Witam W załączeniu manual do programu WD 16.0 Jest to nakładka na autocada. Na bazie tego programu zrobiono autocada electricala. Wiekszość funkji podobna. Pozdrowienia Marek
Manual Revisions
Title: VIA Wiring Diagram User’s Guide
Issue
Date
Original
10/01
2nd Edition
2/02
Changes
Software Version
Original Issue of Version 15.41
Reference Number Mode, RSLogix
Import, Move Circuit Section, Fan In/
Fan Out, Project Wide Block Swap,
Publish to the Web, Publish to XML
Major Revision for Version 16.0
3-2
Table of Contents
Manual Revision
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction & Installation
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
How the Manual is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Requirements and Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Chapter 2: Project Management
Creating a New Project / Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
How to Create a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Adding a New Drawing to the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Adding Existing Drawing(s) to the Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Grouping Drawings within a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Changing the Order of Drawings in the Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Reference Only Drawing(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Removing a Drawing from the Current Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Assigning a Description to each Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Viewing a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Picking a Different Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Copy Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Project-Wide Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Combined INST/LOC and Component TAG Mode (IEC Style) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Auto Fill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Description Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Project's Scratch Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Wire Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Wire Number Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Hide Wire Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Special Wire Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Real Time Inter-Drawing Cross-Referencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
iv
Table of Contents
Cross-Reference Text Options (text button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Component Cross-Reference “text between” Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Option to “fill” Cross-Reference Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Catalog Look Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Project File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
WD Environment and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
User Programming API Routines for “.wdp” File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Multiple Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Client Subdirectory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
WD to Title Block “mapping” File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Customized Labels for WD's Title Block Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Client Specific Library Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Starting a New Project for a Given Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Chapter 3: Drawing Configuration
Viewing the Drawing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Replaceable Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Ladder Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Referencing Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Reference Number Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
X-Y Grid Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
X-Zone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Sheet/Drawing Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Component Tagging Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Wire Number Tagging Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Signal Arrow Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Wire Crossing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Cross-Reference Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
WD Layer Name Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Component Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Wire Number Layers and Wire LINE Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Wire Line Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
PLC Module Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Scaling Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
IEC Coding Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Wire Fan In/Out Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Saving/Retrieving Settings to/from the Project file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Chapter 4: Symbol Libraries
Library Symbol Naming Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Library Symbol Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Table of Contents
General Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
PLC I/O Parametric Build Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Stand-Alone PLC I/O Point Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Stand-Alone Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Dumb In-Line Wire Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Cable Marker Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Plug/Jack Connector Pin Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Component “Location Mark” Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Wire “Dot” Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Source/Destination Wire Signal Arrow Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Wire Number Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Panel Layout Footprint Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Configuration and Ladder Master Line Reference Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Attribute Requirements - Schematic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Specific to Parent / Stand-Alone Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Specific to Child Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Common to Both Parent and Child Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Wire Connection / Terminal Pin Number Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
WD_JUMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Stand-Alone Terminal Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Specific to Source/Destination Wire Signal Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
PLC Modules and Stand-Alone I/O Points4-12
Managing the Library Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Changing Appearance of Existing Library Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Pre-defining Symbol Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Converting Your Existing Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Creating a New Library Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Tips and Hints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Chapter 5: PLC
PLC Parametric Build - Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
PLC Parametric Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Parametric PLC Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
First / Top-Most Parametric Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
2nd and Beyond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Parametric PLC Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
PLC Data File Tips and Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Adding to an Existing PLC Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Creating a New PLC Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Modifying a PLC Appearance “Style” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Creating a New PLC “Style” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Adding Slide for New PLC “Style”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
PLC Data File Wizard - Module Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
New Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Defining Terminal Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Preview Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
v
vi
Table of Contents
Saving the Module Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Edit Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Adjusting Terminal Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
New Module Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Terminal Block Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Preview Module Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Delete Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Module Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49
Single, Stand-Alone I/O Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51
Inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51
Annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52
Modifying the Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52
Attributes - Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53
Non-Parametric Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53
PLC Insert - Complete Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53
Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54
Changing Utility's Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58
Changing the Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58
Saving Your Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-61
Restoring Your Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-62
RSLogix Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-63
Chapter 6: Miscellaneous Tools
Black Box/Symbol Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Insert Standard Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Wire Connection Points and Associated Terminal Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Link Terminal Text to Wire Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Contact State Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Dashed Link Line Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Optional Rating Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Convert Existing Text Entities to Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Browse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Block/Wblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
What if I Mess Up? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Okay, I Built it, How do I Insert it? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Component Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Insert “Just Like” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Fence Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Fence Insert “Just Like” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Insert Component from Catalog List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Erase Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Move Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Stretch Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Flip Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Checking Coil/Contact Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Table of Contents
Align Components/Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16
Component Block Swapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17
Updating Source/Destination Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Stand-Alone Cross-Ref Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-20
Dashed Link Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
Din Rail Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-22
Component Attribute Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
Editing a Component's Attribute Text Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
Override Component Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-26
Find/Replace Component Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27
Moving Component Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
Pushing DESC Attributes Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30
Rating Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30
Hiding / Un-hiding Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32
Fixed Component Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
Fix/Unfix Component Tags Project-Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
Cross-Ref Text to Multi-line MTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
Child Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34
Schematic Copy LOC Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-35
Location Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-35
Changing Attribute Text Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
Changing Attribute Size Project-Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
Library Symbols: Mass Attribute Size Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-38
Changing WD Style Text Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39
Terminal Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39
Stand-Alone Schematic Terminals Insert / Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39
Terminal Re-Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-41
Internal/External Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42
Dumb Terminal Strip Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42
Wire Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45
Show Wires Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45
3-Phase Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46
Angled Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-47
Stretch Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-48
Wire Color/Gauge Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-48
Wire Color/Gauge Labels Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-49
Cable Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-50
Editing the Cable Conductor Database File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
Wire Shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-53
Dumb In-line Wire Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-55
Define Wire Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-55
Show Wire Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57
Wire Gap / Un-Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57
Check/Repair Gap Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-58
Check/Trace Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-58
Fan In/Fan Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-59
Fan In/Fan Out Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-61
Changing Wires to Fan In/Out Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-62
Wire Number Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-63
3-Phase Wire Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-63
vii
viii
Table of Contents
“Fixing” Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-63
Fixing all Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-64
Fixing/Un-fixing all Wire Numbers Project-Wide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-64
Repositioning a Wire Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-65
Swapping Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-66
Rotating Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-66
Wire Number “Extra” Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-66
Erasing a Wire Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-66
Erasing all Wire Numbers Project-Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-66
Hide/Unhide Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-67
Find/Replace Wire Number Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-67
Layer Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-69
Layer Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-69
Change Attribute Layer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-70
Spreadsheet Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-70
Spreadsheet Edit / Drawing Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-70
Spreadsheet Table Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-72
Project Wide Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-72
WD Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-72
WD Batch Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75
User Scripts and Programs - Batch Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-78
Project Zipping Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-79
Mark and Verify Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-80
Project Re-Sequence/Re-Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-83
Title Block Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-85
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-85
How to Link WD Information to your Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-86
Attribute “Mapping” File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-88
WD Mapping Info Embedded on Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-89
Title Block Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-90
What if Title Block Consists of Multiple Blocks? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-93
Mapping AutoLISP or System Variable Values to the Title Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-93
Customizing the “LINEx” Labels Shown in the Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-95
Project-Wide Title Block Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-96
Language Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-97
Language Conversion Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-97
Language Conversion Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-99
Language Mapping for WD Prompts and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102
Troubleshooting Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
WD Audit / Problem Fixer utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Drawing Integrity Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105
Clean Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105
MDB Debug Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105
Conversion Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Conversion Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Convert “Dumb” Block to WD Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Convert/Edit WD Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-108
Convert Wire Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-109
Table of Contents
Convert Source Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-109
Convert Destination Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-110
Add Attribute to Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-111
Convert Text to Attribute Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-112
Convert “Dumb” Ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-112
Convert VIA 6.0 Drawings to VIA-WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-113
Block and Attribute Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-115
“Publish To” Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-116
Publish to Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-116
Publish to XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-120
Chapter 7: Icon Menus
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Alternate Icon Menu Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Tips and Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Ugly Slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Slow Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Icon Menu Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Adding a New Symbol to the Icon Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Adding “Insert Circuit” to the Icon Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
Adding a New Icon Menu Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
Command Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Cut and Paste Icon Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Updating Menu Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Modify Icon Menu File Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
ICON Menu's File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Title Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Insert Component Menu Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Sub-Menu Trigger Menu Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Sub-Menu Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Chapter 8: BOM and Catalogs
Component Catalog Look-Up Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Convert Catalog dBase Files to Access File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Table Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Catalog File Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Modifying / Expanding Catalog Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Catalog Database Table Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
TEXTVALS Rating and Misc Attribute Value Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Catalog Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
ix
x
Table of Contents
From Component Insert/Edit Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Project-Specific Catalog File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Miscellaneous, Catch-All Catalog Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Last Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Drawing-Wide / Project-Wide Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Pulled from Another Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
From External File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
From your own External Database Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Adding Multiple BOM Catalog Numbers to a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
BOM Copy Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Show Missing BOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Contact Quantity / Pin-List Look-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Pin List Database Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
NO/NC and Pin List Data Carried on the Parent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Not limited to Relays/Timers/Contactors/Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Chapter 9: Schematic Reports
Schematic Report Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Named LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Edit Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Change Report Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Post-Process Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Save to File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Insert as Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Component Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Component Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Quick Connector Pin Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
BOM Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
BOM Report of Sub-Assembly Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
BOM “Purchase List” Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
BOM “By Tag” Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
BOM Report Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
PLC I/O Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
PLC I/O Connection Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
PLC I/O Connected Component Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Modules Used Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
PLC Module and Individual I/O Point Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Cross-Reference Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Cross-Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Cross-Reference Exception Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Wire Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Extracting a Wire From/To Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Component Connection Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Plug/Jack Connector Report and Pin Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Repeated and Missing Wire Numbers Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Table of Contents
Terminal Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Terminal Numbers Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Terminal Plan Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Quick and Dirty Terminal Strip Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Cable Conductor Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Wire SRC/DEST Signal Exception Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Panel BOM / Panel Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Chapter 10: Panel Layout
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Panel Layout Pull-Down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Panel Layout Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Mouse Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Right Click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Double Click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Panel Drawing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
WD Panel Layout Template Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Automatic Schematic / Panel Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Footprint/Terminal Selection and Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Semi-Automatic from Schematic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Terminal Footprint Insertion - Semi-Automatic from Schematic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Footprint Insertion - Selection from Icon Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Footprint Insertion - Manual Draw on-the-fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Copy Panel Footprints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Insert Panel Footprint Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Footprint Insertion - Selection from Spreadsheet Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Component Spreadsheet Data Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Panel Terminals Spreadsheet Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14
Starting with a Previous Project's Schematic Spreadsheet Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15
Footprint Attributes/Xdata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15
Auto-Attribute Add to Footprint During Insertion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16
Attribute Add to Footprint After Insertion - Xdata to Attribute Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Footprint Block Attribute / Xdata Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18
Minimum Attribute / Xdata Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18
Copy Loc/Inst/Groupwith/Mount Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19
Layout Wire Connection Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19
Merging Schematic Wire Numbers onto Footprints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19
Extract Wire Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20
Add Wire Information to Footprint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20
Wire Connection Target Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22
Footprint Look-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-24
xi
xii
Table of Contents
Convert Footprint dBase Files to Access File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-25
Look-Up File Naming Convention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-26
Look-Up File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-26
Block Name versus Geometry Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-28
Editing Look-Up Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-28
Panel Edit Footprint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-31
Item/Detail Number Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-32
Re-Sequence Item Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-32
Name Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33
Linking a Name Plate to a Component Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33
Inserting a Stand-Alone Name Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-34
Generic Name Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-34
Panel Layout Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-35
Panel Bill of Materials Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-35
Panel Component Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-36
Wire Connection Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-38
Name Plate Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-39
Component Exception Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-39
Terminal Exception Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-41
Chapter 11: Frequently Asked Questions
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
Icon Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-4
Configure Drawing Form and Ladder Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6
Configure Component Tag Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
Configure Wire Number Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13
Configure Cross-Reference Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Configure Layer Naming Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16
Library Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-18
Horizontal and Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-22
Layers and Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-24
Multiple Libraries / Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-26
Manual Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-30
Tablet Insertion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-31
New Drawing -- Setup, Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-32
New Ladder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-39
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-39
Line Reference “Ruling” Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-43
User-Defined Line Reference Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-45
Existing Ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-48
Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-50
Connection Trap Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-53
Crossing Wire Gaps/Loops. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-56
Table of Contents
Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-57
Text Size and Wire Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-61
Leaders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-63
Catalog Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-64
Old Drawings Compatible with WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-66
WD Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-67
WD Scratch Database File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-70
WD Environment File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-72
WD and Drawing Management Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-73
Network Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-74
WD API / AutoLISP Programming Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-75
Insert Electrical Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-75
Insert Panel Layout Footprints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-78
Insert Wires / Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-81
PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-83
Insert/Edit Ladders, Drawing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-84
General Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-86
Project / Project Database File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-90
Report Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-93
“USER” Table Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-97
Appendix A
Push Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Illuminated Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Standard Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Press to Test Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Master Test Pilot Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Neon Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Illuminated Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Proximity Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Foot Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Pull Cord Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Anti-Plugging Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Flow Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Level Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Pressure Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Temperature Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Toggle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
xiii
xiv
Table of Contents
Photo Eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Connectors - Wire Number Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Connectors - No Wire Number Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Wire Markers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Power Distribution Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Electronics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Generic Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Cable Markers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Stand-Alone Cross-Ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Wire Arrows - Ref Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
Disconnect Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
Index
Introduction &
Installation
In This Chapter. . . .
- Introduction
- How the Manual is Organized
- Requirements and Recommendations
- Conventions
- Getting Help
- Installation
- Quick Start
4
1-2
Introduction & Installation
Introduction &
Installation
Introduction
VIA Wiring Diagram (WD) is perfect for anyone doing design and layout of
schematic ladder or point-to-point wiring diagrams. If your design includes PLC
I/O, motor control, discrete electrical control components and layout, then WD will
save you time and improve drawing accuracy.
How the Manual is Organized
This manual consists of the following chapters:
Chapter 1:
Introduction provides a summary of the topics covered in
this reference manual. It also describes the conventions
used in this manual. Installation describes how to install
and set up WD. Quick Start is for people who don’t like
to read manuals or don’t like to ask for directions.
Chapter 2:
Project Management describes how to set up a multidrawing, wiring diagram project.
Chapter 3:
Drawing Configuration lists the different ways you can
configure WD to meet your specific wiring diagram drafting standards.
Chapter 4:
Symbol Libraries describes modifying and expanding the
WD symbol libraries to meet specific needs.
Chapter 5:
PLC covers WD’s technique of drafting and annotating
PLC modules and how to customize and expand. It also
covers a useful Spreadsheet to PLC I/O drawing
generator utility.
Chapter 6:
Miscellaneous Tools.
Chapter 7:
Icon Menus covers how you can customize WD’s easyto-use icon menu system.
Chapter 8:
BOM and Catalogs provides information about how
BOM information can be linked to wiring diagram
components.
Chapter 9:
Schematic Reports lists the various reporting capabilities
of WD.
Chapter 10:
Panel Layout describes WD’s integrated layout
capabilities.
Chapter 11:
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) is a listing of
frequently asked questions about setting up, using, and
customizing WD.
Introduction & Installation
1-3
Requirements and Recommendations
Sufficient memory to run AutoCAD
CD Drive
80 meg of disk storage space
The software requirement is as follows:
AutoCAD Release 14 or above (Windows 95/98/NT/2000/Me)
Note: A few features are not available in the R14 version of WD.
Conventions
In this manual, when we ask you to select a button from a fly-out; the fly-out button
is shown first, then the button to select from the fly-out list. For example:
Select the Report toolbar button and then select Wire From/To report.
The
button is the first button to select, and then select the
the button list.
button from
Paths are generically shown as c:\viawd\…
For AutoCAD R14, the actual default installation path is c:\viawd14\…
For AutoCAD 2000/2000i/2002, the actual default installation path is
c:\viawd2000\…
Getting Help
For additional information about VIA software products, contact your authorized
re-seller. We can also be reached through our web site:
www.viadevelopment.com.
Excel, Access, Windows 95/98/NT/2000/Me are trademarks of Microsoft Corp.;
AutoCAD and AutoLISP are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.
Installation
This chapter provides the necessary information required for installing VIA Wiring
Diagram (WD) on your system.
Introduction &
Installation
The minimum hardware requirements for the software are the same as AutoCAD:
Introduction & Installation
The WD software comes with the following items:
On-Line Reference Manual
Program CD
Introduction &
Installation
1-4
Prior to installing the WD package, install the AutoCAD software. Configure the
program completely and ensure it is operating correctly. Allow 80 megabytes of
free disk space to load the WD program. The WD system makes fairly extensive
use of file subdirectories. The specific directory structure is created on the
specified drive (C:) upon completion of the installation.
1. Choose Run from the File menu of Windows Program Manager (or choose
Run from the Windows 95/98/NT/2000/Me Start menu).
2. Type D:INTRO (where D: is your CD-ROM drive letter) and click OK. The
installation program displays information about product registration.
3. Follow on-screen instructions.
4. The installation of WD is now complete. Now start AutoCAD as you normally do. From the VIA WD pull down menu or WD toolbar, select any
command. VIA WD should self-authorize for a 30-day, full feature trial
period.
5. To authorize a purchased copy, select the License command from the VIA
WD pull-down and then select Authorize from the submenu. Follow the
instructions on the WD Authorization dialog.
Special note for AutoCAD 2000 installation (not AutoCAD 2000i): The larger
toolbar button images supplied with this version of WD are optimized for AutoCAD
2000i. If you are using AutoCAD 2000 (not 2000i) and switch to AutoCAD's larger
toolbar buttons, the WD buttons may look a bit fuzzy. To flip to a new set of toolbar
buttons optimized for WD use on Regular AutoCAD, follow this procedure:
1. Exit AutoCAD 2000
2. Erase these files:
\viawd2000\wd2000.mns
\viawd2000\wd2000.mnr
\viawd2000\wd2000.mnc
3. RUN \viawd\bmp\pre2000i_bmps.exe
A different set of bmp files will be copied into the \viawd2000\bmp subdirectory.
Now restart AutoCAD 2000. The menu should recompile using the new 2000specific bmp picture files.
Quick Start
In a hurry? Like to explore on your own? Call up any new or existing drawing
and...
Press this button to insert a wiring diagram ladder.
Press this button to insert electrical components.
Introduction & Installation
1-5
Press this button to insert PLC I/O modules.
Press this button to cut wires.
Press this button to insert wire numbers automatically.
Press this button to change configuration options.
… or when you are ready for more in-depth instruction, start the Tutorial.
Introduction &
Installation
Press this button to insert wires.
Introduction &
Installation
1-6
Introduction & Installation
Project
Management
5
In This Chapter. . . .
- Creating a New Project / Project Files
- How to Create a New Project
- Adding a New Drawing to the Project
- Adding Existing Drawing(s) to the Project
- Grouping Drawings within a Project
- Changing the Order of Drawings in the Project
- Reference Only Drawing(s)
- Removing a Drawing from the Current Project
- Assigning a Description to each Drawing
- Viewing a Drawing
- Picking a Different Project
- Copy Project
- Project-Wide Settings
- Project File Format
- WD Environment and Settings
- User Programming API Routines
- Multiple Clients
2-2
Project Management
Creating a New Project / Project Files
A project is a set of inter-related wiring diagram drawings. An ASCII text file,
called the “project file”, lists the AutoCAD drawing file names that make up the
wiring diagram set. Here are the key points about a WD project file:
• It is an ASCII text file with any path, any name, but with a “.WDP” extension
Project Management
• It lists the complete path to each wiring diagram drawing that is to be in the
project
• A project file is not needed if the project consists of a single wiring diagram
drawing
• A project file optionally carries default settings that can be referenced when
new drawings are created and added to the project
• You can have as many projects (i.e. project files) as you wish, but only one
can be “active” at a time in your AutoCAD session
How to Create a New Project
Choose the PROJ toolbar button. The project selection dialog is displayed.
WD remembers the last project that you worked on and this one comes up by
default when you re-enter WD (saved in wd\user\lastproj.fil). The “demo” project
covered in the tutorial is shown displayed in the project dialog here.
Pick the New Proj button at the bottom center of this dialog.
The following dialog is displayed. Decide where you want to store your new
project file (this example defaults to \viawd\wd\proj). Enter a name for the project
Project Management
2-3
file. The “.WDP” extension is assumed. Call your new project “NEWPROJ”.
Enter this name and click OK.
Project Management
This Project Description dialog is now displayed. You can enter as many
description lines as you wish about the project (twelve per page) or you can skip it
(or add or edit it later). Information you put in this dialog can be included in BOM,
component, and wiring reports generated by WD for the project (select the “in
reports” toggle in the right-hand column). These values can also be “mapped” to
your drawing's title blocks.
Enter something and then click OK to close this dialog. You have the option to
include the current drawing's WD CONFIG settings as the new project's defaults
or to leave the project's defaults blank.
Project Management
2-4
Project Management
Make a selection and OK Proj to save this new project file. At the “Build project
database now” dialog (below), click OK. This new, empty project now becomes
your current active project.
Adding a New Drawing to the Project
If you have a new, named drawing displayed on your screen and you want to
add it to the current WD project, pick the PROJ toolbar button. When the project
dialog appears, select the Add CURRENT button. The current drawing’s file
name will appear at the end of the existing drawing list for the project.
Adding Existing Drawing(s) to the Project
To add one or more existing drawings to the active project, select the PROJ
toolbar button to display the Project dialog. Select One or Multiple add. Selecting
Project Management
2-5
One brings you straight to the drawing selection dialog as shown here. Select the
drawing and hit Open. The drawing file name is added to the project list.
Project Management
To insert two or many drawings into the project in one operation, select the
Multiple option at the dialog shown here.
A file dialog displays. Pick on ANY file name in the subdirectory where the target
drawings are located. WD extracts a list of drawings and displays this dialog.
Highlight the drawings you want to reference in your current WD project and hit
OK.
2-6
Project Management
Grouping Drawings within a Project
You can create groups of drawings within your project list by assigning sections
and subsection codes to each drawing. WD’s project-wide tagging, crossreferencing, and reporting functions can then be instructed to operate on the
whole project (default) or, using this sec/sub coding, on just a portion of the
drawing set.
Project Management
To assign, edit, or remove sec/sub coding for a drawing, highlight the drawing and
select the sec/sub/desc button.
Changing the Order of Drawings in the Project
The order in which drawings appear in the project’s drawing list is the order in
which WD processes them in project-wide tagging and cross-referencing
operations. You can change the drawing order by either editing the project’s
“.WDP” file with an ASCII text editor or by using WD’s “Re-order” feature.
For example, a project consists of 38 drawings with new drawing E140.DWG
added to the end of the project list. It really needs to be moved up in the list so
that WD’s cross-referencing and project-wide tagging features give ordered
results. From the PROJ dialog click Re-order.
Project Management
2-7
A drawing list dialog is displayed. Find and highlight drawing E140.DWG in the
list, then click Move Up repeatedly until drawing E140 moves to the desired
position in the list. Click OK to save this new version of the list in the project file.
Project Management
Reference Only Drawing(s)
Sometimes you may want to include drawings in the project set but you do not
want WD to process them. If this is the case you can mark these drawings as
“reference only”. Select the drawing from the project list, then select the sec/sub/
desc button.
Turn on the toggle at the bottom marked for REF ONLY. Now when WD processes
your drawing set for wire numbers, cross references, etc. this drawing will be
ignored. This can help speed up some processes for large projects. It WILL be
included in project-wide plotting and title block operations. Drawings so marked
are identified with an “r” shown along the left-hand column of the drawing dialog
list.
2-8
Project Management
Removing a Drawing from the Current Project
Project Management
Select the PROJ toolbar button to display the Project dialog. Look at the
dialog list and find the drawing or drawings you want to remove. Highlight this
entry and then click Remove.
Selecting Replace will let you replace the selected drawing with another drawing
in the project file. Selecting Multiple brings up a dialog so you can pick which
drawings to remove from the project file.
Selecting Remove selected dwg will remove just the one drawing from the
project file. The drawing file name is deleted from the list carried in the project’s
“.WDP” file.
Note: The drawing file itself is not deleted; just the reference to it is removed
from your project’s .WDP text file.
Assigning a Description to each Drawing
You can assign a one-line description to each drawing listed in your project. You
can then toggle the project drawing list back and forth between file names and
Project Management
2-9
drawing descriptions. Do this by selecting the “dwg / desc” radio button
combination that appears any time WD presents the drawing selection list to you.
Flipping the drawing list to “desc” display can make it easier to find a specific
drawing among dozens or hundreds in a project file.
Now, when the Project dialog or any project drawing selection dialog displays, the
drawing file names can be instantly flipped to drawing description text. This can
make it easier to find and select the proper drawing(s) for opening or processing.
Project Management
To add or edit a description to a drawing reference, highlight the drawing’s file
name in the project list. Select the sec/sub/desc button to display the sub-dialog
shown here. Type in a one line description for the drawing and click OK.
Repeating this process for the other drawings in the project. The drop down list
below the edit box is a list of descriptions used on the other drawings in the
project. Use this if the description for this drawing is similar to a description on
another drawing. Use the Pick button to select text on the drawing for the drawing
description.
2-10
Project Management
Project Management
These one line descriptions can be linked to an attribute in the title block for
automatic update and can also show up in the “Drawing list” report.
Viewing a Drawing
You can preview a drawing from the WD Project dialog (R2000 only). Open the
project dialog.
Select the View button to turn this feature on. A separate small dialog opens to
display an image of the highlighted drawing. Once selected this feature will
Project Management
2-11
remain “ON” while the dialog is active. Each time you highlight a drawing from the
project drawing list, the display will update with an image of the drawing.
Project Management
Picking a Different Project
From the PROJ dialog, click Pick Proj. WD displays a Recent PROJECTS list.
You can pick from this list or, if the project you are looking for is not listed, pick on
the Other projects button. A file selection dialog, with “.WDP” as its default
extension, appears. Find the project you want and click OK. The selected project
becomes the active project.
The “Recent” project list is dynamic. The last project you worked on will appear at
the top of the list. Select a Project from the list and use the dwgs button to see a
list of the drawings in that project. You can even pick a drawing from that list and
WD makes that project the current project and pops open the selected drawing.
To purge a project from this list, highlight it and select the Rmv button.
2-12
Project Management
Project Management
If you have a drawing name but you aren't sure what project it is in, select the
Find button, enter the drawing name (wild cards okay), and let WD search the
recent projects for the drawing. A list of projects that contain the drawing name will
appear, allowing you to select a project to open.
Once a list of possible projects is presented, select the project name then dwg
list, to see a list of drawings contained in the project. You can even pick the
drawing name from this list, select the Pick Proj, Open Dwg button and WD will
make that project active and open the selected drawing.
Note: This list of recent projects is saved by WD in a text file called
wd\user\lastproj.fil.
Copy Project
You can make a copy of your current project, renaming it and creating
renamed copies of the project's drawings. Select the PROJ toolbar fly-out and
pick the COPY project button.
Select the project you wish to copy. The Copy Active Proj button gives you an
easy way to select the current project to copy. Then enter a name for the new
project file.
You are prompted to enter a path where WD is to put the copied drawings. If the
path does not exist, WD creates it.
Project Management
2-13
WD then displays a dialog listing the copied file names. You can accept them “as
is”, edit individual drawing names, or you can do a global search/replace on the
drawing names.
Project-Wide Settings
There are several project-wide settings that are controlled from the main project
dialog. Select the Misc Settings button to display this sub-dialog.
Combined INST/LOC and Component TAG Mode (IEC Style)
If this is toggled “on” then WD will use the combined INST/LOC/TAG for
interpreting component tag names. For example, “-100CR” relay contact marked
with location code “PNL1” will be interpreted as tied to a totally different relay coil
from relay contact “-100CR” marked with location code “PNL2”. If this toggle is
clear (i.e. “off”), then WD assumes that both contacts are tied to the same parent
relay coil, “-100CR”. INST and LOC assignments are not taken into account.
If this option is toggled “on” and you do want the INST/LOC prefix used in reports,
make sure you select the sub-option to Suppress INST/LOC prefix.
Project Management
Click OK. This copied project now becomes the current WD project.
2-14
Project Management
Auto Fill
If you define default LOC and/or INST values for the drawing, you may opt to have
WD automatically fill in these values upon component insert.
Description Text
If this is toggled “on” then WD will force all Description text upper case regardless
of how it is entered.
Project Management
Project's Scratch Database
If this is toggled “on” then WD will maintain the project's scratch database in the
same directory as the project (.wdp) file. This could be a sharable network
directory. If this is toggled “off” then the project's scratch database is local (in your
WD USER directory). Each user's WD maintains its own snapshot copy of the
common project data. If multiple users will be working on a common WD project
AND if a fast network connection is available, WD performance may be better with
the project’s scratch database file set to the same subdir as the project file.
Otherwise it is recommended keeping the scratch file local (toggle turned “off”).
Wire Numbering
Select the Wire nums button to display this sub-dialog.
Wire Number Placement
Instead of wire number tags defaulting to the center of each wire segment, you
can now program the tags to a fixed, user-defined offset distance from the left end
of horizontal wires and from the top end of vertical wires.
Hide Wire Number
If a wire network has a “wire number” type terminal on the network, have WD
automatically hide the wire number for the network.
Special Wire Numbering
If this is toggled “on” then WD will assign a wire number to each connected wire
rather than the wire “network”.
Real Time Inter-Drawing Cross-Referencing
If this is toggled “on” then WD will update relay and wire source/destination
symbols in real time across multiple drawings. If this is left unchecked, WD
prompts for permission to update and, if received, does the update by quickly
opening the target drawing, making the change, and then returning to the current
drawing. If permission not granted, the changes are queued up in a “Pending
Project Management
2-15
update” file (wd\user\ & lt; projname & gt; .upd) that can be triggered from the Proj dialog's
Update button.
Cross-Reference Text Options (text button)
Include an extra space between multiple cross-reference annotations.
Option to “fill” Cross-Reference Annotation
This will fill a cross-reference with a marker for each available but unused contact.
This requires that the parent coil be annotated with contact/pin number data or
marked with a maximum N.O. and/or maximum N.C. allowed contact count.
Catalog Look Up
WD can reference component specific catalog information, which has the same
name as component block name or its general family code, or WD can be set to
automatically reference a “catch-all” catalog look-up table within your catalog
Access database, either 1) all the time (i.e. no other catalog tables used except for
MISC_CAT) or 2) reference this file only if a component-specific catalog table
does not exist.
Note: Project settings for the above are saved in the project’s “.wdp” file.
Project File Format
A “.WDP” project file is a text file whose main purpose is to list the drawing files
that are to be treated as a multi-drawing wiring diagram. WD manages this file
automatically.
Here is a general breakdown of the “.WDP” file format:
Project Description
All lines of text marked with “*[n]” in columns 1-4
followed by the line of project data (n=1 to xx).
Project default
settings
50+ entries marked with “?[n]” in column 1-4.
Most of these values are mirrored on attributes
carried by each drawing’s invisible WD_M block.
Project Management
Component Cross-Reference “text between” Options
2-16
Project Management
Marked with “+[1]” in columns 1-4 followed by path
Schematic icon
menu file
Marked with “+[2]” in columns 1-4 followed by file
Default panel library
path
Marked with “+[3]” in columns 1-4 followed by path
Panel icon menu file
Project Management
Default schematic
library path
Marked with “+[4]” in columns 1-4 followed by file
Real-time inter-dwg
update
Marked with “+[5]” followed by 1=realtime, 0=none
Use MISC_CAT
table
Marked with “+[6]” followed by 1=always use
MISC_CAT, 2=use MISC_CAT if component
specific not found, entry not present if use
component specific only
Cross-ref fill format
Marked with “+[7]” and “+[8]”
LINEx entries for
reports
Marked with “+[9]” followed by comma delimited
list
Combined INST/
LOC/TAG
Marked with “+[10]” followed by 0=do not combine,
1=combine
DESC case mode
Marked with “+[11]” followed by 0=allow upper/
lower case, missing or 1=force all uppercase
Project scratch
database
Marked with “+[12]” followed by 0 or missing=on
local “USER” subdirectory, 1=same subdirectory
as project
Wire network mode
Marked with “+[13]” followed by 0 or
missing=normal (wires combined into networks),
1=discrete (each connected wire gets its own wire
number)
IEC style INST/LOC
tag
Marked with “+[14]” followed by 0 or missing=add
prefix to TAG when output to reports, 1=suppress
adding the prefix to TAG. This option is only used
when +[10] above is set to 1.
Auto-fill INST/LOC
Marked with “+[15]” followed by 1 to auto-fill,
missing or anything else, don't auto-fill
Schem- & gt; Pnl wire
format
Marked with “+[16]” for the full format, and “+[17]”
holds the partial format
Auto-hide wire num
Marked with “+[18]” followed by 1 to auto-hide a
wire number on a wire network with a wire number
terminal present
Wire number offset
Marked with “+[19]” followed by wire number offset
value
Project Management
Project drawing list
2-17
All remaining entries. If special “sec/sub”
groupings are defined, then a drawing’s “sec” is
preceded by a “=” entry and a “sub” by a “==”
entry. If a one line description is defined, it is
preceded by a “===” entry. If a drawing is marked
“Ref” only, it is preceded by a “====REF” entry.
WD Environment and Settings
Select the PROJ toolbar button to display the Project dialog. From there
select the Settings button in the lower right hand corner.
User Programming API Routines for “.wdp” File
Management
WD makes a number of “.WDP” file read and write routines “visible” to external
user programs such as those that might be written in AutoLISP. Refer to the WD
API documentation for a listing of the currently available entry points into the WD
software.
Project Management
There may be times when you need to check WD's environment and project
settings, maybe for troubleshooting purposes, or to see what WD version you are
using, or to check some project settings. WD provides one place to check all this.
2-18
Project Management
Multiple Clients
You can set up WD to deal with multiple clients, each with his own title block and
library requirements. Client-specific drawing borders, title blocks, parts libraries,
and part number lookup files can be set up to be automatically selected by WD
when working on a specific client's project.
Client Subdirectory Structure
Project Management
Set up a subdirectory structure where each client is assigned his own
subdirectory. For example, it might look like this:
n:\campbell.nap\
n:\j-m\
n:\jeep_toledo\
WD to Title Block “mapping” File
Use WD's “Title block setup” utility to create a “default.wdt” file for each client's
title block. Store this default.wdt in the client's base subdirectory. For example:
n:\campbell.nap\default.wdt
HOW TO: One way to do this is as follows:
1.
Use WD to create a dummy project in the client's base subdirectory
(ex: n:\campbell.nap\dummy.wdp).
2. Now call up the client's drawing border drawing or any existing drawing
that contains the client's title block (block with attributes). Fire up WD's
“Title block setup” utility (under the WD pull-down menu-- & gt; Project -- & gt; Title
Block Setup).
3. The main dialog will give you four options. Choose the middle option listed
under “Method 1” -- the DEFAULT.WDT file for any project found in subdir
n:\campbell.nap. Then follow the on-screen dialogs and pick options to
build the default.wdt file.
Project Management
2-19
Customized Labels for WD's Title Block Dialogs
Several title block related dialogs in WD display generic labels like “LINE1”,
“LINE2”,... You can change these labels so that they match up with the actual link
to the client's title block. For example, in the “.wdt” mapping file, you might have
linked the WD data “LINE10” value to the “DRAWN_BY” attribute on the client's
title block. What you'd like to see when WD displays a title block related dialog is
not “LINE10” for a dialog label but “Drawn by”.
HOW TO:
3. Save and exit.
Project Management
1. Create a file called default_wdtitle.wdl in the client's subdirectory where
you store the project (.wdp) files. Use any generic text editor like the Windows Accessories “notepad” or “wordpad” programs.
2. The file should contain one line per label in the format LINEx=label. The
entries do not have to be in order and line numbers may be skipped.
2-20
Project Management
Project Management
Try updating the Title Block from the Project dialog. Notice all the updated labels.
Client Specific Library Symbols
If the client has special symbols or text size settings that are different from the
default libraries provided with the WD product, then create and maintain a clientspecific symbol library subdirectory with smart WD symbols that have been
adjusted to meet that client's standards. When you start a new project for this
client, set WD's “Symbol LIB” path to point at the client's library.
HOW TO:
1.
From the PROJ dialog select the “Symbol LIB” button in the lower
left-hand corner of the dialog.
2. On the ACTIVE SYMBOL LIBRARY subdialog, enter in the path to the client specific library in the Schematic Symbol Library path edit box. Make it
the first or only path listed. For example, let's say the client symbol library
is stored on network drive/path p:\libs\jm.
Project Management
2-21
Note: Make sure you also update the Panel symbol path.
Starting a New Project for a Given Client
Now it all comes together. When you start a new project, create and save the
WD's project “.wdp” file to the client's base subdirectory where the client's
default.wdt and wdtitle.dcl files are stored. Make sure that the new project also
points at the client's symbol library. The actual drawings for the project can be
stored anywhere but you might want to store them in some kind of a “job number”
subdirectory under the base client subdir.
For example, let's say that for client “Campbell”, you have a new project 12345.
Under the n:\campbell.nap network drive subdirectory, create subdir
n:\campbell.nap\12345. This is where you'll save the AutoCAD drawings for that
project. Using WD's PROJ dialog -- & gt; New Proj, create a new project, let's say
P12345.wdp, and save it to the base subdir n:\campbell.nap\P12345.wdp (along
with any other Campbell projects you've already created -- they're all grouped
together in this base subdir but their drawing sets are isolated into unique job
number subdirectories).
With the above set up, any time you work on a Campbell project (project file
“.wdp” stored in the n:\campbell.nap directory), WD will automatically use the
client-specific title block mapping file (n:\campbell.nap\default.wdt) and the clientspecific dialog label file (n:\campbell.nap\wdtitle.dcl).
For more information on this see the Frequently Asked Questions section on
Multiple Clients.
Project Management
This will cause WD to look in the client specific symbol library first before going to
a default WD symbol library (on the c:drive).
Project Management
2-22
Project Management
Drawing
Configuration
6
In This Chapter. . . .
- Viewing the Drawing Configuration
- Replaceable Parameters
- Ladder Defaults
- Referencing Mode
- Sheet/Drawing Codes
- Component Tagging Format
- Wire Number Tagging Format
- Signal Arrow Style
- Wire Crossing
- Cross-Reference Format
- WD Layer Name Setup
- PLC Module Style
- Scaling Factor
- IEC Coding Setup
- Wire Fan In/Out Setup
- Saving/Retrieving Settings to/from the Project file
3-2
Drawing Configuration
Viewing the Drawing Configuration
Drawing Configuration
Configuration settings are displayed on the WD Drawing Configuration
dialog. Access this dialog by selecting the CONFIG Drawing toolbar button.
Changes you make through this dialog are saved as attribute values on the
drawing’s invisible WD_M block. The configuration dialog has a number of
sections. Each is described in the related topics.
Replaceable Parameters
The configuration dialog makes use of codes as replaceable parameters that are
encoded on to attributes of the drawing’s invisible WD_M block.
%F
Component “family code string” (ex: PB, SS, CR, FLT,
MTR)
%S
Drawing’s sheet number (ex: 01 setup under Misc. tab)
%D
Drawing number (set up under Misc. tab)
%N
Sequential or Reference-based number applied to the
component
%X
Suffix char position for ref-based tagging (not present =
end of tag)
%P
IEC-style “project code” (default for drawing)
%I
IEC-style “installation code” (default for drawing)
%L
IEC style “location code (default for drawing)
For example, if you set your component tag format to be %F%N, this format is
encoded on to the TAGFMT attribute of the WD_M block. Then when WD assigns
Drawing Configuration
3-3
a TAG to a component, this format is read, and the codes are replaced with the
appropriate values.
Note: If you include %I or %L in your component's Tag code, you will be
prompted to recalculate the component's tag if you change the Installation or Location value of the component once it has been inserted.
Ladder Defaults
New ladders you insert on the fly will default to the values set under the “Ladder”
Setup button of the Config dialog.
Referencing Mode
Set up your referencing system under the “Referencing” section. There are three
modes:
Reference
Numbers
This is where each ladder column has a column of
assigned reference numbers
X-Y Grid
This is where all referencing is tied to an X-Y grid system
of numbers and letters along the left-hand side and top
of the drawing form.
X-Zones
Similar to X-Y Grid but with no Y-axis.
Drawing Configuration
Set your defaults and click OK. These settings now become the default
orientation, spacing, and width values whenever you wish to insert a new ladder
on this drawing.
3-4
Drawing Configuration
Reference Number Mode
Drawing Configuration
There are seven options under References. This dialog lets you pick ladder
references.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Numbers only
Numbers with a ruling on the left-hand side
Numbers with a Sheet prefix
Numbers with a Sheet - (dash) prefix
Numbers only in a hexagon symbol
Sheet and Numbers in a hexagon symbol
User defined line reference block (a hexagon symbol is provided as a
default)
X-Y Grid Mode
If you select X-Y Grid referencing, set up your drawing’s vertical and horizontal
index numbers and letters, spacing, and origin on the dialog shown here. Refer to
the Tutorial for a complete, step-by-step example.
Drawing Configuration
3-5
X-Zone Mode
If you select X-Zone referencing, set up your drawing’s horizontal labels, spacing,
and origin on the dialog.
Component, wire, and cross-reference tagging can make use of replaceable
parameters in their format (fully described in Replaceable Parameters). If you
reference the drawing’s sheet number or drawing number in any of your tagging
formats, then set these values in the upper right corner of the Config dialog.
Component Tagging Format
Component tags can be sequential or reference based. You make this selection
under the Component tagging section of the Config dialog. If you select Seq, then
you can enter the beginning sequential number for the drawing. If you enter the
same starting sequential number for every drawing of your wiring diagram set,
WD will confirm at insertion time that a new component’s sequential tag is not
repeated on any other drawing. If it is, WD will automatically scan all drawings to
determine and assign the next available number.
Drawing Configuration
Sheet/Drawing Codes
3-6
Drawing Configuration
Drawing Configuration
If you choose Reference-based tags (the lower button, “Line Ref”), you can set up
the unique format tag suffix list. This list is used by WD to create unique
reference-based tags when multiple components of the same family are located at
the same reference location (ex: three push-buttons on the same line reference
“101” could be labeled PB101, PB101A, and PB101B -- WD does this using a
suffix list of “A”, “B”, and so on). Pick the Setup button to display the Suffix dialog.
The Tag Format edit box encodes the way that WD is to construct new component
tags. It consists of a minimum of two pieces of information: a family code and an
alphanumeric reference number (ex: “CR” and “100” to yield a tag like CR100 or
100CR). Optionally, a component tag might contain a sheet number or some
user-specified separators.
WD uses the concept of a component tag format string with replaceable
parameters. A typical format string using three replaceable parameters might
look like this:
%S%F – %N for Sheet code, the Family code, a dash, and finally the reference number.
Here is a list of the replaceable parameters available to you for defining a default
component tag format:
%F
Component “family” code string (ex: “PB”,
“SS”, “CR”, “FLT”, “MTR”) (see the Library
Symbols chapter on Parent symbols to see
where WD gets the family code)
%S
Drawing’s sheet number (ex: “01” set up
under Misc tab)
%D
Drawing number (set up under Misc tab)
%N
Sequential or Reference-based number
applied to the component
%X
Suffix char position for ref-based tagging (not
present = end of tag)
Drawing Configuration
%P
IEC style “project” code (default for drawing)
%I
IEC style “installation” code (default for
drawing)
%L
3-7
IEC style “location” code (default for drawing)
Example 1: Relay coil on line reference “100” of sheet “02” yields these tags for
the following formats:
%F%N
tag = CR100
%N%F
tag = 100CR
%F-%N
tag = CR-100
%F%S%N
tag = CR02100
%S%F:%N
tag = 02CR:100
Example 2: Three push buttons in series on line reference “100” with Setup suffix
list set to “(blank),A,B,C,…”:
tags = 100-PB, 100-PBA, 100-PBB
%N%X-%F
tags = 100-PB, 100A-PB, 100B-PB
Note that if your format includes the sheet number %S parameter or the drawing
number %D parameter, then you need to enter the values in the edit boxes in the
upper right of the CONFIG dialog. IEC-style codes are also set up in this section.
Note: Both %N and %F parameters are mandatory in any component tag format you define.
Wire Number Tagging Format
Wire number tags can be sequential or reference based. You make this selection
in the Wire numbering section of the Configuration dialog. If you click Sequential
Format then you can enter the starting sequential number for the drawing. If you
enter the same starting sequential number for every drawing of your wiring
diagram set, WD will confirm at insertion time that a new sequential wire number
tag is not repeated on any other drawing. The default for Increment is “1”.
Setting it to “2” with a starting sequential of “1” would yield wire numbers 1, 3, 5, 7,
9, 11, etc.
Drawing Configuration
%N-%F
3-8
Drawing Configuration
Drawing Configuration
If you choose Reference-based tags (the lower button, “Line Ref”), you can set
the wire number tag suffix by clicking the Setup button. This list is used by WD to
create unique reference-based wire number tags for multiple wire networks
beginning at the same reference location. There are four pre-defined suffix lists
(selectable from the four radio buttons) or you can type in your own custom suffix
list.
Selecting “Use I/O addr wire nums” causes WD to use PLC I/O address values
for wires that connect to an addressed I/O point. This overrides both Seq and
Reference-based tagging.
Like component tags, WD uses the concept of a wire tag format string with
replaceable parameters. One replaceable parameter, %N, must always be part of
the wire format string. A typical format string might be just this %N parameter.
Here are the replaceable parameters available to you for defining a default wire
number tag format.
%S
Drawings sheet number (ex: 01 set up under
Misc tab
%D
Drawing number (set up under Misc tab)
%N
Sequential or Reference-based number
applied to component
%X
Suffix char position for ref-based tagging (not
present = end of tag)
%P
IEC-style “project” code (default for drawing)
%I
IEC-style “installation” code (default for
drawing)
%L
IEC-style “location” code (default for drawing)
Examples: Wire beginning on line reference “100” of sheet “02” yields these wire
number tags for the following formats.
%N
wire number = 100
W%N
wire number = W100
Drawing Configuration
%S-%N
wire number = 02-100
%S%N
wire number = 02100
%S:5N
3-9
wire number = 02:100
Note that if your format includes the sheet number %S parameter or the drawing
number %D parameter, then you need to enter the values in the edit boxes in the
upper right of the CONFIG dialog. IEC-style codes are also set up in this section.
Note: The %N parameter is mandatory in any wire number tag format you
define.
Signal Arrow Style
Under the Arrow Setup button you select the wire signal arrow look that you want
to be your drawing’s default. There are four styles provided. Several blank ones
allow you to reference your own custom signal arrow styles (refer to the Signal
Arrows section). WD lets you override the default style setting at insertion time.
Drawing Configuration
Wire Crossing
WD currently supports three modes of operation when two wires cross: 1) insert
gap with no loop, 2) insert gap and loop, and 3) solid (no gap). Make your
selection in the drop-down list in the Wire Cross section.
Cross-Reference Format
WD uses the concept of a cross-reference annotation format string with
replaceable parameters. One replaceable parameter, %N, must always be part of
3-10
Drawing Configuration
Drawing Configuration
the cross-reference format string. A typical format string might be just the %N
parameter.
Select the Setup button in the Cross-ref format section of the Config dialog. Use
the upper section for on-drawing references and the bottom section for offdrawing references. You can use the same format for both, if you wish. Here are
the replaceable parameters available to you for defining a default cross-reference
tag format.
%S
Drawing’s sheet number (ex: 01 setup under
Misc tab)
%D
Drawing number (set up under Misc tab)
%N
Sequential or Reference-based number
applied to the component
%P
IEC-style “project” code (default for drawing)
%I
IEC-style “installation” code (default for
drawing)
%L
IEC-style “location” code (default for drawing)
For example, normally open contact on line reference “100” of sheet “02” with
optional drawing name code of “DWG 12345” yields these tags for the following
formats:
%N
tag = 100
%S:%N
tag = 02:100
%S-%N
tag = 02-100
%S%N
tag = 02100
%N (DWG
%D)
tag = 100 (DWG 12345)
Drawing Configuration
3-11
Note that if your format includes the sheet number parameter %S or the drawing
number parameter %D, then you need to enter the values in the edit boxes in the
upper right of the CONFIG dialog. IEC-style codes are also set up in this section.
WD Layer Name Setup
WD automatically manages the wire and component layers you set up in the
drawing’s configuration. No matter what layer is current, wires will always go to a
wire layer and components to component layers. You define what these layers are
to be under the Layers Setup button (upper right section of Config dialog).
As WD inserts a component, it moves the parts and pieces of the symbol to the
category layers listed in this dialog. If there are certain entities in your symbol
library that you do not want WD to automatically move to these standard layer
categories, check the Ignore above for symbol’s non-lay “0” ents toggle.
Component Layers
Here is a brief description of the different layer categories for sub-component
entities listed in the dialog shown above:
Graphics
Layer name for all non-attribute graphics of a
symbol
Tags
Layer name for all parent and child
component nametags (ex: “CR101”)
Drawing Configuration
Example layer names are shown here. Type whatever layer names you wish into
these edit boxes or pick from the pop-down lists. The layer names you choose
are what WD will use as it inserts the parts and pieces of component symbols,
wires, and wire numbers. It doesn’t matter what layer is current at the time. If the
layer name you enter doesn’t exist when it comes time for WD to insert something
onto that layer, WD creates that layer on the fly.
3-12
Drawing Configuration
Layer name for component tags that are
“fixed” and will not change if processed by the
RE-TAG command
Desc
Layer name for parent functional description
text (ex: “MASTER RELAY”)
Desc (child)
Layer name for child contact functional
description text (a copy of the parent’s
description)
X-ref
Layer name for parent cross-reference text
X-ref (child)
Layer name for child cross-reference text
Terminals
Layer name for terminal pin number text
Inst/Loc
Layer name for optional location and
installation code text
Positions
Layer name for switch position text
Misc
Drawing Configuration
Fixed Tags
Layer name for all other component
annotation not covered above
Dashed links
Layer name for dashed lines that can be
inserted to show multiple components linked
together
A blank entry causes that category to end up on the current layer. Multiple
categories can be tied to the same layer name (enter the same layer name into
multiple edit boxes).
Wire Number Layers and Wire LINE Layers
Here is a description of the Wire Number layer entries.
Wire numbers
Layer name for normal wire numbers
Extras
Layer name for “extra” wire number copies
Fixed numbers
Layer name for “fixed” wire numbers that do not change
with a renumber
Term/Sig
Layer name for wire number copies that are a part of a
terminal or signal arrow symbol
Using the dialog example above, let’s say your current layer is BORDER when
you use WD’s icon menu to insert a 2-position selector switch. The lines and
circles of the switch symbol automatically go to layer SYMS, the component’s tag
to layer TAGS, the description text to DESC, switch position text to POS, and so
on. If a new wire number pops in as a result of the switch breaking an existing
numbered wire, the wire number automatically goes to layer WIRENO. All of this
happens automatically, while your layer BORDER is current.
Drawing Configuration
3-13
Wire Line Layers
Wire LINE layers are set up in upper right part of the dialog shown above. Layer
names with wild-cards are allowed (examples: “RED*”, “BLK*”). If you use WD to
insert a new wire, it will be placed on the current layer if the current layer is a valid
wire layer listed in this dialog. If not, it looks for the first layer that matches one in
the list and puts the new wire on that layer.
PLC Module Style
Select the PLC module style or look that you want to be the drawing’s default with
the Setup button in the PLC Style section. There are five pre-defined styles or
you can select from additional ones of your own design.
You can make everything new that WD inserts a bit bigger or a bit smaller by
adjusting WD’s feature scaling factor. Select the Scale Setup button in the upper
right corner of the Config dialog. To instruct WD to insert everything 25% bigger
than normal, change the edit box value from 1.00 to 1.25. This change does not
affect components and wire numbering that is already present on the drawing; it
just affects anything new that is inserted.
Drawing Configuration
Scaling Factor
3-14
Drawing Configuration
IEC Coding Setup
WD has some IEC related settings. Select the appropriate Setup button on the
Config dialog.
Drawing Configuration
Enter your default values for the three fields. When you insert a component, WD
will use the %I and %L default values for the component if the Installation and/or
Location values would normally be blank. The dwg and proj buttons next to the
Installation and Loc fields allow you to search the current drawing or project for
any values used. You then pick from the dialog displayed and the value is placed
in the field.
Wire Fan In/Out Setup
There may be times when you want to show source and destination markers on
the individual wires of a cable and yet you want to show the wires coming together
to form the cable. WD's Fan In/Fan Out feature lets you do just this.
WD's Fan In/Out feature relies on layering to work. A special layer or set of layers
can be defined for the wires going out of a Fan In/Out Source marker and the
wires coming into a Destination marker. These layers are defined on the drawing's
CFG.
Drawing Configuration
3-15
Select the Wire Fan In/Out Setup button. If you have an older drawing (prior to this
feature) you may be warned about an older version of the WD_M block. If that
happens go ahead and swap the WD_M block and try again.
You can select the default Fan In/Out marker style here along with defining the
layers for the wires. Select the Add layer name button to define layer names as
Fan In/Out layers.
The changes you make to the current drawing’s configuration are saved on the
drawing’s invisible WD_M block. You can save a copy of these settings (or
selected settings) to the project file. This makes the settings available as defaults
for new drawings that you might add later to the project. Alternately, you can
retrieve selected settings previously saved in the project file and assign them to
the current drawing.
From the WD pull-down menu, select “PROJECTÆ Compare Dwg and Prj
Settings”. WD reads both the settings on the current drawing’s WD_M block and
Drawing Configuration
Saving/Retrieving Settings to/from the Project
file
3-16
Drawing Configuration
Drawing Configuration
a copy of the settings maintained in the current project’s .wdp file. Any differences
are displayed in a three-column dialog as shown here.
To make the default project settings match those of your current drawing, click
Project File -- Chg proj file. Highlight the settings you want to copy over from
the current drawing into the current project’s “.WDP” file. Use the all button to
quickly change all the settings. To go the other way and make your current
drawing’s setting match the project defaults, click This Drawing -- Change dwg
and make your selections. As each entry is reconciled, it disappears from the list.
Click OK when finished. Note that changing these settings does not automatically
change components and wiring already present in your drawing.
Symbol Libraries
In This Chapter. . . .
- Library Symbol Naming Convention
- Attribute Requirements
- Managing the Library Symbols
7
4-2
Symbol Libraries
Library Symbol Naming Convention
Library Symbol Name
The default symbol subdirectory, /viawd/wd/jic1, and a companion 0.125 uniform
text height library, /viawd/wd/jic125, each contain many hundreds of component
symbols in standard AutoCAD “.dwg” file format. These are referenced by WD
and its icon menuing system and are inserted as standard AutoCAD blocks with
attributes. There are three ways to determine the block name of an existing
symbol:
METHOD A
Insert the symbol from WD’s icon menu and then use AutoCAD’s LIST command
to display the block name. Add /viawd/wd/jic1/ as a prefix to this block name to
obtain the path to the symbol’s “.dwg” file (or /viawd/wd/jic125/ as a prefix for the
uniform 0.125 unit text height version).
METHOD B
Go to the Appendix A section of this on-line help manual. Most of the schematic
symbols are illustrated here along with the appropriate block name.
METHOD C
The file /viawd/wd/WD_MENU.dat lists the symbol descriptions and file names of
all components referenced in the WD icon menuing system. You can pick the
symbol names from this file. Here is an example of how the data looks in this file.
Symbol Libraries
“On delay coil | S2(SHTD1N) | HTD1N”
The “|” characters divide the entry into three sections. The first piece is the
description that appears in the menu’s side bar, the second in a slide-library
reference, and the third is the actual symbol file name. In this example, the file
name of the library symbol is /viawd/wd/jic1/htd1n.dwg. The vertical version of
this symbol is /viawd/wd/jic1/vtd1n.dwg.
Note that WD depends on a specific naming convention to enable some of its
automation features to work. Though not mandatory, you are urged to follow the
naming convention outlined below if you create new WD-smart symbols for use
with WD. This will allow your custom symbols to take full advantage of WD’s
features.
See Appendix A for an illustrated listing of the schematic symbols supplied with
WD.
General Components
Schematic components such as relays, switches, pilot lights, and discrete motor
control devices (but not PLC I/O symbols) follow this naming convention:
1. 32 character block name maximum, first character is either “H” or “V” for
horizontal or vertical wire insertion.
Symbol Libraries
4-3
2. The next two characters are reserved for family type (ex: PB for push buttons, CR for control relays, LS for limit switches). A zero “0” as the second
character of the family type (i.e. a “0” in the overall symbol name) means
that the symbol does NOT trigger a wire number change through it (ex: T0
for terminals, W0 for cable markers, C0 for connectors).
3. The fourth character is generally a 1 or a 2: a “2” for “child” contacts and a
“1” for everything else (parent or stand-alone component).
4. If the symbol is a contact then the 5th character is a 1 for normally open, 2
for normally closed.
5. The remaining characters are not specified. They are used to keep names
unique.
Examples:
HCR1.dwg
control relay coil, horizontal rung insertion
VCR1.dwg
control relay coil, vertical rung insertion
HCR21.dwg
horizontal relay contact, N.O.
HCR22.dwg
horizontal relay contact, N.C.
HCR22T.dwg
horizontal relay contact, N.C., with in-line terminal numbers
VPB11.dwg
vertical push button, parent contact, N.O.
VPB21.dwg
vertical push button, child contact, N.O.
HLS11.dwg
horizontal limit switch, parent, N.O.
HLS11H.dwg
horizontal limit switch, parent, N.O. Held closed
VLT1RP.dwg
vertical pilot light, red, press-to-test
HW01.dwg
horizontal cable marker, no wire number change through it
These symbols begin with “HP” or “VP” (horizontal rung versus vertical) followed
by a digit 1 through 9. The digit corresponds to the selected PLC module style or
“look” (1 through 5 are provided in the WD library, 6 through 9 can be user
defined). Refer to the PLC Parametric Build chapter for more information.
Stand-Alone PLC I/O Point Symbols
These symbols begin with “PLCIO” and can be up to 32 characters long. There is
no naming convention referenced by WD other than the “PLCIO” prefix.
Examples:
PLCIO50E1761L16AWA.dwg
AB 1761 model L16-AWA with 0.5 unit rung spacing
PLCIOI1T.dwg
Stand-alone input point, single wire connection
Stand-Alone Terminals
Stand-alone terminals follow this naming convention:
Symbol Libraries
PLC I/O Parametric Build Symbols
4-4
Symbol Libraries
1. First two characters are “HT”.
2. Next character is “0” if the wire number does not change through the terminal, “1” if the terminal symbol should trigger a wire number change.
3. The 4th character is an “_” underscore if the terminal carries no attributes
for WD to process (i.e. just a dumb, unannotated terminal symbol). Otherwise the 4-8th character positions of the symbol file name are user
defined.
Examples:
HT0001.dwg
square terminal with annotation, wire number does not
change
HT1001.dwg
same as above, but the wire number changes through
the terminal
HT0-01.dwg
dumb, square terminal with no annotation, no wire number change
Dumb In-Line Wire Markers
Symbol Libraries
Dumb in-line wire marker symbols must be constructed with a tiny piece of “pigtail
line entity” at each connection point. This can be very small but it needs to be
present for WD to correctly “see” the in-line inserted block as it traces the wire
network. In-line wire marker symbols follow this naming convention:
1. First character is “H or “V for horizontal wire or vertical wire insertion.
2. The next three characters are “T0_”.
3. The remaining characters are undefined.
Example:
HT0_RED.dwg
“RED” in-line marker, horizontal wire insert
Cable Marker Symbols
WD cable conductor marker symbols follow this convention:
1. First character is “H” or “V” for horizontal wire or vertical wire insertion.
Symbol Libraries
4-5
2. Next two characters are “W0”, the “0” meaning that the wire number does
not change through the cable maker symbol.
3. The fourth character is “1” for parent marker or “2” for child marker.
4. The remaining characters are not specified.
HW01.dwg
Parent cable conductor marker, horizontal wire insertion
HW02.dwg
Child
VW01.dwg
Parent cable conductor marker, vertical wire insertion
VW02.dwg
Child
Plug/Jack Connector Pin Symbols
WD cable conductor marker symbols follow this convention:
1. First character is “H” or “V” for horizontal wire or vertical wire insertion.
2. Next two characters are “C0” if the connector does NOT trigger a wire
number change through it (the “0” meaning that the wire number does not
change) or “CN” if the connector DOES trigger a wire number change.
3. The fourth character is “1” for parent marker or “2” for child marker.
4. The remaining characters are not specified.
Component “Location Mark” Symbols
Symbol Libraries
WD expects these symbol names to begin with the characters “WDXX”.
Wire “Dot” Symbol
WD expects this symbol name to be “WDDOT.dwg”.
Source/Destination Wire Signal Arrow Symbols
WD expects the first four characters of these symbol names to be either “HA?S”
for source signal arrows or “HA?D” for destination symbol arrows. The “?”
character is the arrow style digit (1-9). Characters 5 through 11 can be user
defined.
4-6
Symbol Libraries
The WD’s default installation includes arrow styles 1 through 4. The remaining
styles are undefined. You can create your own arrow styles using these unused
digits (ex: HA5S… and HA5D…). For example, copy wd\jic1\ha1s*.dwg to
ha5s*.dwg and wd\jic1\ha1d*.dwg to ha1d*.dwg. Call up each of the copied arrow
symbols in AutoCAD and edit to suit. Then, to access your new arrow style, set
the default arrow style to “5” in the WD CONFIG dialog.
Stand-Alone Cross-Reference Symbols
Same naming convention as the Source/Destination Signal symbols (i.e. HA?S*
and HA?D*) but without a WIRENO attribute present on the symbol.
Wire Number Symbols
A WD wire number is a block insert consisting of a single wire number attribute.
The origin of the block insert lies on its wire with the wire number attribute floating
above, below, or off to the side of the block’s insertion point. Here are the symbol
names WD expects to find for wire numbering:
WD_WNH.dwg
wire number for horizontal wire insertion
WD_WNV.dwg
wire number for vertical wire insertion
WD_WCH.dwg
“extra” wire number copy for horizontal wire
WD_WCV.dwg
“extra” wire number copy for vertical wire
WD also supports “in line” wire numbers that follow the value of the main wire
number. An in-line wire marker has a block name that follows that of a terminal
symbol that does not trigger a wire number change:
Symbol Libraries
HT0_W1.dwg
in-line wire number marker, horizontal wire insertion,
short wire number
HT0_W3.dwg
longer wire number
VT0_W1.dwg
in-line wire number marker, vertical wire insertion, short
wire number
VT0_W2.dwg
medium wire number width, vertical wire insertion
Panel Layout Footprint Symbols
There is no required naming convention to follow but the name must adhere to
AutoCAD’s 32- character block name limit.
Configuration and Ladder Master Line Reference Symbols
WD expects to find these block inserts:
WD_M.dwg
Block insert consisting of about 50 invisible attributes.
These carry the drawing’s settings.
WD_PNLM.dwg
Optional block insert consisting of several invisible
attributes. These carry the drawing’s settings for
“panel layout” functions.
Symbol Libraries
WD_MLRH.dwg
Block insert that carries a ladder’s first line reference
number and additional information such as rung spacing and ladder length.
WD_MLRV.dwg
Same as above, but for a ladder that lays on its side.
WD_MLRHX.dwg
Optional, user-defined alternative to WD_MLRH.dwg.
This symbol name is used by WD when you select
“User block” from the “Referencing” tab of the main
CONFIG dialog.
WD_MLRVX.dwg
4-7
Same as above, but for a ladder that lays on its side.
The ladder line reference block used by WD is determined by the ladder reference
configuration selected in WD’s CONFIG dialog in the “Referencing” section.
Attribute Requirements - Schematic Symbols
Specific to Parent / Stand-Alone Components
TAG1
WD puts the component’s tag name on this attribute, names like “PB101” or “CR55” (24 characters maximum). The default value you assign to this attribute
definition at the library symbol level (i.e. symbol’s “.dwg” file opened and displayed
in AutoCAD) becomes the family code character string WD uses to build the
component’s tag name when the block is inserted into your wiring diagram. This
default value character string is used as the “Family Code” (%F) portion of the
drawing’s tag format code you set up in the Configuration dialog (example
%F%N).
Symbol Libraries
For example, push-button symbol HPB11.dwg is shown here. Use “PB” for a
default value of the attribute definition TAG1 if the family name you want WD to
use is “PB” (examples: “PB100”, “100-PB”, “PB4-100”). Note that this family
name can be overridden at component insertion time, a later edit, or automatically
by use of the “wd_fam.dat” mapping file described elsewhere in this manual.
4-8
Symbol Libraries
Note: If the TAG1 attribute carries no default value then WD will use that
symbol's FAMILY attribute value.
MFG
Invisible attribute for optional manufacturer name or
code (24 characters maximum).
CAT
Invisible attribute for optional catalog number (60 characters maximum).
ASSYCODE
Invisible attribute for optional subassembly code that
causes WD to extract subassembly items into BOM
reports. The value for this attribute is generally set by
WD and not by the user. Its limit is also 24 characters.
Specific to Child Components
TAG2
Symbol Libraries
WD puts a copy of the parent component’s tag name on this attribute. An
example child contact, file name HCR22.dwg (horizontal, control relay, child,
normally closed), is shown here. During WD’s tagging operation, WD takes the
parent coil’s tag name (carried on its TAG1 attribute) and copies it to this contact’s
TAG2 attribute. If no parent tag is found then WD displays the attribute definition’s
default value.
Symbol Libraries
4-9
Common to Both Parent and Child Components
These attributes can be used on either Parent/Stand-alone or child components.
FAMILY
Invisible attribute that carries the components “family” type
(ex: “CR”, “TD”, “M”, “PB”). Generally, the FAMILY attribute
definition’s default value is the same as the default value for
the component’s TAG1 or TAG2 attribute.
A generic child device can be linked to any type of parent
symbol if the child’s Family attribute value is left blank. WD
will fill it in “on the fly” with the parent’s FAMILY code when
the link is made (see Annotate Child Component in the Tutorial section).
Description, first or only line of description text (60 characters maximum)
DESC2
2nd line of description text.
DESC3
3rd line of description text.
INST
Optional component “installation” code (ex: “MACH1”, 24
characters maximum).
LOC
Optional component “location” code (ex: “FIELD”, “JBOX2”,
16 characters maximum)
XREFNO,
XREFNC
Attributes to list “normally open” and “normally closed” references separately
XREF
This attribute can be used in two different ways. It can be
used for a combined list of normally open and normally
closed contacts. WD underlines the closed contacts. If
XREFNO and XREFNC are present it will be used this way.
If XREFNO and XREFNC are not present, then XREF is
used for non-NO/NC contacts.
Note: If XREF is not present then non-NO/NC contacts are
put in with the XREFNO annotation.
CONTACT
Invisible attribute present when the symbol is a contact. The
value of this attribute is the contact’s de-energized state (ex:
“NO” or “NC” or any text string with an embedded “NO” or
“NC” such as “NO-TC”).
POSn
Attribute to mark switch position text where “n” is the position
number digit. You can leave the default value blank and
then fill it in at component insertion time.
STATE
Optional contact state character string to denote relationship
between switch positions and open/closed contact state.
You can leave the default value blank and then fill it in at
component insertion time.
Symbol Libraries
DESC1
4-10
Symbol Libraries
RATINGn
Optional rating/value attribute text where “n” is a digit starting
with “1”. WD supports up to twelve RATINGn attributes (i.e.
RATING1 through RATING12) on the component symbol, up
to 60 characters each.
X?LINK
Optional invisible attribute that allows WD to automatically
tie in dashed “link” lines between related components (in lieu
of cross-reference annotation). The “?” is a digit that indicates the preferred link line connection direction and follows
the wire connection convention described above. A child circuit breaker pole is shown here with X2LINK and X8LINK
attributes marking where WD can attach dashed link lines
from above and from below respectively.
Wire Connection / Terminal Pin Number Pairs
Wire connection and terminal pin number attributes are generally used in matched
pairs.
Symbol Libraries
X?TERMn
Invisible wire connection attributes where an external wire “connects” to the
attribute’s origin point. The “n” character is an incremented digit starting at “01”
used to keep multiple wire connection point attribute names unique. The “?”
character position is used to identify the preferred wire connection direction:
1=
wire connects to the attribute from the right
2=
wire connects to the attribute from above
4=
wire connects to the attribute from the left
8=
wire connects to the attribute from below
0=
special for motor connections
If more than 99 terminals are present on a single symbol, the “n” value can
continue with double alpha letters/numbers such as “A0”, “A1”, …, “AZ”, “B0”, …,
“ZZ”.
X?TERMDESCn
Symbol Libraries
4-11
Optional wire connection description attributes that match up with X?TERMn wire
connection attributes. The value assigned to each termination description
attribute can be extracted into various wire connection reports and/or merged on
to panel wiring diagram representations of schematic symbols.
The X?TERMDESCn attributes can be used to define a terminal as an “Internal”
connection or an “External” connection. See User’s Guide, Terminal Utilities,
Internal/External Terminal Connections.
TERMn
Optional terminal pin number attribute where “n” is a two-digit number (starting at
“01”) that is used to match up with the corresponding X?TERMn wire connection
attribute.
The example push button symbol shown here has two X?TERM / TERM pairs.
The left-hand wire connection attribute is X4TERM01 and its associated terminal
pin number attribute is TERM01. The “4” in the name means that WD will give
preference to a wire connection coming in from the left. The common “01” suffix
of both attributes ties them together as a pair for various wire connection reports.
The right-hand wire connection attribute is X1TERM02 and its associated terminal
pin number attribute is TERM02. The “1” means that WD prefers a wire
connection coming in from the right and the “02” ties the two attributes together.
Other points of interest
• X?TERMn attributes can be stand-alone (i.e. no associated TERMn
attribute).
• A single TERMn attribute can have two, three, or four wire connection
attributes associated with it. For example, a round, stand-alone terminal
symbol is shown here. It has a single terminal pin number attribute
TERM01 but carries four wire connection attributes to allow connection from
any direction. All four wire number attribute names end with “01” which
links them all to the common terminal pin number attribute.
Symbol Libraries
• WD’s limit on wire connection points for a single component is pretty high.
It starts at 01, increments through 99, and then can start A0, A1… AZ, B0,
B1… ZZ (X?TERM01 through X?TERMZZ and TERM01 through TERMZZ).
4-12
Symbol Libraries
WD_JUMPERS
Optional “internal wire jumpers” attribute. This attribute value can be encoded to
link sets of terminals together in that WD will consider them internally jumpered
when calculating wire number assignments and processing wire connection and
from/to reports. Example: WD_JUMPERS attribute value of ((01 02)) will flag WD
to treat wire connection X?TERM01 is electrically jumpered to X?TERM02.
WD_JUMPERS attribute with a value of ((01 04) (02 05 06)) means that wire
connection X?TERM01 and X?TERM04 will be treated as internally jumpered
together and X?TERM02, X?TERM05, and X?TERM06 will be viewed by WD as
jumpered together.
Stand-Alone Terminal Symbols
TAGSTRIP
Optional attribute to carry terminal strip number (16 char
max)
X?TERM01/
TERM01
Wire connection attributes and optional terminal number
attribute
WIRENO
Optional attribute to carry wire number of connected wire
network
INST
Optional attribute for terminal “installation” code (ex:
“MACH1”)
LOC
Optional attribute for terminal “location” code (ex: “JBOX1”)
Specific to Source/Destination Wire Signal Symbols
Carries unique signal code used by WD to match the source
to its destination(s)
WIRENO
Symbol Libraries
SIGCODE
This attribute carries the wire number for the signal source
XREF
This attribute indicates the reference location for the matching destination(s)
DESC1
Optional description attribute
SHEET
Optional attribute for WD's SHEET (%S) value assigned in
the drawing Config. This attribute is updated automatically
when you run a Signal Update.
DWGNAM
Optional attribute for WD's DWGNAM (%D) value assigned
in the drawing Config. This attribute is updated automatically
when you run a Signal Update.
PLC Modules and Stand-Alone I/O Points
Please refer to the PLC Parametric Build chapter.
Symbol Libraries
4-13
Managing the Library Symbols
Changing Appearance of Existing Library Symbols
The WD default symbol library is installed in the /viawd/wd/jic1 subdirectory (and
/viawd/wd/jic125 for a uniform 0.125 text height library). You can modify the
“.dwg” version of each symbol to comply with your specific standards or client
requirements. Open each symbol up in its native AutoCAD .dwg format (i.e.
AutoCAD OPEN, open the file!). Move the tag, description, location, and cross
reference annotation attribute definitions to different locations to satisfy your
drafting standards (attribute definitions look like text entities). Adjust attribute
definition text size to meet your requirements but avoid deleting any of the existing
attribute definitions. Attributes are needed to give the symbol full compatibility
with WD features. You can insert additional non-WD attributes that your own
custom applications might need. WD lets you edit these attributes with the Show/
edit misc button on the WD edit dialogs.
Use Layer 0
You are urged to leave all symbol attribute definitions and geometry on layer “0”
and that entity color assignments are “BY LAYER”. Let WD manage what layers
the various parts and pieces of your symbol get put on at insertion time. This
layer naming scheme is set up in the Layers section of the CONFIG dialog. If you
want certain layer naming maintained on your inserted components, check the
box found at the bottom of the Layers setup sub-dialog, the Ignore button. With
this checked, non-layer 0 entities will maintain their existing layer names as the
component inserts into the drawing.
Pre-defining Symbol Annotation
For example, let’s say that you always want your N.O. limit switch symbol to insert
showing the two terminal pin numbers labeled as “1” and “2”. In AutoCAD, call up
and edit these symbol files: HLS11.DWG, VLS11.DWG, HLS21.DWG, and
VLS21.DWG (modify both the viawd/wd/jic1 and viawd/wd/jic125 versions). In
each case use DDEDIT to change the TERM01 and TERM02 attribute default
values to be “1” and “2” respectively. At insertion time, these values will show up
as defaults. Note that you can override the default values at insertion time, if you
wish.
Symbol Libraries
You can have certain symbols insert with switch position text, terminal pin
numbers, or BOM catalog numbers pre-filled with default values. To do this, open
the symbol’s “.dwg” file in AutoCAD (default symbol library path is /viawd/wd/jic1).
Use the DDEDIT or PROPERTIES command to change the symbol’s default
attribute values.
4-14
Symbol Libraries
Converting Your Existing Library
Your existing symbol library can be made fully compatible with WD when you
follow these two guidelines:
• Symbol file names should conform to the WD’s naming convention. Though
not mandatory, you are encouraged to follow the convention in order to take
full advantage of WD’s features.
• Symbols need to carry the target attribute names that WD expects to find,
as described in Attribute Requirements earlier. A special “Black Box
Builder” utility can be used to make this process less painful.
Using the Black Box Builder utility
WD includes a utility that can speed up the process of adding the
correct attributes to your new or existing library symbols. Here is the sequence:
Symbol Libraries
1. Call up your existing library symbol.
2. From the WD Component MISC toolbar fly-out, select Black Box Builder.
3. Select any existing objects that are to become part of the new or converted
symbol. This dialog is displayed.
Choose from the various categories and place the WD-required attributes, then
save and exit. See the chapter on Miscellaneous Tools for a more complete
discussion of this utility.
Creating a New Library Symbol
WD uses stock AutoCAD blocks and attributes in its library symbols. The symbols
can be any size and any width. There are no edits required to some external
support file or database to register a symbol for use in a WD wiring diagram
drawing.
You can use the “Black Box Builder” utility covered briefly above and more fully in
the chapter on Miscellaneous Tools, but the quickest way to create a new symbol
might be to start with an existing WD compatible symbol. Start with a copy of a
similar type and then modify to suit. Avoid deleting the existing attribute
definitions, just reposition and edit their default values as required. Here is the
step-by-step process:
1. Open a new drawing using the desired symbol name.
Symbol Libraries
4-15
2. Insert an exploded copy of an existing WD symbol that somewhat resembles what you need in the new symbol. Take into consideration the number of wire connection points, rating attributes, and whether your new
symbol is a parent symbol (attribute TAG1) or a child symbol (attribute
TAG2).
3. Clean up the graphics. Keep everything on layer 0.
4. Reuse attribute definitions from the exploded symbol. Reposition them as
required. Make sure that you keep terminal pin number text paired with its
wire connection attribute (the last two digits of each attribute name must
match, “X4TERM01” wire connection point attribute matched with
“TERM01” terminal pin number text attribute).
5. Use DDEDIT to change the TAG1 or TAG2 and the FAMILY attribute values to the desired family code. Insert any pre-defined terminal pin,
description, or catalog number attribute values.
6. Delete unneeded attribute definitions and graphics.
7. Save your work to the /viawd/wd/jic1, /viawd/wd/jic125, or /viawd/wd/user
subdirectory. To test it, call up a new or existing WD drawing. Try to insert
your new symbol into an existing piece of wire. You can manually enter
your new symbol’s file name from WD’s “Type it” box on the main icon
menu page, bottom left corner.
Avoid putting wire pigtails on your new symbols. Pigtails can defeat WD’s
SCOOT and automatic wire numbering when two symbols with pigtails bump up
against each other. There is only one condition where a wire connection pigtail is
mandatory.
Pigtail Exception
Insert a very short pigtail at a wire connection point that has no other visible
symbol geometry nearby. WD needs to “see” something tangible on a symbol at a
wire connection point. The example below is a simple toggle switch. The lefthand wire connection point does not need a pigtail since the angled portion of the
switch touches the wire connection point. The right-hand side has the problem
since there is no visible geometry for a connected wire to “see” when it ties in to
Symbol Libraries
Pigtails
4-16
Symbol Libraries
the invisible X1TERM02 attribute. Add a very short line entity pigtail at this point
(it can be microscopic).
Note: Another example where very short pigtails are required is on both
sides of the “in-line” wire marker symbols.
Tips and Hints
Symbol Origin
The WD library symbols generally have their origin points centered between the
first (or only) pair of wire connection point attributes. Though this is not
mandatory, it helps WD more reliably determine the correct orientation for
alignment with an underlying wire at insertion time.
Symbol Width
There are no restrictions. Every symbol can have a different width. At insertion
time WD determines the symbol’s width on the fly by reading the locations of its
wire connection attributes (attributes with name X?TERMn as described
previously in this chapter).
Symbol Libraries
Wire Connection Points
A symbol can have hundreds of connection points and, if desired, a terminal pin
number attribute tied to each (use suffix codes beginning with “01” and ending
with “ZZ”).
Component Description Text
WD supports three lines of description text up to 60 characters long. The attribute
names are DESC1, DESC2, and DESC3 and generally appear on both parent/
stand-alone and child contact symbols. You can insert additional DESCn
attributes on your symbol and edit them with any attribute editing utility, but WD
will not process them.
Symbol Libraries
4-17
Symbol Libraries
Symbol Libraries
4-18
Symbol Libraries
PLC
In This Chapter. . . .
- PLC Parametric Build Theory
- PLC Parametric Build
- PLC Data File Wizard - Module Builder
- Single, Stand-Alone I/O Points
- Non-Parametric Build
- Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Drawing
8
5-2
PLC
PLC Parametric Build - Theory
WD can generate any of hundreds of different PLC I/O modules on demand, in a
variety of different graphical styles, all without a single, complete I/O module
library symbol resident on the system. Modules automatically adapt to the
underlying ladder rung spacing, whatever that value might be, and can even be
stretched or broken into two or more pieces at insertion time. This is all possible
because WD generates PLC I/O modules via a parametric generation technique
driven by an ASCII data file and using just a handful of component parts.
Here is the simple explanation of how this works. We start with just six small
AutoCAD symbols:
#1
Single input I/O point with full module
description, part number, and manufacturer
attributes.
#2
Single input point - bare.
#3
Single connection point, wire connects from
right.
#4
Single output I/O point with full module
description, part number, and manufacturer
attributes
#5
Single output point - bare
#6
Single connection point, wire connects from
left
A data file lists the simple sequence of how to pick and choose from this small
library of symbols and “stack” them to build a particular module. For example, an
8-point input module’s symbol stack sequence might be this: #1, #2, #2, #2, #2,
#2, #2, #2, #3. An 8-point output module with two commons might be #4, #5, #5,
#5, #6, #5, #5, #5, #5, #6.
This is basically how WD does it, but instead of six symbols, there are about three
dozen. The data file contains not just the stack sequence but also text values to
annotate on to each symbol in the stack. As WD builds the module, it reads the
underlying ladder rung spacing and spreads the stack out or compresses it to
match the rung spacing. During the insertion process, WD lets you interrupt it to
break the module and then restart it at a different location.
PLC
The next sections describe the parametric library and the data file structure that
drives this process.
PLC
5-3
PLC Parametric Build
Parametric PLC Symbols
These PLC symbols are stored in the /viawd/wd/jic1/ subdirectory (or /viawd/wd/
jic125 for 0.125 hgt version) along with all of the other WD component symbols.
Their file names begin with the characters “HP” (Horizontal ladder rungs / PLC) or
“VP” (Vertical ladder rungs) followed by a digit that corresponds to a PLC I/O
“style” number. Each symbol is a building block with a different arrangement of
attributes and wire connection points. WD selects the appropriate symbols to use,
stacks them together in the order defined by the data file, and produces a
completed I/O module.
The collection of parametric PLC I/O symbols for style “1” for insertion into
horizontal ladder rungs is shown on the following pages.
Note: Some of the symbols for style 1 are identical to others found in style 1.
Differences appear when other style numbers are considered.
Example
When you instruct WD to insert an Allen-Bradley 1771-IA 8-point input module
using style number 1, WD quickly refers to the parametric data file to find what
symbols it must stack together to build this module. The data file instructs WD to
insert the following symbol sequence for a 1771-IA module.
HP1WA-DL.dwg
HP1WA-D.dwg
HP1WA-D.dwg
HP1WA-D.dwg
HP1WA-D.dwg
HP1WA-D.dwg
HP1WA-D.dwg
HP1WA-D.dwg
HP1--W.dwg
WD inserts the symbols based upon the underlying ladder’s rung spacing,
explodes them, draws a rectangular box around the entire assembly, creates a
single block out of the collection, and then annotates the new module’s attributes.
PLC
If you select style number 2, then WD follows the exact sequence above except
that it substitutes a “2” for the “1” in each of the parametric symbol file names (ex:
HP2WA-DL.dwg instead of HP1WA-DL.dwg). You end up with the same module
but this time each I/O point is represented by a screw terminal inside of a square.
5-4
PLC
PLC
First / Top-Most Parametric Symbol
PLC
5-5
PLC
PLC
5-6
PLC
PLC
5-7
2nd and Beyond
PLC
PLC
5-8
PLC
PLC
5-9
PLC
PLC
5-10
PLC
PLC
5-11
Parametric PLC Data Files
There are multiple files available to drive the PLC I/O module generation process,
generally one file for each PLC product line. You can edit these ASCII files or
create new ones, if you wish, to cover additional manufacturers and product lines.
WD’s default PLC data files are installed in the “/viawd/wd/ subdirectory” with file
names in this format: “plc_*.dat”.
Breakdown of File Format
A small sample of parametric data is shown here. It covers everything WD needs
to know in order to generate and annotate an AB 1771-IA 8-point input module or
an AB 1771-OQ 8-point sourcing output module.
PLC
*
\K=1771-IA
\M=ALLEN-BRADLEY
\T=DI
\P=8
\D=8-POINT INPUT
\V=120V AC/DC
\B=OCTAL
\1=0.5
\2=0.5
\3=0.5
\4=0.375
5-12
PLC
\5=0.25
\6=0.25
HP?WA-DL;TERM_=00;MFG=AB;CAT=1771-IA;DESC=120V
INPUTS;%%1PROMPT=RACK NUMBER; %%2PROMPT=SLOT
NUMBER;TAG=R%%1/S%%2;LINE1=RACK %%1;LINE2=SLOT %%2
HP?WA-D;TERM_=01
HP?WA-D;TERM_=02
HP?WA-D;TERM_=03
HP?WA-D;TERM_=04
HP?WA-D;TERM_=05
HP?WA-D;TERM_=06
HP?WA-D;TERM_=07
HP?--W ;TERM_=B;TERMDESC_=L2
*
\K=1771-OQ
\M=ALLEN-BRADLEY
\T=DO
\P=8
\D=8-PT SOURCING OUT
\V=24V DC
\1=0.5
\2=0.5
\3=0.5
\4=0.375
\5=0.25
\6=0.25
HP?---L;MFG=AB;CAT=1771-OQ;DESC=24V DC SOURCE
OUT;%%1PROMPT=RACK NUMBER; %%2PROMPT=SLOT
NUMBER;TAG=R%%1/S%%2;LINE1=RACK %%1;LINE2=SLOT %%2
HP?DWAW;TERM_L=2;TERMDESC_L=+24;TERM_R=3
HP?D-AW;TERM_=4
HP?--W;TERM_=5;TERMDESC_=-DC
HP?--W;TERM_=6;TERMDESC_=-DC
HP?D-AW;TERM_=7
HP?DWAW;TERM_L=9;TERMDESC_L=+24;TERM_R=8
HP?DWAW;TERM_L=10;TERMDESC_L=+24;TERM_R=11
HP?D-AW;TERM_=12
HP?--W;TERM_=13;TERMDESC_=-DC
HP?--W;TERM_=14;TERMDESC_=-DC
HP?D-AW;TERM_=15
HP?DWAW;TERM_L=17;TERMDESC_L=+24;TERM_R=16
*
PLC
Here is an explanation of the file format.
The first half dozen or so entries cover information that appears in the module’s
selection line listed in the bottom half of the PLC module selection dialog.
“\K=”
Model number
“\M=”
Manufacturer’s name
“\T=”
Module type
PLC
“\P=”
Number of I/O points
“\D=”
Description displayed in selection dialog
“\B=”
Base numbering value (Octal, Decimal, Hex)
“\X=”
Optional block to insert at bottom of module
(ex: DIP switches)
“\V=”
Voltage rating
“\L=”
5-13
AutoLISP file to run at module insertion time
The next four lines, “\1=“, “\2=“, “\3=“, and “\4=“, give offsets right, left, top, and
bottom for the rectangle that WD will draw around the finished stack of symbols to
create an overall module. The optional “\5=”, and “\6=” give the offsets for a split
module where “\5” gives the offset for the top of a split module and “\6” gives the
offset for the bottom of the split module. If left out then WD will use “\3” and “\4”.
Now to the heart of the data. The first line is the most complex and is reproduced
here:
HP?WA-DL;TERM_=00;MFG=AB;CAT=1771-IA;DESC=120V
INPUTS;%%1PROMPT=RACK NUMBER; %%2PROMPT=SLOT
NUMBER;TAG=R%%1/S%%2;LINE1=RACK %%1;LINE2=SLOT %%2
PLC
The first part of this entry tells WD the name of the first parametric symbol to
insert: “HP?WA-DL.dwg”. The user’s selected “style” number is substituted for
the “?” character in the symbol name. With style number 1 selected, WD finds
and inserts an exploded copy of HP1WA-DL.dwg (shown here) at the user’s
selected insertion point for the overall module.
5-14
PLC
This symbol carries attributes with names “TERM_”, “MFG”, “CAT”, and “DESC”.
The next part of the data file entry carries the attribute values that WD is to copy to
these attributes.
Next, WD prompts you to enter the module’s beginning I/O address number. In
this example, you enter “I:01400”. This value gets annotated on to the “TAGA_”
attribute.
Next, there are two user prompts encoded into this line.
%%1PROMPT=RACK NUMBER
%%2PROMPT=SLOT NUMBER
These two lines trigger WD to display a dialog to prompt you to enter additional
information.
PLC
The value you enter into the rack number edit box is temporarily saved in memory
under the variable name “%%1”. Your slot number response is saved in “%%2”.
There are three more attributes to annotate: “TAG”, “LINE1” and “LINE2”. Note
that the values to insert include the “%%1” and “%%2” variable names. WD
substitutes the values you entered in the dialog for these two variables. For
example, using the values of “01” for %%1 and “4” for %%2 shown above, the
entry “TAG=R%%1/S%%2” means that WD annotates attribute “TAG” with a value
of “R01/S4”. Entry “LINE1=RACK %%1” means that WD gives attribute “LINE1” a
value of “RACK 01” and “LINE2=SLOT %%2” means that the “LINE2” attribute is
given a value of “SLOT 4”.
PLC
5-15
The next seven entries are simple in comparison to the first one. They are
reproduced here.
HP?WA-D;TERM_=01
HP?WA-D;TERM_=02
HP?WA-D;TERM_=03
HP?WA-D;TERM_=04
HP?WA-D;TERM_=05
HP?WA-D;TERM_=06
HP?WA-D;TERM_=07
These lines instruct WD to work its way down the module, inserting symbol
HP1WA-D.dwg seven times. With each insertion, WD increments the beginning
address and puts it on the symbol’s “TAGA_” attribute. It puts the appropriate
terminal value on the symbol’s “TERM_” attribute.
The final line gives the common, neutral wire connection at the bottom of the
module.
HP?--W ;TERM_=B;TERMDESC_=L2
WD inserts symbol HP1--W.dwg and annotates attributes “TERM_” with a “B” and
“TERMDESC_” with a value of “L2”. Here is what the finished module looks like
when inserted into a ladder with 0.5 inch rung spacing.
PLC
5-16
PLC
PLC Data File Tips and Hints
Rectangular Box
You can suppress the rectangular box WD draws around the finished module by
removing the “\1=“ through “\4=“ entries in a module’s data list.
Box Color / Linetype / Layer
You can instruct WD to draw the rectangular box using non-default line properties
for color, layer, line type, or ltscale. Encode this information as a series of key
words as if you were using AutoCAD’s CHPROP command to make the change.
The key words are encoded into the “\1=“ through “\4=“ entries in a module’s data
list. For example, the following will instruct WD to make the left and right-hand
sides of the enclosing box CYAN using line type HIDDEN2 and the top and bottom
BLUE using the default line type:
PLC
\1=0.5
COLOR CYAN LTYPE HIDDEN2
\2=0.5
COLOR CYAN LTYPE HIDDEN2
\3=0.5
COLOR BLUE
\4=0.375
COLOR BLUE
PLC
5-17
Use of %%x Prompt Values
After WD prompts you to enter these values (such as “rack”, “group” or “slot”
numbers) the values are available for use on any subsequent I/O point of the
module. For example, let’s say that you want to use each I/O point’s
“TERMDESC_” attribute to carry the I/O address in a Rack/Group/bit number
format. Here’s how to do it.
1. Prompt for Rack and Group values in the modules first entry.
%%1PROMPT=Rack number; %%2PROMPT=Group number;
2. Encode the TERMDESC_ value using %%1, %%2, and a bit number suffix.
...;TERMDESC_=I:%1%%2/00;... for the first I/O point,
...;TERMDESC_=I:%%1%%2/01;... for the 2nd I/O point, and so on
User Attributes
You can add your own attributes to the parametric symbols and even annotate
them automatically if you reference them in the PLC data file.
Address Prefix or Suffix
You can trigger WD to include a prefix or suffix to each address value it inserts.
For example, let’s say you want “IN-“ to always come in as a prefix for inputs on a
given module. Edit the data file and add “;TAGA_=IN-%%N” to each I/O
parametric data entry in the module’s block of data. The “%%N” represents the
calculated I/O address and the “IN-“ is the prefix that gets added to it. You can
also use the Prompt values above. For example, let’s say that you want to
permanently encode the rack and slot numbers (%%1 and %%2 prompts) into
each I/O address value. Encode each I/O address entry in the data file with
“;TAGA_=%%1%%2%%N”.
Dealing with non-sequential addresses
Some modules may have I/O address assignments that do not sequentially
increment from one terminal to the next. Use the “%%A” flag to represent the
module’s beginning address. In the example shown below, the address sequence
is non-sequential. Note the use of the “TAGA_=%%A+ & lt; some value & gt; ” flags.
PLC
\K=D2-08ND3
\M=PLC-DIRECT
\T=DI
\P=8
\D=8-POINT INPUT
\V=12-24VDC
\B=OCT
\1=0.5
\2=0.5
\3=0.5
\4=0.375
HP?--WLR;TERM_=C,C;MFG=PLC-DIRECT;CAT=D2-08ND3;…
HP?WA-DQ;TERM_=0
HP?WA-DR;TERM_=4;TAGA_=%%A+4
HP?WA-DQ;TERM_=1;TAGA_=%%A+1
HP?WA-DR;TERM_=5;TAGA_=%%A+5
5-18
PLC
HP?WA-DQ;TERM_=2;TAGA_=%%A+2
HP?WA-DR;TERM_=6;TAGA_=%%A+6
HP?WA-DQ;TERM_=3;TAGA_=%%A+3
HP?WA-DR;TERM_=7;TAGA_=%%A+7
Forcing a Break
You can predefine a module break point in the PLC data file. Add this entry,
“\SPECIAL=BREAK”, on the line where you want the automatic break to occur.
For example, on the 8th I/O point for a 16 point input module, change the
module’s parameter list as shown below. This will trigger an automatic module
break after the 8th I/O point is inserted.
HP?WA-D;TERM_=07 (before)
HP?WA-D;TERM_=07;\SPECIAL=BREAK (after)
Triggering for a re-prompt of I/O address
Some modules include both inputs and outputs. You can trigger WD to prompt for
a new beginning address number when the parametric build flips from inputs to
outputs or vice versa. Add this entry, “\SPECIAL=ADDR_OUT”, on the line where
you want WD to re-prompt for a new output address or “\SPECIAL=ADDR_IN” if
WD should re-prompt for a new beginning input address value.
Example
PLC
Here is the parametric data for a 4 point output / 4 point input module. Note the
“ADDR_IN” flag set midway through the data at the point where the I/O points flip
from outputs to inputs. As this module builds at insertion time, WD will pause and
re-prompt at this point for an input address.
\K=1746-IO8
\M=ALLEN-BRADLEY
\T=IO
\P=4/4
\D=4-PT RELAY OUT, 4-PT 120VAC IN
\V=120V AC
\1=0.5
\2=0.5
\3=0.5
\4=0.375
HP?---L;MFG=AB;CAT=1746-IO8;DESC=4OUT/4IN;%%1PROMPT=RACK…
HP?DWAWO;TERMDESC_L=+V;TERMDESC_R=out0
HP?D-AWO;TERMDESC_=out1
HP?D-AWO;TERMDESC_=out2
HP?D-AWO;TERMDESC_=out3
HP?WA-D;TERMDESC_=in0;\SPECIAL=ADDR_IN
HP?WA-D;TERMDESC_=in1
HP?WA-D;TERMDESC_=in2
HP?WA-D;TERMDESC_=in3
HP?--W;TERMDESC_=AC COM
PLC
5-19
Including unused terminals
Some modules may have terminals that are not used (i.e. dummy terminals with
no electrical connection). The PLC data files are set up to skip unused terminals
by default. This results in the most compact representation of the module, but the
PLC data files can be set up to optionally show unused terminals. This is done by
adding in “\SPECIAL=INCLUDE” and “\SPECIAL=EXCLUDE” flags. This
following example will illustrate.
An Allen-Bradley 1746-IA4 input module is inserted normally on the left. A second
one is inserted, but this time at the Module Layout dialog, the “Include unused/
extra connections” toggle is picked. The same module inserts but it is almost
twice as long. This is because the second one shows the module’s four unused
terminals.
PLC
Here is the parametric data for the 4-point input module above. Note the use of
the INCLUDE and EXCLUDE flags. When the “Include unused/extra
connections” toggle is NOT selected for the insert, WD skips all entries marked
5-20
PLC
with “\SPECIAL=INCLUDE”. When the toggle IS selected, WD skips all entries
marked with “\SPECIAL=EXCLUDE”. It looks a bit goofy but it works nicely.
\K=1746-IA4
\M=ALLEN-BRADLEY
\T=DI
\P=4
\D=4-POINT INPUT
\V=120V AC
\1=0.5
\2=0.5
\3=0.5
\4=0.375
HP?WA-DL;\SPECIAL=EXCLUDE;TERMDESC_=in0;MFG=AB;…
HP?W--L;\SPECIAL=INCLUDE;TERMDESC_=n.c.;MFG=AB;…
HP?W--;\SPECIAL=INCLUDE;TERMDESC_=n.c.
HP?W--;\SPECIAL=INCLUDE;TERMDESC_=n.c.
HP?W--;\SPECIAL=INCLUDE;TERMDESC_=n.c.
HP?WA-D;\SPECIAL=INCLUDE;TERMDESC_=in0
HP?WA-D;TERMDESC_=in1
HP?WA-D;TERMDESC_=in2
HP?WA-D;TERMDESC_=in3
HP?--W ;TERMDESC_=AC COM
Special Spacing
Normally when WD generates a PLC module, it uses the current rung spacing for
I/O and wire connection point spacing. You can override this by using the
“\SPECIAL=SPACINGFACTOR= & lt; val & gt; ” in the plc*.dat file. When WD sees this on
an I/O point or wire connection entry line it will use a factor of the rung spacing.
For example, a “\SPECIAL=SPACINGFACTOR=0.5” for a given I/O or wire
connection entry will flag WD to insert this point down 0.5 rung spacing instead of
a full rung spacing. A value of 1.5 will insert that point down an extra half rung
spacing than normal. 0.0 will put the particular I/O point at the same location as
the preceding one.
HP?WA-D;TERM_=07;\SPECIAL=SPACINGFACTOR=1.5
PLC
Adding to an Existing PLC Data File
You can use the PLC data file wizard, Module Builder (described later in this
chapter) to edit existing module specifications or they can be edited manually. The
easiest way to manually add a new module to an existing PLC data file is to open
the ASCII file for edit, find a similar module within the file, copy it, and then edit the
copied module to suit. To determine what the data file name is, examine the file “/
viawd/wd/plc.dat”. This ASCII file is a list of the PLC data files available to WD and
a portion of it is reproduced here. There is one “#” line for each vendor name
followed by a variable number of lines, one for each module “series”. The format
follows this syntax:
#vendor1 name
seriesA;type1=filename1;type2=filename2;type3;filename3; . . .
seriesB;type1= . . .
#vendor2 name
seriesA;type1= . . .
PLC
5-21
* *********** P L C . D A T ***************
#Allen-Bradley
1794;Discrete Input=plc_AB_1794_Discrete Input.dat;Discrete
Output=plc_AB_1794_Discrete Output.dat;
1771;Discrete Input=plc_AB_1771_Discrete Input.dat;Discrete
Output=plc_AB_1771_Discrete Output.dat;
1769;Discrete Input=plc_AB_1769_Discrete Input.dat;Discrete
Output=plc_AB_1769_Discrete Output.dat;
1764;Discrete Combination=plc_AB_1764_Discrete Combination.dat
1761;Discrete Combination=plc_AB_1761_Discrete Combination.dat
1756;Discrete Input=plc_AB_1756_Discrete Input.dat;Discrete
Output=plc_AB_1756_Discrete Output.dat;
1747;Discrete Combination=plc_AB_1747_Discrete Combination.dat
1746;Discrete Input=plc_AB_1746_Discrete Input.dat;Discrete
Output=plc_AB_1746_Discrete Output.dat;
#Aromat
FPO;Discrete Combination=plc_Aromat_FPO_Discrete Combination.dat
#ATC
ATCOM 64;Discrete Input=plc_ATC64_Discrete Input.dat;Discrete
Output=plc_ATC64_Discrete Output.dat
ATC;Analog Input=plc_ATC_ATC_Analog Input.dat
#B & R
MULTICONTROL;Discrete Input=plc_B & R_MULTICONTROL_Discrete
Input.dat; #Barber Coleman
MACO 4000;Discrete Input=plc_Barber Coleman_MACO 4000_Discrete
Input.dat;
Once you find the specific PLC data file to modify, use an existing module
definition as a starting place. See PLC Data Files for an explanation of the file
format.
Creating a New PLC Data File
You can use the PLC Data File Wizard, Module Builder (described later in this
chapter) to create new module specifications or the files can be edited manually.
An easy way to manually create a new PLC data file is to copy an existing file to
your new data file’s name and then cut and paste. When you finish, make sure
you add your new PLC data file’s name to the list file “\viawd\wd\plc.dat” (shown
previously). You can add the file name under an existing vendor name or add a
new vendor for this new file. Remember the format for the PLC.DAT file is as
follows:
Once you create the specific PLC data file to modify, use an existing module
definition as a starting place. See PLC Data Files for an explanation of the file
format.
PLC
#vendor1 name
seriesA;type1=filename1;type2=filename2;type3;filename3; . . .
5-22
PLC
Modifying a PLC Appearance “Style”
There are five pre-defined PLC style numbers provided with the default
installation of WD, numbered 1 through 5. If one or more of these do not appeal
to you or if you have a client with specific requirements not met by any of the five
stock styles, you can pick one of the existing styles and modify it to your liking.
There are about three dozen symbols associated with each style. They are
located in the \viawd\wd\jic1 subdirectory (or \viawd\wd\jic125 for the uniform
0.125 text height version). They carry the file name “HP?*.dwg” where “?” is the
style number. Use the style “1” examples illustrated earlier in this chapter as a
guide.
Creating a New PLC “Style”
An easy way to create a new PLC style is to copy an existing PLC style’s library
symbols to one of the unused style numbers (6, 7, 8, or 9) and then edit each one
to suit your needs. For example, copy style 1 to style 6 by copying
“\viawd\wd\jic1\hp1*.dwg” to “\viawd\wd\jic1\hp6*.dwg” (or, if you are using the
0.125 uniform text height library, copy “\viawd\wd\jic125\hp1*.dwg” to
“\viawd\wd\jic125\hp6*.dwg”). Open the hp6*.dwg drawing files in AutoCAD and
modify as required. To access your new style, select “6” in the style subdialog
when you prepare to select and insert a new PLC module.
Adding Slide for New PLC “Style”
The icon menu “pictures” that display for the various PLC styles are just AutoCAD
“slides” that are compiled into a slide library called s_ldpc.slb. This file is saved to
your \viawd\wd subdirectory where WD's INS PLC utility and CONFIG utility will
find and access it.
To add a new “style” to this slide library, you must first create an AutoCAD slide file
and then rebuild the slide library to include your new slide. This is illustrated in the
following steps.
Example
PLC
Adding a new “style #6” slide to the library.
1. Unzip plc_slb.zip into a dummy subdirectory. This zip contains the “.dwg”
source files used to create the original s_ldpc.slb slide library file.
2. COPY drawing file s_ldpc1.dwg to new name s_ldpc6.dwg (copy style 1's
drawing to style 6's drawing). Call up drawing s_ldpc6.dwg in AutoCAD
and massage it to make the image look the way you want.
3. Then type MSLIDE at the AutoCAD command prompt to create a slide file
called s_ldpc6.sld.
4. COPY drawing s_ldpcv1.dwg to new name s_ldpcv6.dwg and repeat steps
2 and 3 above to create sideways image of your new PLC style. Create
sld file s_ldpcv6.sld.
5. Exit AutoCAD. Get into text editor like Wordpad and call up file s_ldpc.dat.
Add the following two lines to the top of the file:
s_ldpc6
s_ldpcv6
Exit and save the new version of s_ldpc.dat.
6. Run batch file s_ldpc.bat. This should re-create the s_ldpc.slb slide library
file. If successful, copy the resulting file to your \viawd\wd subdir, overwriting the old version.
PLC
5-23
Note: If the resulting slide doesn't look quite right, maybe it's too small or off
center, try this. Call up your source drawing again. Resize your
AutoCAD graphics screen so that it is more square. Center your image
and reshoot the MSLIDE command. Recompile the slide library and
check the results in WD. Repeat until you're satisfied with the result.
PLC Data File Wizard - Module Builder
Overview
WD can generate any of hundreds of different PLC I/O modules on demand, in a
variety of different graphical styles, all without a single, complete I/O module
library symbol resident on the system. Modules automatically adapt to the
underlying ladder rung spacing, whatever that value might be, and can even be
stretched or broken into two or more pieces at insertion time. This is all possible
because WD generates PLC I/O modules via a parametric generation technique
driven by an ASCII data file and using just a handful of component parts.
Here is the simple explanation of how this works. We start with just six small
AutoCAD symbols:
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
Single input I/O point with full module description, part number, and
manufacturer attributes
Single input point - bare
Single connection point, wire connects from right
Single output I/O point with full module description, part number, and
manufacturer attributes
Single output point - bare
Single connection point, wire connects from left
A data file lists the simple sequence of how to pick and choose from this small
library of symbols and stack them to build a particular module. For example, an 8point input module's symbol stack sequence might be this: #1, #2, #2, #2, #2, #2,
#2, #2, #3. An 8-point output module with two commons might be #4, #5, #5, #5,
#6, #5, #5, #5, #5, #6.
WD inserts the symbols based upon the underlying ladder's rung spacing,
explodes them, draws a rectangular box around the entire assembly, creates a
single block out of the collection, and then annotates the new module's attributes.
Getting Started
The Module Builder is a utility supplied with WD to help you create and modify the
PLC Module support files as described in the previous topic. The format of these
PLC
This is basically how WD does it, but instead of six symbols, there are about three
dozen. The data file contains not just the stack sequence but also text values to
annotate onto each symbol in the stack. As WD builds the module, it reads the
underlying ladder rung spacing and spreads the stack out or compresses it to
match the rung spacing. During the insertion process, WD lets you interrupt it to
break the module and then restart it at a different location.
5-24
PLC
files is described in the PLC chapter of the WD User's Guide. The Module Builder
can be started from within WD or from outside of AutoCAD completely.
To start the Module Builder from within WD, select PLC Modules - & gt;
ModuleBuilder data file editor from the WD pull-down menu.
To start the utility outside of AutoCAD, select the Module Builder icon
from the VIA WD menu group.
Toolbar
Toolbar buttons are provided for the most commonly used functions.
Build the specifications for a new PLC module
Open for editing the existing specifications for a PLC module
Edit the open module's specifications beside the specific terminal points
Insert a terminal before selected place
Insert a terminal after selected place
Delete terminal
Defaults to use when creating a new module
Preview the module
PLC
Preview Settings
PLC
5-25
New Module
Select the New Module button on the toolbar. When you define a new
module the first thing to do is to define the overall module specifications, then the
terminal sequence.
Manufacturer
If you already have modules defined for the manufacturer, select it from the list. If
this is a new manufacturer, enter the name in the edit box.
Family
Next we need to enter a Family for our new module. For example, for an AllenBradley module the family might be 1771. If this manufacturer has been used
before, a list of family codes will be available for you to select from.
PLC
5-26
PLC
Type
Define the module type, i.e. is it an Analog Input, Analog Output, etc. Select from
the list or enter your own type.
Miscellaneous
Enter the rest of the information as required: a Description, Rating, Addressing
scheme, etc. Make sure you define how many terminals the module will have and
how many are addressable points.
Advanced
PLC
Select the Advanced button to see additional options.
The Module Rectangle Dimensions give offsets right, left, top, and bottom for
the rectangle that WD will draw around the finished stack of symbols to create an
overall module. The optional S Top, and S Bottom give the offsets for a split
PLC
5-27
module where S Top gives the offset for the top of a split module and S Bottom
gives the offset for the bottom of the split module. If left out, WD will use the
rectangle Top and Bottom values.
You can predefine a few properties for the lines that make up the rectangle. For
example, you may want the lines to be a certain color or linetype. To predefine the
color, enter “COLOR colorname” into the box. For linetype, enter “LTYPE
linetypename” into the box. For example, if you want the line that is blue and
hidden2 linetype then you would enter COLOR BLUE LTYPE HIDDEN2 into the
box.
If you have a block you wish WD to insert at the bottom, for example DIP
switches, put the block name in the edit box labeled for this purpose. WD also
allows you to run your own customized AutoLISP program when the module is
inserted.
Module Prompts
When the module is inserted, you may want WD to prompt you for some
information, for example the rack number. To define the prompts select the
Module Prompts button on the bottom of the Advanced dialog.
PLC
WD allows up to nine different prompts at insertion time. To assign a prompt, first
select the prompt number from the list, then enter the prompt text in the edit box
and click Change. Same idea to modify an existing prompt; select it in the list,
5-28
PLC
modify the text in the edit box and Change. To remove a prompt, first select it from
the list then pick Remove Selected Prompt.
This is only part of the story though. You still need to tell WD what to do with the
prompt values once they are entered at insertion time. For this, we need to look at
the Terminal Specifications.
Defining Terminal Sequence
Now we come to the heart of the module definition, the terminals. In the next few
sections we will cover defining the terminal type, whether the terminal should
always show or some other option, special addressing, and pre-defined breaks.
We will also look at pre-defining some attribute values.
Selecting from the dialog
PLC
To select a field to modify you can simply click one time into the field's box. Click
with the left button to edit the field's value, click with the right to bring up the
Terminal Information dialog. You may also select multiple fields to update at the
same time by dragging your mouse across contiguous fields or by holding down
the Ctrl button while selecting non-contiguous fields. If you select multiple fields
and then want to activate the Select Terminal Information dialog, click with the
right mouse button.
PLC
5-29
Notice the options along the bottom of the Select Terminal Information dialog.
These will enable depending on the field(s) selected at the time this dialog was
activated. For example, if you select the Show field from multiple terminal entries
and activate this dialog you can update all the fields at the same time.
Select the fields as shown above and right click into the dialog.
Select a Show option from the list at the bottom left of the dialog.
Terminal Type
Let’s start with a blank new input module with eight terminals, six addressable I/O
points, and two non-addressable terminals.
Usually the top most symbol for the module is a little different than the rest so that
it can carry some basic information for the module that only needs to occur once
in the final symbol. Notice there are three categories for Top terminals, Top Input,
Top Output, and Top Terminal. The Top Input and Top Output are addressable
PLC
We need to define some information for each terminal in the module, the most
important being what symbols should WD stack together to build the module.
5-30
PLC
terminals, while the Top Terminal category are non-addressable terminals. To
define a specific terminal, click in one of the boxes for that entry.
Let's say our top terminal is a non-addressable terminal so we pick Top Terminal.
The available terminals for that category are displayed along with any recently
used terminals. Each terminal shown is a little different. It may have an input wire
connection terminal or have terminals for both input and output, or it may not have
any wire connection. Select the terminal you want to use for your top terminal by
selecting right on the picture of it, then select OK.
PLC
The terminal selected is assigned to the Terminal Type. In addition WD looks at
the actual block to see what attributes will come in when that block is inserted.
Some of the attributes come in with predefined values which can be overwritten.
We will look closer at assigning values to the attributes a little later.
PLC
5-31
Let's assign a terminal type for a couple more terminals. Let's say our next six
terminals are addressable points. Try selecting all six at one time and then right
click.
Select the Input category and take a look at the available terminals. As before,
select the one you want and OK. All six terminals are assigned at the same time.
PLC
5-32
PLC
Now we need to define our last terminal which is a non-addressable terminal.
Click into the entry and select the Terminal category.
We now have all of our terminal blocks defined. We could even preview it at this
point if we wanted, but let's look at some optional information that can be defined
for a terminal.
Terminal - To Show or Not to Show
Some modules may have terminals that are not used (i.e. dummy terminals with
no electrical connection). When you build your PLC module on an AutoCAD
drawing there will be a choice to “Include unused/extra connections”.
When this toggle is NOT selected for the insert, WD skips all entries marked with
“when including unused”. When the toggle IS selected, WD skips all entries
marked with “when excluding unused”. It looks a bit goofy but it works nicely. This
gives some flexibility in how a module is represented.
PLC
Optional Re-Prompt Address
Some modules include both inputs and outputs. You can trigger WD to prompt for
a new beginning address number when the parametric build flips from inputs to
outputs or vice versa. On the line where you want WD to re-prompt for a new
PLC
5-33
output address, select “Output” in this column. If you want WD to re-prompt for a
new input address, select “Input” from the list.
Break After
You can predefine a module break point in the PLC data file. On the line where
you want the automatic break to occur, toggle the Break After box on.
Terminal Attributes
When you select a specific terminal block for your module, that AutoCAD symbol
comes in with certain attributes. These attributes can come in with predefined
values, including some values that you enter at insertion time.
PLC
5-34
PLC
With the module's terminal sequence visible, select one of the terminals. The
attributes associated with this block, along with any predefined values (right on
the attribute definition), are displayed.
Some of the values look pretty cryptic so let's cover those first. Notice the module
above the TAG attribute has a predefined value of R%%1/G%%2/S%%3. First,
let's see about those %% values.
Module Prompts
Remember setting our module's specifications? We defined some prompts that
we want WD to display at insertion time.
PLC
This above dialog shows some prompts defined for a module. What this means is
that at insertion time WD displays a dialog that looks like this.
PLC
5-35
You enter the values for each field right before the module is built. But how does
WD know what to do with them? The value you enter into the rack number edit
box is temporarily saved in memory under the variable name %%1. The group
number is saved as %%2 and your slot number response is saved in %%3.
Note that the value for the TAG attribute includes the “%%1, %%2, %%3” variable
names. WD substitutes the values you entered in the dialog for these two
variables. For example, using the values of “01” for %%1, “02” for %%2, and “4”
for %%3, the entry “TAG=R%%1/G%%2/S%%3” means that WD annotates
attribute TAG with a value of “R01/G02/S4”. Attribute value for LINE1 “RACK
%%1” means that WD gives attribute LINE1 a value of “RACK 01”.
Address Variable
Besides the Module Prompt variables as described above, WD also supports the
use of an Address variable. When the module is inserted, WD calculates the PLC
I/O addresses on-the-fly based on some WD settings and the module settings.
You can trigger WD to include a prefix or suffix to each address value it inserts.
For example, let’s say you want “IN-” to always come in as a prefix for inputs on a
given module. Edit each attribute value for the TAGA_ attributes to read “IN%%N”. The “%%N” represents the calculated I/O address and the “IN-” is the
prefix that gets added to it. You can also use the Prompt values above. For
example, let’s say that you want to permanently encode the rack and group
numbers (%%1 and %%2 prompts) into each I/O address value. Encode each I/O
address entry in the data file with, “TAGA_=%%1%%2%%N”.
Non-Sequential Addressing
Some modules may have I/O address assignments that do not sequentially
increment from one terminal to the next. Use the “%%A” variable to represent the
module’s beginning address. Then update the TAGA_ attribute value for the nonsequential address to “%%A+ & lt; some value & gt; ” where you put a number value in to
tell WD how much to increment from the initial address to calculate this terminal's
address.
Text Constants
You can assign a text constant to any attribute value. As shown in the module
prompts and addressing examples above, you can also combine a text constant
with the variables.
Preview Module
To see what your module will look like with the current specifications, select
the Preview Module button on the toolbar.
PLC
5-36
PLC
If your module includes any terminals that are defined as “unused”, you may see
the following prompt. See the Preview Module Settings to adjust this setting.
Your module will be displayed with the current parameters and current terminal
settings.
Use the buttons at the bottom of the dialog to get a good look at your module as it
will be built in WD. Remember that WD will adjust the spacing to the ladder rung
spacing when it actually builds it on an AutoCAD drawing.
Saving the Module Specifications
Once you have defined all the module's parameters, the rectangle properties,
prompts, terminal sequence, etc., you are ready to save your module.
PLC
Select the Save button on the toolbar and your module is saved.
Behind the Scenes
What does the WD Module Builder really do when you perform a save. It is simply
writing your module parameters out to a text file in the file format that WD expects
to see when building a PLC module. The file naming convention is “plc_” followed
by the manufacturer name, the family, the type, and a “.dat” extension. For
PLC
5-37
example, the parameters for an Allen-Bradley 1771 Analog Input module would
be written to a file called “plc_Allen-Bradley_1771_Analog Input.dat”.
If the specific PLC data file exists, then your module's parameters will be added at
the end of the file or modified if you were updating an existing module. If the PLC
data file does not exist, then the file is created. The Module Builder also needs to
update a separate file called “plc.dat”. This file holds information about each PLC
data file so that when you select to insert a PLC module in WD, all defined
modules are displayed. More information is provided later in this chapter on the
plc.dat file.
A sample of the data is shown here. For more detail on the actual file format see
the PLC Parametric Data Files information in the User's Guide.
*
\K=1771-IA
\M=ALLEN-BRADLEY
\T=DI
\P=8
\D=8-POINT INPUT
\V=120V AC/DC
\B=OCTAL
\1=0.5
\2=0.5
\3=0.5
\4=0.375
\5=0.25
\6=0.25
HP?WA-DL;TERM_=00;MFG=AB;CAT=1771-IA;DESC=120V
INPUTS;%%1PROMPT=RACK NUMBER; %%2PROMPT=SLOT
NUMBER;TAG=R%%1/S%%2;LINE1=RACK %%1;LINE2=SLOT %%2
HP?WA-D;TERM_=01
HP?WA-D;TERM_=02
HP?WA-D;TERM_=03
HP?WA-D;TERM_=04
HP?WA-D;TERM_=05
HP?WA-D;TERM_=06
HP?WA-D;TERM_=07
HP?--W ;TERM_=B;TERMDESC_=L2
PLC
5-38
PLC
Edit Module
Select the Open Module button on the toolbar when you want to edit an
existing module's parameters.
To find an existing module, first narrow the search by selecting the Manufacturer.
Next, select from the Family list for that Manufacturer, the Module Type and finally
the specific catalog number. Or, if you know the catalog number select the Type
Catalog Number button and enter the information on the dialog as shown below.
PLC
Now that the module is open, you may edit the overall module specifications and
modify its terminal sequence and specifications.
PLC
5-39
Edit Overall Module Specifications
Select the Edit Module Specifications icon on the toolbar to modify the
module specifications (separate from the terminal sequence).
Since this is an existing module there are some fields that cannot be changed. For
example, the manufacturer, family, and module type. But you may change the
catalog number, description, rating, base addressing, and addressable points. For
the Base Addressing select from Octal, Decimal, Hexidecimal.
PLC
5-40
PLC
Select the Advanced button to see additional parameters for the module.
The Module Rectangle Dimensions give offsets right, left, top, and bottom for
the rectangle that WD will draw around the finished stack of symbols to create an
overall module. The optional S Top, and S Bottom give the offsets for a split
module where S Top gives the offset for the top of a split module and S Bottom
gives the offset for the bottom of the split module. If left out then WD will use the
rectangle Top and Bottom values.
PLC
You can predefine a few properties for the lines that make up the rectangle. For
example, you may want the lines to be a certain color or linetype. To predefine the
color, enter “COLOR colorname” into the box. For linetype, enter “LTYPE
linetypename” into the box. For example, if you want the line that is blue and
PLC
5-41
hidden2 linetype then you would enter COLOR BLUE LTYPE HIDDEN2 into the
box.
If you have a block you wish WD to insert at the bottom, for example DIP
switches, put the block name in the edit box labeled for this purpose. WD also
allows you to run your own customized AutoLISP program when the module is
inserted.
Module Prompts
When the module is inserted you may want WD to prompt you for some
information, for example the rack number. To define the prompts select the
Module Prompts button on the bottom of the Advanced dialog.
WD allows up to nine different prompts at insertion time. To assign a prompt, first
select the prompt number from the list, then enter the prompt text in the edit box
and click Change. Same idea to modify an existing prompt, select it in the list,
modify the text in the edit box and Change. To remove a prompt, first select it from
the list then pick Remove Selected Prompt.
PLC
This is only part of the story though. You still need to tell WD what to do with the
prompt values once they are entered at insertion time. For this, we need to look at
the Terminal Specifications.
5-42
PLC
Adjusting Terminal Sequence
When you modify the terminal stack for a module, there may be times when you
need to adjust the order of the terminals, add in additional terminals, or remove
terminals.
First, select the entry that you want to add a terminal above. Next, select the
Insert Terminal Before button on the toolbar. The terminal specifications are
copied and inserted right above it in the list.
First, select the entry that you want to add a terminal below. Next, select the
Insert Terminal After button on the toolbar. The terminal specifications are
copied and inserted right below it in the list.
Select the terminal that you wish to remove and then select the Delete
Terminal button on the toolbar.
New Module Defaults
PLC
Whenever you start a new module definition it defaults to certain values. To
save yourself some time you may want to modify those defaults. Then when you
start a new module there won't be as many values to update. Select the New
Module Defaults button on the toolbar.
Select your default addressing scheme, number of terminals and number of
addressable points. If you want the dialogs to start with the Advanced options
visible, then select Advanced under Dialog Mode.
PLC
5-43
Types
Use the Types sub-dialog to define the list of module types you want to make
available in the pull-down list.
Ratings
Use the Ratings sub-dialog to define the list of module ratings you want to make
available in the pull-down list.
PLC
Advanced
The Module Rectangle Dimensions give offsets right, left, top, and bottom for
the rectangle that WD will draw around the finished stack of symbols to create an
5-44
PLC
overall module. The optional S Top, and S Bottom give the offsets for a split
module where S Top gives the offset for the top of a split module and S Bottom
gives the offset for the bottom of the split module. If left out then WD will use the
rectangle Top and Bottom values.
PLC
You can predefine a few properties for the lines that make up the rectangle. For
example, you may want the lines to be a certain color or linetype. To predefine the
color, enter “COLOR colorname” into the box. For linetype, enter “LTYPE
linetypename” into the box. For example, if you want the line that is blue and
hidden2 linetype then you would enter COLOR BLUE LTYPE HIDDEN2 into the
box.
If you have a block you wish WD to insert at the bottom, for example DIP
switches, put the block name in the edit box labeled for this purpose. WD also
allows you to run your own customized AutoLISP program when the module is
inserted.
Module Prompts
PLC
5-45
When the module is inserted you may want WD to prompt you for some
information, for example the rack number. To define the prompts select the
Module Prompts button on the bottom of the Advanced dialog.
WD allows up to nine different prompts at insertion time. To assign a prompt, first
select the prompt number from the list, then enter the prompt text in the edit box
and click Change. Same idea to modify an existing prompt, select it in the list,
modify the text in the edit box and Change. To remove a prompt, first select it from
the list then pick Remove Selected Prompt.
Terminal Block Settings
Select the Terminal Block Settings button on the toolbar to update the
terminal settings.
Note: This button is only available if no module is open for update. Close any
open modules and the button becomes available.
PLC
This dialog can be used to add or update the symbols available to build a module.
5-46
PLC
Block File Name
This is the actual AutoCAD drawing file name that will be inserted if this terminal is
included in your module. These PLC symbols are stored in the /viawd/wd/jic1/
subdirectory (or /viawd/wd/jic125 for 0.125 hgt version) along with all of the other
WD component symbols. Their file names begin with the characters “HP”
(Horizontal ladder rungs / PLC) or “VP” (Vertical ladder rungs / PLC) followed by a
digit that corresponds to a PLC I/O “style number”.
Category
Define the category for this terminal. When you add a new terminal, you select
from a list of terminal categories and that group of terminals is displayed. There
are some categories by default, Input, Output, etc., but you may add your own by
just typing it in the edit box. This new category will be added to the pull-down list.
Unique Description
Enter the description that will appear underneath the terminal in the Terminal Type
Selection dialog.
Sample Bitmap File Name
PLC
When the Terminal Type dialog box is displayed there are little pictures of the
terminals to make it easier for you to select the correct terminal type. These
pictures are bitmap files created just for this purpose. If you are adding your own
terminals so they are available for selection in the Terminal Type dialog, you may
want to create corresponding bitmaps. The bitmaps that come with WD carry the
same name as the terminal .dwg file. This is not necessary but done for
convenience. Enter your bitmap name in the box or Browse for it and then the
next time you select a Terminal Type, your bitmap will be displayed.
PLC
5-47
View DWG
At any time you can view the AutoCAD .dwg file by selecting in the edit box for the
specific terminal and selecting View DWG. This is a great way to see exactly what
attributes are part of a specific terminal and the placement of each attribute.
View Bitmap
At any time you can view the Bitmap file by selecting in the edit box for the specific
bitmap and selecting View Bitmap.
Graphics Style
Add Terminal
Scroll down to the bottom of the list and click any box in the last entry. This will
trigger a blank entry line to be added at the bottom. When you add a terminal you
PLC
When you select a specific Graphics Style, the 3rd character/digit of the Block File
Name is changed to the corresponding style number and the symbol names are
updated appropriately. Then when you build your module's specifications, the
Module Builder will look for the correct library symbols for the style you have
selected to use.
5-48
PLC
will need to define the AutoCAD block name that WD will use at insertion time,
assign it to a terminal category for selection when defining the module
specifications, give it a description, and assign a bitmap to be used for dialog
displays.
Preview Module Settings
There are a few options that affect how the Preview Module works. From the
Menu select Options - & gt; Module Preview Settings.
Select how to handle terminals that are defined to show “when including/excluding
unused”. In addition this is where you define the terminal spacing used for the
Module Preview. Again, remember that this spacing is only used for the Preview
and does not affect the spacing when the module is built. WD defaults to the
underlying rung spacing at the time of insertion.
Delete Module
PLC
There may be times when you want to completely delete the specifications for a
module. Maybe it becomes obsolete or your client has decided not to use it. All
modules must be closed before you can delete a module, so make sure you close
all modules before you try and delete a module. Choose Module - & gt; Delete from
the menu.
Locate the module as described in the Edit Module section, select it, and pick OK.
The entire section for this module is removed from its PLC .dat file.
Module Save As
When you get ready to add a new module you might save some time by starting
with the specifications from a similar module. WD's Module Builder makes this
PLC
5-49
easy with its Save As function. Open the module that is similar to the new one you
need to add. Choose Module - & gt; Save As from the menu.
Enter the Manufacturer, Family, Type, and Catalog Number. WD uses this
information to determine the name of the PLC .dat file to use. All module
specifications are saved under the new module. The module is opened and you
can immediately change any specifications for this new module.
Troubleshooting
Database Location
For Module Builder to work it needs to be able to find the PLC.DAT file which
contains a list of all modules. To set the path for this file, select Module - & gt;
Database Location from the menu.
Support Path
If the bitmaps do not display properly in the Terminal Type dialogs, or WD is
having trouble locating the AutoCAD .dwg files for the terminals, you may need to
make some changes to the search path defined in Module Builder.
PLC
Locate the PLC.DAT file and select Open. Module Builder should now be able to
display the list of defined modules.
5-50
PLC
Select the Terminal Block Settings button on the toolbar to update the
terminal settings.
Note: This button is only available if no module is open for update. Close any
open modules and the button becomes available.
PLC
Select the Setup Search Path button.
PLC
5-51
Make sure the correct path is part of the search sequence. Type in the path or
Browse for the correct path and Insert Before or Insert After. You can also select
to add the AutoCAD path, the Last Project's symbol path, the same path as the
PLC Database, and the Module Builder files. Use the arrow buttons to change the
search order.
Single, Stand-Alone I/O Points
Inserting
PLC I/O points can be inserted as independent symbols spread out over your
drawing set. WD provides a small set of single I/O point library symbols that you
can expand and modify to suit your needs.
Select the INSERT Component toolbar button. On the main icon menu
select “PLC I/O”. Single I/O points are selected from the second and third rows of
the subdialog.
Select from the upper row for the first I/O point of a module. These symbols carry
attributes for catalog BOM assignment. Select from the bottom row for the 2nd
through nth points of a module (which are “children” symbols of the first symbol
“parent”).
PLC
The example here shows two output points connected to pilot lights and a single
input point tied to a limit switch. Based upon its assigned address bit number, the
output shown on line 115 is the first I/O point of the module “R1-S4”. It is selected
from the upper row of the menu so that catalog BOM information is carried with it.
The second output is tied to the same module (based upon its assigned address
number). Since it is a child of the first I/O point of the module, it is selected from
the icon menu’s lower row of symbols. It does not carry the catalog BOM
attributes. Judging from the single input’s address/bit number, it is the first input of
5-52
PLC
module “R1-S2” and should have been picked from the upper row of symbols so
that it carries the catalog BOM attributes.
Annotating
This dialog is displayed when a stand-alone I/O point symbol is inserted or edited.
Select Dwg--used so far or Proj--used so far to keep track of what I/O points
have been used so far on each module. If a comma-delimited ASCII text file of
I/O point descriptions is available, then you may save time by selecting External
file. WD displays the contents of the external ASCII text file. Pick an entry in the
file and then copy the values to edit boxes in the EDIT dialog. Click OK and the
values are annotated onto the I/O point.
PLC
Modifying the Appearance
The single, stand-alone PLC I/O symbols are in the “\viawd\wd\jic1\” library (or
“\viawd\wd\jic125\” library) but do not follow the normal WD naming convention.
Their file names must start with “PLCIO” in order for WD to find and process them
along with the full PLC modules in WD’s various BOM and PLC reports. The last
three characters need not follow any naming convention.
Open each in AutoCAD and modify the appearance to suit your needs. Here are
the file names of the default symbols (in the “\viawd\wd\jic1\” subdirectory):
PLCIOI1T.dwg
First input, single wire left
PLC
PLCIOI1.dwg
2+ input, single wire left
PLCIOI2T.dwg
First input, wire left and right
PLCIOI2.dwg
2+ input, wire left and right
PLCIOO1T.dwg
First output, wire right
PLCIOO1.dwg
2+ output, wire right
PLCIOO2T.dwg
First output, wire left and right
PLCIOO2.dwg
5-53
2+ output, wire left and right
Attributes - Minimum Requirements
These attributes need to be present on stand-alone I/O symbols with just one wire
connection:
TAGA01
For I/O address
TERM01
For terminal number
X?TERM01
For wire connection (X4TERM01 for a left-hand
terminal, X1TERM01 for right-hand terminal)
MFG, CAT, ASSYCODE
For “First” only symbols
These attributes need to be present on stand-alone I/O symbols with wire
connections on both sides:
TAGA01
For I/0 address
TERM01L
For terminal number on left
X4TERM01L
For wire connection on left
TERM01R
For terminal number on right
X1TERM01R
For wire connection on right
MFG, CAT, ASSYCODE
For “First” only symbol
Non-Parametric Build
PLC Insert - Complete Units
PLC
Some PLC units may not lend themselves very well to parametric generation. If a
PLC module symbol is built with the appropriate attributes in place and the symbol
name follows WD’s convention (block name begins with “PLCIO”), it can be
inserted as a single unit with WD’s INSERT COMPONENT command.
5-54
PLC
An insert sequence is illustrated below.
PLC
A complete unit, an AB 1761 with ½ spacing, pops into the ladder, breaks the
wires, and reconnects.
Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Drawing
Overview
A project’s PLC I/O requirements, in spreadsheet format, can drive automatic
generation of the I/O schematic drawings. Lay out your PLC I/O requirements
using your favorite spreadsheet program. Include I/O catalog numbers, I/O
address assignments, I/O descriptions, and connected component tags. Your
PLC
5-55
spreadsheet can be read directly in Excel format (“.XLS”) or dump your
spreadsheet out to a comma-delimited format (i.e. SAVEAS to a “CSV” format)
and then let WD construct a set of PLC I/O wiring diagrams directly from your
spreadsheet data.
Example
A sample spreadsheet file, viawd\wd\user\demoplc.xls, and a comma delimited
version of this spreadsheet’s data, viawd\wd\user\demoplc.csv, are included in the
WD installation. The data columns include module part number, address, up to
five lines of description per I/O point. There are also columns to define up to six
in-line devices that connect to the I/O point. Auto-generate a set of wiring
diagrams using this data.
Spreadsheet Sample
1. Open a new drawing in AutoCAD. Do a SAVEAS and give it any name
(this utility cannot start with an unnamed drawing).
2. From the WD pull-down menu, select Reports/MISC and then pick
Spreadsht PLC I/O util. A file selection dialog appears. Find and select
file “\viawd\wd\user\demoplc.xls”. IMPORTANT: This utility can read an
Excel spreadsheet file directly. If your file is not an .XLS format, you must
PLC
5-56
PLC
take your spreadsheet and “Saveas” out to a comma-delimited ASCII file
format (generally a “.CSV” file extension).
3. The above dialog is displayed. It provides for overrides of default values.
Just click OK to move on to the next dialog (shown below).
PLC
Ladder Reference Numbers
Enter a value for the beginning line reference number for the first ladder of the first
drawing, let’s say “1000”. Use the indx box to define if you want your line
reference numbers to sequence by 1 (default) or by some other amount. Then,
pick your “column to column” option, either next reference number, or define a
specific amount from the previous column. For example, even though your ladder
only has 30 rungs, you wish the first ladder to start at 1000, and the next at 1100,
select Skip, col to col count =, and enter 100 in the box. Also, define how to
PLC
5-57
number the first ladder on each successive drawing, either next reference
number, or define a specific amount from the previous drawing. For example, you
want each drawing to start at the next 1000 even though your drawing does not
have that many rungs. Select Skip, dwg to dwg count =, and enter 1000 in the
edit box. If your ladders use the WD Sheet parameter you may want to enter a
value for the optional sheet number.
Module Placement
There are 3 options related to module placement. This allows you to define if you
want each I/O module to start at the top of a ladder, or if you want the module built
in a ladder with the previous module only if it fits completely, or finally if you want
the module to be built in the same ladder with the previous module and split if
necessary to fill the ladder.
Unused Connections
If you believe some of the modules to be built have unused terminals in their PLC
data files, and you wish them to be shown, then make sure this is checked.
Auto-Break
Your PLC modules will auto-break at a given point when a “\\SPECIAL=BREAK”
code is encountered in the module's block of parametric data.
Run Mode
If you want the program to stop between each drawing, select Pause between
dwgs. If you want to go get some coffee and come back to have all drawings
completed, select Free Run.
Click Start. In a few moments WD begins to construct a set of PLC I/O drawings
based upon information carried in the PLC spreadsheet. Ladders and modules
insert automatically, breaking at the bottom of one ladder and continuing on the
next (or on to the next drawing).
PLC
5-58
PLC
Sample Generated Drawing
Changing Utility's Defaults
You have control over many aspects of how these drawings auto-generate. You
also can adapt this utility to an existing spreadsheet format, different from the
example demoplc.xls file format. You may change these settings each time you
run the program or you can change them once and save your settings for future
use.
Changing the Settings
PLC
When you start the program and see the Settings dialog, select to either use the
Default settings or to Read in any previously saved settings.
PLC
5-59
Spreadsheet Columns
Select Spreadsheet columns to define what column in your spreadsheet goes
with what data value in the utility (ex: what column is the module part number
in?). The first page of this dialog deals with the overall module information.
The sub-dialog is used to identify the spreadsheet column data for up to six in-line
connected devices for each I/O point.
PLC
5-60
PLC
There are a couple of special values that can be placed in a row to direct special
PLC module placement.
BREAK
Insert this key word in the “ADDR” column of the
spreadsheet where you want the PLC module to break and
continue on the next ladder column. There should be no
other data in the spreadsheet row, just the word “BREAK” in
the address column.
SKIP
Insert this key word in the “CODE” part number column
(probably the left-most column of your spreadsheet) right
after the end of the previous modules data on the
spreadsheet. This key word will trigger the utility to skip a
ladder before it begins the next module in the spreadsheet.
There should be nothing else in this row other than the word
SKIP in the part number code column.
Ladder Setup
PLC
Select Ladder setup to define how many ladders you want inserted, the type of
ladder, spacing, and number of rungs in the dialog shown here.
PLC
5-61
General Setup
Select General Setup to define the insert scale, text size, and the use of a
prototype if more than one drawing is generated.
Saving Your Settings
If you have changed any of the default settings you may want to save these
settings for future use. Once you have modified the settings as shown in
Changing the Settings, and the Settings dialog is displayed, select the Save
Settings button.
PLC
5-62
PLC
You will be prompted to enter a file name for the settings. The file extension will
be “.WDI”.
Once saved, these can be restored by using the Read Settings button.
Restoring Your Settings
PLC
To restore settings saved previously, select the Read Settings button from the
main settings dialog.
PLC
5-63
Select the file created previously. It will have a “.WDI” file extension.
Your settings are now restored and will be used for the drawings generated from
the selected spreadsheet.
RSLogix Import
RSLogix is a PLC programming software package for programming various AllenBradley PLC's. This program has an output function that can write the I/O
information out to an ASCII file. WD provides a way to import this information and
create a regular spreadsheet from the data that can then be used for the
Spreadsheet to PLC I/O generator.
Select the RSLogix Import button under the PLC flyout.
PLC
5-64
PLC
Select your RSLogix output file. WD will read the file and display a dialog similar
to what is shown below.
First, select whether the I/O points displayed should be in 8pt, 16pt or 32pt
groupings. You will need to pick an I/O module for each set of I/O points. You can
simply enter it in the edit box, select it from WD's PLC dialog by using the Browse
button, or select it from the already used list once you have some modules
selected. Select OK to assign the module and move on to the next set of points.
PLC
Use the Omit button to skip a set of points, or use the Future button to skip the
points and also add information so WD will add a blank column when generating
the drawing from the spreadsheet. Once you have assigned a module for each set
of points, you will be prompted to enter the name for the spreadsheet.
WD creates the spreadsheet in the format it expects for the PLC generator
program. Use Excel to modify your spreadsheet as needed.
Miscellaneous
Tools
In This Chapter. . . .
- Black Box/Symbol Builder
- Component Utilities
- Component Attribute Utilities
- Terminal Utilities
- Wire Utilities
- Wire Number Utilities
- Layer Utilities
- Spreadsheet Utilities
- Project Wide Utilities
- Title Block Utility
- Language Utilities
- Troubleshooting Utilities
- Conversion Utilities
- “Publish To” Utilities
9
6-2
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
Black Box/Symbol Builder
Overview
This utility helps you convert existing symbols or create new, custom components
on the fly. It works nicely for quickly building power supplies, filters, drives,
controllers, and other custom devices or for converting existing non-WD symbols
to make them “WD smart”. Schematic symbols created or converted using the
BBB are fully compatible with WD, break wires upon insertion, and appear in the
various BOM, component, and wire connection reports.
Click the Black Box/Symbol builder tool under the MISC fly-out. Then
select any existing geometry you want to include with the new WD-compatible
component (or just press Enter if you are starting from scratch).
WD displays the dialog below. The first choice you make is to pick what type of
symbol you want to build. For example, pick Parent for a schematic device.
Parent
Schematic symbol that will be used as a stand-alone symbol
or a parent component with related secondary contacts.
Child
Schematic secondary symbol that will be related to a parent
component.
Terminal
Schematic terminal with Terminal number
Terminal
Schematic terminal that follows the wire number rather than
having a terminal number of its own
Footprint
Panel symbol that is not used as a terminal or name plate.
Terminal
Panel Terminal symbol
Name Plate
Panel Name Plate symbol
Miscellaneous Tools
Insert Standard Attributes
Select the Insert standard attributes button to speed up the process of adding
the correct attributes to make your new symbol fully WD-compatible.
Different attributes will be displayed depending on the symbol category you
selected initially. Here is the initial list that is displayed for a parent symbol. Since
a parent symbol has a number of standard attributes, a second dialog may be
Miscellaneous Tools
Depending on which symbol category you select, the dialog choices and
selections will differ. This is the dialog that displays on a parent schematic
symbol.
6-3
6-4
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
accessed by picking the More button.
Pick the attribute you wish to insert. Choose text size and justification from the
pull-downs (if the desired text size is not shown, go to the bottom of the list and
pick “-add-”). Select Insert Attribute to insert a new attribute or if you are
converting existing text to the target WD attribute, click Pick text.
When you insert the TAG1 attribute for a Parent schematic symbol, WD will
prompt you for a default value. This value will be used as the default “family” code
for an auto-generated schematic component tag upon component insert into a
drawing. WD defaults to “DV” unless you override it with another value (such as
“PB” or “CR” or “MOT”).
Wire Connection Points and Associated Terminal Text
To insert wire connection points and terminal pin numbers, click WIRE conn. The
following dialog is displayed. For each wire connection point you need, select the
desired wire connection direction and then place the point on your new symbol.
WD provides several different wire connection / terminal styles. Pick the style
from the pull-down menu as shown here. You can edit existing terminal styles or
Miscellaneous Tools
Link Terminal Text to Wire Connection
This choice can only be used if you already have a WD wire connection attribute
defined and you wish to link terminal text to it. This is useful to help make an
existing symbol “WD smart”.
Contact State Attribute
If your symbol needs to show whether it is normally open, normally closed, or
some other state, use this button to add the necessary attribute.
Miscellaneous Tools
create your own. All terminal symbols are filed in the /viawd/wd/jic1 subdirectory
under file name “bb?*.dwg”, where “?” is the style number.
6-5
6-6
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
Dashed Link Line Connection
In addition to using TAGS to link a parent symbol with a child symbol, WD allows
you to draw dashed lines between a parent symbol and its related child contact.
This method requires special attributes at the point where the dashed line
“connects” to the symbol.
Optional Rating Attributes
WD has provision for up to 12 “Rating” attributes. These attributes can be used
for anything from amps to motor horsepower. If you insert one or more of these
optional attributes, define an attribute prompt for each such as “Motor FLA” or
“Voltage”. These prompts will show up later in WD’s INS/EDIT component dialog
when you insert/edit your new symbol.
Convert Existing Text Entities to Attributes
If you windowed existing geometry and text entities at the initial prompt of the
Black Box Builder, this provides a quick and easy way to convert the existing text
entities to WD attributes “in place”.
Miscellaneous Tools
Browse
There may be a time when you want to insert an existing symbol so that its entities
can be included with the symbol you are creating. The Browse button allows you
to do just that. Pick the button, select an existing symbol, and the symbol will be
inserted as an exploded block, and the entities will be included in your symbol
when you Block/Wblock your symbol.
Block/Wblock
When you are finished, click Block to block and insert your new component into
your circuit, or Wblock to first save a copy of your new symbol out to disk (for
future use). WD defaults to writing it out to your \viawd\wd\user subdirectory,
though you can override this if desired.
Caution: WD provides a default name for your new symbol. If you are creating a schematic parent or child contact symbol, avoid changing the
first four letters of the auto-generated symbol file name and limit
the total length to 32 characters maximum. WD keys off of these
first four characters for certain parent/child tagging operations.
What if I Mess Up?
You can exit the Black Box builder command and re-enter it at any time. You can
also exit the command and use regular AutoCAD commands to edit or finish the
symbol you’re creating and AutoCAD’s Wblock command to write it to disk. There
is no rocket science or behind the curtain database stuff going on with the BBB
utility – it just helps you insert the appropriate attribute definitions to create a WDsmart symbol.
Miscellaneous Tools
If you select, Convert to WD attributes, you will map your text/attributes to the
WD attribute names for the selected symbol type.
6-7
Miscellaneous Tools
6-8
Miscellaneous Tools
Each time you re-enter the BBB utility, make sure you window your existing
geometry at the builder’s initial prompt. This allows the utility to track what
standard attributes and wire connection points you’ve already inserted.
Okay, I Built it, How do I Insert it?
New symbols you create are inserted with WD’s INSERT Component or INSERT
Panel Component commands. You can add your new symbol to the icon menu or
you can select it from the Type it or Browse dialog file selection options in the
bottom left-hand corner of the icon menu.
Component Utilities
Insert “Just Like”
This is a variation on the INSERT Component command. It bypasses the
WD icon menu selection process and prompts you to use the displayed drawing
itself as an “icon” menu. Pick a component from the circuit “just like” the new one
you want to insert. For example, if you want to insert a normally open relay
contact, pick on an existing normally open relay contact. Now select the insertion
point. WD inserts a copy of the symbol you selected and then displays the normal
INSERT/EDIT dialog.
Fence Insert
You can quickly insert a series of like components at fence crossing
points with underlying wires with this utility. For example, you can insert a column
of limit switches as illustrated here. Select the FENCE Insert command, select
Miscellaneous Tools
With each possible insertion point (that is, fence crossing point with a wire), WD
displays this dialog prompting you to decide whether to “keep” this insertion or
skip to the next.
If you keep it, WD displays the regular INSERT/EDIT dialog allowing you to finish
annotating the component. Then WD moves to the next fence insertion point and
repeats the process.
Fence Insert “Just Like”
It works like the Fence Insert example except that it prompts you to
pick a nearby “just like” component on your screen instead of asking you to
choose it from WD’s icon menu.
Insert Component from Catalog List
To insert a Schematic component from a catalog list.
To insert a Panel component from a catalog list.
Miscellaneous Tools
the component you want to use for the insert from WD’s icon menu, and then
draw a single or multi-line fence through the wiring you want to process.
6-9
Miscellaneous Tools
6-10
Miscellaneous Tools
This command lets you insert schematic or panel symbols by simply choosing a
catalog number or a component description from a user-defined pick list. The
data displayed in this pick list is stored in a database (in generic Access format).
The file name is wd_picklist.mdb and you can edit with Access or from the Add/
Edit/Del buttons along the bottom of the pick list's dialog. WD's normal search
path sequence is used to locate this file (ex: first looks in USER subdir, then in
active project's subdir, ..., AutoCAD support paths).
Both schematic and panel layout symbols can be included in the pick list
database, but only schematic or panel entries are displayed at any one time
(depending upon whether the routine is called from the schematic or panel
toolbar).
Miscellaneous Tools
6-11
Sort
Add
When you add a record you must indicate if the component (or circuit) is
Schematic or Panel. In addition, you need to indicate if it should be inserted as a
block or exploded upon insert (as you would for a circuit). Then, at a minimum,
you need to define the block name and either the catalog number or the
description.
Optionally, you can enter a MFG value, an ASSYCODE value and a TEXTVALS
value. These values are not used for exploded inserts.
Miscellaneous Tools
You may sort the file by Description, Catalog Number, or Manufacturer.
6-12
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
Edit
Highlight the record you want to modify and then select the Edit button.
Delete
Select the record you want to remove and hit the Del button.
Erase Component
The ERASE Component command removes the selected component. WD
also attempts to repair the broken wires and reconcile any resulting instances of
multiple wire numbers now assigned to a single wire network. In the case of a
child contact, WD looks for its parent on the current drawing and removes the
deleted contact from the parent’s cross-reference annotation (if the parent is on
some other drawing then a separate run of the “X Cross-ref” command is required
on the drawing set). If you erase a parent schematic component you will have the
option to search for related child components, Surf to them, and optionally delete
them.
Move Component
The MOVE Component command removes the selected component
from its current location/wire connection and inserts it into the new position you
pick. WD uses a rotated version of the symbol, if necessary, as it breaks and
reconnects any underlying wires. WD attempts to repair the broken wires and
Miscellaneous Tools
6-13
Stretch Component
The STRETCH BLOCK command is a very handy feature, especially for PLC
modules. Let's say you have a PLC module and you need to add a couple
components in parallel on a particular rung and you did not leave enough room
between the I/O points. What do you do? You could erase everything and rebuild
the module and then reinsert the components, redo the wiring, etc. or you could
use the STRETCH BLOCK command.
Select the STR BLK command under the PLC flyout.
Select your block(s) just like you would using the AutoCAD stretch command, i.e.
a crossing window or crossing polygon window. WD then explodes the blocks.
Now pick your base point of displacement and your second point of displacement.
WD stretches the exploded block(s) and then rebuilds the blocks maintaining all
the original block information, including attributes.
Before
Miscellaneous Tools
reconcile multiple wire numbers left over in the component’s vacated position. If
you use this command and select on a panel footprint, WD issues the normal
AutoCAD MOVE command.
6-14
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
After
Note: The block name itself is changed to make it unique.
Flip Contact
Pick on any component that is a contact and WD will flip it to the opposite
state. In addition, if the component is a child contact, then WD will look for the
parent on the current drawing and update its cross-reference annotation (if not on
current drawing then a separate run of the “X Cross-ref” command is required on
the drawing set).
Note: For this feature to work, WD depends upon the symbol’s conformance
to the WD component naming convention. WD keys off of the 5th character position of the component’s block name: “1” for normally open,
“2” for normally closed. It reverses what it finds and inserts the new
version. For example, a horizontal, normally open mushroom head
push button’s block insert file name is “HPB11M.dwg”. If you select an
instance of this component to “flip”, WD looks at the 5th character of its
block name. Seeing a “1” it substitutes a “2” and then looks for the
existence of “HPB12M.dwg”. If found, WD saves the original block’s
attribute values, erases it, inserts the new component, and then populates it with the original attribute values.
Checking Coil/Contact Count
The QUICK Check toolbar button is on the “X Cross-ref” fly-out. Using
this utility, WD first extracts a complete list of components from the project
drawing set. Then it prompts you to select a component to check. WD reads the
component’s tag, finds all associated components, and lists them in a dialog. It
also displays the parent’s assigned catalog number (if one exists) and allows you
to do a Quick BOM check to see if the item’s description indicates that the quantity
of contacts can be accommodated.
Miscellaneous Tools
Selecting the Quick BOM check button causes WD to use the parent coil’s
catalog number to retrieve the full BOM description for this item. Comparing the
description (2 available) with the contact count (3 required) reveals a needed
adjustment.
Miscellaneous Tools
An example is given here. Relay CR101 coil is selected for a quick check. WD
finds that there are 2 normally open and 1 normally closed contacts assigned to
the coil so far in the project.
6-15
Miscellaneous Tools
6-16
Miscellaneous Tools
Select the Catalog lookup button and highlight the next bigger relay. Click OK to
make the new catalog assignment to the relay coil.
Align Components/Wire Numbers
Select the Align Components command from the Scoot fly-out.
Select the one “master” component to align with. A temporary line will appear
showing the alignment position. Pick the component(s) to move into alignment
with the selected “master” component. You can pick the components individually
or by windowing. All connected wires will be adjusted, and wire numbers recentered if necessary. You can align vertically or horizontally by flipping the
command with a V or H character and a [space] entered on the command line.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-17
Note: The Align Component command can be used on panel layout symbols.
Component Block Swapper
Select the SWAP Block utility from the EDIT Component fly-out toolbar.
This utility lets you update or change blocks “in place”. Attribute values are
retained during the swapping process. Wire connections are also maintained
even if the new symbol is slightly wider or narrower than the original.
The block swapper program can operate in several different modes, selectable
from the dialog shown below. The Swap mode exchanges one block for another,
retaining the old block’s scale, rotation, wire connections, attribute values, and
attribute positions (if Retain is selected). For example, use the utility to swap out
a red standard pilot light with a green one, or drawing-wide, swap out all standard
red pilot lights with red press-test pilot lights.
The Update mode allows you to update all instances of a given block with an
updated version of the same block. Again, all attribute values and wire
connections are retained. For example, an old WD project set needs to be used
on a new project but the client likes his limit switches drawn a bit differently.
Simply make client-specific versions of the limit switch symbols. Then use the
Update option; select any limit switch on the drawing, and then reference the path
to the new version of the symbol. WD quickly replaces all instances of the symbol
it finds on the drawing(s) with the new version of the same symbol. The Library
Miscellaneous Tools
In the picture below, notice that CR105 is out of alignment with CR104 before the
Align Components command. Afterwards, it is aligned and the wire number, 105A
has also been adjusted.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-18
Miscellaneous Tools
mode works the same as the Update mode but will swap out all the blocks on the
drawing(s).
Mapping Attribute Values
When you swap or update a block there may be times when you want the values
of certain attributes mapped to different attribute names. For example, you may
be doing a Library Update and the library symbols you are swapping out do not
use standard WD attribute names. You want a quick way to update the library
symbols, but you do not want to lose the information held on the current attributes.
Select the Library Swap and Use Attribute Mapping File, then enter the
mapping file name. The mapping file determines how WD should map the
attributes. The file should have two columns of attribute names. The first column
should contain the current attribute name and the second column the new
attribute name. The mapping file may be an Excel spreadsheet, a commadelimited file (.CSV), or a simple text file with a space separating the current
attribute name from the new attribute name. (Note that when doing a Library
Swap you enter the path to the new library on a secondary dialog.) Below is a
portion of a sample Excel attribute mapping file.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-19
Updating Source/Destination Signals
Select the Update Signals icon under the Source/Destination Flyout.
This utility updates cross reference information for two types of cross-reference
symbols:
1. Wire number signal arrow symbols
2. Stand-alone cross-reference symbols
Wire Number Signals
Select the toggle to update the “from/to” cross-reference annotation on each wire
network source and destination arrow symbol. You can also instruct the utility to
make sure that wire number tags on the destination end matches the wire number
carried on the source end of each wire signal pair.
Stand-Alone Cross-Ref Symbols
Select the toggle to update the cross-reference annotation between pairs of
stand-alone cross-reference symbols. These are like wire number signal symbols
but without a WIRENO attribute and do not attach to wires. They can “float”. Insert
these from the schematic INS COMP dialog -- & gt; MISC subdialog.
Set up the desired cross-reference format under the drawing's CONFIG-- & gt; Setup
Cross-ref subdialog. This is on a per drawing basis.
Miscellaneous Tools
There may be times you need to update your Source/Destination signals, singly,
drawing wide or even project wide.
6-20
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
Stand-Alone Cross-Ref Symbols
Use these “smart” cross-reference symbols just like wire source/destination arrow
symbols but without the wires. The concept is exactly the same: you insert a
“source” reference symbol and then tie one or more “destination” reference
symbols to it. These can be on the same drawing or scattered across the project
drawing set.
Insert a unique “name” on the pair. This is what links each source cross-reference
symbol to its one or more destination cross-reference symbols.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-21
Updating Stand-alone Cross-reference symbol annotation
Creating new Stand-alone Cross-ref symbol shapes
Follow the naming convention outlined in the first part of the chapter on Symbol
Libraries. Copy an existing symbol’s “.dwg” file (viawd\wd\jic1 subdir) to the new
file name, edit, and save. Add it to the icon menu if you wish (see the chapter on
Icon Menus).
Dashed Link Lines
This tool inserts a dashed line linking the components you select. This
command automatically hides (makes invisible) TAG2 and DESC attributes of the
2nd through nth components you select for linking. This command will NOT work
unless both members of a linked pair carry X?LINK attributes.
For example, an extra contact has been added to the switch shown here.
Select the last linked contact of the switch (on line reference 106) and then pick
anywhere on the new switch contact. WD changes the contact’s annotation to
Miscellaneous Tools
Select the Update Stand-alone cross-ref syms button under the
Cross-Ref toolbar fly-out.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-22
Miscellaneous Tools
invisible and draws a dashed link line from the bottom of the upper contact to the
top of the new contact.
The SCOOT command is fully compatible with dashed link lines. If either contact
is scooted, the dashed link line updates to stay connected.
To remove a dashed link line and restore the attributes to their visible state, follow
the same procedure used to insert the dashed link line. The dashed line will
toggle off and the hidden attribute annotation reappears. The layer used for these
dashed link lines is set up in the layer sub-dialog of the main Drawing
Configuration dialog box.
Din Rail Utility
Open the INS Panel Footprint icon menu and select the Din Rail
icon.
To insert a Din Rail, first select the rail type from the drop-down list. Then enter
the origin and the rail length. You may enter these values in a couple of different
ways. One way is to type the information into each edit box. Another way is to use
the Pick Rail Info & lt; button. This will allow you to pick the origin on your drawing
and then drag the mouse to define the rail length.
Once the information is entered and you click OK, the Din Rail will be generated.
Each Din Rail section is created as a separate block. If you selected Standoff
Miscellaneous Tools
6-23
The Din Rail utility can be programmed into a menu button as long as you pass a
few parameters. The command line would be (c:wd_dinrl_menu mfg cat asmb).
This simply brings up the same dialog but with the appropriate Din Rail type
preselected.
Din Rail Parameters
The Din Rail is generated based on data held in an Excel spreadsheet called
WDDINRL.XLS. Each row in the main table, DIN_RAIL, represents a rail type.
The MFG, CAT, and DESC fields are used to create the drop down list on the
dialog. In addition, each rail type has a corresponding table named to match the
catalog number. This table defines some parameters based on the number of
slots calculated from the rail length.
Spreadsheet Fields
MFG
Manufacturer
CAT
Catalog Number
ASSYCODE
Assembly code
DESC
Description used for dialog listing only
RAILLENSTD
Standard length of din rail
RAILLENMIN
Minimum length of rail piece
MIN_SHIFT
Length of rail to shift from one piece of rail to the next to make
sure last piece is not less than the minimum length
NCHOLE
Name of AutoCAD block for the drill hole
BRKT
Allow standoff brackets, Yes or No. If No, then the button is
disabled on the dialog. If Yes, the button is enabled and you
may select standoff brackets if desired.
BRKT_NAME
Name of AutoCAD block for standoff bracket
Miscellaneous Tools
brackets, each bracket will be a separate block. Some WD information is added to
each block so it can be treated as a WD Panel entity. The WD edit dialog appears
for the first Din Rail section and the first bracket, if applicable.
6-24
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
BRKT_MFG
Manufacturer for standoff bracket. Added as Multi-BOM on
the created Din Rail block.
BRKT_CAT
Catalog number for standoff bracket. Added as Multi-BOM on
the created Din Rail block.
BRKT_ASMB
Assembly code for standoff bracket. Added as Multi-BOM on
the created Din Rail block.
There are a few special case fields that may be needed for some non-standard
Din Rail types. See the illustrations below for these fields.
Line Properties
There may be times that you want to specify a Color, Linetype, or Layer for a
particular line entity that makes up the Din Rail. You can do this with a few
optional spreadsheet fields. For the two end lines you add two columns in your
spreadsheet, each called END_PROP. The first one is for the left end, the second
is for the right end. The format is COLOR colorname LAYER layername LTYPE
linetype. For example, COLOR 9 LAYER MISC LTYPE HIDDEN2. It is expecting a
single space between the values. If you leave the field blank, or leave out one of
the properties, it will draw the lines using the current defaults. For the channel
lines it works similar but the columns should be called CHANNEL_PROP. Put
them in the same order as the CHANNEL values. For example, you want the inner
lines to be font HIDDEN2 and the CHANNEL columns are in this order, 0.69 0.49
-0.49 -0.69, this means the inner lines would be the second and third channel
columns. So the CHANNEL_PROP columns would be like this - 1st column leave
blank, second column LTYPE HIDDEN2, third column LTYPE HIDDEN2, and
fourth column blank.
END_PROP
Use this field to define the properties for the end lines
CHANNEL_PROP Use this field to define the properties for the channel lines
Miscellaneous Tools
6-25
Component Attribute Utilities
Here are the different tools you can use to edit a component’s information.
The standard way is to use the regular EDIT Component command and edit
the tag value from the INS/EDIT COMPONENT dialog.
The EDIT ATTR utility, under the SQUEEZE ATTR fly-out, lets you pick right
on the attribute. A dialog box pops up and lets you type in a new attribute value.
This utility also works on invisible attributes, it will find and display the closest
attribute to your pick point on a block insert.
You can also use WD’s ATTR Move/Edit command. Select the toolbar
button and then pick right on the component’s graphics (NOT on attribute text
itself – otherwise it flips into Attribute Move mode). This dialog displays listing all
of the component’s attributes and their values. If there are no graphics to pick on
(ex: wire number block/attribute or ladder line reference block/attribute), type “B”
and space and then pick on any attribute on the block insert. This will force the
command into attribute display mode.
Miscellaneous Tools
Editing a Component's Attribute Text Value
Miscellaneous Tools
6-26
Miscellaneous Tools
Check the Edit Attributes box in the upper right-hand corner of the dialog and
then highlight the attribute you want to edit.
You can also use any attribute editing command to edit a WD component’s
attribute values. For example, use AutoCAD’s DDATTE command.
Override Component Tag
WD provides a way to override a component tag but still update the reference
number portion on a re-tag. On the INSERT/EDIT dialog select the Options
button in the TAG area.
Enter a tag format override in the edit box. For example, a certain relay
component needs to always have an “MC-R” family tag value instead of “CR” so
that re-tag, for example, will assign MC-R100 instead of CR100. To achieve this
tag override you would enter “MC-R%N” for the tag format. WD adds an invisible
Miscellaneous Tools
6-27
Find/Replace Component Text
This utility lets you find and replace component and terminal text values or find
and replace sub-strings within those values. You can do this on the current
drawing or across the project drawing set.
Select the Find/Replace icon under the Retag fly-out. Choose to
process either the current drawing or the project. WD scans the drawing or
project set looking for all the WD components and the current attribute text values.
The Find/Replace dialog displays allowing you to define your search/replace
parameters.
Miscellaneous Tools
xdata flag that carries the tag's format value to override the drawing's default
format of “%F%N”.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-28
Miscellaneous Tools
Initially only the “F” - Find toggles are enabled. Click the “F” next to the WD value
you wish to “Find”. The Lst buttons will display a list of the current text values for
the WD attribute selected. Select from this list to define your “Find” parameter.
If you wish to Replace this “Find” text value, click on the “R” toggle for the WD
value and type a new text string in the edit box. Make sure you select either Exact
or Substr for the Find/Replace.
You can set up simple or complex search criteria:
Example 1:
Change all LOC codes marked “PNL1” to “PNL2A”. Set LOC “F” value to “PNL1”,
the “R” value to “PNL2A”, and click “Ex” for exact.
Example 2:
Change all instances of DESC1 text “E-STOP” to “EMERGENCY STOP” for all
remote operator stations marked with LOC codes that begin with the letters “OP-”.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-29
Once you click START Search, each match found is displayed. You can Edit,
Replace, Skip to the next, or Replace All (with no additional prompting).
Note: This utility does not support wildcard characters.
Moving Component Attributes
Use the ATTR Move/Edit tool to move one or more attributes. Pick right on
the attribute or attributes you want to move or type “W” and a space and do a
“crossing window” (i.e. right to left) to window all of the attributes you want to
Miscellaneous Tools
Set LOC “F” value to “OP-” and select “Substr”. Set the DESC1 “F” value to “ESTOP” and the “R” value to “EMERGENCY STOP”, click Exact.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-30
Miscellaneous Tools
move. Each attribute will highlight with a rectangular box drawn around it. Press
Enter and then, just like AutoCAD MOVE command, pick a base point and a new
“move to” point. The attributes follow your cursor and plant themselves at your
second pick point. The attributes remains tied to the parent block inserts.
Limitation: The Window option may not be available in some versions of
AutoCAD.
Note: If you accidentally pick on the block’s graphics instead of an attribute,
this move/edit command will kick into its attribute display/edit mode
described earlier.
Pushing DESC Attributes Down
WD supports three lines of description text on schematic components. If some
only have one or two lines of description, the description may seem to “float” too
high above the device. It would be nice to shove the DESC1 attribute value down
to the DESC3 position. You can do this with a manual edit or you can use the
Push DESC attrs DOWN utility.
This utility is only available from the WD pull-down menu as illustrated above.
Select the schematic components that you want to process. WD will push the
DESC1 and DESC2 values down into DESC2 and DESC3 attribute positions
when blanks are found. To go the other way, choose Push DESC attrs UP.
Rating Defaults
WD allows up to 12 Ratings attributes on a component. To help you annotate
these attributes WD lets you pick from a list of defaults. To take advantage of this
feature you need to create/modify a text file with a .WDR extension. This file is a
simple text file and can be edited with any editor such as WordPad.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-31
The dialog displays letting you enter values for each Ratings attribute. Next to
each edit box will be a Def button. Select this button to display the list of default
values.
Select a line from the file to map its value(s) to the available Ratings attributes.
Notice that a single line may carry multiple values with each value separated by a
“|” character. Any text that follows a semi-colon is considered a comment and will
be ignored.
You may create multiple .WDR files. WD will look for a generic defaults file called
WD_RATINGS.WDR stored in the WD support directory. You may also create a
project specific file with the same name and path as the project with the .WDR
extension. You may also have Family specific files named for the Family code of
the component with the .WDR extension. For example, if the component has the
family code “PB” for pushbuttons and a file called PB.WDR exists, it will display
when you select the “Family” button.
Hiding / Un-hiding Attributes
You can use the HIDE attribute command button to hide each attribute
you pick (or type “W”, space, and do a crossing window to select multiple
attributes). This tool is on the ATTR Move/Edit fly-out.
Miscellaneous Tools
When the Insert/Edit dialog is active, select the Show all Ratings button. If this
button is disabled, the component you are editing carries no Rating attributes.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-32
Miscellaneous Tools
Alternately, use the ATTR command described above to hide or unhide
attributes (switch between visible / invisible). Pick right on the symbol’s graphics
(instead of on an attribute) or type “B” and space and pick on an attribute. The
symbol’s attribute list appears in a dialog. You then toggle attributes between
invisible and visible by picking on their entries in this dialog list.
WD also provides a way to hide or un-hide attributes based on attribute tag
names.
Select the WD pull-down menu Component Misc & gt; ATTR hide/unhide & gt; ATTR
hide (dwg-wide) or ATTR unhide (dwg-wide). Select the blocks on the drawing.
A dialog, showing all the possible attribute tags, is displayed.
Select all of the attribute tag names to hide (or unhide).
Fixed Component Tags
Use the FIXED COMP command on the MISC fly-out to mark a
component tag as “fixed”. This means that it will be unaffected if the drawing is
later processed by a RE-TAG command.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-33
To “unfix” a component tag, follow the above and clear the “Make it FIXED” button.
Fix/Unfix Component Tags Project-Wide
To quickly “fix” (or un-fix) all component tags across the current project,
go to the WD Proj fly-out and then Project-wide Utilities. Batch Process dialog
display, select the desired Fix/Unfix button and click OK. In the next dialog select
what drawings (of the current project set) you want to process, click OK. WD then
processes the selected drawings.
Cross-Ref Text to Multi-line MTEXT
Use this tool to convert a long string of relay coil or source/destination
cross-reference text to a multi-line text entity (MTEXT). Then use GRIPS or
AutoCAD DDEDIT to reformat the reference string into multiple lines. This button
is under the cross-reference (X-ref) toolbar fly-out.
WD maintains the underlying attribute value but flips it to invisible. The MTEXT
entity is created at the same XY location as the underlying attribute. The MTEXT
Miscellaneous Tools
Select anywhere on the component and then check the box in the dialog as
shown here. WD changes the component’s attribute to a “fixed” layer as defined
in the “Layers” Setup of the main CONFIG dialog.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-34
Miscellaneous Tools
entity updates, scoots, and otherwise behaves as if it were an attribute tied to the
component block.
Child Update
A child contact should carry the same location “code” that is present on its parent
component. If relay coil CR101 is marked “PNL1” then all CR101 contacts should
also carry this exact same location code. In addition, if a child component carries
MFG and CAT attributes, they should carry the same information as the parent.
Managing this across multi-drawing projects is made easier with WD’s Child
Update utility.
The CHILD Update toolbar button is on the X Cross-ref fly-out. Select
this button and make your selection in the dialog shown here.
Click OK and then identify the components you want to update. Type the word
ALL if you want to process the entire drawing. WD quickly extracts a listing of all
parent components and pertinent codes from all drawings listed in the current
project. It applies these to the child contacts you’ve identified on the current
drawing. For example, if coil “CR469” is marked “PNL1” then every contact on the
current drawing labeled “CR469” gets “PNL1” as its location attribute value.
Note: If you choose to update the MFG/CAT, it will not carry to the children
unless they carry the MFG and CAT attributes.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-35
Schematic Copy LOC Utility
Note: There is an equivalent copy command for panel layout footprints. It is
found under the panel layout toolbar’s MISC fly-out.
Location Marks
This tool allows you to substitute small geometric location mark symbols for
text “location” codes. Refer to the Tutorial for a step-by-step example of how
these are inserted and manipulated.
Miscellaneous Tools
This tool lets you do mass copies of LOC and/or INST codes to all of
the components you select. You either type in the desired code, pick from an online list, or pick a “just like” master component.
6-36
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
What if no “LOC” code present on symbol?
If you try to insert a Location Mark symbol on a component with a blank LOC code
you will be prompted to enter the LOC code before selecting a marker.
Pick
Dwg
Proj
Select a component on your drawing that carries the LOC value you
want to use
Select from a list of LOC codes used on the drawing
Select from a list of LOC codes used on the project
Removing Location Mark Symbol
To remove a Location Mark symbol simply run the command again, and select the
component(s). WD will remove the location mark symbols and the original LOC
attribute will become visible again.
Expanding the Menu with a New Location Mark Symbol
The LOCATION MARKS menu works like the INSERT COMPONENT icon menu
in that it is driven by a text file that you can modify. The file name is
\viawd\wd\wd_locs.dat. Its structure parallels that of the component icon menu.
Follow these steps to add a new mark symbol to the menu.
1. Create the mark symbol, save it to the \viawd\wd\jic1\ subdirectory with a
file name that follows WD’s naming convention of the first four letters of the
symbol name being “WDXX” (for example: “WDXXSQ1.DWG”).
2. Create an AutoCAD “SLIDE” of the symbol and save the resulting “.sld” file
to the \viawd\wd subdirectory (ex: “wdxxsq1.sld”). To create a slide, call
up the drawing in AutoCAD, center it on the screen, type MSLIDE at the
command prompt, enter \viawd\wd\wdxxsq1.sld as the file name to create
and save, then Exit.
3. Make a backup copy of \viawd\wd\wd_locs.dat. Then edit wd_locs.dat with
a text file editor (such as Wordpad). Add the reference to the new mark
symbol (ex: Special Square | WDXXSQ1.SLD | WDXXSQ1).
Note: You can also use the WD Icon Menu Wizard to do this task.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-37
Changing Attribute Text Size
This is WD’s CHANGE ATTR Size utility. Pick this toolbar button to display
the Change Attribute Size dialog. Select your new attribute size by either picking
on a “just like” text or attribute entity or by manually entering the size value into the
edit box.
If you want to select the attributes to change manually, select “Single” and then
pick them one at a time. If you want to change all attributes of a certain type, let’s
say wire number attributes, then pick “By name”, select an example attribute for
WD to determine the attribute’s name, and then window the entire drawing. WD
will find all attributes of the same name and adjust all of them to your specified
size. See the section on project-wide utilities later in this chapter if you need to
change attribute sizes across multiple drawings in your project.
Use the SQUEEZE attribute utility to compress an attribute in order to
make it fit into a tight spot (ex: closely spaced components). Use the STRETCH
attribute command to go the other way. Each click on the attribute dynamically
changes the attribute’s width factor by 5%.
Changing Attribute Size Project-Wide
To change attribute sizes across the current project, select the Util
button under the Proj flyout. Batch Process dialog displays, check the “Change
Attr Size” toggle in the bottom right-hand portion of the dialog and then select the
Setup button next to it.
Miscellaneous Tools
Here is a tool that helps you quickly change attribute text size when components
or wire numbers have already been inserted onto your drawings.
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
6-38
Pick the WD attribute types that you want to change. Enter the text height and
optional width factor and then click OK. In the next dialog select what drawings
(of the current project set) you want to process, click OK. WD then processes the
selected drawings and adjusts the target attributes to the value you’ve specified.
To make permanent changes to symbol text heights you should adjust the
attribute definitions on the library symbols themselves. This means either 1) using
the automated “chg_hgt.scr script file” and wdlib.lsp utility combination (next topic)
or 2) opening each symbol’s “.dwg” file in AutoCAD and manually editing the parts
and pieces of the symbol.
Library Symbols: Mass Attribute Size Change
You can use the \viawd\wd\jic1\chg_hgt.scr batch script file and companion
\viawd\wd\wdlib.lsp AutoLISP utility to change attribute sizes across the entire
default WD schematic symbol library. Follow these steps:
1. IMPORTANT: Make a backup copy of the library you plan to modify (either
the viawd\wd\jic1 or \viawd\wd\jic125 library). This is just in case the conversion doesn’t give you the results you expect – you can restore the symbols, adjust the settings, and then re-run.
2. Open \viawd\wd\wdlib.lsp with a text editor (ex: Wordpad). In the top part of
the file you will find some text size settings for various attribute categories.
Adjust to suit. Save and exit the file.
3. Open \viawd\wd\jic1\chg_hgt.scr (or \viawd\wd\jic125\chg_hgt.scr) with your
text editor. Make sure that the paths to the library symbols and the
wdlib.lsp file are valid. If not, do a global search/replace to correct (note:
use double back-slashes for the path to the wdlib.lsp file). Save and exit.
4. Open any existing drawing in AutoCAD (it has to be a named drawing). For
AutoCAD 2000 type SDI at the command line. Make sure that it is set to 1.
5. At the command prompt type SCRIPT [Enter]. Browse to find the script file
in #3 above and click OK. The script should begin, each symbol opened,
Miscellaneous Tools
6-39
Changing WD Style Text Font
To change the WD style text font across the current project, select the
Util button under the Proj flyout. The Batch Process dialog displays, check the
“Change WD Style” toggle in the bottom right-hand portion of the dialog and then
select the Setup button next to it.
Select the font from the available text fonts, and OK. Select the drawings to
process and let WD quickly change the WD style font.
Terminal Utilities
Stand-Alone Schematic Terminals Insert / Edit
Stand-alone schematic terminal symbols insert like components but use a
different INSERT/EDIT dialog. Here is the sequence to insert a terminal:
Select the INS Component toolbar icon to display WD’s opening icon menu.
Then select the Term, Connectors icon.
The terminal icon menu page is displayed. The first column covers “dumb”
terminals. These do not show up in any reports. The second column covers
terminals that take on a terminal number that matches the wire number passing
through or connected to the terminal. The third column terminals carry a user
defined terminal number. The last column’s terminals will force a new wire
Miscellaneous Tools
modified per the settings in wdlib.lsp, saved, and then on to the next drawing.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-40
Miscellaneous Tools
number to generate as a wire passes through the terminal. Each type of terminal
behavior is controlled by the terminal block name.
Select a terminal, let’s say from the third column, and insert it into a wire.
The Terminal Insert/Edit dialog displays. It helps you annotate the terminal by
tracking what terminal numbers and terminal strip ID names have been used so
far. Selecting the Freshen list: Proj button makes this terminal number tracking
“project-wide”. It collects all terminal number / terminal strips from all drawings
and presents them to you in the “ID’s Used” and “Nums Used” list boxes.
To edit an existing terminal symbol, use the EDIT COMPONENT utility and pick
right on the terminal. You can also edit existing terminal values, drawing wide or
project wide, using WD’s To/From Spreadsheet editing function (described later in
this chapter).
Miscellaneous Tools
6-41
Terminal Re-Sequence
There are two modes, a “per pick” mode, and a “proj-wide” mode.
Per Pick
You will be prompted on the command line for the first terminal number you wish
to use. Alpha-numeric terminals are supported. Then just pick each terminal in
order. WD will update the terminal number on each terminal you pick,
incrementing each time.
Proj-Wide
Enter your starting number on the dialog that displays. In addition you need to
enter the Term Strip ID. WD will use this Term Strip ID when it searches each
drawing for terminals. Only terminals with this ID will be updated. If you wish to
further refine the search, you may include an LOC and/or INST value. If you put
values in these fields then WD will only update a terminal if it matches the Term
strip ID, LOC, and INST and values.
Select the drawings from your project you wish to process and WD is off and
running.
Miscellaneous Tools
WD provides a couple of utilities to make it easy to re-sequence the terminal
numbers across one or many drawings. From the WD menu select Component
MISC & gt; Terminal strip utils.
6-42
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
Internal/External Terminal Connections
WD allows you to define terminal connections as Internal or External. This would
usually be done on-the-fly after the terminal has been inserted on your drawing. If
you use this feature, WD will report wiring connection direction. This can also
control which side of a panel terminal will receive specific Schematic - & gt; Pnl wire
connection annotation.
Select the Term Sho button under the Wire Spool flyout.
Use this button to flag a terminal connection as an Internal connection.
Use this button to flag a terminal connection as an External connection.
Use this button to Blank out any connection flag on a terminal connection.
Dumb Terminal Strip Utility
Use this tool to quickly create non-intelligent terminal strips. The terminal
numbers can be imported from a file, windowed on one or more drawings,
individually picked, typed in by hand, or all of the above. Select the DUMB
Terminal Strip utility toolbar button from the WD pull-down menu under COMP
Misc - & gt; Terminal Strip utils.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-43
If you select TERM STRIP - from file, select the file containing the terminal text.
Miscellaneous Tools
If you select TERM STRIP - Pick, select to Pick or window the text and/or attribute
values you want to import into the terminal strip generator utility.
In the Terminal Strip edit dialog you can sort, add, remove, re-arrange the terminal
strip layout. You can even go to other schematic drawings and add more to the
Miscellaneous Tools
6-44
Miscellaneous Tools
list (just click Cancel, go to the next drawing, and re-invoke the utility – it
remembers what you’ve accumulated so far).
When the terminal number list looks good, select OK. The setup dialog displays.
This prompts you for text size and terminal height / width size and terminal strip
orientation. Make your selections and select OK.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-45
Editing existing terminal strip
Editing an existing terminal strip is easy. Just re-invoke the command, window
the existing terminal strip to capture the existing terminal numbers. Cancel the
command. Delete the old terminal trip. Re-invoke the terminal strip utility, make
your edits, and re-insert.
Wire Utilities
Show Wires Utility
Some problems with wire numbering (or lack thereof) can be traced to
line wires not being on a valid wire layer. Use the Show Wires utility (under the
INS WIRE fly-out) to make a quick check of what is a wire and what is not. The
solution to the problem may be as simple as moving some line entities to a valid
WD wire layer (per the drawings CONFIG setting for wire layer names).
Miscellaneous Tools
Select the insertion point for your terminal strip (upper left-hand corner). WD
inserts the terminal strip representation.
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
6-46
Show Wires can highlight in bright red every LINE entity that is found to be on a
valid WD wire layer. Select AutoCAD’s Redraw command to remove the
highlights.
3-Phase Wire
Select the 3-conductor toolbar button to insert vertical or horizontal 3-phase
bus wiring. Bus spacing defaults to the default ladder rung spacing for horizontal
bus. For vertical bus, the spacing is the default value defined in the “Ladders”
Setup on the CONFIG Drawing dialog.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-47
Three-phase wiring automatically breaks and reconnects to any underlying
components that it finds in its path. If it crosses any existing wiring, wire-crossing
gaps automatically insert.
If you have trouble connecting a new 3-phase wire to an existing bus, start the
command and select the starting point on the existing bus. Move your cursor
SLOWLY across the other wires of the bus so that WD has a better chance of
finding them and correctly connecting the new wiring.
As you pull the 3-phase wire out, you can turn a corner by moving your cursor out
of line with the bus. To reverse the turn’s phase sequence, press the letter “F”.
If you want, tie the new 3-phase wire to an existing bus, but with reversed
sequence, start the new 3-phase wire connected at the last wire on the existing
bus. Move the cursor backward across the other wires until WD makes the
connections, and then move your cursor forward again. This will result in a
reversed sequence connection.
Angled Wires
WD supports 45, 22.5, and 67.5 degree angled wires. The icons are under
the Wire fly-out.
Miscellaneous Tools
You can adjust the spacing in the dialog that is displayed. This dialog also gives
you options on how you want the bus to connect and in what orientation it should
go. You can use the SCOOT command to adjust bus spacing after insertion.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-48
Miscellaneous Tools
You can tie an angled wire to a component’s wire connection point, another wire,
or start the angled wire in blank space.
Note: WD does support SCOOT of components along angled wires.
22.5 Degree Wire
45 Degree Wire
67.5 Degree Wire
Stretch Wire
Use STRETCH Wire to lengthen a wire until it meets another wire or a
WD component. You select the wire and WD automatically finds the wire or
component in its path.
Wire Color/Gauge Labels
The wire color/gauge utility inserts “smart” labels on your drawing’s
wiring (this button is under the Wire Leader fly-out). This utility “maps” a wire
color/gauge/wire type label to each wire layer. When you select a wire to label,
WD reads the wire’s layer name, retrieves the matching text label, and inserts it as
a label/leader on the drawing. The resulting wire color/gauge label is “smart” in
Miscellaneous Tools
6-49
There are a few options for placement of the label. If you select Auto Placement,
WD will look for a good spot to place the label. Manual allows you to pick the
leader location points. Manual/no leader allows you to pick the location for the
text label with no leader.
Wire Color/Gauge Labels Setup
The mapping file is an ASCII text file with a “.wdw” extension. The default
mapping file, \viawd\wd\user\default.wdw, is referenced if a project-specific .wdw
file is not found. The mapping file lists each wire layer name followed by the wire
color/gauge label text that is to be assigned to that wire layer.
WD provides a means to easily set up or edit these labels. Select the wire color/
gauge tool and select Setup to display the setup dialog. All of the current
drawing’s valid layer names are listed in the upper dialog list along with any
matching labels found in the “.wdw” file (if it exists). Highlight any layer name and
type in the label you want to associate with it. Your entries are saved to the
“.wdw” file for instant reference as you insert wire color/gauge labels.
Miscellaneous Tools
that if you change the wire layer of a labeled wire, WD automatically revises the
label.
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
6-50
Label text size follows the current AutoCAD DIMTXT setting and the arrow size
defaults to the current AutoCAD DIMASZ setting.
Cable Markers
You can insert parent and child “cable markers” into wires. These
markers carry a cable TAG value, just like any parent/child device combination.
They can also carry a conductor color value (carried as a RATING1 attribute value
on the marker block symbol). The parent symbol has provision to carry MFG/CAT
part number information and, if the particular cable is referenced in WD’s cable
conductor database table (_W0_CBLWIRES within your Access catalog file) then
WD can track conductors used versus conductors available.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-51
Subsequent insertions of “child” cable markers, tied back to the parent through
any of the normal methods (Parent/sibling or drawing/project-wide pick list) will
cause WD to offer the cable’s next conductor color as a default. You can use the
Dashed Link Line command to insert “smart” linked lines between the symbols.
Since this example used a 4-conductor cable, one conductor is free for use.
Opening the edit dialog again and selecting the Project button under Wire color/ID
finds all CBL115 markers and conductor colors used, compares this with the part
number match in the _W0_CBLWIRES conductor database table, and displays
this dialog.
Miscellaneous Tools
Inserting the parent cable marker into a wire triggers a special Cable version of
the INSERT/EDIT dialog to display. If the catalog selection is one that is
referenced in the _W0_CBLWIRES table, the first conductor color is offered as a
default in the Wire color/ID edit box (as shown here).
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
6-52
It lists the four conductors available and the three that have already been
assigned. The GRN conductor is the remaining unused conductor.
Editing the Cable Conductor Database File
You can edit the Cable conductor database table (_W0_CBLWIRES in file
\viawd\wd\catalogs\default_cat.mdb) just like any other WD catalog table. The
main Access database catalog file can be named either default_cat.mdb or
& lt; projname & gt; _cat.mdb. (See the chapter on BOM and Catalogs for the WD search
sequence for your project catalog database). You can open it in Microsoft Access
or you can edit it from within WD. Select the CABLE Conductor View/Edit
button on the cable catalog look-up dialog to enter into the database file editor.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-53
Miscellaneous Tools
Wire Shields
WD provides a few special Shield symbols that graphically represent the cable
shield type. There are “dumb” shields that carry no WD tag and there are cable
marker/shields that carry a WD tag. You can have parent and child shields. You
can insert them one at a time and relate them as you would any other component
or insert a group at a time.
To insert Cable Markers with Shields.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-54
Miscellaneous Tools
For “dumb” shield symbols select Insert a Component. From the menu
select MISC, then Shields.
Pick each wire for the shield/cable marker. The top/left most wire will be the
parent (if you did not select a “dumb” shield and you did not select “all 2nd”) and
the standard Cable Marker Edit dialog appears. Each successive symbol will
automatically be related to the parent as it is inserted.
Note: If you want to select the wires with a Fence, use the Fence Insert
Comp button.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-55
Dumb In-line Wire Markers
From the Wire leader toolbar button fly-out select Dumb in-line wire
labels (or select from the “Terminals” submenu on the main INSERT Component
icon menu). A dialog displays with a selection of predefined in line markers and
user defined in the third row. Select the desired marker and place it on a wire.
The wire breaks around the in-line marker. For a user-defined marker, WD pops
open a dialog for you to type in your entry.
If the resulting typed-in label is too wide, use WD’s “Attribute Squeeze” command.
You can create wider marker symbols -- just follow WD’s block naming convention
for “dumb” terminal symbols. For example, the horizontal “Red” marker’s file
name is wd\jic1\HT0_RED.dwg and the vertical version is wd\jic1\VT0_RED.dwg.
WD keys off of the first four characters of the block/drawing name.
Define Wire Sequence
This utility allows you to predefine a wire network's connection sequence. This
sequence is taken into account by WD’s wire and cable from/to reporting and wire
Miscellaneous Tools
You can insert a special in-line marker into any wire. This marker might be used
to identify a special signal name or conductor color. WD ignores these markers
for wire numbering and reporting – they are “dumb”, for reference only.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-56
Miscellaneous Tools
connection annotation that is merged from the schematics to panel layout footprint
symbols.
Select the wire network to process. If there is a wire signal source or destination
arrow link tied to the network, you are given the opportunity to select the
continuation networks (only on the current drawing).
Select the Wire Seq button (under the Wire Spool flyout). Then select
any wire on the wire network.
Move Up/Move Dn
Select the wire/component from the list and select Move Up or Move Dn to
change the order.
Pick Mode
Pick near each wire connection in the order of how you want the wiring sequence
to proceed from component to component.
Rmv All
Removes the wire connection sequence information from a wire network.
Sort LOC
Automatically sorts by the INST/LOC values. If previously sorted, it will reverse
the sort.
Note: To VIEW an existing wire connection sequence, select the SHOW SEQ
utility.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-57
Show Wire Sequence
Press the Space bar to step through the defined wire sequence.
Wire Gap / Un-Gap
WD automatically inserts a gap/loop when a new wire crosses another.
Under some conditions you may need to manually add a loop gap at the point of
two crossing lines. Select the GAP wire command under the Wire Spool fly-out.
If a gap/loop is no longer needed in an existing wire, use the UNGAP
command under the Wire Spool fly-out.
If you wish to flip the gap to the other wire, use the FLIP GAP
command under the Wire Spool fly-out. Pick right on the wire that has the gap/
loops. WD will make the gapped wire solid and flip the gap/loop to the crossing
Miscellaneous Tools
Show the wire sequence defined using the Define Wire Sequence
program.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-58
Miscellaneous Tools
wire(s). You can also window the wires containing the gaps to flip by pressing a W,
then windowing the wires.
This makes it easy to make the gaps on your drawing consistent by picking
horizontal or vertical wires for the gaps. WD will check each gap on the wires
selected, and flip it if it isn't consistent with the option selected from the above
dialog.
Check/Repair Gap Pointers
This utility verifies that the invisible Xdata pointers on both sides of a
wire gap/loop are valid. If not, appropriate pointers are established.
Select each wire as directed. Gap data will be added as needed.
TIP: Use this utility to create wire number jumps (on the current drawing)
without resorting to individual signal SRC/DESC arrow symbols.
Check/Trace Wire
This utility single steps through and highlights each connected wire of
the selected wire network. It can help you troubleshoot problems with
unconnected or shorted wires and invalid wire crossing gap pointers.
Select a wire on the network. You can select “A” to show All Segments, or if you
would rather step through wire by wire, press the Space bar.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-59
Fan In/Fan Out
First we'll add the Source markers.
Select the Markers Fan In/Out Src under the Wire Numbers flyout.
Select the style and the orientation for the markers.
Miscellaneous Tools
There may be times when you want to show source and destination markers on
the individual wires of a cable and yet you want to show the wires coming together
to form the cable. WD's Fan In/Fan Out feature lets you do just this.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-60
Miscellaneous Tools
Enter a source code for the marker and optionally a description. If you enter the
color of the wire in the Description field, WD reports will use this information in the
Wire Color field.
You have a few options for inserting the matching Destination marker.
Yes, don't ask Prompt me to insert the matching destination without asking
as I insert each source
No, don't ask Do not insert the matching destination markers after each
source
I want to insert this matching destination marker
Yes
I do not want to insert this matching destination marker
No
If the destination wires are nearby it may be easiest to insert them right away. If
they are on another drawing you can wait until later.
Let's try inserting the destination marker.
Select the Markers Fan In/Out Dest under the Wire Numbers.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-61
When a Fan In/Out marker is inserted, WD breaks the wire and changes the layer
of one side of the wire to a special layer. If you are inserting a source marker then
the wire coming out of the marker is changed. If it is a destination marker the wire
coming into the marker is changed.
Fan In/Fan Out Layer
WD's Fan In/Out feature relies on layering to work. A special layer or set of layers
can be defined for the wires going out of a Fan In/Out Source marker and the
wires coming into a Destination marker. These layers are defined on the drawing's
CFG.
Miscellaneous Tools
Select the style and orientation. Then select the wire for the destination marker.
Enter the code or select Recent to see a list of the recent markers inserted.
Continue selecting wires until all destination markers have been inserted.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-62
Miscellaneous Tools
Select the Wire Fan In/Out Setup button. If you have an older drawing (prior to
this feature) you may be warned about an older version of the WD_M block. If that
happens go ahead and swap the WD_M block and try again.
You can select the default Fan In/Out marker style here along with defining the
layers for the wires. Select the Add layer name button to define layer names as
Fan In/Out layers.
Changing Wires to Fan In/Out Layer
Select the Fan In/Out Layer button under the Wire Numbers flyout.
The list displays only layers that are already assigned as Fan In/Out Layers as
defined in the drawing configuration setup.
Use the Pick button if you aren't sure of the layer you want, but you have a line on
your drawing on that layer. You can also use this if the line's layer isn't defined as
a Fan In/Out layer and you want to add it on the fly.
If you want to make sure you only change the layers of wires that are already
defined as Fan In/Out wires, check the box to Change existing fan in/out lines
Miscellaneous Tools
6-63
Wire Number Utilities
3-Phase Wire Tagging
This utility speeds up the process of inserting special wire numbering generally
associated with 3-phase bus and motor circuits.
Select the 3Phase/Motor Wirenum command hidden under the Edit
wire number fly-out. Then select the motor or target symbol you want the 3-phase
wire numbers to be referenced to (or manually type in a base number). WD
displays a dialog with sets of possible wire numbers based upon that number.
For example, clicking on motor “MTR109” yields a dialog showing these wire
number combinations:
Pick the desired combination and then click on the three wires. Each wire is
automatically annotated with a “fixed” wire number from the selection set.
If this utility does not meet your needs, use the regular Edit Wire Number
tool to assign the fixed wire numbers one at a time.
“Fixing” Wire Numbers
In some cases you may find that certain wire numbers must be pre-assigned.
These might include motor wiring that needs to include special suffix values or
other wiring, such as instrumentation, that might not follow the default numbering
convention. Manually edit the wire number and flip it to “fixed”. Fixing a wire
number means that the wire number tag is left unchanged if later processed or reprocessed by the WD’s automatic wire numbering utility.
Select the Edit wire number toolbar icon. Then select a wire on the desired
network or pick right on the wire number itself (if it already exists). You can edit an
Miscellaneous Tools
only (no convert). Otherwise WD will let you convert any selected line(s) to the
Fan In/Out layer.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-64
Miscellaneous Tools
existing wire number in the dialog shown here or enter a new wire number. Up/
down toggles and a Pick similar text tool can speed up the task if you have a
number of special wire numbers to manually edit. If you want the wire number to
be “fixed”, check the box and then click OK. If the wire number is already fixed
and you want to “unfix” it (i.e. turn it back into a regular wire number) then clear
this box and click OK.
When WD “fixes” a wire number, the wire number attribute is renamed and it is
moved to a special fixed wire number layer. If you assign a different color to this
layer, you make it very easy to identify which wire numbers are fixed and which
are normal. The layer name for fixed wire numbers is entered in the “Layers
Setup” sub-dialog of WD’s main CONFIG Drawing dialog.
Fixing all Wire Numbers
There may be times when you want to “fix” all or many wire numbers
on a drawing at their current values (ex: “released for fabrication” or an “as built”
drawing). Use the Force to Fixed command on the “Edit Wire Number” fly-out
toolbar and identify all of the wiring you want WD to mark as fixed.
Fixing/Un-fixing all Wire Numbers Project-Wide
To quickly “fix” (or un-fix) all wire numbers across the current project,
go to the WD pull-down menu. Pick Project and then Project-wide Utilities.
The Batch Process dialog displays. Select the desired Fix/Unfix button and click
Miscellaneous Tools
6-65
Repositioning a Wire Number
There are different commands for different conditions.
If you want to move a wire number along its wire segment, use SCOOT and
pick right on the wire number.
If you want to move an existing wire number from one segment of the
network to another, use the MOVE Wire Number command (under the Edit Wire
Number fly-out toolbar button). Just pick on the wire segment where you want the
wire number repositioned. You do NOT have to first pick on the existing wire
number.
If you want to reposition the wire number text with an attached leader, use
the LEADER command. Pick right on the wire number text and then identify the
new position. Right click or press Enter to exit the command.
If you want to reposition the wire number without use of a leader, use the
MOVE ATTRIBUTE utility. Pick right on the wire number text and then enter
“from” and “to” pick points, just like an AutoCAD MOVE command sequence. You
can also select multiple attributes to move together, if you wish.
Note: Avoid using AutoCAD’s MOVE command to reposition a wire number.
A WD smart wire number is an invisible block with one visible wire
number attribute associated with it. The block’s X-Y insertion point
needs to physically lie on the wire segment. If it is forced off of the segment during an AutoCAD MOVE command, then WD no longer sees it
linked to the wire. If you want to use straight AutoCAD commands to
Miscellaneous Tools
OK. In the next dialog select the drawings (of the current project set) you want to
process, click OK. WD then processes the selected drawings.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-66
Miscellaneous Tools
reposition a wire number, use GRIPS to move the wire number
attribute or any other attribute position editing command so that you
reposition the wire number attribute but not its underlying block insertion point.
Swapping Wire Numbers
Swap wire numbers between two wire networks by selecting the
“SWAP” wire numbers toolbar button under the Edit Wire Number fly-out. Select
on the “from” and the “to” wire networks or pick right on the existing wire number
text.
Rotating Wire Numbers
To rotate a wire number, use the Rotate ATTR command found under
the attribute size fly-out. Each click on an attribute will rotate it another 90
degrees counter-clockwise. This command can be used on other types of
attribute text data.
Wire Number “Extra” Copies
Extra wire numbers can be positioned anywhere on a wire network. These
copies “follow” the network’s main wire number attribute -- if WD modifies it then
any wire number copies on the network also update.
To place extra copies of a wire number on a wire network, use the EXTRA
wirenums command. Pick right on the wire location where you want the extra
wire number to insert.
Extra wire numbers go on their own layer that is defined in the “Layers” Setup of
the CONFIG dialog. If you assign a color to this layer different from the normal
wire number and fixed wire number layers then it is easy to tell them apart from
the network’s main master wire number.
Erasing a Wire Number
Use the ERASE Wirenum command and either select the wire number or
pick on any wire of the network. “Extra” wire number copies also delete. If you
erase a wire number and select right on an “extra” wire number copy, WD will
erase just that copy but leave the networks’ main wire number and any other
copies in place.
Erasing all Wire Numbers Project-Wide
To quickly erase all wire numbers or all non-fixed wire numbers across
the current project, go to the WD Proj fly-out toolbar and then Project-wide
Utilities. Batch Process dialog display, select the desired option and click OK. In
the next dialog, select what drawings (of the current project set) you want to
process, click OK. WD then processes the selected drawings.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-67
Hide/Unhide Wire Numbers
The new “hide layer” is created from the wire number layer name with a “_HIDE”
suffix. For example, if the wire number text layer is called WIRENO then the “hide
layer” name is called “WIRENO_HIDE”. The layer will be created automatically
when it is needed and you will be asked if you wish to freeze this layer.
Use the UN-Hide button under the Edit Wnum flyout to unhide any wire
numbers that were previously hidden. Select the wire that carries the hidden wire
number.
Find/Replace Wire Number Text
This utility lets you find and replace wire number text values or find and replace
sub-strings within those values. You can do this on the current drawing or across
the project drawing set.
Miscellaneous Tools
WD automatically “hides” wire numbers when the wire number is on
the same network as a TERM symbol that carries a copy of the wire number
(WIRENO attribute). There may be times when you want to manually hide or
unhide wire number(s). Select the HIDE button under the Edit Wnum flyout.
Select the wire number itself or the wire it is associated to. WD moves the wire
number to a special “hide layer”.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-68
Miscellaneous Tools
Select the Find/Replace Wire Number icon under the Retag fly-out.
Full, exact match
Replace the text only if the entire wire number text
string matches the Replace value.
Substring match
Replace the text anywhere within the wire number
text string.
Enter up to 3 different Find/Replace values, and then click Go.
Choose to process the project, the current drawing, or selected wire numbers on
the current drawing. WD scans the selection looking for all the WD wire number
text values and replacing text as instructed.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-69
Layer Utilities
The Layer Rename utility makes it easy to rename layers one by one,
or multiple layers at once by using the Find/Replace method. Select Rename WD
LAY from under the MISC toolbar fly-out. For example, the WD demo drawings
come with DEMO- as a prefix on many layer names. We can remove this using
the Layer Rename.
You can edit an individual layer name by selecting the layer from the list, then click
on Edit. Select the Find/Replace button to replace a name or sub-string within a
layer name.
The advantage to using the WD layer rename is that in addition to renaming the
layer, WD also updates the WD layer assignment information carried on the
drawing’s WD_M block. For example, if DEMO-WIRES is currently assigned as a
WD Wire layer and you rename it using the WD rename layer utility, the new layer
name will be substituted for DEMO-WIRES in the WD wire layer name list.
Miscellaneous Tools
Layer Rename
6-70
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
Change Attribute Layer
This utility can be used to force attribute text entities to a given layer.
Select the Change Attr Lay button under the Attr fly-out. Select the
target layer either by typing it or selecting from List. Click OK and then select the
attribute entities to change to the target layer. Windowing of attributes is not
supported -- you must select them individually.
There are two preset target layer names that can be selected by clicking on the
“Wires” or “Terms” buttons.
Spreadsheet Utilities
Spreadsheet Edit / Drawing Update
You can edit component tags, descriptions, catalog assignments, wire numbers,
or PLC I/O descriptions from the comfort of a spreadsheet and then have your
edits update your drawings. This is a very powerful feature. For example, you
can set up standard drawing templates. From a spreadsheet, manipulate the
component tags, catalog numbers, and ratings to match a customer’s
requirements. Then export the data out to the wiring diagram templates and
watch them update to match your spreadsheet data.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-71
Click OK and then select the drawings you want to extract from (current drawing
or project-wide) and select output format and file name.
WD then quickly creates a file of the data pulled from your wiring diagram
drawings.
Using your favorite spreadsheet or database program, read in the extracted file
(Caution: If you selected a Tab or Comma-delimited ASCII format, import all
fields as “text”. Some spreadsheet programs may try to convert some fields into
numeric or scientific notation values. You may need to save the WD extracted
data to a file with a “.txt” extension and then use the spreadsheet’s import “wizard”
to force all fields to be classified as “text”). In the spreadsheet, edit the data as
you see fit. Then save it back out to its original format.
Miscellaneous Tools
Click the Project & gt; TO Spreadsheet tool under the RE-TAG toolbar
fly-out to take a “snap shot” of your drawing set. Select the type of data that you
want to export (select from the dialog shown here).
Miscellaneous Tools
6-72
Miscellaneous Tools
For each drawing of your drawing set, use WD’s FROM Spreadsheet
& gt; Drawing Update utility (button under the RE-TAG toolbar fly-out). Reference
the saved data filename. Next, select current drawing update or whole project
(i.e. WD will “batch” update the drawings) from the dialog shown here.
WD then updates components it finds on the drawing(s) with the matching entries
it finds in the spreadsheet data file. Note: all spreadsheet update changes are
automatically logged, complete with time and date, in a text file saved to WD’s
“\viawd\wd\user” subdirectory.
Spreadsheet Table Insert
You can read spreadsheet data into WD and then insert it right on to your drawing
as a ruled text table. One application of this WD feature is to extract any of WD’s
report types, such as BOM or wire connection and then “Save as” a commadelimited, xls, or .mdb file format. Directly read or import the file into your
spreadsheet and edit/manipulate the report. Then save the spreadsheet back out
as a comma-delimited, xls, or mdb file. Use this utility to insert it on to your
drawing.
Select the INSERT Comma-delim file tool under the RPT fly-out.
Choose the input file from AutoCAD’s file selection dialog. WD reads in the file
and allows you to insert it as a table on your active drawing. You can adjust table
width, spacing, layer selection, and break the table into pieces.
Note: This table is strictly lines and text (i.e. there is no dynamic link back to
the spreadsheet).
Project Wide Utilities
WD Surf
The WD Surf utility allows you to quickly move from reference to reference
across the project drawing set. For example, start WD Surf and pick on the coil or
Miscellaneous Tools
6-73
Pick on any reference listed in the dialog and WD instantly zooms up on that
reference. If the reference is on another drawing, WD immediately opens that
drawing and zooms in on the reference. You can quickly and easily “surf” through
your drawing set, looking at each reference in context. This utility can also surf
wire SRC/DEST arrow signals. At each reference you have the option to EDIT the
reference (WD calls up the normal INSERT/EDIT dialog), do a Quick BOM check,
or pick a different component reference to surf.
WD Surf can also be used in a project-wide “search” mode. For example, to
quickly find where FV-104A solenoid is referenced in the schematics, start WD
Surf, at the “pick component to surf” prompt, press [ENTER].
WD then prompts you to type in the component reference you want to find
(instead of picking it from an instance of the reference on the current drawing).
WD scans the project and quickly returns with its Surf dialog displaying all FV104A references. Pick and surf straight to it.
Miscellaneous Tools
any contact of relay “CR105”. A dialog quickly is displayed listing all references
related to CR105, including panel layout and panel nameplate references.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-74
Miscellaneous Tools
The WD Surf “search” mode supports wild cards. To surf across all solenoid
references, repeat the above but enter “*FV*” at the prompt. All component
references that contain the sub-string “FV” are immediately displayed in the surf
dialog. WD Surf supports searching on component Tags, component Catalog
Numbers, and Wire Numbers. Just make sure to fill in the appropriate field.
This choice would search for all components that have a catalog number that
matches “800H-PR*”.
Use the & lt; & lt; Pick buttons next to a field to pick a component or attribute. WD will
then extract the value from the selected object and use that for the search field.
Surf ZOOM Factor
Surfer’s zoom factor is related to the smaller of the current drawing’s default
dimension text size (DIMTXT) and text size (TEXTSIZE). The smaller this value
is, the closer WD Surf zooms into the surf references. During surfing, zoom to a
comfortable zoom factor and then click Zsav on the SURFER dialog. The current
zoom factor is saved with the drawing (on the WD_M block) and will be recalled
automatically each time that WD Surf revisits the drawing.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-75
WD Batch Plotting
This displays a listing of all the drawings in the current project. Select the
drawings you want to plot or select “Do All” for the whole project. Notice you can
Miscellaneous Tools
WD can batch plot your full drawing set or a selected subsection of it. From the
PROJECT dialog (i.e. select the PROJ toolbar button) click on PLOT.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-76
Miscellaneous Tools
sort by the date which makes it easy to plot just the drawings that have been
updated since a certain time/date. Now this dialog is displayed:
Select the Layout tab you wish to plot.
WD gives an option to run a script file before and/or after WD issues the plot
command. For example, you might want to freeze some layers or insert a plotting
border, plot, and then remove the border – WD’s pre-plot and post-plot script file
option makes this easy to implement.
Select the output device. If you have already created a plot config file, .pc3, and
want to use it, enter its name or use the Browse button to select it. If you use
Page Setup names, you can enter this name to define the plotting options.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-77
If you wish to plot to a file, select this toggle on the main dialog and define the
path for storage of the plot files.
Click on OK or OK-Reverse (reverse means that the plots will be output in
reverse order) to advance to the final step.
WD now creates and launches a script file (viawd\wd\user\_wdplot.scr) that opens
each of the selected drawings, runs any pre-plot script, plots, runs any post-plot
script, quits out of the drawing, and moves on to the next.
Note: WD’s batch plotting routine, by default, does NOT save any changes
made to the drawing during the plotting process. If you want to save
any changes made, for example, layers frozen or a time/date stamp
inserted, then add a QSAVE command to the end of a pre-plot script
file or anywhere in a post-plot script file.
Automatic Time/Date Stamping
During WD batch plotting of each drawing, WD checks for “mapping information”
for the drawing’s title block (refer to “Title Block” utility above). If it finds an entry
labeled “ & lt; attribute name & gt; = PLOTTIME” and “ & lt; attribute name & gt; = PLOTDATE”,
(or any of the WD time/date variations detailed in the Title Block section), WD will
temporarily insert the current time and date on to the target attributes in the title
block. Then it will plot the drawing (with the time/date stamp in place) and then
quit out of the drawing, effectively removing the time/date stamp information. By
default, the time/date stamp is temporary, only present long enough to get plotted
with the drawing.
Miscellaneous Tools
Use the Detailed Plot Config Mode to turn on/off the options set within this subdialog.
6-78
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
Example
Your title block has an attribute, “P_TIME”, to carry plot time and “P_DATE” to
show the day the plot was created. You include these two lines in your WD title
block-mapping file (or encode them on the title block’s invisible WD_TB attribute
(see WD_TB topic):
P_TIME = PLOTTIME
P_DATE = PLOTDATE
To get a title or label added to each value, for example, “Plot time:” and “Plot
date:”, open your title block’s AutoCAD “.dwg” file (from which the title block is
derived). Edit the ATTDEFS that receive the plot time and/or plot date data. Make
the attribute definition’s “prompt” value equal to the label you want displayed.
Save and exit. Now insert this new version as a block into your drawing border/
title block drawing or template. Now, during the WD batch plot routine, if plot date
or plot time is referenced, WD will find and use the prompt value as a prefix for the
time or date value.
Batch Plot to File
You can trigger WD to batch plot to files (AutoCAD 2000 only). Edit \viawd\wd.env
and add this entry:
WD_PLOT2FILEDIR,x:/somepath/,plot to file subdir
User Scripts and Programs - Batch Processing
You can instruct WD to run a custom AutoCAD script file against each drawing in
the current project list. This script might contain standard AutoCAD commands
and/or AutoLISP programs.
Go to the Proj toolbar fly-out and then Project-wide Utilities. Batch
Process dialog displays. Enter the name of the script file in the lower left-hand
edit box and click OK. In the next dialog select what drawings (of the current
project set) you want to process, click OK. WD then calls up each drawing in
sequence, runs your script file, and then moves on to the next drawing.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-79
Example
Here is the ASCII text script file, coffee.scr:
LAYER
SET
0
FREEZE
ENGINEERING_NOTES
(blank line)
GRID
OFF
SNAP
OFF
Enter this file name in the edit box shown here, click OK, select the drawings you
want to process on the next dialog, click OK, and then head for the coffee
machine.
Project Zipping Utility
This utility provides the framework for simple zipping/archive of the current
project’s drawing set. You must supply a suitable “zip” program, making it
available for WD to “call”.
Initial Configuration
1. Find your zip program’s executable file name, including full path (for example, c:\winzip\winzip32.exe).
Miscellaneous Tools
Your 150 drawing project is ready to deliver to the customer but you need to make
sure that SNAP and GRID are turned off and that a special
ENGINEERING_NOTES layer is frozen. You could spend the next two hours in
mindless tedium or you could use WD’s project scripting feature and drink a cup of
coffee. You choose the latter.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-80
Miscellaneous Tools
2. Edit file \viawd\wd\wdzip.lsp with any text editor. Type in your zip program’s
file name in the place shown near the top of this “.lsp file. Save and exit.
Using
Select the Zipping utility from the WD pull-down menu under Project submenu
and follow the on-screen instructions.
This utility may also be called from within a number of WD's routines that call up
and modify multiple drawings. This provides a safeguard for you by creating a zip
file of your drawings prior to WD acting on them.
Mark and Verify Changes
The Mark/Verify utility can help you track changes made to your project drawing
set during the design/approval/build/as-built process. For example, have you ever
wished you could tell exactly what had been changed on the controls drawings
that you sent out and then received back from customers or clients? WD’s Mark/
Verify utility can help.
Before you send your drawings out, use the “Mark WD Components” option of this
utility. Each WD component, wire number, and beginning ladder reference is
invisibly marked and referenced in a table in the current project’s scratch
database file ( & lt; project name & gt; .mdb). When the drawings are returned, you will
use the “Verify” option to generate a report of changes. The report includes a list
of all added, changed/edited, copied, and deleted components and wire numbers.
Detected changes can have been made using regular AutoCAD or AutoCAD LT or
WD -- it doesn’t matter how! You can even “Surf” through the change report,
viewing each detected component or wire number change in context.
Select the Mark/Verify icon button under the PROJ fly-out.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-81
Next you are prompted to enter your name or initials and any comments. Your
initials, comments, and the current time/date will be show up later when the
“Verify” report is run.
Now you email the drawing set to the client for review. A week later he emails the
drawing set back to you. Has he made any edits?
To report the accumulated changes made to a WD drawing set since
the last time the Mark command was applied to the set, Re-run the Mark/Verify
command but, this time, select the Verify option.
Miscellaneous Tools
The first step is to “Mark” your drawings before you send them out. Select to
process your project set or just the current drawing. Select the MARK button.
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
6-82
WD quickly searches through the selected drawings, comparing the invisible
“marks” to the actual WD components to detect edited, copied, and newly inserted
components and wire numbers. It checks the project’s scratch database to detect
any deleted component or wire numbers. When the search is complete, a report
is displayed.
Display: data format
Bring the data up into WD’s report format.
Surf
“Surf” through the list, examining each detected
change in context.
Note: For WD to detect if a component or wire number is deleted; it must reference the MARKVERIFY table that the MARK command saves in the
project’s scratch database file ( & lt; project name & gt; .mdb). If the scratch
database file is erased AFTER the MARK function has been run, then
a subsequent VERIFY command will not be able to report deleted
items – it will be limited to reporting only changes involving new inserts,
copies, and edited components and wire numbers.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-83
Data Types tracked/detected by Mark/Verify
• Component TAG name (ex: CR101 changed to CR101A)
• Description text
• Switch position text, rating values
• Beginning PLC module address value
• Terminal pin numbers (both stand-alone terminals and component pin numbers)
• Catalog number, manufacturer, assembly code value
• Location / Installation code values
• Wire numbers
• Beginning ladder reference number
• Wire Source/Destination codes
Project Re-Sequence/Re-Tag
You have some drawings that you want to reuse from another project but you
need to renumber all the ladders, then retag all the components, and finally redo
all the cross referencing. There are quite a few drawings and you need them right
away for an important client. Work through lunch? Maybe not -- let WD work and
you eat.
Select the Re-sequence button under the PROJ fly-out. On the ReSequence dialog select your desired options. You can select to run just one of the
options available or run them all at once. Depending on which options you select,
WD may need to make multiple passes through your drawing set to get everything
done.
Miscellaneous Tools
The Verify command will detect and report changes to the following:
6-84
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
Component Re-Tag
Select this option to instruct WD to pass through your selected drawings and retag all “non-fixed” components. If you also select Ladder Reference renumber,
the component re-tag pass will be done after an initial pass to renumber the
ladder references.
Cross Reference Update
Select cross-reference update to trigger WD to redo all cross-referencing on your
selected drawings. If you selected other options such as component re-tag or
ladder renumber, then the cross-referencing will be done in a separate pass after
the ladder update and component re-tag is complete.
Wire Number Tag/Re-tag
Click Setup to view a set of options for wire number re-tagging.
Re-Sequence Ladders
WD renumbers each ladder sequentially. Use the Setup button to define options
such as starting reference number and how the ladders are to sequence from
drawing to drawing.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-85
Bump Ladders Up/Down
Sheet
This option automates re-sequencing the Sheet value (defined on Config dialog)
on consecutive drawings. You can elect to re-sequence with a starting number
you supply or you can bump the current Sheet value up or down by a given count.
Note: This is the same option that can be run from the Title Block update dialog.
Dwg Num
Project-wide update of the drawing's %D “DWG NAME” parameter.
Other CFG Settings
Update the drawing parameters related to component and wire tagging modes
and format. Use the Setup button to see the options.
Title Block
This option runs the Title Block utility as described in this chapter. The advantage
here is that you can update the title block on the same pass through your
drawings as the other options you selected. Make sure that you use the Setup to
define which Title Block value to update.
Title Block Utility
Overview
If your existing drawing title block consists of an AutoCAD “block with attributes”,
WD can be linked into it for some level of automated, project-wide title block
updates. WD’s project-wide info lines and WD’s per-drawing values can be
“mapped” to attributes on your existing title block.
Miscellaneous Tools
You may want to simply bump the ladder references up if you’ve added some
drawings into the middle of your project. (Or bump down if you removed some
drawings). Select the Bump option and enter the “bump” count. Enter a negative
number in the bump count edit box if you want to “bump down”.
6-86
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
Project-Wide Values
LINE1 - LINEx
unlimited number of project description lines
Drawing Values
DWGNAM
The “Drawing name” value assigned in the Config
dialog
DWGDESC
The one line drawing description assigned in the WD
Project dialog
DWGSEC
The section assigned in the WD Project dialog
DWGSUB
The sub-section assigned in the WD Project dialog
FILENAME
AutoCAD drawing file name, no path, no extension
FILENAMEEXT
AutoCAD Drawing file name, no path, includes DWG
extension
FULLFILENAME
AutoCAD Drawing file name, including path and
extension
SHEET
The “Sheet Number” value assigned in the Config
dialog
SHEETMAX
Count of drawings in the project
WD batch plotting Values
PLOTTIME
Current time, 24 hr. clock
PLOTTIME12
Current time, 12 hr. am/pm format
PLOTDATE
Current date, MM:DD:YYYY
PLOTDATEMMDDYY
Current date, MM:DD:YY
PLOTDATEYYMMDD
Current date, YY:MM:DD
PLOTDATEYYYYMMDD
Current date, YYYY:MM:DD
How to Link WD Information to your Title Block
Let’s say that your title block looks something like this:
Miscellaneous Tools
6-87
You want to “link” some WD project description data entries (the first twelve data
lines shown in the dialog here), and some of the WD drawing values to the
attributes that appear in the drawing title blocks.
Miscellaneous Tools
It is a block and its block name is “TITLE”. When exploded, its underlying attribute
names display:
6-88
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
Here is what you decide to link:
Title Block Attribute
WD’s “Line” Value
PROJ_TITLE
LINE1
DRAW_TITLE1
LINE2
DRAW_TITLE2
DWGDESC
PROJ_NUM
LINE4
STATUS
LINE5
STATUS_DATE
LINE6
REV
LINE7
SH
SHEET
SX (max dwg count)
SHEETMAX
There are two different approaches to linking WD's project and drawing values to
the drawing title blocks.
• Attribute “Mapping” file
• WD Mapping Info Embedded on Title Block
Attribute “Mapping” File
A text file, DEFAULT.WDT, defines what WD values are mapped to the drawing
title block attributes. Use any text editor to create (or edit) file
\viawd\wd\proj\default.wdt:
BLOCK = TITLE
PROJ_TITLE = LINE1
DRAW_TITLE1 = LINE2
DRAW_TITLE2 = DWGDESC
PROJ_NUM = LINE4
STATUS = LINE5
STATUS_DATE = LINE6
REV = LINE7
SX = SHEETMAX
SH = SHEET
PLOTTIME = PLOTTIME
PLOTDATE = PLOTDATE
When you instruct WD to do a project-wide title block update, WD reads this
mapping file. The “BLOCK = “ entry tells WD the AutoCAD block name of the title
block. The lines that follow list the attribute names on that block and what pieces
of WD project data or drawing specific data that WD should copy to that attribute.
The PLOTTIME and PLOTDATE entries (as described earlier) also appear in this
file but they are used only by WD’s batch plotting routine (see elsewhere in this
chapter).
Miscellaneous Tools
6-89
DRAWN_BY = “Joe N. Gineer”
This triggers WD to look for an attribute named “DRAWN_BY” and, if found, insert
a value of “Joe N. Gineer”.
If your target attribute name contains an AutoLISP “wild-card” character such as
#, ?, [, ], -, @, ~, ., or * then you’ll need to precede that character with the `
character. For example, if your target attribute name is SHT# and you want to
map WD’s SHEET parameter to it, you would set up the mapping with:
SHT'# = SHEET
You can create project-specific mapping files. WD always looks for a mapping file
that matches the current project’s “.wdp” file name before it defaults to
DEFAULT.WDT. For example, if the current, active project is ACME99.WDP and
you instruct WD to do a title block update, WD looks for mapping file
ACME99.WDT. If not found, WD then looks for DEFAULT.WDT (and if not found,
WD aborts the command).
WD Mapping Info Embedded on Title Block
An invisible attribute on your drawing’s title block, named “WD_TB”, can be
encoded with the mapping information. This method eliminates the need for an
external mapping text file (i.e. method A above). When you instruct WD to do a
project-wide title block update, WD first searches each drawing for any block that
carries an attribute named WD_TB. If found, WD assumes that it has found the
drawing’s title block (and skips any search for a “.wdt” file, per Method A above).
WD extracts the WD_TB attribute value where the mapping information is stored.
The format is & lt; attribute name & gt; = & lt; LINEx & gt; ; & lt; attribute name & gt; = & lt; LINEx & gt; ;…
Using the previous example, this is what the WD_TB attribute value would be:
PROJ_TITLE=LINE1;DRAW_TITLE1=LINE2;DRAW_TITLE2=DWGDESC;PROJ_NUM=LINE4…
Miscellaneous Tools
You can include other non-WD-mapped attributes as well in this mapping file. For
example, the line:
6-90
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
Title Block Setup Wizard
WD supplies a wizard to help you set up your title block “mapping”.
Select the WD pull-down menu. Under the Project sub-menu, select Title Block
Setup. This dialog displays.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-91
Select your preferred method and click OK.
To set up a project-specific mapping file that will only
be referenced for drawings in the current project. The
filename will be the same as the project but with a
“wdt” extension.
Default.wdt
To set up a default mapping file in the project’s
subdirectory, that will be referenced if a project specific
file is not found and if a WD_TB attribute is not present
on the title block.
Default.wdt
To set up a default mapping file in the default WD
subdirectory that will be referenced if a project specific
file is not found and if a WD_TB attribute is not present
on the title block.
WD_TB attribute
method
The title block itself carries an invisible attribute with a
value that defines the mapping between the title block
and WD. No external “.wdt” file is needed - the
mapping information is all self-contained on the title
block itself.
If you select either .WDT method and no existing file is found, you must identify
your title block’s AutoCAD block name.
The next dialog is used to define your attribute “mapping”. Each drop-down list
next to the valid WD values contains a list of your title block's attributes. Select
the attribute from each list to “map” to its corresponding WD value. Each Pick
Miscellaneous Tools
Project.wdt file
Miscellaneous Tools
6-92
Miscellaneous Tools
button next to the WD values can be used to pick an attribute right on your
drawing. This is useful if you do not know the name of the attribute.
For the WD drawing specific and Plotting values select DWG Values.
The dialogs also have a button that allows you to “map” your attributes to text
constants or AutoLISP values. Click on the User Defined button to add these
Miscellaneous Tools
6-93
What if Title Block Consists of Multiple Blocks?
If your title block / revision block consists of multiple blocks, you can encode two
or more block names into the “.wdt” file. You can even encode wildcards into the
block name that WD searches for.
For example, the following line encoded in the “.wdt” file will trigger WD to look for
and update not only a block called “TB” but also two other blocks.
BLOCK = TB,TB-REV,TB-ISSUE
Here is a “wild-card” example. Your drawing could have any of three different title
block sizes, perhaps named TITLE-SIZEB, TITLE-SIZEC, or TITLE-SIZED. The
following line encoded in the “.wdt” file will trigger WD to find and update the title
block no matter what “size” is used on the drawing.
BLOCK = TITLE-SIZE*
Mapping AutoLISP or System Variable Values to the Title Block
You can vector to the title block system variable values or values extracted by
AutoLISP programs. For example, let’s say that your system’s environment
variable “USERNAME” contains a value that needs to show up on the drawing title
block. You have set up your default.wdt file to map WD’s “LINE12” value to
attribute “DWGBY” on your standard title block. Now you’d like to automatically
have LINE12 point at the USERNAME environment variable so that, during title
block update, the USERNAME value goes to LINE12 which, in turn, sends it on to
the “DWGBY” attribute on the title block.
Miscellaneous Tools
“mapping” values. Select the attribute from the drop-down list, enter your value in
the edit box, and Update List.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-94
Miscellaneous Tools
Here’s how to do it: Encode the AutoLISP (getenv “ “) function into the LINE12
value for your current project description data.
Now when you run the Title Block update, make sure that LINE12 is selected.
During the update WD will evaluate the expression (getenv “USERNAME”),
retrieve the environment value, and write that value out to the attribute that is
mapped to LINE12 (mapped in the “.wdt” file or on the WD_TB attribute value
carried by the title block).
If the expression is a full AutoLISP function, it MUST return a string value (not an
integer, real, list, or nil value!). The program must be encoded into the project
description data as “(load “filename.lsp”)”. This means that it must be self-starting
upon load.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-95
Customizing the “LINEx” Labels Shown in the Dialogs
1. Create a file called either projname_wdtitle.wdl or default_wdtitle.wdl in the
project subdirectory. Use any generic text editor like the Windows Accessories “notepad” or “wordpad” programs.
2. The file should contain one line per label in the format LINEx=label. The
entries do not have to be in order and line numbers may be skipped.
LINE1=Proj Title
LINE2=Dwg Title1
LINE3=Dwg Title2
LINE4=Proj no
LINE5=Status
LINE6=Date
LINE7=Rev letter
...
3. Save and exit the ASCII text file.
4. Pop back into AutoCAD and test.
You may create different .wdl files for different projects. The search sequence is
as follows:
1. Look in the same directory as the project's .WDP file for a file called
PROJNAM_WDTITLE.WDL
2. Look in the same directory as the project's .WDP file for a file called
DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDL
3. If WD_ACADPATHFIRST flag is present in wd.env file, look for
DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDL in ACAD paths
4. Look for DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDL in the WD USER directory
5. If WD_SUP_ALT is defined in the wd.env file, look for
DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDL in the specified path
6. Look for DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDL in base WD directory
7. Look for DEFAULT_WDTITLE.WDL in ACAD paths (if
WD_ACADPATHFIRST flag isn't set in wd.env)
Miscellaneous Tools
The generic “LINEx” labels that display in the various title block and project info
dialogs can be customized to match up with the field names in your title block.
Carefully follow this procedure:
6-96
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
Project-Wide Title Block Update
Using the example title block above, let’s say that you need to change the
“STATUS” value of all drawings in your project to “REL FIELD”. You also need to
change the status date to “11-26-2001”, and since two more drawings have been
added to the project drawing set somewhere in the middle, you need to renumber
the sheet values and change the sheet max value from 45 to 47.
Pick the PROJ toolbar button to bring up the Project dialog. Click Edit in the
upper right hand corner. A list of the current values for the project-wide LINEx
values display.
You change the value for LINE5 to “REL FIELD”. This is the entry that will map to
the title block’s STATUS attribute. Likewise you edit LINE6 (STATUS_DATE).
Clicking OK dismisses this edit dialog.
Now you select the Update TB button, just to the left of the Edit button. The
dialog shown below displays allowing you to identify the data lines you want to
write out to each title block in your project. Click LINE5, LINE6, SHEET, and
SHEETMAX. In addition, pick the Re-sequence SHEET values and enter a
starting value. Click OK Project-Wide. Select ALL drawings to process from
your project list, and click OK. WD then quickly calls up each drawing, finds the
drawing’s title block (via Method A or B above), and makes the changes to the
Miscellaneous Tools
6-97
Language Utilities
Language Conversion Overview
This utility helps you convert your component description text from one language
to another. It processes the following text on schematic and panel components:
• Description text
• Switch position text
This utility can be run on your whole project, selected drawings, the current
drawing, and even selected objects on the current drawing. You define which
languages to swap and whether you want WD to only swap on an exact match or
allow it to do partial match conversion.
Select the Language Swap button under the Proj fly-out. Use the
dialog below to pick the “From” language and the “To” language. Also pick from
the options for how WD is to handle multiple lines of the component description
Miscellaneous Tools
attribute names mapped to LINE5, LINE6, SHEET and SHEETMAX. It also resequences the SHEET values as it goes.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-98
Miscellaneous Tools
text. By default, the conversion will look for exact matches on the description
labels you select with partial match as an option.
Click OK and the components or drawings you want to process. When WD
finishes it displays a report of the results, what was successfully translated and
what was not. You can use this report to “surf” to the problem areas (where a
phrase could not be translated) and make manual edits one by one. If desired,
you can add more phrases to the translation table (see Language Setup) and rerun the language swap to obtain more satisfactory results.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-99
Language Conversion Setup
Select the Edit Language button under the Proj fly-out. WD opens the
current language table (default is \viawd\wd\wd_lang1.mdb) and displays it for you
to examine and modify. You can add or delete phrases and edit specific phrase
translations. You can add a new language or dialect or remove one.
Note: Language matches are NOT case sensitive but phrase substitutions
are made exactly as entered in the language table.
Add Language
Enter the language name and click OK. A new column is added to the look-up
database with a blank entry for each existing phrase.
Miscellaneous Tools
A database table in Microsoft Access format drives the Language Conversion
utility. The default file name is wd\wd_lang1.mdb. You can examine and edit this
file with Access or use WD’s editor and modify this language look-up table from
within AutoCAD.
6-100
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
Delete Language
Select the language you wish to delete.
Edit Specific Phrase
Select a phrase from the displayed language. The translation for each language
is shown in the lower dialog. To edit a specific phrase, click on the phrase in the
lower dialog. A small edit dialog is displayed where you enter the translated
phrase.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-101
When you select OK, the new phrase is displayed in the translation list.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-102
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
Add New Phrase
The New Phrase button will add a blank entry at the end of each language list.
The new entry will be displayed in the lower dialog translation list. Edit each blank
phrase as described above.
Copy Phrase
Select a phrase in the upper dialog display of phrases. The Copy Phrase button
will add a copy of each translation of this currently selected phrase at the end of
each language list. Edit each phrase as described above.
Delete Phrase
Select the phrase in the upper dialog display of phrases then select the Delete
Phrase button. You are asked to confirm the deletion before removing the
phrase.
Language Mapping for WD Prompts and Messages
As WD works, many times there are prompts and messages indicating what you
should do next. By default these are in English. WD provides a way to map these
Miscellaneous Tools
6-103
As you can see, the database supplied with WD needs to be modified. Only the
US (English) column is complete. You may update the values in the existing
columns or add your own column and enter in the values.
To direct WD to use the prompts in your language column you must update the
WD.ENV file. Exit AutoCAD before you edit this file. You will find the WD.ENV file
in the WD support directory. Add the following line:
WD_MSG,language
where “language” corresponds to your column heading in the WD_MSG.MDB file.
For example, if you want WD to use the prompts and messages from the ITALIAN
column, the line should read WD_MSG,ITALIAN.
Troubleshooting Utilities
WD Audit / Problem Fixer utility
This utility can be used to identify and clean up some types of
problems that might affect a “smart” WD drawing. Select the WD Audit program
Miscellaneous Tools
messages to another language. The mapping is set up in an Access database file
called WD_MSG.MDB.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-104
Miscellaneous Tools
from the RPT fly-out. Select to process the current drawing or the project. Pick
the categories you want WD to check and click OK.
Wire Gap Pointers -- Looks for and fixes problems related to wires that have
gaps across other wires.
Bogus pointers -- Looks for and cleans up wires pointing to non-existent wire
numbers (this is the opposite of wire number “floaters”). Also looks for bad color/
gauge label pointers.
Unconnected wires -- AUDIT will draw a red triangle around the end of any wire
that appears to be unconnected. AUDIT also checks for and erases any/all zerolength wire segments.
Wire Number - Networks -- AUDIT will clean up wire networks with existing wire
numbers making sure that each wire in the network has the correct pointer to the
network's wire number. It also checks for missing or repeated wire numbers.
“Floaters” -- Looks for and erases wire numbers that are not linked to a wire
network (i.e. the wire was manually erased but wire number remains).
Components without catalog information -- AUDIT will report any parent/
stand-alone component without catalog information.
Component connections -- AUDIT will report on any components that carry
connection attributes with no connected wires.
Lines/Wires -- AUDIT will draw a red outline around each wire entity (i.e. each
LINE entity that is on a layer defined in WD CONFIG as a “wire” layer).
Refresh blocks/attributes -- AUDIT does a regen on each block insert found on
the drawing. This can restore attributes that become “unselectable”.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-105
Drawing Integrity Check
Sometimes a drawing can carry some bad AutoCAD information that can cause
WD some problems, especially when trying to freshen the scratch database. If this
happens you may want to run the Integrity check on the project's drawings. Select
Reports/Misc & gt; debug & gt; Dwg files integrity chk on the pull-down menu.
Select the drawings you wish to process from the project. If any problems are
found then a message is written to the command line window.
Clean Drawings
Select drawings from your project and have each inserted as an exploded block
into a blank, empty new drawing. This process can remove corrupt entities that
may accumulate in some AutoCAD drawings. Select Reports/Misc & gt; debug & gt;
Clean dwg script util on the pull-down menu. Then select which drawings you
want to process.
MDB Debug Trace
If you receive a message that WD is having trouble updating your project's scratch
database file, you may want to turn on the MDB Debug Trace. This can help track
down the problem. Select Reports/Misc & gt; debug & gt; Debug Trace Mode & gt; MDB
debug trace ON on the pull-down menu.
Miscellaneous Tools
The WD Audit utility displays a report of detected problems or potential problems.
You can save this file for reference or “surf” the file to view and correct the errors.
6-106
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
Conversion Utilities
Conversion Toolbar
To display the WD Conversion Toolbar, select Toolbars & gt; dumb dwg convert
tools from the WD pull-down menu.
The Conversion Tools are meant to make it a little easier for you to take a drawing
created using something other than WD and change it so that you can use a
number of the WD drafting/edit utilities.
Convert “Dumb” Block to WD Schematic
From the Conversion Toolbar, select the Convert to Smart icon. This utility is
designed to take non-WD blocks or graphics representing a symbol and replace it
with a WD block and transfer the attribute or text values to this new WD block.
1. Pick your “dumb” non-WD block containing attributes and/or text entities.
2. Pick a WD block from the icon menu to use in its place. (See Managing
the WD Library for creating/modifying the WD symbols).
3. From the dialog that displays, assign text/attribute values to WD attribute
names.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-107
=
Next to each WD Attribute name is an “=” button. Select a value from the list at
the left and then pick the “=”button next to the desired WD attribute. This transfers
the value to that attribute.
+
Next to each WD Attribute name there is a “+” button. Select a value from the list
at the left and then pick the “+” button next to the target WD attribute. This will
append the value to the end of the current value for that attribute.
Pick
Next to each WD Attribute name there is a Pick button. Use this to pick text/
attribute objects from the drawing to assign to the WD attribute.
Hide
Toggle the appropriate Hide button to make the WD attribute visible or invisible.
Delete original non-WD block
If you selected a non-WD block initially, check this box if you want the block
deleted once you’ve mapped all of the attributes.
Delete “Picked” Text
If you want to replace the picked text with the new WD attribute, then make sure
this box is toggled “on”. If you want to leave the selected text as is, then make
sure you turn this option off.
Miscellaneous Tools
If your “dumb” block has attributes, or you picked some text entities, then the
dialog will include buttons to make it easier to assign your values to WD attributes.
6-108
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
If no attributes or text were picked then the dialog’s appearance is a bit different.
Note: If you exit out before you are finished mapping your attributes/text to
WD attributes, use the Add/Edit utility to continue from where you left
off.
Convert/Edit WD Attributes
Select the Add/Edit icon from the Conversion Toolbar. This allows you to
continue what you started with Convert Dumb Block to WD Schematic. Use this if
you did not finish mapping values from your non-WD block. Select the block for
Miscellaneous Tools
6-109
Note: If you want to add an attribute to your block use Add Attribute.
Convert Wire Number
Select the Convert Wire Number icon from the Conversion Toolbar. Use this
if you have a drawing not created using WD. It makes it easy to take an AutoCAD
text object and convert it to a WD wire number. Select the line near the wire
number text. Then select the text. The text immediately converts to a WD wire
number block that is associated to the selected line “wire”.
Note: If the line selected is not on a valid wire layer (see Config) you will
automatically enter WD's Wire Layer utility so you can add the wire
layer to the list if you wish or move the line to an existing wire layer.
Convert Source Arrow
From the Conversion Toolbar, select the Convert Source Arrow icon. Use
this tool to replace a non-WD source arrow with a smart WD source arrow and
map the information to the new WD source.
1. Select your non-WD source block and/or any text related to it that you might
want to map to the new WD source.
2. Select the wire end for the Source.
Miscellaneous Tools
additional attributes. Optionally, select any non-WD block or text objects to map
values to the WD attributes.
6-110
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
3. Define the Source Signal Code.
4. Map/define attribute values.
Convert Destination Arrow
From the Conversion Toolbar, select the Convert Destination Arrow icon.
Use this to replace a non-WD destination arrow with a smart WD destination
arrow.
1. Select your non-WD destination block and/or any text related to it that you
might want to map to the new WD destination.
2. Select the wire end for the Destination.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-111
3. Define the Destination Signal Code.
Miscellaneous Tools
4. Map/define attribute values.
Add Attribute to Block
On the Conversion Toolbar select the Add Attribute icon. Use this utility to
add an attribute to one insert instance of a block. The block does not need to be a
WD block.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-112
Miscellaneous Tools
Select the block. Define the attribute name, value, height, justification, and
visibility.
Select the attribute location.
Convert Text to Attribute Definition
From the Conversion Toolbar, select the Convert Text To Attribute Definition
icon. Use this to convert a text object into an attribute definition object.
Select the text object.
Define the attribute name.
Note: This is not an attribute associated to an already inserted block -- this is
an attribute definition possibly on a library symbol that becomes an
attribute when the symbol drawing itself is inserted as a block into
another drawing.
Convert “Dumb” Ladder
From the Conversion Toolbar, select the Dumb Ladder Convert icon. Use
this to insert the WD ladder line-reference number intelligence to the drawing’s
ladder(s). This does not convert the existing symbols on the ladder to be “smart”,
Miscellaneous Tools
6-113
Enter the ladder’s first line reference, spacing, and number of rungs. Click OK
and then pick the insertion point for the MLR block (1st line reference number of a
ladder). Insert it in the upper left-hand corner of the ladder, in line with the very
top ladder rung or the ladder’s first line reference number. Repeat this process for
each ladder on your drawing.
If you want to reuse the existing drawing’s line reference TEXT entities, make the
new MLR line reference number attribute invisible (use WD’s ATTR Hide tool).
Convert VIA 6.0 Drawings to VIA-WD
If you used VIA Schematic or VIA Schematic Jr Version 6.0, you may have some
drawings you wish to use with the newer VIA WD product. WD provides a
conversion tool that will take your VIA 6.0 drawings and convert its intelligence to
the intelligence that WD expects.
Miscellaneous Tools
but any new components or wires added to the ladder will tag and cross-reference
per the ladder’s now “smart” line reference numbering.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-114
Miscellaneous Tools
From the WD toolbar select Reports/Misc & gt; debug & gt; Convert VIA drawings to
WD.
You need to supply a little information. Enter your VIA 6.0 project name or Browse
for it. Enter a WD project name, either existing or new. If you are adding the
drawings to an existing WD project make sure you select that option, otherwise
the .WDP project file will be overwritten. You also have the option to either
overwrite the VIA 6.0 drawings with the converted drawings or leave the original
drawings alone and create copies in another location. If you elect to create copies,
enter the new location for the converted drawings.
WD will present a list of drawings in your VIA 6.0 project. Select the drawings you
wish to convert. WD then calls up each drawing, converts the intelligence and
saves it. A log file is created named projnam_cv.log and saved in the same
directory as the .WDP file. The log file contains information about any problems
encountered in the conversion.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-115
Block and Attribute Mapping
COMPSWAP Table
The COMPSWAP table tells WD how to swap blocks. It is simply a list of the
blocks used on your VIA drawings with a corresponding list of WD blocks. When
the converter is run, WD looks for the block in the VIA list and if it finds it, swaps it
out for the block in the WD list.
If the origin for the WD block is different than the VIA block enter an XY Offset. If
you need to use multiple WD blocks to “build up” the VIA symbol, use an available
WD command $C=wd_via_cv_3unit followed by the individual block names.
Miscellaneous Tools
For this conversion to be effective WD needs to have information to intelligently
swap WD type blocks with the blocks used on your VIA drawings. It also needs to
know how to map the values carried on each attribute on the blocks. This
information is all supplied in an Access database file called WDVIACMP.MDB.
6-116
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
ATTRMAP Table
The ATTRMAP table tells WD how to map the information held on the attributes
within each block. For each attribute used on the VIA blocks, enter the WD
attribute name in the next column to create the attribute map. Then when WD
swaps out the blocks, the information carried on the individual attributes will not
be lost.
IOATTRMAP Table
The IOATTRMAP table is the same as the ATTRMAP table but is used when a
PLC block is swapped out. This accounts for some of the same attributes being
mapped differently for PLC blocks then other blocks.
Note: This program is still in the preliminary stage of development.
“Publish To” Utilities
Publish to Web
Use this utility to build up a web page of selected drawings in your current WD
project. WD saves the web page and associated support files in a folder that you
Miscellaneous Tools
6-117
Select PROJECT & gt; Publish to the WEB from the WD pull-down menu.
Your Web page and its configuration files are stored in a directory in your file
system to enable preview and testing before posting to the Web. Choose the
folder location where these files are to be stored (if the folder does not exist, WD
will automatically create it).
Image Format Options
DWF
Drawing Web Format (DWF) files are vector-based representations of
dwg drawing files. To view them, install the free Volo View Express
viewer. WD's publish to web function sets up views that allow for
intra-drawing surfing from a component tag/desc list.
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) files are raster-based. Not
recommended for large files with lots of text. JPEG format does NOT
support the intra-drawing surfing from a component tag/desc list.
PNG
Portable Network Graphics (PNG) files are raster-based like JPEG
but provide a higher quality output. PNG format does NOT support
the intra-drawing surfing feature.
Miscellaneous Tools
specify. Outside of WD, you will need to “post” your web page by copying the files
in this folder up to a web site.
6-118
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
Image Background Color
This is set from AutoCAD's “Plotter Manager” command. Select the appropriate
“PublishToWeb xxx.pc3” configuration to bring up the Plotter Configuration Editor.
Select “Device and Document Settings” tab -- & gt; “Custom Properties”. Set the
background color here.
Once you've selected the drawings from your project to include you will be asked
to define a few options.
Banner text
This is your web page's banner text string. WD defaults to the
current project's “.wdp” file name
Title text
This text will appear just below the banner on your web page.
WD defaults to the current project's first four project
description “LINEx” values.
TAB to output
WD uses AutoCAD's “Plot to DWF” function to create the
drawing images displayed in your web page. The plot mode
can be “Model”, “Layout1 tab”, or “As saved” which means it
plots whatever state the drawing was last filed in.
Config Name
WD will use this plot config file for generating the .dwf
drawing images. To override, set WD_DWF_PC3 in WD's
wd.env environment settings file.
Build lists
WD will set up the ability to automatically “surf” or zoom up on
components on the current web-displayed drawing image.
This is easily done by picking from a component list. This
option slows down the DWF plotting process somewhat, but
on the plus side, it provides for this intra-drawing surfing
feature once the page creation process is complete.
Allow Drag/Drop
WD will take a copy of your “.dwg” files or create “.dxf” file
copies of your drawings and post them with the web page.
Users can drag and drop these from your web page straight
into their own AutoCAD session.
Miscellaneous Tools
6-119
Once WD processes each selected drawing the dialog shown below will display.
Miscellaneous Tools
Use the Preview button to take a sneak peek at what your web page will look like.
Click your right mouse button and select Named Views from the menu.
If you selected to include your drawings in with the web file pages, then the iDrop
function will be available from your web page. Browse to a drawing on your web
page, click on the little symbol below the bottom-left corner of the image. You can
then drop the .dwg file from the web page straight into your AutoCAD session.
6-120
Miscellaneous Tools
Miscellaneous Tools
Publish to XML
This WD utility outputs selected drawings from your project in Autodesk's
“DesignXML” file format. The .XML converted files are placed in the same folder
as the existing .dwg files. Select PROJECT & gt; Publish to XML from the WD pulldown menu.
Select the drawings you wish to process and WD creates each .XML file.
Icon Menus
In This Chapter. . . .
- Overview
- Alternate Icon Menu Files
- Tips and Hints
- Icon Menu Wizard
- Modify Icon Menu File Directly
:
7-2
Icon Menus
Overview
WD supplies two default icon menus, one for schematic symbols and the other for
panel symbols. Each menu is driven by a text file. The schematic icon menu is
defined by the contents of file \viawd\wd\wd_menu.dat and the panel menu is
\viawd\wd\wd_pmenu.dat.
Icon Menus
When you select the INSERT Component command, WD defaults to the
wd_menu.dat icon menu.
If you select the INSERT Panel Footprint command, WD defaults to the
wd_pmenu.dat icon menu.
You modify or expand the icon menus by editing the underlying icon menu text
file. You can use a generic text editor and edit it manually or you can use WD’s
Icon Menu Wizard.
Alternate Icon Menu Files
WD defaults to icon menu wd_menu.dat for schematic symbols and
wd_pmenu.dat for panel symbols. These menu files are found in the \viawd\wd
subdirectory. You can create alternate or project-specific icon menus and have
WD automatically use them instead of these defaults.
An icon menu can be tied to a project so that when the project is active, WD
references that special icon menu instead of WD’s normal menu. The alternate
menu’s full path and file name is saved in the project’s “.wdp” file (entry “+[2]”…
value). You may save an alternate menu for schematic symbols and a separate
alternate menu for panel symbols.
To assign specific icon menu files to a project, select the PROJ toolbar
button to display the PROJECT dialog. Make sure that the desired project is the
Icon Menus
7-3
current, active project. Then select the Symbol LIB button on the dialog. This
subdialog is displayed showing the default schematic information:
Icon Menus
Enter the full path to the WD icon menu file into the Icon menu file edit box on this
dialog. Then click OK. This menu will now become the default schematic menu
for the current project. If you make custom slides and/or slide libraries for this
menu, keep them together with the icon menu file. Copy them to the same
subdirectory as the menu file itself. WD always looks for menu slides in the active
icon menu file’s directory.
To change the default panel icon menu, click on the Panel radio button at the top
of the dialog. Enter the new panel menu file name in the edit box.
7-4
Icon Menus
Tips and Hints
Ugly Slides
Avoid adding ugly slides to WD’s icon menu system. If you use the actual library
symbol as the graphics for your new slide, you run a much greater risk of this
happening. Instead, create a simplified, perhaps exaggerated “cartoon” version of
your symbol. Add a bit of color. Use this as the basis for your new slide file.
Icon Menus
Slow Response
You may find that the slides you’ve made seem to take longer to display than the
stock slides provided with WD. This is because the WD slides are accessed from
what is called an AutoCAD slide library while the ones you’ve made are probably
stand-alone slide files. AutoCAD seems to process slides in a slide library much
faster than individual ones. The solution is to take all of your custom slides and
combine them into your own slide library file (see regular AutoCAD documentation
for instructions on how to do this). Then edit your WD_MENU.dat file and change
the references from your stand-alone slide files to the corresponding entries in
your new slide library. You should enjoy quicker menu response.
Icon Menu Wizard
Overview
The Icon Menu Wizard can be used to add or modify icons for each of the
following functions.
• Insert a symbol from the schematic or panel symbol library
• Trigger a sub-menu to display
• Issue an AutoCAD or WD command
Run the Icon Menu Wizard under the WD & gt; Reports/Misc pull-down menu. On
the first dialog prompt, select the menu data file you wish to modify.
Icon Menus
7-5
The opening page of the menu displays.
Adding a New Symbol to the Icon Menu
This is the basic sequence for adding a new library symbol and icon to WD’s
menuing system:
1. Create your new WD compatible library symbol. For schematic symbols,
follow the guidelines in the chapter on Symbol Libraries regarding the symbol “.dwg” file naming convention and required attributes.
2. Run the Icon Menu Wizard under the WD & gt; Reports/Misc pull-down menu.
Select the menu file you wish to modify and add the new component symbol reference (see example below).
3. Select the appropriate INSERT Component command and test your new
symbol insert.
You’ve created a special, new schematic library symbol HZS11.dwg (plus the
vertical version VZS11.dwg). Now you’re ready to add the new symbol to WD’s
icon menuing system. Select the Icon Menu Wizard choice under the Reports/
Icon Menus
Select the icon that you want to change and select a function.
7-6
Icon Menus
Misc sub-menu on the WD pull-down (not the toolbar). On the first dialog prompt,
select the schematic menu data file wd_menu.dat.
Icon Menus
The opening page of the menu displays.
You decide that you want to put the new symbol on the MISC page of the icon
menu. Pick on that icon. The MISC sub-menu displays. You decide to show it in
the blank spot on the top row of this icon menu page. Pick on the blank icon
button, top row, and right-hand side.
Icon Menus
7-7
The menu wizard displays the “Menu Icon Function” dialog. The question is,
“What should happen when this button is selected?”.
There are three items that need to be defined for this icon menu button choice: the
block file name, a “slide” image name, and the list bar text.
The symbol’s file name can be typed into the edit box or you can enter it using one
of the following methods.
Browse
To find an existing Wblocked “.dwg” file to assign to the icon.
Active
To insert the full current drawing as a block. The name of the
current drawing is inserted into the edit box but the full path
name may be needed if the drawing is not in WD’s symbol
library or “user” sub-directory search path or the standard
AutoCAD support paths.
Icon Menus
Select the Ins Component choice and click OK. A large dialog displays that
prompts for specific information about the component that is to insert when the
icon button is picked.
7-8
Icon Menus
Pick
Your symbol has been inserted on the drawing as a block.
Pick right on it so the wizard can retrieve its block name. If
the block is not in WD’s library or “user” sub-directory search
path or AutoCAD’s support file search path, then you will
need to add the full path name to the block name.
The slide name can be typed into the edit box, or enter it using one of the
following methods.
Icon Menus
Browse
Pick the & lt; slide & gt; .sld file from the standard file dialog
(assumes you’ve already created an AutoCAD slide “.sld” file
of the symbol using AutoCAD’s mslide command).
Active
Your new & lt; slide & gt; .sld slide file has the same name as the
active drawing.
Pick
A symbol with the slide name has been inserted on the
drawing as a block. Pick it from the drawing to obtain the
& gt; .sld file name.
Same As
Your & lt; slide & gt; .sld slide file name is the same as the block
name entered above.
Note: If you are using a slide in a slide library, you must enter the slide’s
name in the format “library_name(slide_name)”.
If you have not created the slide image and would like to have it created
automatically from the current screen image, click on the Create Slide toggle.
The Menu Wizard will run the AutoCAD MSLIDE command on your current screen
image to create the .SLD file.
Enter the text that you want to display in the slide bar list on the left side of the
menu dialog.
Once you have entered the block name and either a slide name or text for the list
bar, click OK. Your new symbol will be added to the menu. It will be available the
next time you select the INSERT Component command.
Adding “Insert Circuit” to the Icon Menu
This is the basic sequence for adding an icon to insert a circuit to WD’s menu
system:
1. Create your new WD compatible circuit. See the Tutorial for information
about saving circuits.
2. Run the Icon Menu Wizard under the WD & gt; Reports/Misc pull-down menu.
Select the menu file you wish to modify and add the new circuit reference
(see example below).
3. Select the appropriate INSERT Component command and test your new circuit insert.
You've created a circuit MYCIRC.dwg. Now you're ready to add it to WD's icon
menuing system. Select the Icon Menu Wizard choice under the Reports/Misc
Icon Menus
7-9
sub-menu on the WD pull-down (not the toolbar). On the first dialog prompt, select
the schematic menu data file wd_menu.dat.
The opening page of the menu displays.
Icon Menus
You decide that you want to put the new symbol on the MISC page of the icon
menu. Pick on that icon. The MISC sub-menu displays. Pick on a blank icon
button.
7-10
Icon Menus
Icon Menus
The menu wizard displays the “Menu Icon Function” dialog. The question is,
“What should happen when this button is selected?”
Select the Ins Circuit choice and click OK. A large dialog displays that prompts
for specific information about the circuit that is to insert when the icon button is
picked.
There are three items that can be defined for this icon menu button choice: the
circuit file name, a “slide” image name, and the list bar text.
The circuit’s file name can be typed into the edit box or you can enter it using one
of the following methods.
Browse
To find an existing “.dwg” file to assign to the icon.
Active
To insert the full current drawing as a circuit. The name of
the current drawing is inserted into the edit box but the full
path name may be needed if the drawing is not in WD’s
symbol library or “user” sub-directory search path or the
standard AutoCAD support paths.
Icon Menus
7-11
The slide name can be typed into the edit box, or enter it using one of the
following methods.
Pick the & lt; slide & gt; .sld file from the standard file dialog
(assumes you’ve already created an AutoCAD slide “.sld” file
of the symbol using AutoCAD’s mslide command).
Active
Your new & lt; slide & gt; .sld slide file has the same name as the
active drawing.
Pick
A symbol with the slide name has been inserted on the
drawing as a block. Pick it from the drawing to obtain the
& gt; .sld file name.
Same As
Your & lt; slide & gt; .sld slide file name is the same as the block
name entered above.
Note: If you are using a slide in a slide library, you must enter the slide’s
name in the format “library_name(slide_name)”.
If you have not created the slide image and would like to have it created
automatically from the current screen image, click on the Create Slide toggle.
The Menu Wizard will run the AutoCAD MSLIDE command on your current screen
image to create the .SLD file.
Enter the text that you want to display in the slide bar list on the left side of the
menu dialog.
Once you have entered the block name and either a slide name or text for the list
bar, click OK. Your new symbol will be added to the menu. It will be available the
next time you select the INSERT Component command.
Adding a New Icon Menu Page
You can add new menu pages to the WD icon menu and then populate them with
your own custom symbols. Each new page can have icon selections that cascade
down to other new menu pages.
Start the Icon Menu Wizard and select the schematic WD_MENU.DAT file.
Icon Menus
Browse
7-12
Icon Menus
Decide which unused icon button you want to use to activate your new menu
page. You can pick from the main opening menu or from any submenu page.
Let’s say you decide to add your Spcl Syms menu button right on the opening
menu page in the first open spot, just to the right of the INSTRU button. Click on
this blank button.
Icon Menus
Note that the right hand column of empty buttons is off-limits. This is reserved for
WD’s “Dyna-stack”.
Define this icon as a Sub-Menu Trigger and click OK.
You need to define a slide name and/or text to appear in the select list bar. In
addition, you must define a unique menu number for the new sub-menu, a menu
template, and a menu title.
The slide name can be manually typed into the edit box or can be selected by
using one of the following methods:
Browse
Pick the & lt; slide & gt; .sld file from a standard file dialog (assumes
you’ve already created an AutoCAD slide “.sld” file of the
symbol using AutoCAD’s mslide command).
Active
Your new & lt; slide & gt; .sld slide file has the same name as the
active drawing.
Icon Menus
Pick
7-13
A symbol with the slide name has been inserted on the
drawing as a block. Pick on the block to capture the block’s
name and build the corresponding & lt; slide & gt; .sld file name.
Note: If you are using a slide in a slide library, you must enter the slide name
in the format “library_name(slide_name)”.
If you have not created the slide image and would like to have it created
automatically from the current screen image, click on the Create Slide toggle.
The Menu Wizard will run the AutoCAD MSLIDE command on your current screen
image to create the .SLD file.
For WD to find your new sub-menu, it must be assigned a unique menu number.
WD has reserved numbers 1-99 for internal use. This means that your new menu
number must be unused and 100 or above. To make sure that you assign a
unique number, display a list of the menu numbers 100 and higher that are
already assigned. Do this by picking the List Used button next to the edit box.
WD supports a number of menu page styles or templates. The template simply
defines how many icon buttons you wish your new page to have.
Then enter the title text for your new menu page. Once you click OK, your trigger
icon and new sub-menu page will be added. The new sub-menu page will display
and allow you to define the functions for the blank icons.
Icon Menus
Enter the text that you want to show up in the slide bar list on the left side of the
menu dialog.
7-14
Icon Menus
Icon Menus
Note: If the selected icon was not blank, you may move the previous icon
function to the new sub-menu by clicking the toggle box under the
Menu Title.
Command Icon
An icon can be configured to trigger an AutoCAD command, trigger a WD
command, or run a script file. The icons that trigger insertion of multi-pole
schematic symbol assemblies and panel footprints are examples that require
encoding of special WD commands.
Let's say you have a new panel footprint you wish to add to the panel menu. Run
the Icon Menu Wizard and select the WD_PMENU.DAT menu file. Select the
menu icon for your new panel footprint. Select Command from the Menu function
dialog.
Icon Menus
7-15
To make it easier for you to build the appropriate command to insert a multi-pole
symbol or a panel symbol, select the List button.
For our example, let's say you want to add an icon that will insert a black flush
pushbutton, Allen-Bradley, catalog number 800T-A2A, with no rotation. Select the
command WD_INFP from the list. Once you return to the Command dialog you
must enter in the rest of the parameters.
“family”
Will be used for the catalog file look up table name.
“mfg”
Will be used for footprint lookup.
“cat”
The actual catalog number.
“assycode”
Catalog number assembly code (often blank).
“footprint”
Library symbol name.
Enter the slide name and text for select list bar as described previously.
Icon Menus
To see the command line parameters for a specific WD command, click on the
command in the list, the parameters will be displayed at the right. If quotation
marks are shown, then you should enclose the parameter value within quotation
marks.
7-16
Icon Menus
Cut and Paste Icon Function
Icon Menus
The Icon Menu Wizard allows you to delete an icon's function or move the
function from one icon to another. Perhaps you have an icon that inserts a library
symbol and you want to move that function to another sub-menu page. First,
select the icon that is currently defined to insert the symbol.
Since the icon is not blank, the Cut Contents button is enabled. Select it and
click OK. This will “blank” out the currently selected icon. Now find and click on
the icon you wish to move the existing function to. The same Menu Icon Function
dialog is displayed but now the Paste Previous “Cut” option is enabled.
The icon's contents including function, slide name, and text bar information will be
pasted into the new icon button position.
Updating Menu Slide
There are times when you might want to simply change the slide image
associated with an icon menu choice. The WD Icon Menu Wizard provides a
quick, easy way to reassign or reshoot a slide image.
Icon Menus
7-17
Run the Icon Menu Wizard under the WD & gt; Reports/Misc pull-down menu. On
the first dialog prompt, select the menu data file you wish to modify. The opening
page of the menu displays. Select the icon that you want to change.
The slide name can be typed into the edit box, or enter it using one of the
following methods.
Browse
Pick the & lt; slide & gt; .sld file from a standard file dialog (assumes
you’ve already created an AutoCAD slide “.sld” file of the
symbol using AutoCAD’s mslide command).
Active
Your new & lt; slide & gt; .sld slide file has the same name as the
active drawing.
Pick
A symbol with the slide name has been inserted on the
drawing as a block. Pick it from the drawing to obtain the
& lt; slide & gt; .sld file name.
Note: If you are using a slide in a slide library, you must enter the slide’s
name in the format “library_name(slide_name)”.
If you have not created the slide image and would like to have it created
automatically from the current screen image, click on the Create Slide toggle.
The Menu Wizard will run the AutoCAD MSLIDE command on your current screen
image to create the .SLD file.
Icon Menus
If the icon is already defined to perform a function (other than display a submenu), Menu Slide will be a choice. Once selected, the following dialog will be
displayed.
7-18
Icon Menus
Modify Icon Menu File Directly
Overview
There may be times when you want to bypass the Icon Menu Wizard and edit the
menu .DAT file directly. It is important to maintain the menu file structure,
otherwise your menu may not activate properly. A WD menu “.dat” file is a text file
that can be viewed and edited with any text editor (ex: WordPad or Notepad).
Icon Menus
ICON Menu's File Format
A portion of the WD_MENU.DAT file is reproduced here. Each menu page starts
with a “menu number” line preceded by two asterisks “**”. The next line is a WD
code (see Sub-Menu Page for codes) which defines the menu page format, i.e.
how many rows, how many icon buttons per row. The next line is the title, with
optional column labels, for the menu page. The rest of the lines define the
information for each icon button on the menu page. See the related topics for the
format for these lines.
**M18
D6
MISCELLANEOUS
Bell|s1(shan1b)|HAN1B
Buzzer|s1(shan1z)|HAN1Z
Horn|s1(shan1h)|HAN1H
||
Volt meter|s1(shvm1)|HVM1
Amp meter|s1(sham1)|HAM1
Battery|s1(shba1)|HBA1
Battery|s1(shba1r)|HBA1R
Electronics|s2(s_tronics)|$S=M28
Suppressor tag)|s2(shsu1)|HSU1
Suppressor|s2(shsu0)|HSU0
Ground|s1(shgnd2)|HGND2
Cable markers|s1(shw01)|$S=M30
Recptacles|s1(s_cnrdup)|$S=M29
Enclosure light|s1(s_ltenc)|HLT1ENC
Ground (chassis)|s1(shgnd1)|HGND1
||
||
||
||
User Circuits|s2(s_usr_ck)|$S=M19
Generic boxes|s1(s_box)|$S=M20
Black box builder|s1(shblkbox)|$C=(c:wd_bb)
Wire arrows-ref only|s1(s_a_ref)|$S=M26
Title Line
The title line which immediately follows the sub-menu page code is just the text
that is displayed in the title bar of the menu page. Optionally, the title line may
contain column labels. For example, say you have a menu page that contains
both parent components and the associated child components. Further, say that
columns 1 & 2 are the parent components and columns 3 & 4 are the child
Icon Menus
7-19
components. You may want to include the label “Parent” above columns 1 & 2,
and “Child” above columns 3 & 4. To do this your title line should read:
LIMIT SWITCHES {Parent,Parent,Child,Child}
The labels are separated from the title by a left bracket “{“. Then each label should
be separated by commas. Then finally a right bracket “}” to finish it off.
Each entry consists of three parts separated by “|” characters. The first part will
be the text that is displayed in the select list bar. The second part is the slide
name. You should include the path to the .SLD file if it is not in the \viawd\wd
subdirectory. If the slide is contained within a slide library the format here is
library_name(slide_name). The third part is the actual icon function. As
described earlier, the function can be a symbol name to insert, a sub-menu
trigger, or a command. The special switch added earlier using the menu wizard,
simply added a line that looked like this:
“Special Switch | hzs11.sld | HZS11”
Sub-Menu Trigger Menu Line
A sub-menu trigger line has the same 3 parts with the call to a sub-menu in the
3rd part. A sub-menu call format is “$S=M#” where # is a unique menu number.
This menu number directs WD to the correct menu sub-page.
**M0
D0
MAIN MENU
Push Button|s2(s_pb)|$S=M3
Selector Sw|s2(s_ss)|$S=M6
Limit Sw|s2(s_zs)|$S=M8
Relays|s2(s_cr)|$S=M1
Pres,Temp Sw|s2(s_ps_ts)|$S=M9
Flow,Level Sw|s2(s_fs_ls)|$S=M13
Other Sw|s2(s_msc_sw)|$S=M10
Timers|s2(s_td)|$S=M2
Terms,Conn|s2(s_trm_cn)|$S=M14
DOT|s1(shdot)|WDDOT
PLC I/O|s2(s_io)|$C=PLC
Pilot Lights|s2(s_lt)|$S=M4
Misc|s2(s_msc)|$S=M18
Fuses/CB|s2(s_cb_fu)|$S=M16
Mtr Ctrl|s2(s_mcc)|$S=M15
Icon Menus
Insert Component Menu Line
7-20
Icon Menus
Solenoid|s2(s_sv)|$S=M24
Instruments|s2(s_inst)|$S=M25
||
||
||
||
||
The sub-menu trigger added earlier using the Icon Menu Wizard added the
following line.
Icon Menus
Spcl Symbols | spclsyms.sld | $S=M101
Here is what this line means. “Spcl Syms” will display in the left-hand window of
the opening menu page. The slide that will be displayed in the icon box is
“spclsyms.sld'. When you select this icon, WD will display submenu page
“**M101”.
Remember to use menu pages above 99 when adding new pages. WD has
reserved 1-99 for its own use.
Sub-Menu Page
Go to the bottom of the WD_MENU.dat file. This is where you will enter the
definition for any new menu pages. The new Special Symbols sub-menu page
added using the Icon Menu Wizard added the following lines of text.
**M101
D2
SPECIAL SYMBOLS
||
||
||
||
||
||
||
||
Explanation
1st line: displays the menu page number (user created menu pages should
begin at 100).
2nd line: code that defines how many icon boxes will be in the new menu page.
D1
4W x 1H
D2
4W x 2H
D3
4W x 3H
D4
4W x 4H
D5
4W x 5H
Icon Menus
4W x 6H
D7
4W x 3H x 2 sections
D2W
4W x 2H with wider side list
D3W
4W x 3H with wider side list
D3WW
4W x 3H with much wider side list
D4W
4W x 4H with wider side list
D5W
4W x 5H with wider side list
D6W
4W x 6H with wider side list
D7W
4W x 7H with wide side list
DT
Text side list only (screen-wide), no icons
3rd line: gives the title that will appear at the top of the menu page.
4th + lines: one entry for each icon box, working across then down. A blank or
unused entry consists of two vertical line symbols ( | | ). The example above
shows 8 blank entries -- this corresponds to the “D2” icon box configuration, 4W x
2H = 8 icon boxes.
Icon Menus
D6
7-21
Icon Menus
7-22
Icon Menus
BOM and
Catalogs
In This Chapter. . . .
- Component Catalog Look-Up Tables
- Convert Catalog dBase Files to Access File
- Table Naming
- Catalog File Directory
- Modifying / Expanding Catalog Tables
- Catalog Database Table Structure
- Catalog Assignment
- Contact Quantity / Pin-List Look-Up
;
8-2
BOM and Catalogs
Component Catalog Look-Up Tables
Sample catalog information is furnished with the default WD installation. The
information is held in tables in an Access Database file (“.mdb”) which are
populated with sample vendor data. You must expand and modify these tables to
meet your specific BOM reporting needs. You can do this using tools provided
with WD or through the use of a database program that can read/write the Access
file format.
In earlier versions of WD, this catalog information was saved in generic dBase
(“.dbf”) files. This format is no longer supported and the separate files must be
converted to the Access database file with tables. WD has provided a conversion
tool to do this for you.
The MDB file is a single file that is named & lt; project & gt; _cat.mdb or default_cat.mdb.
If the project-specific .mdb file is used, it needs to be in the same subdirectory as
the & lt; project & gt; .wdp file is located.
BOM and Catalogs
Here is the WD search sequence:
1st Choice
& lt; project & gt; _cat.mdb (in project’s subdirectory)
2nd Choice
default_cat.mdb (in project’s subdirectory)
3rd Choice
default_cat.mdb (in user subdirectory)
4th Choice
default_cat.mdb in catalogs subdirectory
Catalog information can be carried on parent or stand-alone components that
have MFG, CAT, and optional ASSYCODE attributes. Assigning catalog
information to a component’s attributes can be done at component insertion time
or any time later during an EDIT of the component.
Convert Catalog dBase Files to Access File
In earlier versions of WD, catalog information was saved in generic dBase (“.dbf”)
files. This format is no longer supported and the separate files must be converted
to the Access database file with tables. WD has provided a conversion tool to do
this for you. The MDB file is a single file that is named & lt; project & gt; _cat.mdb or
default_cat.mdb. Within the single file are many tables carrying the catalog
information.
BOM and Catalogs
8-3
To convert your existing dBase files use the conversion tool provided under the
VIA WD pull-down: Report/MISC-- & gt; debug-- & gt; Convert old catalogs to mdb.
BOM and Catalogs
You may convert your catalog files and your Panel footprint look up files at the
same time. Just check the appropriate boxes.
8-4
BOM and Catalogs
BOM and Catalogs
Below is a sample of what you might see as the program works.
New catalog mdb file to create: c:/viawd/wd/catalogs/default_cat.mdb
Build from catalog files in subdir: c:/viawd/wd/catalogs/
Old catalog dbf files will be preserved. OK to continue? (Y/N)
Creating table _PINLIST
Creating table _W0_CBLWIRES.., 4251 records copied
Creating table CR., 191 records copied
Creating table LS....., 527 records copied
Creating table LT1A., 158 records copied
Creating table LT1AM, 69 records copied
Creating table LT1AN, 34 records copied
Creating table LT1AP., 148 records copied
Creating table LT1B., 119 records copied
Creating table LT1BM, 69 records copied
Creating table LT1BP., 124 records copied
Creating table LT1C., 113 records copied
Creating table LT1CM, 63 records copied
Creating table LT1CN, 34 records copied
Creating table LT1CP., 124 records copied
Creating table LT1G., 159 records copied
Creating table LT1GM, 69 records copied
Creating table LT1GP., 148 records copied
Creating table LT1R., 160 records copied
Creating table LT1RM, 69 records copied
Creating table LT1RP., 148 records copied
Creating table LT1W., 119 records copied
Creating table LT1WM, 69 records copied
Creating table LT1WP., 124 records copied
Creating table LT1Y, 55 records copied
Creating table LT1YM, 44 records copied
Creating table LT1YP, 54 records copied
Creating table NP, 44 records copied
Creating table PB11..., 991 records copied
Creating table PB11L.., 3128 records copied
Creating table PB11M.., 789 records copied
Creating table PB11ML., 1748 records copied
Creating table PB12..., 991 records copied
Creating table PB12L..., 3128 records copied
Creating table PB12M..., 789 records copied
Creating table PB12ML.., 2108 records copied
Creating table PLCIO.., 510 records copied
Creating table SS112.., 274 records copied
Creating table SS112I..., 970 records copied
Creating table SS112L.., 264 records copied
Creating table SS112LI.., 872 records copied
Creating table SS112R.., 264 records copied
Creating table SS112RI........, 872 records copied
Creating table SS113.., 248 records copied
Creating table SS113B.., 242 records copied
Creating table SS113BI.., 1019 records copied
Creating table SS113I.., 1019 records copied
Creating table SS113L.., 246 records copied
Creating table SS113LI..., 872 records copied
BOM and Catalogs
Note: If you were using a catch-all MISC_CAT.DBF file, it will be converted to
a table called MISC_CAT in the new MDB file.
Table Naming
Each primary or stand-alone component type can have an associated table in
your Access mdb file. (See WD's MDB search sequence for the file name and
location for the catalog Access file.) This approach is taken for both performance
reasons and to exclude invalid choices (ex: you can’t assign a blue press-test
pilot part number to a standard red pilot light symbol). This means that there can
be multiple catalog tables for the same component family. For example, RED pilot
lights can have these catalog look-up tables in the \viawd\wd\catalogs\
default_cat.mdb file:
LT1R
For “red” pilot lights (for symbols HLT1R, VLT1R)
LT1RP
For “red press-test” pilot lights (symbols HLT1RP,
VLT1RP)
LT1RM
For “red master test” pilot lights (symbols HLT1RM,
VLT1RM)
LT1RN
For “red neon” pilot lights (symbols HLT1RN, VLT1RN)
Alternately, all master test and all neon pilot lights (of all colors) might be
combined into a single catalog table named LT.
BOM and Catalogs
Creating table SS113R.., 246 records copied
Creating table SS113RI........, 872 records copied
Creating table SS114., 161 records copied
Creating table SS122.., 274 records copied
Creating table SS122I.., 970 records copied
Creating table SS122LI..., 872 records copied
Creating table SS122R.., 248 records copied
Creating table SS122RI..., 872 records copied
Creating table SS123.., 248 records copied
Creating table SS123B.., 242 records copied
Creating table SS123BI.., 1019 records copied
Creating table SS123I..., 1019 records copied
Creating table SS123L.., 246 records copied
Creating table SS123LI...., 872 records copied
Creating table SS123R.., 246 records copied
Creating table SS123RI.., 872 records copied
Creating table SS124., 161 records copied
Creating table TD1F.., 682 records copied
Creating table TD1FT.., 682 records copied
Creating table TD1N.., 628 records copied
Creating table TD1NT.., 628 records copied
Creating table TRMS, 36 records copied
Creating table W0..., 358 records copied
WD catalog mdb file created: c:/viawd/wd/catalogs/default_cat.mdb
8-5
8-6
BOM and Catalogs
The program searches for a catalog data table based upon the following criteria:
BOM and Catalogs
1. Match on component’s block name minus its first character (the orientation
character “H” or “V”). For example, if the component being inserted or
edited is a standard, N.O. push-button, then the symbol’s block name is
probably either HPB11 or VPB11 (for horizontal or vertical insertion). WD
knocks off the first character of the block name. This yields “PB11”
whether the component is inserted horizontally or vertically. WD then
looks for and accesses a table in your MDB file named PB11.
2. If the block name is 8 characters or more, it starts lopping characters off of
the end of the block name and looks for a table name match. This continues until a match is found or there are less than 8 characters remaining in
the truncated block name. Example: full block name is
“HCR1MCTRL_W_SUPPR”. WD first checks for a parts table
“CR1MCTRL_W_SUPPR”. If not found, it starts lopping characters off of
the end of the block name and looks for a table name match. Table names
that it would look for in sequence would be “CR1MCTRL_W_SUPP”,
“CR1MCTRL_W_SUP”, ... until it got down to “CR1MCTR”. If no match on
this last table name, WD finally checks for table “CR” (the first two characters of the block name).
3. Looks for family-specific table (= char 2,3 of full block name).
Alternately, you can instruct WD to look at a “catch-all table”, MISC_CAT within
your MDB file.
Catalog File Directory
WD’s default installation for the default catalog Access file is \viawd\wd\catalogs\.
If you want to move this file to some other directory, perhaps a shared network
drive, then you must edit a small text file to tell WD where to look. Here’s how:
1. Move the file to your new drive:directory.
2. Exit AutoCAD (very important!). Edit the file \viawd\wd.env with a text editor like WordPad or Notepad. Here is what this file typically looks like:
*WD environment configuration file
*Created: 98/08/03 14:45:27
*Format: key,data,description
WD,%VIA_DIR%/wd/,WD programs
WD_LIB,%VIA_DIR%/wd/jic1/,WD symbols
WD_PROJ,%VIA_DIR%/wd/proj/,WD data
WD_USER,%VIA_DIR%/wd/user/,WD Userlib
WD_PNL,%VIA_DIR%/wd/panel/,WD panel base subdirectory
WD_CAT,%VIA_DIR%/wd/catalogs/,WD catalog file
3. Work up from the bottom of the file and find the WD_CAT entry. Change
the %VIA_DIR%/wd/catalogs/ portion of the line to point to the new location for the catalog file. Let’s say that you’ve moved them to n:/electric/catalogs/ on your network drive. Change this line to:
WD_CAT,n:/electric/catalogs/,WD catalog file.
BOM and Catalogs
8-7
4. Save and exit the file.
Note: WD will look for a project specific MDB file first, called
& lt; project & gt; _cat.mdb, in the project's subdirectory.
Modifying / Expanding Catalog Tables
You can edit entries in a catalog table or even add new catalog items on-the-fly
using WD. Here is the sequence:
To add a new table to the catalog file, you can either insert a new component that
will trigger WD to ask permission to create the table or you can do it from the WD
pull-down menu. Select Report/Misc & gt; debug & gt; Add table to catalog mdb.
Refer to the Tutorial for a detailed, step-by-step example about adding or editing
catalog look-up table records.
Refer to the Tutorial for an example of using Microsoft Access to modify a catalog
table.
Catalog Database Table Structure
WD uses the first ten fields for its own use plus reserves an additional three “user”
fields for your use followed by one more field. You can insert additional fields
beyond the fourteenth one, if you wish, but WD will ignore these when it
constructs various reports.
BOM and Catalogs
1. Force WD to reference the desired catalog table. Do this by either inserting a new component related to the catalog table you want to edit or by
picking an existing component of that type to edit (using WD’s EDIT Component). For example, if you want to add some new components to the
catalog table for standard red pilot lights (LT1R) then either use WD to
insert a new red pilot light symbol or EDIT an existing red pilot light symbol.
2. From the INSERT/EDIT dialog, select Catalog lookup. Now you have
triggered WD to open the desired catalog table. Select Add new to add a
new item or select Edit to edit the selected item’s database record.
3. WD displays the new or existing catalog record in a dialog.
8-8
BOM and Catalogs
Here are the fourteen fields accessed by WD (they are character fields and must
appear in this order in the database records).
Width
Description
CAT
60
Catalog Number
MFG
24
1st query field - manufacturer code
DESC
60
Generic description
TYPE
60
2nd query field (field name may vary)
RATING
60
3rd query field (field name may vary)
MISC
60
1st misc field (field name may vary)
MISC2
60
2nd mis field (field name may vary)
ASSYCODE
24
Code to flag that this item has
subassembly items
ASSYLIST
BOM and Catalogs
Field Name
24
Code to flag this is a subassy item of a
main item
ASSYQTY
8
Subassembly quantity (blank = qty of
“1”)
USER1
24
Field #1 for user’s use
USER2
24
Field #2 for user’s use
USER3
24
Field #3 for user’s use
TEXTVALS
80
Optional user-defined RATING/misc
attribute values
TEXTVALS Rating and Misc Attribute Value Assignment
An optional 14th field (after the USER3 field) named TEXTVALS can be added to
any catalog look-up table. This field can then be used to vector text values to
specific attributes on the edited component. The format for the text data encoded
into this field is:
& lt; attribute tag name1 & gt; = & lt; text value & gt; ; & lt; attribute tag name2 & gt; = & lt; text value & gt; ;…
Here’s how it works. During component insertion or edit, if you make a catalog
selection that comes with a non-blank TEXTVALS, WD breaks apart the field
value and searches for the target attributes on the edited symbol. If found, WD
prepares to update the component’s target attributes with the encoded data pulled
from the user-selected catalog look-up record.
For example, let’s say you insert a fuse symbol into your drawing. It has the
normal TAG1 attribute that WD updates automatically, but it also has blank
RATING1 and RATING2 attributes for fuse amps and type/max voltage. You
make your catalog selection that is a 30 amp, 250 volt, type FRS. Normally WD
would only annotate the fuse symbol with the MFG and CAT number for this part,
but if the catalog look-up file has the TEXTVALS field defined with this value:
BOM and Catalogs
8-9
RATING1=30 amp;RATING2=FRS 250Volt
And if the fuse symbol carries these two attribute tags; WD will automatically copy
this miscellaneous text on to the fuse symbol.
You can add this field to any catalog database table (if it doesn’t already exist).
Trigger WD to display the target catalog look-up table (ex: insert a component of
the desired “family” and select Catalog look-up). Pick the desired part number
and select Edit record. At the bottom of the Edit Record dialog you will see a
TEXTVALS edit box. Type in your value per the format described above. Click
OK to save the catalog database file. If the TEXTVALS field did not exist in the
selected catalog table, it will be added to each record in the database. If it did
exist, your new value will be saved in the TEXTVALS field for the selected catalog
number’s record.
Catalog Assignment
Overview
From Component Insert/Edit Dialog
WD’s INSERT/EDIT dialog is the common dialog you see whether you
insert a new component or edit an existing component. Clicking the Catalog
lookup button in the lower left-hand section of this dialog sends you to the
component’s catalog database file.
BOM and Catalogs
Catalog information is carried on a parent or stand-alone component. Each
component can carry up to 10 different catalog assignments allowing for subassemblies. There are a number of ways to assign your catalog information to a
component. In addition, you can define exactly where WD should look to get this
catalog information, allowing great flexibility in how you keep your catalog
information.
8-10
BOM and Catalogs
This is where you can search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to
the currently selected component. Database queries are set up in the three popup lists across the top of the dialog with the database hits listed in the dialog’s
main window. Refer to the Tutorial for step-by-step examples.
Project-Specific Catalog File
You can set up a project catalog file with all of the project’s component types in it.
The file must reside in the project's subdirectory. The file may be called either
default_cat.mdb or & lt; project & gt; _cat.mdb. WD will reference this file first before
looking in the user subdirectory or the catalogs subdirectory (as defined in
wd.env). For example, if the current project’s “.wdp” file is
n:\projects\acme99.wdp and you create an n:\projects\acme99_cat.mdb file (or
copy from default_cat.mdb), WD will look for a catalog table
n:\projects\acme99_cat.mdb. If found, this catalog information will display in the
dialog for component catalog number selection.
BOM and Catalogs
Miscellaneous, Catch-All Catalog Table
Note the Use Misc catalog table button on the Catalog Lookup dialog. You can
set up a general catalog table within the .mdb file with all component types in it.
WD will reference this table, if it exists. The table name is MISC_CAT. If found,
this catalog information will display in the dialog for component catalog number
selection.
You can set the MISC_CAT table as the default under the Misc Settings Project
dialog.
Last Used
During your editing session, WD remembers the last MFG / CAT / ASSYCODE
assignment you make for each component type you insert into your wiring
diagram. When you insert another component of that type, WD presents the
previous component’s catalog assignment as the default (assuming a previous
one was made during the current editing session).
Drawing-Wide / Project-Wide Search
From the INSERT/EDIT dialog, you can instruct WD to do a drawing-wide or
project-wide listing of similar components with their catalog assignments. For
example, you insert a standard, normally open push button and you want to use
the same catalog number used for other standard push buttons on the current
BOM and Catalogs
8-11
drawing or other drawings of the project. You select the Find: Proj button shown
here.
This displays the Find dialog. Select Current project.
BOM and Catalogs
WD immediately scans all of the drawings in the current project and tallies all
standard push buttons with a normally open contact. In a few moments it returns
this dialog list. A quick pick from this list and your new push button is assigned a
catalog number consistent with other push buttons used in the project. Click
Quick BOM chk to see what the selected item will look like in a BOM template.
8-12
BOM and Catalogs
Pulled from Another Project
You inserted a rarely used component into your current drawing but you don’t
know what the catalog assignment should be. You recall using the same
component in a previous project. WD will find it for you. WD can quickly scan that
previous project, find the instance of that component, and return the catalog
information to you. This is accomplished without you having to leave your current
drawing.
BOM and Catalogs
From the INSERT/EDIT dialog, select Find: Proj. From the FIND dialog, select
Other project.
WD presents a list of the most recent projects for you to identify what project you
want it to search.
BOM and Catalogs
8-13
Use the Other projects button if the project you want to use is not listed.
WD processes the project you select. It quickly scans each listed drawing for the
target component type and returns a dialog list of what it found. You can then
make your catalog assignment by picking from this dialog list.
You can pull catalog assignments from a generic ASCII file created by a word
processor or output from a spreadsheet or database program. For example, here
is a simple ASCII file, try2use.txt showing a preferred component list:
Note: When possible, use these components on this project.
CR
AB
700-P200A1
CR
AB
700-P400A1
CR
AB
700-P600A1
“CR”,”SIEMENS”,”3TH2040-0AK6”,”3TX4 431-0A”
PB
AB
800E-F2
LT
AB
800H-PR16R
SS
AB
800MR-HH2BB
PB
AB
800T-D6D2
LT
SQD
KP1R31
PB
SQD
KR1GH5
(use these first)
(IEC type)
800E_1NO1NC
(For EM Stops)
(Lots of these in stock)
BOM and Catalogs
From External File
8-14
BOM and Catalogs
Access this list file from the INSERT/EDIT dialog. Pick the Find: Proj button
shown here.
BOM and Catalogs
Select External file on the FIND dialog.
BOM and Catalogs
8-15
WD opens a file selection dialog. Find the file \viawd\wd\user\try2use.txt. A
dialog opens and displays the contents of the selected text file. Find and highlight
the desired entry.
BOM and Catalogs
WD reads the line of text from the text file and breaks it down, as best as it can
determine, into its component parts. These are displayed in the left-hand dialog
list shown below. For each relevant item, you first highlight it and then pick the
appropriate category button in the center column. The highlighted item is
transferred to the corresponding edit box. Click OK when finished.
8-16
BOM and Catalogs
The catalog assignment is transferred to the INSERT/EDIT dialog. Click OK to
write it out to the component. Note that this was all done without having to retype
any data.
BOM and Catalogs
From your own External Database Application
WD provides a means to bypass its internal catalog part number look-up and
temporarily pass control to your custom catalog part number selection application.
Here is the sequence:
1. From WD’s INSERT/EDIT dialog you select the Catalog lookup button.
But instead of immediately accessing the appropriate catalog look-up
table, WD passes control to your application.
2. You make the MFG/CAT/ASSYCODE selection in your own database program. Your application formats your selection and passes it back to WD.
3. WD populates the MFG/CAT/ASSYCODE edit boxes with the data passed
back to it. WD acts as if nothing out of the ordinary had ever happened.
To trigger WD to call an external application whenever the Catalog lookup button
is selected, edit the \viawd\wd.env text file as described below.
1. Exit AutoCAD (important, you must be all the way out of AutoCAD).
2. Open \viawd\wd.env file with a text editor (ex: Wordpad or Notepad). Add
this line to the file:
WD_XCAT,%VIA_DIR%/wd/wd_xcat.lsp,WD external cat call
Save and close the wd.env file.
3. Open file \viawd\wd\wd_xcat.lsp with a text editor. This is the interface
between WD and your external application. Some basic familiarity with
AutoLISP is required to implement this data exchange between WD and
your specific application. Some examples are provided in the wd_xcat.lsp
file.
Adding Multiple BOM Catalog Numbers to a Component
You can add up to ten additional part numbers to any schematic or panel
component on-the-fly. These “multiple” BOM part numbers appear as “subassembly” part numbers to the main catalog part number in the various BOM and
BOM and Catalogs
8-17
component reports. Select the Multiple BOM button as shown below to display a
dialog for adding the extra catalog part numbers.
For each catalog entry you must provide a name for the catalog look-up table. For
the main catalog entry this information is provided on the symbol itself but may not
BOM and Catalogs
For each additional part number, increment the “Sequential Code” number at the
top of the sub-dialog. Enter the catalog part number information and select OK.
These additional catalog part numbers are saved on the symbol as MFGn/CATn/
ASSYCODEn attribute values where “n” is the sequential code value “01” through
“10” selected in the top list box. If these attributes are not present on the symbols,
WD saves the information as Extended Entity Data (Xdata) on the symbol’s block
insert.
8-18
BOM and Catalogs
BOM and Catalogs
be there for these catalog entries. If you select the List button, WD will present a
list of catalog tables in your catalog lookup database file.
If you want to view a table first, select the table name from the list then the View
button. If you aren't sure of the table name but you know the catalog number,
enter that in the edit box at the bottom of the dialog and click the Find button. WD
will search the catalog tables for the catalog number entered.
BOM Copy Utility
This command copies catalog assignments from one component to
another. If your drawing has a dozen blue press-to-test pilot lights on it and you
make a catalog assignment to one of them, you can use it as a master to copy the
same catalog information quickly to the remaining eleven pilot lights.
BOM and Catalogs
8-19
Select the BOM COPY toolbar button. It is on the BOM fly-out (and also on the
MISC fly-out). Pick a component to be the master. WD reads the selected
component and displays this dialog:
BOM and Catalogs
If the master has no catalog assignment then you can do a “Catalog lookup” on
the fly. Click OK when you’re ready to copy the catalog assignment to other
components. WD prompts you to select those, and, one at a time, WD writes the
catalog assignment out. If one of the selected components already carries
catalog information and it is different from the master then this dialog is displayed.
It allows you to reconcile the differences quickly and easily.
8-20
BOM and Catalogs
Show Missing BOM
This utility, available from the BOM fly-out toolbar, has 2 options.
BOM and Catalogs
You can scan the current drawing and have it Show all the parent or stand-alone
components that have no catalog BOM assignments. They are marked on the
screen with a red diamond shape drawn around the symbol's insertion point. This
is painted on the screen in temporary graphics. A REDRAW will restore the
screen to its original state.
Or you can create a Report from multiple drawings from your project that show all
the parent or stand-alone components that have no catalog BOM assignments.
Select the drawings you wish to process and the report appears.
Contact Quantity / Pin-List Look-Up
Overview
WD can automatically track how many contacts have been assigned to a device
like a relay or timer coil. When a newly inserted contact exceeds a predefined
limit, WD can alert you. WD can also track available terminal pin number pairs as
you insert each new contact and automatically give you the next available pair as
a default.
BOM and Catalogs
8-21
To enable this feature, maximum contact count and pin number pair information is
assigned to the parent symbol (ex: relay or timer coil symbol). It is carried as
“Xdata” under the name “WD_PINLIST” or, if a “PINLIST” attribute is present on
the parent device, the pin list is carried on this invisible attribute. A copy of this
pinlist data is carried in a table in the project's Access database file in a table
called PINLIST. This information can be assigned manually or it can be
automatically retrieved from a “pin list” database table when a catalog part
number is assigned to the parent device. Then, as each contact is inserted and
referenced back to the parent, WD checks the pin information carried on the
parent and verifies that a contact of the proper type is available. If so, it retrieves
the next pair of contact pin numbers from the parent and displays as defaults for
the new contact. See the Tutorial for a step by step example.
Pin List Database Table
WD consults a pin list database table when a part number is added or an existing
part number is changed on a parent symbol. If WD finds a match on the part
number’s MFG, CAT, and optional ASSYCODE values in this database table, then
the associated contact count and pin number information is retrieved and placed
on the parent component.
BOM and Catalogs
This look-up database table is a table within the catalog lookup Access .mdb file.
The default file name is \viawd\wd\catalogs\default_cat.mdb, table _PINLIST, and
comes populated with a sample of vendor data. You can expand this table as
needed. Use your own copy of Microsoft Access or use WD’s database editor
tool. From the WD pull-down menu (not the toolbar menu) select CROSS
REFERENCE & gt; Pin List database file editor. The contents of the pin list
database will display in an edit dialog as shown below.
8-22
BOM and Catalogs
Here is the structure of this database table:
MFG
Manufacturer code (value must be consistent with the
catalog look-up files)
CAT
Catalog number (use wildcards as much as possible)
ASSYCODE
WD internal assy code (must be consistent with the
catalog look-up files)
COILPINS
Terminal pin numbers for coil (multiple pins: separate
with commas)
PINLIST
Contact type and pin numbers, 255 characters (format
below)
PINLISTCONT
Continuation of PINLIST field, if required, 255 more
characters.
BOM and Catalogs
The COILPINS field is generally just two pin numbers separated by a comma (ex:
K1,K2), but is not limited to just two pin numbers. At insertion/annotation time,
WD will take this list and apply it to the TERMxx attributes it finds on the parent
symbol.
BOM and Catalogs
8-23
The PINLIST field format is a sequence of two or more element groups with each
group defining one available child contact element for the device. For a two
terminal contact there are three elements in the group. It follows this format:
Contact type, terminal pin, terminal pin
where Contact type = 1 for N.O, 2 for N.C., 0 for convertible contact, 4 for
undefined type. WD also allows a description label associated with a “pin pair”.
To add description labels, encode the _PINLIST database table entry using a
format like this:
1,A1X,A1Y;1,A2X,A2Y,*aux contact;2,B1X,B2Y,*NC;
where the optional comment is always the last element of the sublist and is
preceded by an asterisk character (if no asterisk then the comment will be
interpreted as another pin number). The above example would display in the pin
list pick list dialog as:
A1X,A1Y
aux contact=A2X,A2Y
NC=B1X,B2Y
The Bogus company’s new series 123 general purpose control relays is now your
company’s standard. The relays that you are going to keep in your storeroom are
these:
B123-222-24V, 2-NO, 2-NC, 2-Convertible, 24 volt AC coil
B123-222-115V, 115 VAC coil
B123-004-24V, 4-Convertible contact, 24 volt AC coil
B123-004-115V, 115 VAC coil
The coil pin numbers are always L1 and L2. N.O. contacts have pin number pairs
1A/1B, 2A/2B, …, N.C. contacts 1C/1D, 2C/2D, … and convertible 1E/1F, 2E/2F,.
Two new entries in the _PINLIST table will cover these four relays:
MFG
CAT
COILPINS
PINLIST
BOGUS
B123-222*
L1, L2
1,1A,1B;1,2A,2B;2,1C,1D;2,2C,
2D;0,1E,1F;0,2E,2F
BOGUS
B123-004*
L1, L2
0,1E,1F;0,2E,2F;0,3E,3F;0,4E,
4F
Note: In earlier versions of WD this information was in a separate Access
File called wd_pins.mdb. When you use the WD conversion tool to
convert your old .dbf catalog files to the Access file, this file is converted to the _PINLIST table within the catalog file.
BOM and Catalogs
Example:
8-24
BOM and Catalogs
NO/NC and Pin List Data Carried on the Parent
When WD annotates a parent coil or other device with the pin list information, WD
inserts it on the following attributes (if present):
PINLIST
The pinlist format string of 3-element groups, one for
each available contact
MAXNO
Maximum N.O. contact count, blank menus undefined, 0
means non allowed
MAXNC
Maximum N.C. contact count
MAXNONC
Maximum convertible contact count
If these attributes are not present, WD encodes the data on to the symbol as
extended entity data.
BOM and Catalogs
If WD finds a MFG/CAT match in the pin list database and retrieves the encoded
pin list information, it pre-fills the MAXNO, MAXNC, and MAXNONC values with
the quantities derived from the decoded pin list data.
To view or manually edit these values, select EDIT Component and pick the NO/
NC Setup button on the INSERT/EDIT dialog. Alternately, you can type WDX at
the Command: prompt and pick on the block insert to view the extended entity
data values. WD maintains a copy of the parent’s PINLIST information in the
project’s scratch database file (in Microsoft Access format). You can view this by
opening the PINLIST table of the wd\user\ & lt; projname & gt; .mdb database file.
Not limited to Relays/Timers/Contactors/Switches
WD’s automatic pin list look-up and assignment at component insertion time is not
limited to devices that have contacts. You can encode two wire devices like pilot
lights or prox switch into the database file. Insert the MFG and CAT numbers and
fill in the COILPINS field with the terminal pin numbers. Leave the PINLIST field
blank. Now, when you insert one of these devices and do a “Catalog lookup” and
part number selection, WD will quickly look for a MFG/CAT match in the pin list
database. On a match WD will pull out the device’s “coil” pin numbers and pop
them on to the newly inserted device, automatically.
Schematic
Reports
In This Chapter. . . .
- Schematic Report Features
- Component Reports
- BOM Reports
- PLC I/O Reports
- Cross-Reference Reports
- Wire Reports
- Terminal Reports
- Cable Conductor Report
- Wire SRC/DEST Signal Exception Report
- Panel BOM / Panel Reports
& lt;
9-2
Schematic Reports
Schematic Report Features
Schematic Reports
This chapter covers various WD schematic report types (Panel Reports covered
in the Panel Layout chapter). There is a lot of flexibility with WD reports. WD
extracts multiple fields into each report type. You can strip out some of the field
columns of data and create other useful types of reports. For example, do a
component report, strip out everything except the TAGNAME, DESC1, DESC2,
and DESC3 field columns and you have a legend plate report. Run the Wire
connection report, strip out everything but the wire number column, save to a text
file, edit it a bit if required, and you have a wire number list that you can feed to an
automatic wire label maker. So if you don't see the specific report that you need in
the topics covered below, take advantage of WD's flexibility and create your own.
There are some features that are common to most of WD's reports. You can
extract by LOC values, edit the report, change the report format, post-process the
report with your own programs, save the report out to a file, and put the report on
your drawing as a table.
Schematic Reports
9-3
Named LOC
Some reports allow you to extract only the information for components with
specific LOC value(s).
Once you pick the “Named LOC” button, you can simply type the LOC code in the
box or click the List: Dwg or List: Proj button to select from a list of used LOC
codes.
Schematic Reports
If you want to create a report from multiple LOC codes, you can do this easily by
selecting multiple codes from this dialog. WD automatically creates a commadelimited list for the named LOC search.
9-4
Schematic Reports
Edit Report
There may be times you want to edit the extracted report. While the report dialog
is displayed, select the Edit Mode button.
Schematic Reports
The report is displayed using the current report settings.
Smart Swap
Certain WD reports contain field names that end in a “1” or a “2”. For example, in
the Wire From/To Report there may be field names LOC1 and LOC2. LOC1 would
be the location code for the component at one end of the wire and LOC2 the
location code for the component at the other end. The Smart Swap feature gives
you a quick way to swap the values in these fields. To try this feature, select the
Schematic Reports
9-5
lines in the report that need the values swapped, then pick the Smart Swap
button.
Edit
To edit a line, simply select the line and select the Edit button. A sub-dialog
displays with the current values for the report fields.
Schematic Reports
If the report contains field names that end in a “1” and a corresponding field name
that ends in a “2”, then the Edit Line dialog will have swapping toggles. To swap
two values, simply click on the two toggles next to the values. The swap toggles
work even if the field names are not the same.
9-6
Schematic Reports
Delete
Select the line(s) you want to delete. Note that if you do not select all the lines that
make up a single entry, WD will automatically delete all the report lines that make
up that entire entry. However, if the report contains sub-assembly items, they will
not automatically be deleted when the main entry is deleted.
Reorder Lines
Select the lines you wish to move. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to
rearrange the order of the report. As with the Delete function, WD will keep the
lines together that make up a single report entry.
Add New
Schematic Reports
There may be times you need to add a line to the report for information that wasn't
extracted from any of the drawings. Select a line in the report that can be used as
a placement for the new line. Select whether you want to add the new line Above
or Below the selected line. Select Add New and fill in the blanks.
Add Copy
This function allows you to copy an existing entry and then edit its values. First,
select the line that you wish to copy. Then select whether you want to add the new
line Above or Below the selected line. Select Add Copy and edit the values for
the new entry.
Change Report Format
The Change report format button in the lower right corner of the report dialog
provides means to change what data fields are reported and the order in which
they appear. You can also change justification of any column and even the column
label. WD “remembers” the changes you make in the report format. This new
format becomes the default the next time you extract that report. This format is
Schematic Reports
9-7
saved in a file named \viawd\wd\user\???.set where ??? is different depending on
the specific report.
The Description field is handled a little differently than the other fields. This field
can be a multi-line field which is actually made up of multiple fields. If you include
the Description field in your report, you choose which lines make up this field. Just
toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description.
Note: A field cannot be shown in the Description field if it is shown separately
as a field to report.
Post-Process Report
The Schematic Report has a sample option to calculate total cost of each BOM
item: QTY x SUBQTY x UNIT COST. For this to work the UNIT COST needs to be
Schematic Reports
The User Post button on the report dialog allows you great flexibility with your
report but it requires some set up on your end. When you select the User Post
button, a LISP routine called /viawd/wd/comp.lsp, is executed. This LISP routine
can be modified to meet your needs. It has a dialog that you can customize and
can call your own programs. The purpose of your program would be to modify the
data and pass it back to WD's report before you save it to a file, or insert as a table
on your drawing.
9-8
Schematic Reports
defined in the USER1 field of the catalog information. The report calculates the
cost and places this information in the USER2 field of the report.
Save to File
Many of WD's reports allow you to save the information to a file. If you select this
option you will even be able to select the file type.
Select the file type for the output. Depending on the file type you may also have a
choice to include the project's LINEx values. These are the values in the 24
description lines entered for the project.
Insert as Table
Schematic Reports
There may be times that you would like to display your report as a table on your
drawing.
Schematic Reports
9-9
WD's Put on DWG function allows you to do just that.
Table Text
Define the height, width factor, and line spacing for the text used in the table. Use
the Def button to have WD calculate the default line spacing based on the text
height using (HGT * 1.65).
Table Ruling
Build the table from the bottom up, i.e. last line
first, first line last
Box around
Draw the lines around the table
Vert Ruling
Draw vertical lines between columns
Horz ruling
Draw horizontal lines between rows
Group the table
Create an AutoCAD group from all the objects
that make up the table
Include column labels
Use the column headings as the first row of the
table
Include time/date
Show the report's time and date above the table
Include title line
Show the report's title above the table
Include proj info
Show the project's first four project description
lines above the table
Once you select OK your cursor will look like a box with a small “x” in the corner.
The box is the size the table will be when generated. This allows easy placement
of the table but does not allow you to use AutoCAD's object snap mode. If you
wish to snap to an object, enter an “S” and WD will flip to a normal AutoCAD pick
mode so you can use an object snap.
Schematic Reports
Build Up
9-10
Schematic Reports
Component Reports
Component Report
WD can perform a project-wide extract of all components found on your wiring
diagram set. This data includes component tags, location codes, location
reference, description text, ratings, catalog information, and block names. WD
lets you format this data into various report configurations which can be output to
a report file, exported to a spreadsheet or database program, or inserted on to an
AutoCAD drawing in tabular format.
Selecting the COMP Report toolbar button on the RPT fly-out toolbar
displays this dialog. Here is where WD prompts for the scope of the report (whole
project or just the current drawing) and what component location codes it should
process.
Schematic Reports
Extracted component data is formatted and output to a dialog as shown here.
Selecting the Change report format button in the lower right corner of the main
dialog displays a sub-dialog. The reported fields (and their order) are displayed in
Schematic Reports
9-11
the right-hand list. Other available fields are in the left-hand list. You can change
what data appears in your report by moving fields back and forth between these
two lists. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the order of the
data.
For example, only the TAGNAME and two DESC fields might be selected to be
formatted into the report. Then the report is inserted on to the drawing by
selecting the PUT ON DWG button, which is shown below. This format might
resemble what a panel builder needs to create nametag legend plates.
Schematic Reports
You have complete freedom to rearrange the extracted data. If you save the report
in a comma delimited format or spreadsheet format (select the SAVE TO FILE
button), you greatly increase the ability to manipulate the data and merge it with
information from other sources.
Quick Connector Pin Report
Run a quick connector report that lists a single line for each connector
tag along with pins used, maximum pins allowed (if the parent carries the PINLIST
information), and a list of any repeated pin numbers used. You can run this report
across the project or for a single component.
9-12
Schematic Reports
BOM Reports
WD provides the following BOM-related features:
• Extract BOM reports on demand, current drawing or project-wide
• Extract BOM reports on a per location basis
• Change BOM report format
• Output BOM reports to ASCII report file
• Export BOM data to a spreadsheet or database program
• Insert BOM as a table right on to an AutoCAD drawing
Schematic Reports
Selecting the BOM toolbar button on the RPT fly-out toolbar starts
WD’s BOM extraction mode. This dialog is displayed prompting for the scope of
the report (whole project or just the current drawing) and what component location
codes are to be processed.
WD quickly extracts the BOM data, references the appropriate catalog database
tables for additional information, formats the data, and then displays the BOM
Schematic Reports
9-13
report in a dialog box. Selecting check boxes at the bottom of the dialog perform
various reformatting functions.
The Change report format button in the lower right corner provides means to
change what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear. You can
also change justification of any column and even the column label. WD
“remembers” the changes you make in the report format. This new format
becomes the default the next time you extract a BOM report. This format is saved
in a file named \viawd\wd\user\bom.set.
Schematic Reports
9-14
Schematic Reports
BOM reports can be extracted on demand at any time. This example illustrates
how to instruct WD to extract a project-wide BOM but only report components
located in CAB1.
BOM Report of Sub-Assembly Items
WD reports sub-assembly items in an “indented” format where the sub-assembly
quantity is a “multiplier” for the main quantity count and is in its own column. Subassembly items can be set up either in the catalog look-up tables or created on
the fly using WD’s “Multiple BOM” part number concept. Both are illustrated in the
Tutorial.
Schematic Reports
BOM “Purchase List” Format
WD can present the BOM report tallied by individual sub-items, a “purchase list”
format. For example, a particular contact block part number might appear as a
sub-assembly item for both pushbutton components and selector switch
components. WD’s default BOM mode reports the contact blocks with each main
switch item. But when the Display in tallied Purchase list format toggle is
selected on the initial BOM Report dialog, each part becomes its own line item
(i.e. no longer any sub-assembly items) and each is tallied across all component
types. For the contact block example, it would appear one time in the report and
its quantity would represent the total number of instances of its use for all types of
components found in the processed drawings.
BOM “By Tag” Format
WD can present the BOM report tallied by Tag, where all instances of a given
component or terminal tag are processed together and then reported as a single
entry. For example, ten terminal symbols are marked with tag ID “TS-1”. Each
carries a catalog part number and one of the ten also carries a rail part number
and end piece part number with a quantity of two (see Multiple BOM
assignments). In the normal BOM report, the 9 terminals would be reported
separately from the one that carries the two extra catalog part numbers. But in
the “By TAG” format, all ten “TS-1” terminals are reported together as a single
entry in the report with quantity 10 for the terminal, quantity 1 for the rail, and
quantity 2 for the end pieces.
Schematic Reports
9-15
BOM Report Output
Extracted BOM data can be output to a spreadsheet file, mdb database file, text
report file, or comma-delimited for export to a spreadsheet or database program.
It can also be inserted, in tabular form, right on the current AutoCAD drawing.
Refer to the Tutorial for a step-by-step example of each of these options.
PLC I/O Reports
WD provides a few PLC I/O related reports. You can run a report that lists each
PLC module and its beginning and ending I/O address numbers. Or run another
report that lists information about every I/O connection point or component
connected to those points. WD lets you format this data into various report
configurations which you can output to a report file, import into a spreadsheet or
database program, or insert onto an AutoCAD drawing in tabular format.
Selecting the PLC RPT button on the RPT report fly-out toolbar tool
displays this dialog. Here you select the desired report type.
PLC I/O Connection Report
Schematic Reports
The PLC I/O Connection report scans your drawing set and returns all individual
I/O connection points it finds. This includes up to five lines of description text and
9-16
Schematic Reports
the connected wire number for each I/O point. This data can be put on the
drawing or output to a report or spreadsheet.
PLC I/O Connected Component Report
Schematic Reports
The PLC I/O Connected Component Report scans the selected drawing(s) and
returns information about any components connected to PLC I/O points.
Modules Used Report
For the Modules used report, WD quickly scans the wiring diagram set. It
returns in a few moments and displays the I/O modules it finds. Each entry shows
the module’s beginning and ending address along with some other information.
Select the Change report format button in the bottom right corner to change the
format of the extracted data. As with other report types, you can insert this data
as a table on your drawing (select PUT ON DWG) or output it to a text report file
Schematic Reports
9-17
(ASCII), Excel spreadsheet format, Access database format, or comma delimited
format for export to a spreadsheet program.
PLC Module and Individual I/O Point Cross-Reference
There may be times that you want to show a complete PLC I/O module,
unconnected, on some kind of layout drawing but then show the individual I/O
points scattered throughout the schematics. For example, three stand-alone child
I/O points are shown in schematic sheet 1 that relate to the middle module on the
layout representation.
Schematic Reports
9-18
Schematic Reports
You can generate a cross-reference table for the overall module that points at the
sheet and reference locations of all of its “child” I/O points (i.e. “child” I/O point
symbols that carry the same “TAG ID value” as the module shown in the layout).
Here is how:
1. From the WD pull-down menu, select CROSS REFERENCE & gt; Dumb
Cross-ref table.
Schematic Reports
2. You are prompted to pick on the overall module you want to process. In a
few moments this report is generated. Adjust the format to suit (select the
Change report format button).
3. Select PUT ON DRAWING. Adjust the text height and pop in the cross reference table near the layout version of the module.
Schematic Reports
9-19
Cross-Reference Reports
Cross-Reference Table
This report shows the cross-reference information for a single component. Select
the menu option Dumb Cross-ref table.
Select the parent component or one of the child contacts.
Schematic Reports
Note: The table will display unused contacts if the parent has a maximum
contact setting and the project-wide “Misc settings” is set to fill unused
contact references.
9-20
Schematic Reports
Cross-Reference Exception Report
WD’s cross-referencing function creates two text reports in the process of
annotating components with cross-reference information. The first report gives a
listing of each component and quantity and locations of child contacts.
Schematic Reports
The second text file report lists the exceptions WD found as it processed the
drawing or drawing set. Exceptions include child contact with no parent and
parent relay coil with no child contacts found.
Surfing on Cross-Reference Exception Report
With the Cross-reference ERROR/EXCEPTION report displayed, click the Surf
button. WD flips into “surfer” mode. Double click on any listed error/exception
entry in the SURF dialog. WD immediately pops open the appropriate drawing
Schematic Reports
9-21
and zooms up on the offending contact. Pick the Edit button to correct the error
and then surf to the next.
Wire Reports
WD provides several types of project-wide wire connection reports. One type of
report, From/To, is useful if you have marked components and/or terminals with
location codes. Another lists all component connections, one entry for every wire
connection to a component. Each entry includes the wire number assigned to the
connecting wire, the wire connection’s terminal pin number (if present), the
component’s tag name and location code (if present), and the layer name of the
connected wire. A third type filters out all but plug/jack connection information.
Selecting the WIRE RPT button on the RPT fly-out toolbar tool displays
this dialog. Here you select the desired report type.
If you have marked components and/or terminals with location codes, you can
make good use of WD’s wire “From/To” reporting feature. Here’s an example of
creating a wire from/to report for wires passing from components marked “CAB1”
to those marked either “PNL1” or “MACH”.
Schematic Reports
Extracting a Wire From/To Report
9-22
Schematic Reports
Selecting the WIRE RPT toolbar button as described above displays this dialog.
Select Wire From/To report.
WD first extracts component, terminal, location code, and wire connection
information from every drawing in the project set. Then it displays a location list
dialog shown here. This dialog allows you to make your report’s “from” and “to”
location selections. All of the location codes WD found on the drawing set are
listed on each side of this dialog. Location “(??)” is also included in the list if WD
found any component or stand-alone terminal that didn’t have an assigned
location code.
Schematic Reports
The idea here is to build a report by selecting wire “from” location from the lefthand list and “to” location code(s) from the right-hand list.
In the left-hand list, select CAB1. From the right hand side, select MACH and
PNL1. Your selections end up in the middle two lists. In this example WD is
Schematic Reports
9-23
instructed to format a from/to report listing all wiring that goes from CAB1 to either
PNL1 or MACH.
WD quickly filters and formats the extracted data and presents it in the following
dialog. As before, you can save it to a text report file, a comma delimited file to
import into a spreadsheet or database program, or insert it on to a drawing in table
form.
Schematic Reports
9-24
Schematic Reports
For this particular report WD provides a way to substitute wire color/gauge text for
the wire layer names. To use this feature, select the User post button on the
report dialog.
Component Connection Report
Schematic Reports
Selecting Component connection report displays this dialog. Here you choose
the scope of the report (single drawing or project-wide) and if you want to limit the
report to components carrying a specific location code (for example: everything in
control panel “PNL1”).
WD extracts the component wire connection data and displays it in a dialog. Each
entry shows a connection to a component, the wire number, component tag name,
terminal pin number, component location code (if present), and the layer that the
connected wire is on. Click Change report format in the bottom right corner to
reformat the extracted data. As with other report types, you can insert this data as
a table on your drawing (select PUT ON DWG) or output it to a text report file
Schematic Reports
9-25
(ASCII), Excel spreadsheet format, Access database format, or comma delimited
format for export to a spreadsheet program
Plug/Jack Connector Report and Pin Chart
You can extract plug/jack connection reports and optionally generate
pin charts. The simple example here will illustrate. This is created with one
“parent” connector pin symbol inserted into wire 327T1 and four additional child
pin symbols to pick up the wires immediately below it (though the children could
be scattered across the drawing set). All four children are linked to the parent
through matching P325 tag values, though the tags on three of the children have
been hidden from view with WD’s HIDE ATTR tool.
Schematic Reports
Selecting the WIRE RPT toolbar button displays this dialog.
9-26
Schematic Reports
The Plug/Jack option on the report selection dialog leads to the report display
below. Note that each wire tied to each connector pin shows up in the report.
This means that each pin has two entries, one for the “in” wire and one for the
“out” wire.
Schematic Reports
To create a more useful report, select the PIN chart “on” radio button in the bottom
center part of the report display dialog. Make sure the Remove duplicated pin
numbers toggle is checked. Click OK.
Schematic Reports
9-27
The report re-formats as shown here.
If you Change report format to remove all but the PIN, WIRENO, and WLAY
columns and then select the PUT ON DWG button, you can insert a pin chart for
the connector as shown here.
This utility checks every wire network for a valid wire number. If a wire
network does not carry a wire number, that network is reported in the exception
report. If two different wire networks carry the same wire number and these
networks are not tied together with WD source/destination signal arrow symbols
(i.e. they are NOT electrically part of the same wire network) then the repeated
wire numbers are displayed in the exception report.
This report displays in a dialog just like any other report. You can save it to a text
report file or output it to a spreadsheet. One difference is that you can “Surf” on
the exceptions, jumping to each problem area and viewing it in context.
Schematic Reports
Repeated and Missing Wire Numbers Report
9-28
Schematic Reports
Terminal Reports
WD provides two types of project-wide, stand-alone terminal reports. The first
lists all instances of terminals. Each entry includes information tied directly to the
terminal such as terminal number, terminal strip number, and location code. The
second is similar to the first but WD does a wire network extraction. This means
that it takes longer to generate but the report includes wire number and wire layer
name information.
Terminal Numbers Report
Select the TERM RPT toolbar button on the RPT fly-out toolbar. The
dialog shown below lets you select the report type.
Clicking Terminal numbers report causes WD to do a quick project-wide
extraction.
Schematic Reports
The results are displayed in a dialog. Select Change report to select what data to
display and rearrange, if desired. Pick the Sort button to sort the report data on
the selected column.
As before, you can save this report to an ASCII report file, a comma delimited file
(to import into a spreadsheet or database program) or insert it on to a drawing in
tabular form. Stripping the report of everything but the terminal number column
and inserting it on your drawing, as a one-column table may be useful as a
“terminal strip” layout diagram.
Schematic Reports
9-29
Terminal Plan Report
Select the TERM RPT toolbar button on the RPT fly-out toolbar. The
dialog shown below lets you select the report type.
For the second type of terminal report, pick the Terminal Plan Report button from
this dialog.
The scope of the report is selected from the next dialog (project-wide or limited to
just the current drawing) and, if desired, the report can be limited to terminal
symbols marked with a specific location code (example: report only terminals
marked “JBOX3”).
As before, you can save the report to an ASCII report file, a comma delimited file
(to import into a spreadsheet or database program), or insert it on to your drawing
in tabular form.
Schematic Reports
WD processes the drawings and then reports the extracted data in the following
dialog. Select Change report to select what data to display and its order. Pick
the Sort button to sort the report data on the selected column.
9-30
Schematic Reports
Quick and Dirty Terminal Strip Table
You can use either report above to create a quick terminal strip/connected wire
number representation to insert on your drawing. Run either report and then sort
by TAGSTRIP and then by TERM terminal number. If multiple terminal strip tags
are in the report, they should now be grouped after the sort. Find the beginning
report line number of the target tag’s first terminal (highlight the entry and note its
line number displayed in the bottom left-hand corner of the report dialog). Do the
same for the last terminal for the target tag’s terminal strip. Click Change report
format and eliminate all but the terminal number and wire number fields.
Now click PUT ON DWG. In the bottom right-hand corner of the Table Generation
Setup dialog, enter the Start and End line numbers and click OK.
Schematic Reports
Now pop the table onto the drawing. Use AutoCAD TRIM, STRETCH, ERASE,
and MOVE editing commands to transform the inserted table into a simple
terminal strip/wire number representation.
Note: If you selected to “group” your table you may need to turn “grouping”
off to manipulate the table. Pressing Ctrl+A toggles the AutoCAD
“grouping” feature on and off.
Schematic Reports
9-31
Cable Conductor Report
WD provides two types of project-wide cable conductor reports. The first gives a
report listing all of the cable marker tags (parent tags) found. The second is
similar to the terminal plan described elsewhere in this chapter, but keys off of the
cable slash markers instead of terminal symbols. It lists the “from / to” for each
cable conductor along with the conductor’s parent cable number, conductor color
code, and wire number (if present).
Select the CBL RPT toolbar button on the RPT fly-out toolbar. The
dialog shown below lets you select the report type.
The command sequence then parallels that for the wire from/to and terminal list
reports. After generating a cable report and displaying it in the report dialog or
you can output to a text file report, dump to comma-delimited or spreadsheet
format. You can also insert the cable list on the drawing as a ruled table as
illustrated elsewhere.
Wire SRC/DEST Signal Exception Report
Schematic Reports
Select the RPT button under the SRC/DESC fly-out toolbar. There are
two types of reports that can be generated. The first will report on Wire Signal
Source/Destination codes, while the second reports on just the Stand-Alone
Reference codes.
9-32
Schematic Reports
Wire Signal Source/Destination
WD extracts two reports. One lists all the signal source and destinations used on
the project drawing set. The other report is an “exception” report. It lists problem
areas such as a destination signal with no source found or a source signal that
doesn't tie to any destination.
As with any report, you have multiple options to output the reports to a text file or
export to a spreadsheet.
Stand-Alone Reference
Schematic Reports
Again, WD extracts two reports. One lists all the stand-alone source and
destinations used on the project drawing set. The other report is an “exception”
report. It lists problem areas such as a destination reference with no source found
or a source reference that doesn't tie to any destination.
Panel BOM / Panel Reports
Please refer to the chapter on Panel Layout.
Panel Layout
In This Chapter. . . .
- Overview
- Panel Layout Pull-Down Menu
- Panel Layout Toolbar
- Mouse Functions
- Panel Drawing Configuration
- WD Panel Layout Template Drawing
- Automatic Schematic / Panel Update
- Footprint/Terminal Selection and Insertion
- Footprint Attributes/Xdata
- Layout Wire Connection Annotation
- Footprint Look-Up
- Panel Edit Footprint
- Item/Detail Number Balloons
- Name Plates
- Panel Layout Reports
43
10-2
Panel Layout
Overview
WD Panel Layout gives you tools to create “intelligent” mechanical / panel layout
drawings. Here are the key features:
• Layouts can be driven from information carried on the WD schematic wiring
diagram drawings or they can be constructed independently of schematics.
• WD places no requirements on special naming or attribute requirements on
mechanical “footprint” symbols. This means that vendor supplied footprint
symbols, in AutoCAD format, can be used “as is” with WD.
• Bi-directional update capabilities allow certain schematic wiring diagram
edits to automatically update the panel drawings and vice versa.
• Wire number, wire color/gauge information, and connection sequencing
data can be extracted directly from the schematics and annotated on to the
panel footprint representations.
• WD extracts various reports from these “smart” panel layout drawings
including panel BOM, panel component/item lists, name plate reports, and
schematic versus panel exception reports.
Panel Layout
Refer to the latter part of the Tutorial for a step-by-step tour of the key features of
panel layout.
Panel Layout
10-3
Panel Layout Pull-Down Menu
You access WD’s panel command set from either the main WD pull-down menu or
from a panel-specific toolbar.
Panel Layout Toolbar
There are small and large button versions of the toolbar menu. If the Panel
Layout toolbar is not visible, you can turn it back on from the Toolbars submenu
on the WD pull-down.
Mouse Functions
Right Click
Panel Layout
A quick shortcut to the right WD command is just a mouse-click away. Put your
cursor over any panel component and click your right mouse button. A
component-specific menu will pop up at your cursor position. (This feature is not
available in the R14 version of WD).
10-4
Panel Layout
Here is the menu that pops up when the cursor is over a panel component.
Note: To turn this feature off, under the WD toolbar select REPORTS/Misc & gt; debug & gt; WD right-click OFF.
Double Click
Looking for a quick way to edit a WD component? Just double click on the
component itself to edit that component. (This feature is not available in the R14
version of WD.)
Note: WD's double click feature is disabled if AutoCAD's “selection” mode is
set to “Noun/Verb selection” (i.e. system variable PICKFIRST is set to
1).
Panel Drawing Configuration
Panel Layout
Configuration settings are saved as attribute values on a non-visible block named
WD_PNLM. If your current drawing does not have this block present when any
WD panel layout command is invoked, WD pauses and asks you for permission to
insert this block.
Panel Layout
10-5
It inserts at 0,0 but this location is not critical. The key point is that the non-visible
block needs to be present somewhere on the drawing. Note: you can make this
block “visible” by typing ATTMODE at the AutoCAD “Command: line prompt”,
changing the value from 1 to 2, and then typing REGEN.
There are a few settings related to panel layout drawings that can be
modified through the Panel CONFIG dialog. These settings are retrieved and
saved back to attributes on the non-visible block named WD_PNLM.
Item Numbering
Set the drawing’s item/detail numbering to start with this number (or alpha). WD
will manage item number, drawing-wide or project-wide (over many drawings), so
that the same number is always applied to identical components.
Default Spacing
The default spacing is for multiple footprint insertion. See the Tutorial for an
example.
Panel Layout
10-6
Panel Layout
Balloon Setup
Panel Layout
Configure item/detail balloon type, text size, and arrowhead. Click on Setup to
display this subdialog.
Panel Layout
10-7
Layers
Panel footprint layering works in the same way as WD schematic layering. When
WD inserts a footprint, it is modified on the fly to match the layering scheme set up
in this dialog.
Footprint Insert
Define the default insert scale for panel footprint symbols. Also, define how to
determine the scale of the attribute template added on the fly when the footprint is
inserted. Select a scale factor, 1.0 to insert as is, or select to scale to a specific
text height.
Wiring Levels
Enter the 3-digit codes to be used as defaults when codes are not defined on
individual panel layout components or terminal strips. Preferred wire connection
sequence follows this level and numeric-code-within-level hierarchy.
Panel Wire Connection
WD Panel Layout Template Drawing
You can set up an AutoCAD template drawing for panel layout drawings with the
WD_PNLM block pre-inserted and set up with your own default settings. You can
Panel Layout
Define the XY offset for the mtext added next to a panel component when adding
the wire connection information. Use the Setup button to define the default wire
connection text format.
10-8
Panel Layout
also set up client-specific template drawings and reference the appropriate one
when starting a new WD panel drawing.
Automatic Schematic / Panel Update
WD allows limited bi-directional updating between schematic components and the
associated footprint blocks. The link is through the common “tag” identifier – relay
coil CR104 schematic symbol links to the panel layout footprint that carries a
CR104 attribute value extended entity data value. Forcing the coil’s name to
CR104A triggers WD to update not only the coils child contacts but also update
the panel footprint’s data. If a name plate is tied to the footprint, its text updates
as well.
Footprint/Terminal Selection and Insertion
Use WD to insert smart “footprint” outlines of electrical components and devices
on to layout drawings. You can insert these in a semi-automatic mode or
manually. In the semi-automatic mode, WD uses the component’s manufacturer
and catalog number information, goes to a manufacturer look-up database table,
finds a match on the catalog number, and pulls out the associated footprint block
symbol to insert. You pick the insertion point and orientation for the footprint, and
WD does the rest. In a manual insert mode you can create smart footprint
outlines on the fly or convert existing “dumb” layout representations to be “WDsmart”.
Semi-Automatic from Schematic Data
Let your project set of schematic wiring diagrams help drive the panel layout task.
Component catalog number information can come directly from mfg/catalog data
carried on each electrical component. WD finds a match on the mfg/catalog
number combination to determine the correct footprint block to insert. You pick
the insertion point.
Panel Layout
Go to the WD PNL fly-out and select the CMP Insert from Schem
toolbar button.
Panel Layout
10-9
If a copy of the schematic data is not in memory then WD prompts you to select
what schematic data you want to extract. Make your selection in the dialog shown
above (generally you can just click OK and accept the default of the full current
project, all locations).
WD quickly processes the project drawing set. It presents a list of all parent
components (plus any child components that carry non-blank MFG/CAT values)
extracted from the project’s schematic wiring diagrams as illustrated below. The
sequence is: 1) you pick from this schematic list and 2) place the equivalent
footprint on the layout. WD determines the equivalent footprint block
automatically via a mfg/catalog match pulled from the footprint look-up file
(described later in this chapter).
Some schematic components may not carry MFG/CAT information (note the “LS”
entries listed above) or have a part number assignment that is not listed in the
Panel Layout
10-10
Panel Layout
footprint look-up file. In such a case, WD cannot determine what footprint block
needs to be used. WD gives you two choices:
Choice A: If there is no catalog assignment, do a quick catalog look-up and
selection on the spot, go to the manufacturer’s look-up file and find the footprint
match.
Choice B: Skip catalog assignment. Manually draw a simple footprint
representation for the selected device, browse for a footprint block file, or pick an
existing “dumb footprint” to convert it to “WD-smart”.
In cases where WD is given a mfg/catalog number but it fails to find a look-up
match, WD enables a third choice, Choice C, which enables these options:
1. Create a look-up entry on the fly in the manufacturer’s look-up database
table and match this new catalog number entry up with an existing footprint .dwg file.
2. Create a look-up entry in a catchall “misc” look-up table, _pnlmisc, and
assign an existing footprint .dwg file to it.
3. Manually draw a footprint shape.
Panel Layout
Note: Use the Reload button to re-initialize the display.
Terminal Footprint Insertion - Semi-Automatic from Schematic
Data
This parallels component insertion described in the previous section.
Panel Layout
10-11
Footprint Insertion - Selection from Icon Menu
For items that might not be included on the schematics (for example, panel
backplate, wire duct, hardware), WD gives you two options:
1. Pick the item from a vendor icon menu that is preset with specific catalog
number data and footprint block name. The example shown here is for a
specific vendor. It has a submenu showing racks and power supplies for a
line of PLC’s. Choosing from this submenu supplies WD with MFG/CAT
information and the footprint block name, bypassing any look-up.
2. Pick a general component category from a generic icon menu (shown here).
Panel Layout
10-12
Panel Layout
WD brings up the Choice A/Choice B dialog.
Select the Catalog Lookup button. After your selection, WD goes to the
appropriate manufacturer look-up file and retrieves the matching footprint block
symbol.
Footprint Insertion - Manual Draw on-the-fly
Panel Layout
From the Panel INSERT Panel Footprint fly-out, select the MAN CMP
toolbar button. From the dialog below, select manual draw, choose from a file
dialog, or pick on an existing block on the current drawing to convert it to WDsmart on the fly.
Copy Panel Footprints
Use the COPY PANEL ASSY utility (instead of AutoCAD COPY) when
a panel component footprint has balloon or a name plate associated with it. WD
Panel Layout
10-13
establishes invisible Xdata pointers when either of these is tied to a footprint and
these are properly updated when copied using this utility.
Insert Panel Footprint Assemblies
You can Wblock assemblies of panel components out to disk for
insertion later. Use the INSERT PANEL ASSY utility (instead of AutoCAD
INSERT/Explode) when you want to insert a WBlocked group of panel component
footprints with balloons and/or name plates. WD establishes invisible Xdata
pointers when either of these is tied to a footprint and these are properly updated
when inserted using this utility.
Use the options shown in the dialog to define if WD should add the intelligence
needed for each block to be treated as a WD footprint.
Footprint Insertion - Selection from Spreadsheet
Data
Overview
If you start with panel layouts before you create schematics, schematic pick list
data is obviously not available to automate footprint selection and annotation. An
alternative is available. If you list your panel components in a spreadsheet and in
a format that WD expects, this spreadsheet data can become your “schematic”
pick list data for panel layout.
Component Spreadsheet Data Format
The spreadsheet data must be in this order and have 28 columns of data and be
saved in a “CSV comma delimited” text format. Most of the fields can be left
blank:
TAG
Component tag id (ex: “PB101”)
2
INST
Optional installation code
3
LOC
Optional location code (ex: “PNL1”)
4
MOUNT
Optional mount code
5
GROUPWITH
Optional group code
6
MFG
Manufacturer code (ex: “AB”)
7
CAT
Catalog number
Panel Layout
1
10-14
Panel Layout
8
ASM
Optional catalog assembly code (internal WD
use only)
9
CNT
Optional “count” value
10
UM
Optional unit of measure
11
DESC1-3
Three lines of description text
14
BLKNAM
Schem block name (used to determine
catalog look-up table name)
15
RATING1-12
Optional “rating” values
27
CATDESC
Optional catalog desc (blank)
28
QUERY1
Optional catalog desc (blank)
Go to the WD PNL fly-out and select the CMP Insert from Schem
toolbar button. Click Browse in the lower left-hand corner of the dialog (if the
previous data’s pick list dialog is displayed, click Pick file in lower right-hand part
of dialog to go back to the correct dialog). From the Browse button, find and
select the “.csv” comma delimited file exported from your spreadsheet.
Panel Layout
Panel Terminals Spreadsheet Data Format
The spreadsheet data for panel terminals must be in this order and have 15
columns of data and be saved in a “CSV comma delimited” text format. Most of
the fields can be left blank:
1
TAGSTRIP
Terminal strip tag id (ex: “TB1”)
2
INST
Optional installation code
3
LOC
Optional location code (ex: “JBOX1”)
4
MOUNT
Optional mount code
Panel Layout
5
GROUPWITH
Optional group code
6
MFG
Manufacturer code (ex: “AB”)
7
CAT
Catalog number
8
ASM
Optional catalog assembly code (internal WD
use only)
9
CNT
Optional “count” value
10
UM
Optional unit of measure
11
TERM
Terminal number text
12
WIRENO
Terminal number text (if it follows the
connected wire’s wire number)
13
BLOCK
Optional schem blockname (blank)
14
CATDESC
Optional catalog desc (blank)
15
QUERY1
10-15
Optional catalog desc (blank)
Go to the WD PNL fly-out and select the TRM Insert from Schem
toolbar button. Click Browse in the lower left-hand corner of the dialog (if the
previous data’s pick list dialog is displayed, click Pick file in lower right-hand part
of dialog to go back to the correct dialog). From the Browse button, find and
select the “.csv” comma delimited file exported from your spreadsheet.
Starting with a Previous Project's Schematic Spreadsheet Data
If your new project is similar to a previous project, you can use the previous
project’s schematics to create a component or terminal spreadsheet listing. This
can then help drive the new project’s panel layout.
Open the previous project in WD. Select the WD PNL fly-out and select the CMP
or TRM extract. On the selection dialog, check the save list to extern file and
then extract from the project. WD creates a comma-delimited file of the schematic
data. You can then display this data in spreadsheet format (open it in commadelimited “CSV” format), edit, and then save back out. Now follow the procedure
described for picking and inserting the panel component or terminal footprints
from the spreadsheet driven pick list.
Footprint Attributes/Xdata
Panel Layout
WD puts no attribute or naming requirements on the mechanical footprint block
symbols. As WD inserts a footprint symbol into the drawing, it copies various data
to the footprint block such as component/device tag name, description,
manufacturer code, and catalog number. It first looks for target attributes to copy
the data to, but if not found, WD simply inserts the schematic values as standard
AutoCAD, non-visible extended entity data (Xdata).
10-16
Panel Layout
Some manufacturers provide free, to-scale mechanical libraries of their control
components, all in AutoCAD format. Or you may have your own in-house
footprints set up. In either case, since WD has no naming or attribute
requirements, these libraries can be used “as is”. When WD inserts such a block
footprint symbol, it immediately becomes “WD smart”.
Auto-Attribute Add to Footprint During Insertion
You can set up to have visible attributes added to any footprint automatically at
footprint insertion time. This means that using “dumb” footprint representations
can pop in with smart WD attributes added automatically, on the fly.
There are three attribute “template” drawings:
\viawd\wd\panel\wd_ptag_addattr_comp.dwg
component footprints
\viawd\wd\panel\wd_ptag_addattr_trm.dwg
terminal footprints
\viawd\wd\panel\wd_ptag_addattr_wtrm.dwg
terminal with wire no.
as terminal number
If WD finds that the template exists, a copy of it gets exploded and merged (i.e.
“blocked” with the panel footprint as WD inserts the footprint into the drawing).
Then the schematic data is shoved on to the footprint either as visible attribute
data (if the target attribute exists) or as non-visible Xdata if the target attribute
does not exist on the footprint block.
Panel Layout
An example attribute definition template, wd_ptag_addattr_comp.dwg, is shown
below. It consists of just three attribute definitions with the P_TAG1 attribute
definition centered on 0,0 (the 0,0 point is shown marked with a cross point).
As WD inserts a footprint and prepares to merge this attribute definition template
into the block, it attempts to find the “center” of the inserted block by collecting and
averaging the parts and pieces that make up the block. It pops in the attribute
definition template at this calculated location. Next, for each attribute definition in
the merged template, WD checks to see if the original block is already coming in
with that particular attribute tag name. If there is no attribute with that name, the
merged attribute definition stays, otherwise WD erases the “merging” one and
keeps the existing one. WD re-blocks the added attribute definitions with the
existing footprint. Finally, if there is schematic data to put on the footprint, WD
annotates the attributes, if present, or writes the data out as non-visible “Xdata”.
Panel Layout
10-17
Attribute Add to Footprint After Insertion - Xdata to Attribute
Utility
Even after footprint insertion, WD gives you a tool to convert any piece of this nonvisible extended entity data into a visible attribute tied directly to the footprint
block.
Select the Xdata to Attribute icon from the Edit Footprint fly-out and
pick on a footprint block. This dialog is displayed:
All WD-related pieces of extended entity data (“xdata”) are displayed. Select the
height (Hgt), the justification (Jst) and visibility (Vis) for the xdata value you wish to
change to an attribute. Then click on the small Ins box to the left of the Xdata
name. The dialog disappears. Now click on the location for the attribute. The
attribute inserts, is linked to the footprint block, and the above dialog redisplays.
Repeat this process to quickly convert other pieces of xdata into visible attributes.
Use the Style button to set the width factor and text style for the attributes.
Panel Layout
10-18
Panel Layout
Footprint Block Attribute / Xdata Names
Here is a list of footprint block data names that can be inserted and/or read by
WD. If the footprint block has an attribute with any name listed here, WD will use
that attribute to carry the specific piece of data. Otherwise, WD uses extended
entity data with names based on the data names listed here but with a WD_ prefix
(ex: “WD_DESC1”).
FP
Identifies block as a component footprint
FPT
Identifies block as a terminal footprint
NP
Identifies block as a name plate
P_TAG1
Component tag (used on components and name plates
DESC1
Description line 1
DESC2
Description line 2
DESC3
Description line 3
P_ITEM
Item/detail number
MFG
Manufacturer name
CAT
Catalog number
ASSYCODE
Optional assembly code (internal use by WD)
INST
Installation code
LOC
Location code
MOUNT
Mount location code
GROUPWITH
Group location code
WDBLKNAM
Schematic symbol block name (used for catalog lookup)
RATING1 thru 12
Rating values
P_TAGSTRIP
Terminal strip ID (terminal footprints only)
TERM
Terminal number (terminal footprints only)
WIRENO
Wire number (terminal footprints only)
Panel Layout
Minimum Attribute / Xdata Requirements
Here are the minimum requirements for WD to recognize a block as a panel
footprint or name plate:
Component footprint – block must carry a minimum of one of the following:
Xdata name
WD_FP
Attribute
FP (blank value)
Attribute
P_TAG1 (and no attribute NP present)
Panel Layout
10-19
Terminal footprint – block must carry a minimum of one of the following:
Xdata name
WD_FPT
Attribute
FPT (blank value)
Panel Nameplate – block must carry a minimum of one of the following:
Xdata name
WD_NP
Attribute
NP (blank value)
Copy Loc/Inst/Groupwith/Mount Codes
Use this suite of utilities to quickly insert or copy LOC location codes to
multiple panel components. You can also copy INST, GROUPWITH, and MOUNT
codes. These values extract into various reports and may be useful for sorting/
grouping purposes. Copied values show up on the target footprints as an attribute
value (if an attribute is present) or as invisible Xdata.
Merging Schematic Wire Numbers onto Footprints
WD supports a transfer of schematic wire numbers to panel footprint
representations. There are two ways that this information can be assigned to the
panel footprint, MTEXT or attributes. If the footprint does not carry certain target
Panel Layout
Layout Wire Connection Annotation
10-20
Panel Layout
attributes then WD will generate MTEXT to display the wire connection
information.
Before trying this feature make sure you have added wire numbers to your
schematics. Once this is completed then you will need to run a WD command to
extract the wire connection information from the schematics. Then you may add
the wire connection information to the footprint blocks.
Extract Wire Information
Go to the WD PNL fly-out and select the Wire EXTR toolbar button.
This extracts the wire connection information from the selected schematics and
saves the information in a table called WFRM2ALL in your project's scratch
database. All wire connection information will be pulled from this table when you
add the wire information to a footprint.
Add Wire Information to Footprint
Panel Layout
Once you've added wire numbers to your schematics and you've extracted this
information you are ready to annotate your panel footprint symbols with this
information. The information can be added to the drawing in two different ways.
You can build your panel footprint symbols with some target attributes that are
used for the wire connection information. If these target attributes are not present
on the panel footprint, WD will add a smart MTEXT entity to carry the wire
information.
Panel Layout
10-21
Now select the WIRE PNL toolbar button.
There are two format edit boxes on the dialog. The “Full” format will be used if WD
does not find the target attributes and inserts MTEXT. The “Partial” format is used
if WD finds the target attributes (described later). Each format uses parameters
that are then replaced with the specific wire information. WD provides some predefined formats for you to select from the list box at the right. Or you can enter
your own format using the replaceable parameters as described below.
Replaceable parameters:
Parameters must be separated by non-blank delimiters for WD to be able to reextract wiring diagram information into reports. For example, “%T=%W %1 %G” is
not acceptable because there is only a space between the %W and %1 and %G
parameters. Acceptable formats include “%T=%W (%1) %G” or “%T=%W / %1
(%G)” or “%T=%W (%1) %G”.
Panel Layout
%T = terminal number on device
%W = wire number
%G = wire color/gauge (or wire LAYER name)
%1 thru %9 (use only one) = destination component Tag ID
where 1=comp tag, 2=comp tag:term, 3=comp tag:term:termdesc, 4=IEC
comp tag, 5= tag:term, 6= tag:term:termdesc, 7=INST prefix+IEC comp tag,
8=tag:term, 9=tag:term:termdesc
10-22
Panel Layout
Commas cannot be used in the format. They signal multiple wire connection
annotations onto a single wire connection attribute.
There are additional options that can be included in the text.
Add TERM suffix
Add the terminal text as a suffix
Add TERMDESC suffix
Add any terminal description value as a suffix
Include INST prefix
Add any INST value as a prefix
WD also provides a way to create a report with this information rather than insert it
on the drawing associated with the footprint. If you wish to create the report, make
sure you have the toggle checked. Select the footprints for the wire connection
information. WD will then insert MTEXT (or update target attributes). If MTEXT is
inserted it is related to the footprint block, but is not part of the block, and therefore
can be easily repositioned using the MOVE command.
Wire Connection Target Attributes
Panel Layout
If the panel footprint blocks are modified to carry certain target attributes, then
these will be updated with the wire information. For example, here is a footprint
representation you might set up for an Allen-Bradley 4-pole relay. Each wire
connection attribute definition (WIRENOxx) is tied to a terminal attribute definition
(TERMxx) via matching two digit suffix on each attribute tag pair.
Each TERMxx attribute definition is set up with a default value corresponding to
the relay’s terminal pin number values. Three instances of this footprint are
shown inserted into the layout below. These correspond to relays 104CR1
Panel Layout
10-23
through 106CR1. Note how the footprints come in with the terminal pin number
values in place. WD will use these terminal numbers along with the overall CR
number to find a match with schematic representations of the relay coil and
contacts. Wire numbers can then be pulled across from these schematic
representations and annotated on to the panel representations.
Here is a sample portion of one of the schematic drawings with a contact shown,
in context, for each of the three relays.
To trigger WD to scan the schematics and annotate panel representations with
wire numbers, select the WD pull-down menu & gt; Panel Layout & gt; Schem wire
connection data -- Footprint. Picking or windowing the three relays results in
Panel Layout
10-24
Panel Layout
schematic wire numbers appearing on the appropriate relay / appropriate terminal
pin numbers.
Note: The sample set of panel footprints provided with WD may or may not be
pre-set with these WIRENO/TERM attribute definition pairs already in
place.
Footprint Look-Up
The Footprint lookup file maps catalog information from a schematic component
to a specific Panel footprint library symbol. WD supplies a starter Footprint file
called footprint_lookup.mdb in Access “.mdb” file format. Within the database file
are tables based on Manufacturer codes. When you select a component from a
WD extract file or select a component from a catalog lookup file, it carries a
manufacturer code, MFG. WD takes this MFG code, goes to the matching table
name in the footprint lookup database and tries to find a match on the CAT
catalog number (plus ASSYCODE if non-blank). If a match is found, WD retrieves
the footprint block path/name (or optional geometry definition) from the matching
record and inserts the footprint representation into the drawing.
You must expand and modify these tables to meet your specific Panel footprint
needs. You can do this using tools provided with WD or through the use of a
database program that can read/write the Access file format.
Panel Layout
In earlier versions of WD, this footprint information was saved in generic dBase
(“.dbf”) files. This format is no longer supported and the separate files must be
converted to the Access database file with tables. WD has provided a conversion
tool to do this for you.
The MDB file is a single file that is named footprint_lookup.mdb. Or you may use
a project specific footprint lookup file, called & lt; projnam & gt; _footprint_lookup.mdb. If
the project-specific .mdb file is used, it needs to be in the same subdirectory as
the & lt; project & gt; .wdp file is located.
Here is the WD search sequence:
1st choice -- & lt; project & gt; _footprint_lookup.mdb (in project's subdirectory)
2nd choice -- footprint_lookup.mdb (in project's subdirectory)
Panel Layout
10-25
3rd choice -- footprint_lookup.mdb (in user subdirectory)
4th choice -- footprint_lookup.mdb in panel subdirectory
5th choice -- AutoCAD search paths
Convert Footprint dBase Files to Access File
In earlier versions of WD, the footprint lookup information was saved in generic
dBase (“.dbf”) files. This format is no longer supported and the separate files must
be converted to the Access database file with tables. WD has provided a
conversion tool to do this for you. The MDB file is a single file that is named
& lt; projname & gt; _footprint_lookup.mdb or footprint_lookup.mdb. Within the single file
are many tables carrying the footprint lookup information.
To convert your existing dBase files use the conversion tool provided under the
WD pull-down: Report/MISC & gt; debug & gt; Convert old catalogs to mdb.
You may convert your catalog files and your Panel footprint look up files at the
same time. Just check the appropriate boxes.
Panel Layout
10-26
Panel Layout
Look-Up File Naming Convention
WD takes the target component’s MFG code and looks for a table, in your Access
footprint_lookup.mdb file format file, with that name. For example, if the
component’s MFG value is SQD, then WD searches for footprint look-up table
called SQD; manufacturer code of AB yields the table name AB.
WD uses this search sequence to find the given look-up Access database file:
1st choice -- & lt; project & gt; _footprint_lookup.mdb (in project's subdirectory)
2nd choice -- footprint_lookup.mdb (in project's subdirectory)
3rd choice -- footprint_lookup.mdb (in user subdirectory)
4th choice -- footprint_lookup.mdb in panel subdirectory
5th choice -- AutoCAD search paths
Look-Up File Format
Footprint look-up tables are in a Microsoft Access database file. Each record
consists of these fields and widths (in this order):
CAT
60
Catalog number, wild cards allowed
ASSYCODE
24
Optional WD ASSYCODE value - internal
WD use only
BLKNAM
255
Footprint block name with partial path OR
geometry definition
DESC
60
Optional short description - used for display
purposes only
Panel Layout
A portion of a sample table, SQD, is shown here:
Panel Layout
10-27
Note the extensive use of wildcards in the catalog number column. The “?”
character means that any single character can substitute for the “?” and the “*”
means that any substring can substitute for the “*” character. Use of wild cards
greatly reduces the number of entries required in the look-up file.
For example, the entry in the third line down is KP??A* and the footprint reference
is SQD\SDLT1A.dwg (the value in the third column). This one entry matches up
with twelve different catalog numbers that all require the user of the same footprint
block:
KP31A6
6 volt, full volt AC/DC, 30.5mm round amber pilot light, glass
lens
KP32A6
12 volt, full volt AC/DC, 30.5mm round amber pilot light,
glass lens
KP35A6
24 volt, full volt AC/DC, 30.5mm round amber pilot light,
glass lens
KP36A6
48 volt, full volt AC/DC, 30.5mm round amber pilot light,
glass lens
KP31A9
6 volt, full volt AC/DC, 30.5mm round amber pilot light,
domed lens
KP32A9
12 volt, full volt AC/DC, 30.5mm round amber pilot light,
domed lens
KP35A9
24 volt, full volt AC/DC, 30.5mm round amber pilot light,
domed lens
KP36A9
48 volt, full volt AC/DC, 30.5mm round amber pilot light,
domed lens
KP31A31
6 volt, full volt AC/DC, 30.5mm round amber pilot light,
fresnel lens
KP32A31
12 volt, full volt AC/DC, 30.5mm round amber pilot light,
fresnel lens
KP35A31
24 volt, full volt AC/DC, 30.5mm round amber pilot light,
fresnel lens
KP36A31
48 volt, full volt AC/DC, 30.5mm round amber pilot light,
fresnel lens
Panel Layout
One entry covers them all. Another strategy you can use in cleverly laying out a
footprint look-up file is to realize that WD searches the file top to bottom and stops
its search on the first match it finds. Let’s say that there is a series of amber pilot
lights with catalog numbers KP??A9SPCL* that need to map to a block
SQD\SDLT1ASPCL.dwg. Given the file above, this catalog number WD will find a
match on the KP??A* entry. BUT, if the entry KP??A9SPCL* is inserted ahead of
the KP??A* entry in the look-up file, WD will a match on it first and retrieve the
correct footprint block -- it will never get to the KP??A* entry. Other part numbers,
like KP31A9, will not match on KP??A9SPCL* but will continue down and match
on the correct KP??A* entry.
10-28
Panel Layout
Block Name versus Geometry Definition
You can encode a simple geometry definition in place of a footprint path/block
name in the look-up file. For example, let’s say that a footprint shape for a given
part number is just a 3x4 rectangle. Instead of creating and saving a 3x4
rectangle as a Wblocked “.dwg” file, you can encode the instructions for drawing
this rectangle right in the look-up file like this:
(“LINE” “0,0” “@4.00,0” “@0,3.00” “@-4.00,0” “C”)
The syntax above basically follows the command sequence you’d type in to create
the footprint outline. When WD comes across this instead of a path/block name in
the look-up, WD executes the command sequence and blocks it on the fly.
A tool in the look-up file “editor” helps you encode these simple geometric
definitions.
Editing Look-Up Files
WD includes a simple tool for making edits and additions to these look-up files.
You may also edit them directly using Microsoft Access.
Panel Layout
Select the FP EDIT button under the PNL MISC flyout.
Panel Layout
10-29
Select Edit Existing Table and select the manufacturer look-up table you wish to
edit.
This dialog displays allowing you to examine the records and modify, delete or
add records.
Panel Layout
10-30
Panel Layout
This dialog is displayed when adding or editing a footprint look-up record. The
first and third edit boxes, at a minimum, must be filled in to provide a key field for
the search and a block or geometry definition for the matching footprint.
Panel Layout
Click Geometry to substitute a simple on-the-fly generated outline for the
matching footprint. Several shapes are selectable or you can manually type in the
definition by following the format illustrated below.
Panel Layout
10-31
Panel Edit Footprint
Select the Panel EDIT toolbar button to modify the data carried on a
selected footprint or name plate block. This dialog shown here is what displays
when a component footprint is selected. The dialog is populated with the attribute
or Xdata values carried by the component footprint.
Use the Schem Lst button to pull up a list of components extracted from the
schematic drawings. This allows you to select a component from the list and WD
will copy the schematic information for the selected component to the panel
component.
Panel Layout
10-32
Panel Layout
Item/Detail Number Balloons
An item or detail number can be assigned to a component’s footprint through
the insert/edit dialog shown above. This is stored as a data value on the footprint
block itself. To bring this item number out to a visible label, a balloon for example,
select the Balloon icon from the toolbar and pick somewhere on the footprint
block. WD retrieves the footprint’s item number and then prompts you to select
start/end for a leader.
WD inserts a single item number attribute, B_ITEM, on the balloon symbol. You
can set up a “template” to have additional visible attributes added to the balloon
automatically at insertion time. Create this drawing with the attribute definitions
you want to include with the balloon symbol:
\viawd\wd\panel\wd_ptag_addattr_itemballoon.dwg.
If WD finds that the template exists, a copy of it gets exploded and merged (i.e.
“blocked” with the balloon as WD inserts it into the drawing).
WD’s item balloon labels are smart in that they update automatically if the
footprint’s item number is manually changed through the EDIT dialog.
TIP: To build up a multiple balloon, let’s say of a switch and a name plate
combination, insert a balloon with leader on the switch. Then insert a
balloon without leader on the name plate. Use AutoCAD MOVE command to move the second balloon so that it touches the first. Both balloons still remain “smart”.
Balloon Setup
Panel Layout
You can preset balloon shape, size, text size, and arrow type from a balloon setup
dialog. Select this from either the PANEL CONFIG toolbar button or, when you
click Balloon, press the letter “S” at the command line prompt.
Re-Sequence Item Numbers
Select this utility to assign or re-sequence item number assignments
drawing-wide or project-wide. You select the beginning item number to use. WD
then processes the drawing or project drawing set assigning incrementing item
numbers for each new part number found. Any old item number assignments are
Panel Layout
10-33
overwritten with new. Existing “smart“ balloons are updated. Repeated part
numbers are assigned the same item number, even when running project-wide.
Name Plates
A name plate is inserted on to the drawing as a block. It can either be referenced
to an existing component footprint block or inserted as a stand-alone name plate.
Linking a Name Plate to a Component Footprint
When tied to a component footprint, the component footprint is the parent and the
name plate is a child of that parent. WD establishes the link automatically by
using invisible Xdata pointers on each block. This is different from the schematic
parent/child link where a common “TAG1/TAG2” tag ID defines the relationship.
WD automatically annotates the name plate with the parent’s DESCx data lines
and tag value (if the name plate block carries these target attribute names).
Here is an example of name plate selection from a vendor icon menu:
Panel Layout
10-34
Panel Layout
Pick the desired name plate type/color from the subdialog and then pick the target
footprint. WD inserts the name plate at the footprint’s insertion point. WD
immediately annotates the name plate with a copy of the DESC data that it finds
carried on the footprint (which is the same description that is found on the
schematic representation of the component). Use AutoCAD MOVE command to
position the name plate in relation to the parent footprint.
Inserting a Stand-Alone Name Plate
To insert a stand-alone name plate, follow the procedure above but, when
prompted to select an existing footprint to tie the name plate to, just press Enter.
You are then prompted to pick a location for insertion of a stand-alone name plate.
Generic Name Plates
Several rectangular name plates with stretchable boundaries are provided.
Select the INSERT Panel Footprint toolbar button and then select Name Plates.
Three generic name plates are shown on the top row of the sub-dialog. Each of
these consists of a “nested” block, which WD explodes, and groups upon
insertion. The rectangular outline of the resulting name plate can be stretched
using AutoCAD Grips or STRETCH WIN command.
Panel Layout
Creating your own
Use this example to create your own stretchable name plate symbols. Using the
left-most one above as an example, the name plate attribute definitions (P_TAG1
and DESC1 thru DESC3) are created and saved as drawing
\viawd\wd\panel\npxxtd3.dwg. Another drawing, \viawd\wd\panel\_npxxtd3.dwg,
is created and the first drawing is inserted as a block at 0,0. A polyline rectangle
is positioned around the block and then the drawing is saved. Now the panel icon
menu file, \viawd\wd\wd_pmenu.dat, is edited with any text editor (ex: WordPad)
and the “_npxxtd3” entry is referenced as shown below. The full path to
npxxtd3.dwg is not needed because the \viawd\wd\panel path is WD’s default for
panel library symbols.
Panel Layout
10-35
**M28
D3W
NAMEPLATES
Generic, TAG and 3 DESC | s1(npxxtd3) | $C=wd_inrnp_xg ““ ““ ““
“_NPXXTD3”
Generic, TAG number only | s1(npxxt) | $C=wd_inrnp_xg ““ ““ ““ “_NPXXT”
Generic, 3 DESC lines only | s1(npxxd3) | $C=wd_inrnp_xg ““ ““ ““
“_NPXXD3”
||
Name Plate, cat lookup|pnl2(_np)|$C=wd_inrnpx
Panel Layout Reports
WD provides a number of Panel Layout Reports as described in the following
sections.
Panel Bill of Materials Report
This report parallels what is provided in the schematic BOM report but
deals with panel component and terminal footprint symbols and name plates.
Optionally, it can include schematic items that are not referenced on the panel
layouts (ex: field devices).
Panel Layout
From the Panel BOM Report dialog, you can customize the scope of the report by
filtering on certain location values (ex: report for CAB1 items only), process only a
subset of drawings, or include/exclude certain categories of items.
10-36
Panel Layout
The report displays and tallies like items (i.e. same part number) together. Those
with extra subassembly items are shown with a “SUB” multiplier value.
Panel Layout
The dialog below shows the same data generated with the “Display in tallied
Purchase list format” toggle selected in the opening dialog. Each item and
subassembly item is tallied and reported as its own item. The TAGS column
shows “where used”.
Panel Component Report
This report lists every occurrence of a smart panel component footprint
found on the current drawing or in the project drawing set. You can customize the
scope of the report by filtering on certain location values (ex: report for CAB1
items only), process only a subset of drawings, or include/exclude certain
Panel Layout
10-37
categories of items. Note: this report will not include panel terminals unless you
check that option.
Each extracted panel component is listed as its own line item. If it has a part
number that results in subassembly part numbers or has been individually
annotated with multi-BOM part numbers, each additional part number is a line
item right below the main line item (ex: see PB203 shown in the report dialog with
two extra part numbers listed).
Panel Layout
As with any WD-generated report, the displayed data can be sorted, rearranged
and report field columns added or removed. It can be output to a spreadsheet file,
“mdb” database file, text file, or it can be inserted onto the drawing as a table.
10-38
Panel Layout
Wire Connection Tables
Wire connection reports, extracted from the schematic wiring diagrams, can be
formatted and inserted next to panel footprint symbols as simple wiring tables.
Preliminaries: First select WIRE EXTR to extract wiring information
from the schematic wiring diagram set. This information is saved to a table called
WFRM2ALL in the project's scratch database file.
Panel Layout
Now select the WIRE PNL toolbar button and select one or more
footprint symbols. Make sure you select the Output to report dialog only option.
Panel Layout
10-39
WD extracts and formats a small report of wire connection information for the
selected components, referencing the wire extract file above.
Name Plate Report
This report is similar to the panel component report but filters out all but
name plate symbols.
This report provides some error checking between the schematics and
panel layout drawings. Select the XCPT RPT icon on the Panel RPT flyout.
Panel Layout
Component Exception Report
10-40
Panel Layout
Select which components/drawings you wish to process.
The program will look at the selected components, both schematic and panel,
looking for a match in the project. For each schematic component selected, the
routine will try to find a matching panel component based on TAG, LOC, and INST
information. If a match is found then it will further compare catalog information,
and description information, looking for any discrepancies. The program will then
look at each selected panel component looking for a matching schematic
component in the same way.
Panel Layout
Surf
Surf through the error conditions correcting components as
needed.
Display: ...
Display the information using WD’s standard report dialog
allowing you to manipulate the data, save the report, etc.
Panel Layout
10-41
Terminal Exception Report
This report provides some error checking between the schematic
terminals and panel layout terminals. Select the XCPT TRM icon on the Panel
RPT flyout.
Select which components/drawings you wish to process.
Panel Layout
The program will look at the selected terminals, both schematic and panel, looking
for a match in the project. For each schematic terminal selected, the routine will
try to find a matching panel terminal based on TAG, LOC, and INST information.
If a match is found then it will further compare catalog information, looking for any
10-42
Panel Layout
discrepancies. The program will then look at each selected panel terminal looking
for a matching schematic terminal in the same way.
Surf through the error conditions correcting components as
needed.
Display: ...
Panel Layout
Surf
Display the information using WD’s standard report dialog
allowing you to manipulate the data, save the report, etc.
Frequently Asked
Questions
44
In This Chapter. . . .
- General
- Icon Menu
- Configure Drawing Form and Ladder Defaults
- Configure Component Tag Format
- Configure Wire Number Format
- Configure Cross-Reference Format
- Configure Layer Naming Convention
- Library Symbols
- New Drawing
- New Ladder
- Existing Ladder
- Wires
- Wire Numbers
- Catalog Files
- Old Drawings Compatible with WD
- WD Project Files
- WD Scratch Database File
- WD Environment File
- WD and Drawing Management Systems
- Network Installation
- WD API / AutoLISP Programming Hooks
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-2
Frequently Asked Questions
General
How can I tell between a main switch contact and a child contact on the icon
menu?
The child switch contact icon is marked “2+” in the upper right corner. Select
this icon to insert the 2nd, 3rd, and beyond contacts of a multi-contact switch.
This same concept applies to other symbols like cable markers, single PLC I/
O points, and plug/jack pin connectors. The file naming convention is this:
the 4th character is a “1” for parent and “2” for child (example: HPB11.dwg
and HPB21.dwg for parent push button switch and an extra contact for a push
button switch respectively).
I toggled my WD toolbar off. How do I get it back?
Select Toolbars on the WD pull-down menu and select one of the two categories of WD toolbar menus. This should toggle the toolbar back on.
Why are there two sets of WD toolbars available?
Select Toolbars on the WD pull-down menu and you see two selections:
Main and Split. Both selections give you all the WD toolbar buttons, but the
Split selection divides the large main toolbar into two smaller pieces. At lower
screen resolutions this lets you dock the pieces and still see all of the buttons.
I upgraded my WD and my toolbar is completely different now. What
happened?
WD’s toolbar was rearranged grouping like functions together. You can select
to use the “classic” toolbar under Toolbars on the WD pull-down menu if you
prefer that setup.
I had to switch my screen resolution back to 640x480 and my WD toolbar
disappeared. What happened?
Your WD toolbar is probably floating in space beyond the right-hand side of
your screen. Go back to the higher resolution and dock the toolbars along the
left-hand side of your screen. Then try the lower resolution.
If the problem is that the docked WD toolbar falls off the screen (not enough
room on the screen), try using the Split version of the WD toolbar (see above).
What is the “WD QuikPic” toolbar?
This optional menu gives you quick access to a selected page on WD’s icon
menu. It can save you one or two clicks. For example, pick the CR icon and
Frequently Asked Questions
11-3
You can add or remove buttons on this QuikPic menu by carefully editing and
recompiling the \viawd\wd2000i.mnu file (make a back up first) or you can
program your own menus or shortcuts to access this quick menu display feature. Here is the syntax:
(c:wd_insym_gomenu n) where “n” is a “menu number” defined in WD’s “/
viawd/wd/wd_menu.dat” file.
My WD toolbar has some “smiley faces” for icons. What's wrong?
You need to force the menu to recompile. Exit AutoCAD and find your WD
main directory, i.e. \viawd2000. You need to find the 3 compiled files for your
menu. The compiled files will be the same name as the menu file itself (see
below) but will have the following extensions, .MNC, .MNR, and .MNS. To
find the WD menu file name itself, you need to know which version of
AutoCAD you are using. For AutoCAD R14, the WD menu is WD14, for
R2000 it is WD2000, and for R2000i it is WD2000I (if you’ve opted to load the
WD menus/toolbars as a “partial” menu, the file name will be
WD_ONLY.MNU). So let's say you are using AutoCAD 2000i, look for files
WD2000i.MNC, WD2000i.MNR, and WD2000i.MNS. Delete these three files.
Make sure you do NOT delete WD2000i.MNU (this is the WD menu in the
uncompiled form). Re-start AutoCAD. This will force the menu to automatically recompile. If the “smiley faces” reappear, make sure that your AutoCAD
support path (under AutoCAD “options” dialog) includes the path to the WD
menu “bmp” files (example: c:\viawd\bmp) and repeat the above process.
Can I modify WD’s right-click menu?
Yes. Use any ASCII text editor (ex: Wordpad) and carefully edit wd2000.mnu
or wd2000i.mnu (make a backup, just in case!). Search for sections labelled
“**CLICK_…” and edit as you see fit. Save the file and force the menu to
recompile as described above.
Does WD support long file names?
You can use long files names for wiring diagram drawing names, project file
names, report file names, library symbol names, and Wblocked drawing files
names you wish to insert using WD’s INSERT CIRC command.
The total character length for a WD project file (“.wdp”) is limited to 127 characters.
Why does my report’s numeric column data sort in a goofy manner?
It the problem is that you see “1” and “10” and “11” coming before “2” then the
problem is probably a text justification issue. WD uses an alphanumeric sort.
If your data is meant to be numeric data but it is left justified, you will get this
odd looking sort.
Frequently Asked
Questions
WD immediately jumps to the relay selection icon page (saves one click).
Pick the USR CKT icon and WD immediately displays the user circuit icon
(this one saves you two clicks).
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-4
Frequently Asked Questions
The work-around is to extract and display your report. Pick the “Change
report format” button on the dialog and flip the column in question from LJT to
RJT. Hit OK to return to your report. Resort the display. The numeric column
will hopefully sort more to your liking.
Icon Menu
Can I set up my own icon menu file and make that the WD default?
Yes. You can set up WD's icon menu system so that you can flip back and
forth from the default wd_menu.dat file to your own “my_menu.dat”. Here's
how:
Add a line like this somewhere in WD's wd_menu.dat file:
My schem menu|mymenu.sld|$C=(c:wd_loadmenu “my_menu.dat”)
(c:wd_insym_gomenu 0)
Then, in your new “my_menu.dat” file, put this line in somewhere so you can
jump back to WD's default menu:
Default WD menu|back2wd.sld|$C=(c:wd_loadmenu “wd_menu.dat”)
(c:wd_insym_gomenu 0)
Now, when in WD's default icon menu, pick on the new “My menu” entry. Your
menu should immediately appear and will remain the default for subsequent
component inserts. When/if you want to go back to WD's default menu, select
the “Default WD menu” button you added on your own menu. WD will immediately flip back to the WD default icon menu and it will remain as the default
for subsequent inserts.
I want to use my own custom AutoLISP program with dialog to insert
components. Can I do that from the WD icon menu?
Yes. Below is a simple DCL and AutoLISP file. It shows a case where a user
has a set of conditions that are too complex to encode into the menu. To
invoke your custom command, edit your wd_menu.dat file and add a line to
load and call your custom routine. Using the example shown below, the line
might look like this:
Test Switches | test_switch.sld | $C=(load “test_sw”) (c:test_sw)
DCL file
test_sw_sel : dialog
{
label=”Test Switches”;
:row
{
:column
{
fixed_height = true;
alignment = top;
Frequently Asked Questions
11-5
}
ok_cancel;
AutoLISP Program
(defun c:test_sw ( / dcl_id lst cancel sym_volt_desc_lst symnam_volt_lst
sym_cur_desc_lst symnam_cur_lst symnam_cur_non_lst
sym_cur_non_desc_lst sw_desc_ix symnam ben)
; -- data for dialog pick list -; ** Voltage switches **
(setq sym_volt_desc_lst (list “Voltage LEFT, Parent” “Voltage RIGHT, Parent”
“Voltage LEFT, Child” “Voltage RIGHT, Child”) )
; Corresponding AutoCAD symbol block names
(setq symnam_volt_lst (list “HSW1L” “HSW1R” “HSW2L” “HSW2R”) )
; ** Current-shorting switches **
(setq sym_cur_desc_lst (list “Short-current LEFT, Parent” “Short-current
RIGHT, Parent” “Short-current LEFT, Child” “Short-current RIGHT, Child”) )
; Corresponding AutoCAD symbol block names
(setq symnam_cur_lst (list “HSW1LS” “HSW1RS” “HSW2LS” “HSW2RS”) )
; ** Current-nonshorting switches **
(setq sym_cur_non_desc_lst (list “Current LEFT, Parent” “Current RIGHT,
Parent” “Current LEFT, Child” “Current RIGHT, Child”) )
; Corresponding AutoCAD symbol block names
(setq symnam_cur_non_lst (list “HSW1LN” “HSW1RN” “HSW2LN”
“HSW2RN”) )
; -- internal routines below -(defun fill_list ( / )
(start_list “sw_desc”)
(mapcar 'add_list desclst)
(end_list)
(mode_tile “accept” 0) ; unfuzz the OK button
)
(defun do_volt ( / )
(setq desclst sym_volt_desc_lst)
(fill_list) ; display in picklist
(setq symnam_lst symnam_volt_lst) ; block name list
)
(defun do_cur_short ( / )
(setq desclst sym_cur_desc_lst) ; list for dialog picklist
(fill_list)
(setq symnam_lst symnam_cur_non_lst) ; block name list
)
(defun do_cur_non ( / )
(setq desclst sym_cur_non_desc_lst) ; list for dialog picklist
(fill_list)
Frequently Asked
Questions
:text{label=”Switch category”;}
:radio_button{key=”volt”;label=”Voltage”;}
:radio_button{key=”cur_non”;label=”Current: Non-shorting”;}
:radio_button{key=”cur_short”;label=”Current: Shorting”;}
}
:list_box{key=”sw_desc”;width=24;height=12;allow_accept=true;label=”Type”;
}
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-6
Frequently Asked Questions
(setq symnam_lst symnam_cur_lst) ; block name list
)
; -- **** MAIN routine starts here **** -(setq dcl_id (load_dialog “test_sw.dcl”))
(if (not (new_dialog “test_sw_sel” dcl_id))
(alert “Cannot find dialog definition file \”test_sw.dcl\””)
; ELSE
(progn
(setq cancel nil)
(setq sw_desc_ix nil)
(mode_tile “accept” 1) ; fuzz out the “OK” button
(action_tile “volt” “(do_volt)”)
(action_tile “cur_non” “(do_cur_non)”)
(action_tile “cur_short” “(do_cur_short)”)
(action_tile “sw_desc” “(setq sw_desc_ix (atoi $value))”)
(action_tile “cancel” “(setq cancel 1)”) ; user hit cancel
(start_dialog)
(unload_dialog dcl_id)
(if (AND sw_desc_ix (not cancel))
(progn ; Okay to insert
; Get symbol name to insert
(setq symnam (nth sw_desc_ix symnam_lst))
; Call WD's INS COMPONENT “API” entry point and insert the switch
(setq ben (c:wd_insymn symnam))
))
))
(princ)
)
Configure Drawing Form and Ladder Defaults
Can I use my existing drawing format and title block with WD?
Yes. Your existing drawing format automatically becomes WD compatible
upon insertion of an invisible block \viawd\wd\jic1\WD_M.dwg. Various WD
settings are stored as invisible attribute values on this block. When you
invoke a WD command and it does not find this invisible WD_M block on your
drawing, the command pauses and prompts you for permission for WD to
insert the block automatically.
You can also link your title block to WD for automated updates. See the chapter on Miscellaneous Tools for details.
Can WD be used in Paper Space?
Yes, but you can’t split WD’s smart wiring and components between paper
and model space. They all have to be in one or the other for WD to work correctly.
Frequently Asked Questions
11-7
Can WD be used in a metric environment?
To set your drawing’s global scaling factor, select the CONFIG toolbar button.
On the Configuration dialog click the Scale Setup button. A sub-dialog
offers you a choice of three settings for your drawing:
• Assume inch units
• Assume inch units scaled up for use in metric environment (scale factor
25.4)
• Assume full-size metric (millimeter units) library in use (scale remains 1.0
but internal wire connection “trap” distance scaled up by 25.4)
Make your choice and click OK to save the settings to the WD_M block.
What is the advantage of creating a WD template drawing?
Your template drawing can have WD’s invisible WD_M block pre-inserted and
your specific defaults preset on it. With this template prototype, WD won’t
have to pause and ask permission to insert the block as you start each new
wiring diagram drawing.
Here is how to create a WD template drawing.
1. Open either a NEW drawing or open your existing base drawing border/
title block drawing.
Frequently Asked
Questions
Yes. The defaults and libraries are set up for inch units but a global scaling
factor can be set. This factor is one piece of information saved on the drawing’s invisible WD_M block. WD automatically adapts to this scaling factor on
a per drawing basis.
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-8
Frequently Asked Questions
2.
Select WD’s CONFIG drawing toolbar button. Allow WD to insert a
copy of the special WD_M block (click OK).
3. The Configuration dialog is displayed. Set up your layer naming convention and tagging formats.
4. Click OK.
5. Do a SAVEAS to a new name (select “.dwt” template) to be used as your
prototype/template drawing file.
How do I set up permanent ladder width and rung spacing default values?
This procedure depends upon whether you are using a WD prototype/template or no template to start a new drawing.
Using a WD Prototype/Template drawing
1. OPEN your WD prototype/template drawing.
2.
Select WD’s CONFIG drawing toolbar button.
3. On the Configuration dialog click the Ladder Setup button. This sub-dialog is displayed.
4. Enter your desired rung spacing and ladder width values in the edit boxes.
Frequently Asked Questions
11-9
5. Click OK to exit the configuration dialog. Save and exit.
1. Open drawing \viawd\wd\jic1\WD_M.dwg.
2. Use DDEDIT to change the default values of the following attribute definitions.
RUNGHORV Default value = “H” for horizontal rungs (vertical ladders);
“V” for vertical rungs (horizontal ladders).
DLADW
Set default value = ladder rung width.
RUNGDIST
Set default value = rung spacing.
UNIT_SCL
Set default value = 1.0 for inch; 1.0 for full size metric;
25.4 for inch scaled up to metric.
MISC_FLAGS Set one’s bit to 0 for inch; 0 for scaled inch; 1 for full size
metric.
3. Save and exit.
Can I set up a drawing border template with pre-drawn ladders?
Yes, this is a great idea that will save you time and promotes consistency.
When you start a new drawing you’ll just reference your WD prototype with its
pre-drawn ladders. Then you’ll use WD’s REVISE Ladder utility to change the
pre-drawn ladders instantly to the desired range of line reference numbers.
Here is how to set this up:
1. Open your blank drawing form or WD prototype created above.
2. Use the NEW Ladder command to insert your new, blank ladders (let WD
insert the WD_M block if it prompts for permission).
3. Do a SAVEAS to a file name (.dwt) to be used for this pre-drawn ladder
template drawing.
Configure Component Tag Format
Sequential tags -- can they continue from one drawing to the next?
Yes, sequential tags can continue uninterrupted from one drawing to the next
if you assign the same beginning sequential number to every drawing in your
project. Let’s say you assign each drawing’s beginning component sequential
number as “001” (do this from WD’s CONFIG Drawing dialog). As you insert
components on any drawing of the project set, WD starts with “001” and
works its way up until it finds the next unused sequential number tag for the
target component family. WD does this by checking an internal list it keeps of
all component tags used on all drawings of the project.
If you finish a drawing, move to the next, but then later come back to the first
to add another componet and sequential tag, a gap will appear in the numbering sequence for that drawing. You can use WD’s project-wide Re-sequence
utility (under the PROJ fly-out) to re-tag the whole drawing set.
An alternate method for sequential component tagging is to assign a beginning tag number for each drawing (again, from the CONFIG Drawing dialog).
Frequently Asked
Questions
Not using a WD Prototype/Template drawing
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-10
Frequently Asked Questions
This beginning number then applies to all components on that drawing. For
example, drawing “01” might be assigned “1” as its beginning sequential number, drawing “02” assigned “51”, drawing “03” assigned “101” and so on. If
each drawing has five relay coils and three pilot lights, and the component tag
format code is “%F%N”, then WD would automatically tag these items as:
Drawing “01”
CR1 thru CR5, LT1 thru LT3
Drawing “02”
CR51 thru CR55, LT51 thru LT53
Drawing “03”
CR101 thru CR105, LT101 thru LT103
How can I determine if a sequential component tag number is already used?
WD is designed not to repeat a sequential component tag number on your
wiring diagram set unless you specifically force it to. It checks a list of component tags extracted from the drawing set to find the next unused sequential
number. If you want to confirm this, follow this sequence:
From the INSERT/EDIT dialog, select Tags: Used so far. WD extracts and
displays a list of all component tags of the target family type.
How can I override a component tag?
When you insert or edit a component, the normal INSERT/EDIT dialog is displayed. Manually type the tag of your choice into the Component Tag edit
box in the upper left-hand corner of this dialog. You can overwrite any existing tag. Click the “fixed” toggle if you want this tag to be “fixed” and not accidentally updated by a later Re-tag operation. Click OK to update the
component. Alternately, you can also use any of WD’s attribute editing utili-
Frequently Asked Questions
11-11
In addition, WD provides a way to override a component tag but still update
the reference number portion on a re-tag. On the INSERT/EDIT dialog select
the Options button in the TAG area.
Enter a tag format override in the edit box. For example, a certain relay component needs to always have an " MC-R " family tag value instead of " CR " so
that re-tag, for example, will assign MC-R100 instead of CR100. To achieve
this tag override you would enter " MC-R%N " for the tag format. WD adds an
invisible xdata flag that carries the tag's format value to override the drawing's
default format of " %F%N " .
What is the reference-based tag suffix list and how do I change it?
WD will not insert a duplicate reference-based component tag on the active
drawing (unless you manually force it). WD references a suffix list to keep
component tags unique. For example, WD automatically tags three push buttons found on line reference 100 as “PB100”, “PB100A”, and “PB100B”. It references a suffix list of “,” “A”, “B”, “C”, and so on. If this suffix list is changed
to “1”, “2”, “3”, ... then these three push button tags would be “PB1001”,
“PB1002”, and “PB1003”.
Frequently Asked
Questions
ties or even AutoCAD’s DDATTE command to change attribute values on a
selected component.
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-12
Frequently Asked Questions
You can examine and edit this reference-based component suffix list from the
CONFIG Drawing dialog. Click Component Tagging Line Ref Setup button. This sub-dialog displays:
The individual items in the suffix list are given in the row of edit boxes across
the top of the dialog. Four default lists are available by selecting the appropriate button. If none of these meets your needs then manually enter your own
suffix list in the row of edit boxes. Click OK to save and exit from the Configuration dialog.
Can I force the tag suffix to insert somewhere other than at the end?
The component tag suffix defaults to the end of the tag, which is because it is
a suffix. But, if you wish, you can tell WD to insert the suffix character somewhere within the tag format. Use the “Suffix” position parameter, %X, in the
component tag format (on the CONFIG dialog). Let’s say your tag format
string is %N-%F giving tags like 100-PB, 100-PBA, 100-PBB (suffix list “,” “A”,
“B”…). You really want the suffix to appear after the number. Change the tag
format to %N%X - %F
This will yield tags 100-PB, 100A-PB, 100B-PB.
Frequently Asked Questions
11-13
Sequential wire numbers -- can they continue from one drawing to the next?
Yes. You can batch process your entire project and assign a beginning wire
number for the first drawing. The wire numbers are then tagged to sequence
from one drawing to the next.
Select the INS WIRENUMS toolbar button. This dialog is displayed.
Click Proj-wide in the lower left corner. The following dialog is displayed.
Select the Seq (consecutive dwg to dwg) button, enter the first wire number
for the first drawing, and click OK. WD creates a script file, _irenums.scr, in
your WD user subdirectory and immediately executes it. This script file opens
each drawing in the project and processes the wiring. It makes a second
pass on drawings that have unresolved wire number signals.
What is the reference-based wirenum suffix list and how can I change it?
WD will not insert a duplicate reference-based wire number tag on the active
drawing (unless you manually force it). WD references a suffix list to keep
wire numbers unique when multiple wires begin at the same line reference
number. For example, WD automatically tags three separate wire networks,
all beginning on line reference 100, as wire numbers “100”, “100A”, and
“100B”. To do this, it references a suffix list of “,” “A”, “B”, “C”, and so on. If
this suffix list is changed to “1”, “2”, “3”, ... then the wire number tags would be
“1001”, “1002”, and “1003”.
Frequently Asked
Questions
Configure Wire Number Format
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-14
Frequently Asked Questions
You can examine and edit this reference-based wire number suffix list from
the CONFIG Drawing dialog. Pick the Wire Numbering Setup button. This
sub-dialog displays:
The individual items in the suffix list are displayed in the row of edit boxes
across the top of the dialog. Four default lists are available by selecting the
appropriate button. If none of these meets your needs then you can manually
enter your own suffix list in the boxes. Click OK to save and exit from the
Configuration dialog.
How do I change wire number text size and placement?
If your wire numbers are already present on your drawing then you can use
any of WD’s attribute editing and repositioning utilities or the project-wide
attribute text size update (refer to the chapter on Miscellaneous Tools). If you
want to make permanent changes to WD’s wire number tag size and placement then refer to the section entitled “Wire Numbers -- Text Size and Wire
Offset” later in this chapter.
How can I force automatic wire leaders on or off?
Select WD’s CONFIG Drawing toolbar button.
On the Configuration dialog look at the Wire numbering section. Near the
bottom right-hand corner, select from the Leader drop-down menu. New wire
numbers will follow your selection (existing wire number leaders will remain
unchanged).
I want PLC address-based wire numbers, automatically. How?
Select WD’s CONFIG Drawing toolbar button. In the Wire number section,
select Use I/O addresses toggle. New wires or wire rnumbering on the current drawing will now show PLC I/O address-based wire numbers automatically. If you want to make this a permanent change, make it part of a
prototype/template drawing.
Frequently Asked Questions
11-15
Can I manually edit cross-reference annotation?
Yes. Use one of WD’s attribute editing commands, the EDIT Component
command, or use AutoCAD’s DDATTE command. Be aware that your edited
cross-reference annotation may be overwritten the next time you invoke WD’s
cross-reference update command.
Can I have a different format for inter-drawing references?
Yes. WD will optionally use an alternate cross-reference format on child contacts and signal arrows when the annotation involves a reference from a
drawing other than the current drawing. For example, you can set up the normal on-drawing reference format as “%N” (Reference #) and the alternate,
inter-drawing reference as “%N (%D)” (Reference # (Drawing #)) or “%S-%N”
(Sheet # Reference #). When a reference is from another drawing, WD will
include the drawing name or sheet number along with the reference value.
From WD’s CONFIG Drawing dialog, select the Cross-ref format Setup button. Enter this alternate format in the lower edit box in the dialog shown here.
You set up the drawing’s “%D” (Drawing #) and “%S” (Sheet #) parameters on
WD’s configuration dialog in the right-hand column. The example shown here
is “1” for a sheet number and “R12341” for a drawing number.
Frequently Asked
Questions
Configure Cross-Reference Format
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-16
Frequently Asked Questions
Configure Layer Naming Convention
Can I use my own layer naming convention with WD?
Yes. WD uses no preset layer names.
You set up your own layer naming system from WD’s CONFIG Drawing
dialog. Select the Layers Setup button and then enter layer names on the
WD layer name dialog shown here.
You can fill in whatever boxes you wish. You can leave some blank. Blank
ones instruct WD to use the current layer for that category of graphics or text.
You can put the same layer name in multiple boxes. You have complete freedom to adapt the package to your naming convention.
How can I change layer naming used on an existing WD drawing?
Pick the MISC toolbar fly-out and then find and select the WD LAY
button. The following dialog is displayed. It lists the entire WD-related layer
Frequently Asked Questions
11-17
Click Find/Replace. The following dialog is displayed. In the Find edit box,
type “DEMO-”. Advance to the Replace edit box and press Enter. Now click
OK and OK again to dismiss the main dialog and to save the changes. WD
changes the layer names and saves the new layer name settings on the drawing’s invisible WD_M block.
Frequently Asked
Questions
names currently defined on your drawing. In the example shown here, every
layer has a “DEMO-” prefix. Let’s say that you want to get rid of this prefix.
11-18
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked
Questions
How can I quickly move all entities from one layer to another?
WD provides a simple utility to speed this up. It also has the advantage of
working on entities embedded within blocks. Type VIALM at the AutoCAD
command line to start the utility (or pick Report/MISC from the pull-down
menu, pick debug, pick move ents to lay).
Library Symbols
How can I select a different name for a component family, for example, “PL”
instead of “LT”?
The default family name used for tagging purposes is carried on each library
symbol as the TAG1 or TAG2 attribute default value. To make a permanent
change, edit all of the library symbols of the desired component family, changing the TAG1 and TAG2 attribute default values.
There is an alternate method. You can override the library defaults by creating or editing the \viawd\wd\WD_FAM.dat file. This is a simple text file.
Let’s say that you want limit switches to be tagged “LIM” instead of “LS” and
you want pilot lights to be “PL” instead of “LT”. Add these two lines to the file
(or create the file if it does not exist).
LS,LIM
LT,PL
The change will take effect when you open the next drawing (or reopen the
current drawing). New limit switch components you insert will receive the
“LIM” family code annotation instead of library default “LS” (ex: “LIM1001”
instead of “LS1001”), and pilot lights will be tagged with “PL” instead of “LT”.
Use the RETAG command to update previously inserted components.
Can I have a generic child device symbol that can be linked to any type of
parent symbol?
Yes. A generic child device can be linked to any type of parent symbol if the
child library symbol's FAMILY attribute value is left blank. For example, you
might want to create just a simple N.O. contact and be able to apply it to any
kind of switch, controller, drive, or whatever. If the FAMILY attribute value is
left blank, WD will “fill it in” on-the-fly with the parent's FAMILY code when the
link is made (Parent/Sibling or DWG or PROJ pick).
Can I automatically link customized WD_FAM.DAT files to a specific client or
project?
No, not directly but there are two work-around methods.
METHOD A
Put the target project file (the .WDP file) and the customized wd_fam.dat file
together into a subdirectory separate from any other project files. Then, when
Frequently Asked Questions
11-19
METHOD B
Move the special wd_fam.dat file into your “user” subdirectory
(\viawd\wd\user\) before you start working on a project that requires tag name
re-mapping. When you are finished, erase the wd_fam.dat file or move it out
of the user subdirectory.
Note: To determine what your user directory path is, type in this command at
the AutoCAD command line:
Command: (c:wd_getenv “WD_USER)
How can I make all the symbols I insert a bit bigger (or smaller)?
METHOD A
Pick the CONFIG Drawing toolbar button. Select the Scale Setup button. Change the value of the Feature scale multiplier. The default is 1.0. If
you want everything to be 25% bigger, change this value to 1.25.
This scaling factor is saved with your current wiring diagram drawing on the
drawing’s invisible WD_M block. Since this value is saved with the drawing
itself, you can easily change the scaling from drawing to drawing or project to
project to meet specific client needs.
Frequently Asked
Questions
you select any drawing from this isolated project file, WD will find and use the
customized version of wd_fam.dat located in the selected project file’s directory.
11-20
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked
Questions
METHOD B
This is a permanent method but will take some effort. Modify all of the hundreds of WD “.DWG” library symbols with AutoCAD’s SCALE command. Do
not change the symbol’s origin. Here is a suggested command sequence:
“SCALE “ALL “ “0,0 [factor]
Note: Method A adjusts all WD size, spacing, and wire connection “trap” values by the factor amount. Method B does not.
TIP: To change the scale of existing components already inserted into your
drawing, use WD’s Block Swap command. Select the “Swap” library
option, point at the same library currently in use but change the scale
factor up or down as required.
How can I suppress cross-reference text that gets added to child contacts?
Freeze the layer that this cross-reference text is on. Freezing this layer will
cause the text to become invisible but will not affect the cross-reference text
that is carried on parent components (ex: relay and timer coils). Use the regular AutoCAD LAYER dialog to freeze the layer or use the WD equivalent
under the Layers Setup button of the main CONFIG Drawing dialog. Look
for the layer edit box labeled “X-ref” (child). Check the F box just to the right
of this layer name. Click OK to close the dialog. The target layer will freeze
and the child cross-reference text will vanish.
You can use the HIDE attribute if you want to pick specific crossreference attributes to hide, use the special HIDE attribute utility to make
selected cross-reference attributes invisible. Refer to the chapter on Miscellaneous Tools.
Frequently Asked Questions
11-21
The text style is WD and it is tied to the generic (and plain looking) TXT font.
You can change it to whatever style you like at any time. Just use AutoCAD’s
STYLE command. Select WD from the pull-down, change the Font Name to
a more attractive font, let’s say ROMANS, and then click Apply. All WD symbols will update.
Can I change all existing component text to a different text size?
Select Project-wide UTILs from the PROJ toolbar fly-out. Select Change Attr
Size in the bottom right-hand corner and select Setup. Toggle the various
categories you want to change and set the height value you want (and width
scale factor, if desired). Click OK and select the drawings to process.
Frequently Asked
Questions
What text style does WD use? Can I change its font assignment at any
time?
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-22
Frequently Asked Questions
Permanent changes require changing the attribute definitions found on the
library symbol “.dwg” files themselves (ex: symbols in the \viawd\wd\jic1 or
\viawd\wd\jic125 subdirectories).
How can I get the schematic icon menu’s “Browse” button to start in my
subdirectory?
The Browse button defaults to your user subdirectory when the dialog pops
up. To change this default to your own drive/directory path, add an entry to
the wd.env file.
1. Exit AutoCAD (this is important)
2. Use an ASCII text editor (ex: Wordpad) and open \viawd\wd.env
3. Add this line to the end of the file:
WD_INSCOMPDLG, & lt; drive: & gt; / & lt; path & gt; /,Dlg button start path
where you insert your drive/path as shown. For example, if the path to your
special symbol directory were n:/electrical/spcl, then the line you add to the
wd.env file would be:
WD_INSCOMPDLG,N:/electrical/spcl/,Browse button start path
4. Save and exit
Horizontal and Vertical
Why are there two versions of each symbol, one starting with “H” and the
other “V”?
When WD prepares to insert a component, it reads the orientation of the
underlying wire. If the wire is horizontal, the “H” version of the symbol is
inserted. If vertical, the “V” version is used. This is automatic. For example, if
you insert a normally open relay contact into a horizontal wire, WD uses symbol HCR21.dwg. If the wire is vertical, WD inserts VCR21.dwg.
Why not just rotate a horizontal symbol 90 degrees when inserting it into a
vertical wire?
It doesn’t look as good. The vertical version of each symbol has its major
pieces of text rotated so that the text is always horizontal.
Frequently Asked Questions
11-23
The default orientation is consistent with your drawing’s default ladder rung
orientation. The “H” horizontal symbol is the default for vertical ladders with
horizontal rungs. The “V” symbol becomes the default for horizontal ladders
with vertical rungs. If WD detects an underlying wire opposite the default orientation, WD flips the symbol to the opposite orientation.
How can I outsmart WD and insert a symbol opposite the default
orientation?
Click the check box in the lower left-hand corner of the opening page of the
icon menu. Then select the component you want to insert. This mode will
stay active until you clear the box.
My new symbol has trouble sensing the correct insertion orientation. What
could be wrong?
Make sure that your symbol’s insertion origin point lies in-line between the origins of two X?TERM* attribute definitions. Just a small misalignment may be
enough to cause WD to fail to correctly insert the component and break
underlying wires. Also make sure that the “?” code of each wire connection
X?TERM* attribute is set up correctly. See the chapter on Symbol Libraries
for more information on attributes.
When your converted symbol has three or more wire connection points (i.e.
“X?TERM*” attributes) or there is a wire connection point at or near the origin
of the symbol, WD may become confused as to what orientation it should use
to connect to an underlying wire. You can temporarily flip WD’s default insertion orientation by checking the box in the lower left-hand corner of the opening dialog as described above.
Frequently Asked
Questions
What symbol orientation is the default when a symbol is inserted into empty
space?
11-24
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked
Questions
Layers and Colors
Is there a layering convention that I should follow in constructing or
modifying WD symbols?
Yes. Keep everything on layer 0 and color “BYLAYER”. Then let WD automatically move things to appropriate layers at symbol insertion time. This is a
powerful feature of the package. Library symbols automatically adapt to your
layering convention on the fly.
You define your convention in the Layers setup sub-dialog (shown
below) of WD’s CONFIG Drawing dialog. Enter the layer names for the various parts and pieces of components in the edit boxes under the Component
Layers section. Note that these layers don’t have to exist. If WD cannot find
the layers you define here when it prepares to insert a new component, then
WD creates the layers on the fly.
What attribute categories get assigned to different layers at component
insertion time?
As you insert a component, WD automatically assigns parts and pieces of it to
different layers. For example, the component’s cross-reference attributes are
put on the layer for cross-reference text, the component’s terminal pin number
attributes move to the layer selected for terminal pin numbers, and so on.
These categories are set up in the left-hand column of the dialog shown
above. A blank entry causes that category to go to the current layer. Multiple
entries can be tied to the same layer name, if desired.
I have some special layers on my symbols that I want to preserve during WD
insertion. How?
To always inhibit WD from flipping your special non-layer 0 entities to WD’s
defaults, toggle the Ignore above for symbol’s non-lay “0” ents button on
Frequently Asked Questions
11-25
Why all these different layers for parts and pieces of an inserted
component?
1. It looks better. You can assign a different color to each layer category so
that all component tags display as one color, terminals another, cross-reference text another, and so on.
2. You can turn off all of a certain category of information by freezing that
layer. For example, turn off all contact functional descriptions or all component location codes by freezing the appropriate layer.
3. You can assign different plot “pen” widths to the various categories based
upon assigned colors. Perhaps you want component tags to plot heavier
than switch position or terminal number text.
How can I force everything to always go on a single, named layer?
Put the same layer name in each category listed in the Config dialog’s Layers
sub-dialog.
How can I force everything to always go on to the current layer?
Blank out the layer name for each category listed in the Config dialog’s Layers sub-dialog.
Do I have to worry about what layer is current while I am inserting a
component?
No. WD automatically manages this for you based upon the layer names
you’ve set up in the Setup Layers dialog. Only if you happen to leave some
of the layer categories blank (undefined) will those associated entities end up
on the current layer.
With the layer setup shown below, only the graphics of inserted components
will go on the current layer (since the Graphics category layer name is blank).
Frequently Asked
Questions
the dialog shown below (this is under the drawing’s CONFIG dialog, Layers
Setup). Note that this setting is drawing-wide, not project-wide.
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-26
Frequently Asked Questions
All other parts and pieces of inserted components will automatically move to
the named layers.
Can I change the color of a category of symbol text -- terminal pin numbers,
for example?
Yes. Use the stock AutoCAD LAYER command dialog to change the
assigned color of the target layer. This will change the color of all symbol
annotation of the target category. This works because the WD libraries are
constructed with assigned color “BY LAYER”. Changing the layer’s assigned
color changes the color of all items on that layer.
To find the name of the “terminals layer”, choose CONFIG Drawing and then
pick the Layers Setup button. Find the terminals layer name from left-hand
list. Cancel out of the dialogs. Now use the normal AutoCAD Layers... dialog
to change that layer to a more pleasing color. All Component terminal text
immediately updates.
Multiple Libraries / Clients
Can I use one symbol library to service clients with different layer naming
and color standards?
Yes, this is easy and automatic. Let’s say you are inserting a common relay
symbol, HCR1.dwg into any of a dozen different drawings for a dozen different clients with a dozen different layer naming and color assignment conventions. At insertion time, WD changes the parts and pieces of the common
relay symbol to match the layer name/color assignment convention defined
for that drawing. This is done “on-the-fly”. The layer naming specification is
carried on each wiring diagram drawing as invisible attribute values on the
invisible WD_M block. You can affect what layers the various parts and
pieces of inserted components go to by simply setting up your desired layer
naming convention on the drawing’s WD_M block (this is done via CONFIG
Drawing command).
Frequently Asked Questions
11-27
There are two ways to set up WD to deal with multiple client layer naming /
color conventions.
METHOD A
Set up the client’s layer naming convention as you start each new drawing.
Use AutoCAD’s Layer... dialog or a script file to create or rename layers to
match the clients naming and color convention. Now select WD’s CONFIG
Drawing toolbar button. From this dialog pick the Layers Setup button.
Assign the layer names to the various graphics and annotation categories to
match the layer names you just created (ex: enter layer name for component
graphics, layer name for component tag, layer name for cross-references, layers for wires, layer for wire numbers, and so on).
METHOD B (better)
Follow Method A but save the blank drawing as a “template” or prototype for
that client. Create a template drawing for each client and reference the
appropriate client’s template when starting a new wiring diagram drawing.
Can I use WD with multiple symbol libraries?
Yes. You select the library you want to use for each new project. One project
might require a JIC-style library and another an IEC-style library. Each symbol library set must be in its own subdirectory but adhere to WD’s file naming
convention. You simply point WD to the appropriate library by entering the
library’s path into the PROJ dialog’s Symbol LIB subdialog as shown here.
Enter it into the upper edit box.
Frequently Asked
Questions
For example, drawings for client #1 would have its layer naming convention
set up on the WD_M block for each of its drawings. Those for client #2 would
have client #2’s layer naming convention set up on the WD_M block on each
of its drawings. Then, whether you are working on a client #1 drawing or a client #2 drawing, inserting a component from the common WD symbol library
will automatically cause it to adapt, at insertion time, to that client’s specific
layer naming convention.
11-28
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked
Questions
Can one symbol library service multiple clients but with a few differences?
Yes. You can do it for either schematic symbol libraries, panel symbol libraries, or both. Let’s say that the default symbol library is generally acceptable
to both client #1 and client #2 with these exceptions. Client #1 wants his proximity switch symbols shown differently from the default and client #2 wants
time delay contacts shown with special, fixed annotation. There are two ways
to accomplish this.
METHOD A
Create new versions of proximity switch symbols for client #1 and store them
in a separate subdirectory. Do the same for time delay contact symbols for
client #2 and put in a different subdirectory. Now, when you set up a WD
project for client #1, make client #1’s special schematic symbol subdirectory
the first path that WD checks for “Symbol LIB”. This is illustrated here. The
path to client #1’s special versions of the symbols is given as
“c:\syms\client_a\” and is appended to the beginning of the search path that
WD uses to locate library symbols for insertion.
Note: This multiple path is saved in the project “.wdp” file itself, therefore it is
enabled only when working on a drawing that is part of that project.
METHOD B
Create the two subsets of symbols and put them in their own subdirectories
as described above. Then, when you start a new project for client #1, create
and save the project’s “.WDP” file to client #1’s subdirectory (where client #1’s
special symbols are stored). Do the same for client #2. The rest is automatic.
When you use WD to insert a new component, WD always checks for the
requested component’s “.DWG” file in the project file’s subdirectory. If it is not
found there then WD checks the paths defined in the project file’s “Symbol
LIB” path (as in Method A above).
Frequently Asked Questions
11-29
Exit AutoCAD (important), then find the ASCII text file \viawd\wd.env and
make a back-up copy of it (just in case). This file tells WD directory locations
of various support files. Carefully edit this file. Look for a line that begins with
“WD_LIB”. This is the line you need to edit. During WD’s installation it was
probably set up as follows:
WD_LIB%VIA_DIR%/wd/jic1/,WD symbols
Let’s say that the path to your default library is now to be n:/elec/syms/.
Change this line to read:
WD_LIB,n:/elec/syms/,WD symbols
Save the file and exit.
Another way to do this is to use a WD variable in the WD_LIB line of the
wd.env file. You could use %ACAD_SUP_LAST% or %ACAD_SUP_FIRST%
that would point to the last path defined in your AutoCAD Preferences - & gt; Support file path, or to the first path.
WD_LIB%ACAD_SUP_LAST%,WD symbols
WD_LIB%ACAD_SUP_FIRST%,WD symbols
How can I temporarily access a different symbol library?
Temporarily change the path of the symbol library that WD accesses. Do this
from the Symbol LIB subdialog on the main PROJ dialog as described earlier.
What is the “search path” WD uses to find a requested symbol?
This sequence is a bit different from what AutoCAD normally uses. Here is
the sequence:
1st
Looks on the drawing itself for a previously inserted copy of
the requested symbol (i.e. block).
2nd
Checks for the specific file name if a full path name is
provided.
3rd
Checks for the symbol in your “user” subdirectory (given by
the WD_USER setting in the \viawd\wd.env file).
4th
Checks in the same directory where the active project’s
“.wdp” file is located.
5th
Checks for the symbol in the selected library. This is the
library selected per the current project. If no project is
current, then the library is the one pointed to by the WD_LIB
setting in the \viawd\wd.env file.
Frequently Asked
Questions
With multiple symbol libraries, how can one be permanently set up as the
schematic default?
11-30
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked
Questions
.
6th
Checks directory where the WD support files are located (i.e.
\viawd\wd).
7th
Checks current directory.
8th
Checks path given by the ACAD environment variable.
9th
Gives up and displays an “AutoCAD” Alert dialog message.
For a listing of these paths, select PRJ dialog and select Settings.
How can I temporarily substitute an altered symbol for what is in the
standard library?
Put the altered symbol’s “.DWG file” in your “user subdirectory”
(\viawd\wd\user\). The WD component insertion command always looks at
this directory for the requested symbol prior to going to the selected symbol
library. If you are unsure of where your WD user subdirectory is, type the following command at the AutoCAD command prompt:
Command: (c:wd_getenv “WD_USER”)
Remember: WD deals with regular AutoCAD blocks. If you insert a block
from one library and then try to insert the same block name, but from a different library, you’ll just get a copy of the original version of the block. Use WD’s
SWAP BLOCK command to make the change.
Manual Insertion
Can I use AutoCAD INSERT command to insert schematic components?
Yes. There are no ill effects. The component is still smart and will work just
fine with all WD features. The downside is that the parts and pieces of the
component will not be moved to the various layers and any underlying wires
will not automatically break and reconnect.
How can I manually insert a component but take advantage of WD’s insert
features?
The easiest way is to type in your component name in the Type it editing box
in the lower left corner of WD’s main icon menu. An alternate way is to use
the command wd_insym. It then prompts you for the library symbol file name
and where you want to insert it. Assuming that your symbol has the target
attributes that WD expects, your symbol will insert, connect, and annotate just
as if it had been selected from the regular WD icon menu. Other methods are
listed under the topic “AutoLISP Programming Hooks” later in this chapter.
Note that if you haven’t invoked any WD command prior to entering the
wd_insym command, you need to force WD to fully initialize by typing in these
commands:
(if (not wd_load) (if (setq x (findfile “wd_load.lsp”)) (load x))) (wd_load)
Frequently Asked Questions
11-31
Can I rename this manual insertion command to something shorter?
IC,
*wd_insym
Tablet Insertion
Can I program my tablet menu to insert WD components?
Yes. Program your tablet entries to use this command syntax:
(if (not wd_load) (if (setq x (findfile “wd_load.lsp”)) (load x)))
(wd_load);wd_insym & lt; symbol name & gt;
Example
(if (not wd_load) (if (setq x (findfile “wd_load.lsp”)) (load x)))
(wd_load);wd_insym HCR1
Where can I find a list of symbol names so I can set up my tablet menu?
Appendix A shows a thumbnail illustration of each symbol and the symbol file
name. Alternately, the file \viawd\wd\wd_menu.dat lists the symbol descriptions and file names of the components as they appear in the WD on-screen
menu. You can pick them out of this file. Here is an example of how the data
looks in this file -- under the section labeled “Timers”.
On delay coil | S2(SHTD1N) | HTD1N
The “|” characters divide the entry into three sections. The first piece is the
description, the second is a slide-library reference, and the third is the actual
symbol file name you are looking for. Therefore, program your tablet menu
selection as the following:
(if (not wd_load) (if (setq x (findfile “wd_load.lsp”)) (load x)))
(wd_load);wd_insym HTD1N
Should I program the full path to each symbol file?
No, it is not required. Let WD manage this for you. The wd_insym command
automatically adds the path to your currently selected symbol library. You
only need to provide the symbol name.
How can I invoke WD drafting and editing commands from my tablet?
You can pick out the various WD drafting and editing commands from the onscreen menu file. Look at the text menu file \viawd\wd.mnu.
Frequently Asked
Questions
Yes. You can add an entry to your ACAD.PGP file. Let’s say you want to use
“IC” as a short cut for the INSERT COMPONENT command. Edit ACAD.PGP
and add this line:
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-32
Frequently Asked Questions
New Drawing -- Setup, Template
What does a blank drawing need in order to be compatible with WD?
A special invisible block needs to be present on the drawing. This block’s
name is WD_M.dwg and it is found in the default symbol library,
\viawd\wd\jic1\WD_M.dwg. This block carries about 50 attributes that define
settings, layer names, and defaults that are referenced by the WD commands. If the drawing is to include panel layout symbols, WD needs to also
see block WD_PNLM.dwg.
When you instruct WD to operate on a new or existing drawing that doesn’t
have this WD_M block present, WD pauses and asks you for permission to
insert it automatically. It arbitrarily inserts at location 0,0 though the actual
location is not critical. If you invoke a WD panel command and the
WD_PNLM block is not present, WD pauses and asks you for permission to
insert it automatically. Both blocks may be present on the same drawing;
there is no danger of conflict.
How can I change the drawing settings that are carried on this WD_M block?
Do this through WD’s CONFIG Drawing dialog. It provides a graphical
interface between you and the WD_M block attribute values.
I've been alerted that my WD_M block is missing some attributes. What do I
do?
As WD adds new features, sometimes new attributes are added to the default
WD_M block. However, if your drawing was created with an older WD_M
Frequently Asked Questions
11-33
SCHEMATICS:
Chg to new WD_M blk, vals, layers
To swap and convert to new layers
and values carried on new
wd_m.dwg
Chg to new WD_M blk, no changes
To swap but keep drawing's existing
layer names and current values
PANEL:
Chg to new WD_PNLM blk, vals, layers
To swap and convert to new layers and values carried on new
wd_pnlm.dwg
Chg to new WD_PNLM blk, no changes To swap but keep drawing's
existing layer names and current
values
What information is carried on the drawing’s WD_M block?
Here is a partial attribute list, broken down by category:
Drawing Layout
RUNGHORV
Ladder orientation: “H” for horizontal rungs
(vertical ladders); “V” for vertical rungs (horizontal
ladders).
SHEET
Sheet number for the drawing (value for the “%S”
replaceable parameter value).
SHEETDWGNAME
Optional drawing number for the drawing (value
for the “%D” parameter).
IEC_PROJ
Optional IEC “project code” (value for the “%P”
parameter).
Frequently Asked
Questions
block it may not carry these attributes. WD provides an easy way to swap this
older WD_M block with the newer WD_M block.
11-34
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked
Questions
IEC_INST
Optional IEC “Installation code” (value for the “%I”
parameter).
IEC_LOC
Optional IEC “location code” (value for the “%L”
parameter).
UNITSCL
Units scaling factor (1.0 for inch, 1.0 for full size
mm, 25.4 for inch scaled up to mm).
MISC_FLAGS
1’s bit set = full-size metric selected, 2’s bit set =
vector inserted symbol graphics to configured
layers only when they start on layer 0, 4’s bit = use
PLC address-based wire numbering, 8’s bit =
suppress lader line ref numbering.
FEATURE_SCL
Scaling adjustment (ex: 1.0 = default, 1.25 = for
25% bigger).
Ladder Defaults
REFNUMS
Ladder line-reference based X-Y grid reference based
(“1” for line reference numbers; “2” for numbers with
ruling; “3” to use user-defined line reference block; “4” to
select X-Y grid reference mode; “5” to select X-Zone
reference mode).
RUNGDIST
Default rung spacing value
DLADW
Default ladder width
RUNGINC
Default rung-to-rung line reference increment
DRWRUNG
“1” = draw all rungs for new ladder; “0” = none, “2” = skip
1, “3” = skip 2, ...
Component Tagging
TAGMODE
S = sequential, R = Reference-based
TAG-START
Drawing’s starting sequential number (for sequential
tagging only)
TAG-RSUF
Comma delimited component tag suffix list (for
reference-based tagging only)
TAGFMT
Component tag format specifier (default = %F%N)
XREFFMT
Cross-reference format specifier (default = %N
ALT_XREFFMT
Optional cross-reference format for inter-drawing
references
Wire Number Tagging
WIREMODE
S = sequential, R = reference-based
Frequently Asked Questions
Drawing’s starting sequential number (for sequential
tagging only)
WIRE-RSUF
Wire tag suffix list (for reference-based tagging only)
WIREFMT
Wire tag format specifier (default = %N)
WLEADERS
1 = always insert wire leaders; 0 = only as required
GAP_STYLE
1 = use loops across gaps; 0 = wire gap; 2 = solid
crossing
Layer Names
TAG_LAY
value = layer name for component tags
TAGFIXED_LAY
value = layer name for “fixed” component tags
DESC_LAY
value = layer name for parent component’s
description
CDESC_LAY
value = layer name for child component’s
description
TERM_LAY
value = layer name for component terminal pin
numbers
XREF_LAY
value = layer name for parent component’s
cross-reference
CXREF_LAY
value = layer name for child contact’s crossreference
LOC_LAY
value = layer for component location code text
POS_LAY
value = layer name for switch position text
MISC_LAY
value = layer name for all other component text
COMP_LAY
value = layer name for component non-attribute
graphics
LINK_LAY
value = layer name for dashed link lines
WIRELAYS
value = layer name(s) for LINE wires (comma
delimited)
WIRENO_LAY
value = layer name for wire number text
WIRECOPY_LAY
value = layer name for extra wire numbers
WIREFIXED_LAY
value = layer name for “fixed” wire number text
WIREREF_LAY
value = layer for terminal and signal arrow wire
number text
Frequently Asked
Questions
WIRE-START
11-35
11-36
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked
Questions
Fan In/Out
FAN_INOUT_LAYS
value = layer name(s) for Fan In/Out LINE wires
(comma delimited)
FAN_INOUT_STYLE
value = style number (select in Config)
How can I make changes in the WD_M block so that these settings will
always be the default?
Hard way: Display the \viawd\wd\jic1\WD_M.dwg file in AutoCAD. Referring
to the list above, manually edit the attribute definition default values to meet
your requirements. Save and exit.
Easier way: Open any one of your existing WD schematics and make sure
that the CONFIG settings and the layer names are set up the way you want.
Save the drawing and now open the WD_M.dwg drawing file (default is
\viawd\wd\jic1\WD_M.dwg). From the WD pull-down menu select REPORT/
Misc & gt; Swap WD_M & gt; Update symbol WD_M dwg.
A file dialog is displayed asking you to select an existing drawing that carries
the desired WD_M settings. Find and select your schematic drawing that carries the target values. WD then pops open that drawing, collects the settings
and layer names, jumps back to the WD_M.dwg drawing, and makes the
appropriate adjustments. Save the modified WD_M drawing. Repeat this
process for the 1/8 inch version of the library (\viawd\wd\jic125\WD_M.dwg).
If you have a WD template drawing, after you’ve edited the WD_M block using
either method above you’ll need to update your template drawing’s version of
the inserted WD_M block. Open your template drawing. Select the pull-down
Frequently Asked Questions
11-37
Should I create a WD template drawing?
Yes. A template/prototype drawing with the WD_M block pre-inserted can
save you time and effort as you start a new drawing. Using a template, you
can start a new drawing with the WD_M block inserted, settings adjusted, and
your standard WD layers pre-defined.
To create the template, call up a new, blank drawing or start with a copy
of your standard drawing border / title block drawing. Select WD’s CONFIG
command. This triggers WD to insert the invisible WD_M block. From the
Configuration dialog, change the drawing settings to suit your needs. Don’t
forget the SETUP Layers dialog. Then use AutoCAD’s Layer... dialog to create the layers you just referenced in the Layers subdialog. Adjust layer colors
to your liking. SAVEAS to an appropriate name for an AutoCAD template
drawing (.dwt extension).
Now, when you start a new wiring diagram drawing, you can reference this
WD template. Let’s say that your template drawing is called wd_std_e.dwt.
You need to create a new wiring diagram drawing called R12345.dwg. Use
AutoCAD’s NEW drawing command and select Use a Template. Select the
wd_std_e.dwt template drawing from the list AutoCAD presents.
Can I pre-position ladders on my template?
Yes. When you start a new drawing with your template, you can quickly
renumber the ladder’s line reference numbers using the REVISE Ladder command. Let’s say that your template has three ladders pre-defined, each 17
rungs long, and the first ladder begins with line reference number “1”.
Create a new drawing and reference your 3-ladder prototype.
Select the REVISE ladder toolbar button under the New Ladder fly-out. The
following dialog is displayed. It shows the beginning and ending references
for each of the three pre-drawn ladders.
Frequently Asked
Questions
menu as shown above and select “Chg to new WD_M blk,vals,lays”. The new
version of the WD_M block will replace your existing one.
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-38
Frequently Asked Questions
Change the beginning reference number for each ladder (the ending reference is calculated for you automatically). Click OK to close the dialog, and
update your ladder reference numbers.
The WD_M block carries a number of “DEMO” layers. Can I get rid of them?
Yes. These layers are for demonstration purposes only. Open the
\viawd\wd\jic1\WD_M.dwg file and purge these DEMO layers. Also edit (with
AutoCAD’s DDEDIT command) the various “*_LAY” attribute definitions on
WD_M to replace the default “DEMO*” layer names with the new layer names
of your choice (or leave each default value blank).
If you’ve created a template drawing with a pre-inserted WD_M
block, then run WD’s WD Layer command. Its toolbar button is under the
MISC fly-out with this utility. You can do a global layer name search on the
phrase “DEMO-” and replace it with nothing. Alternately, you can edit the
layer names one at a time. Save your modified template and exit.
How should I handle multiple clients/projects that require different WD
configuration settings?
Make a template drawing for each client and use WD’s CONFIG command to
both insert the WD_M block into this template drawing and then to adjust its
settings per client’s standards. Use the AutoCAD Layer... dialog to create
layer names consistent with the client’s layer naming and color conventions.
Now, when you’re ready to start a new wiring diagram drawing for this client,
reference this template drawing when you create the new drawing.
For example, let’s say that the template drawing you created above is called
client_a.dwg. It carries the WD_M block with the client’s settings. You need
to create a new wiring diagram for client A, let’s say the name is to be
R12345.dwg. Invoke AutoCAD’s NEW drawing command and respond with
“R12345=client_a” to the file name prompt (or set “client_a” as the template
drawing in AutoCAD’s Create New Drawing dialog).
I accidentally inserted the invisible WD_M block on a non-electrical drawing
-- what do I do?
If you are past the point of an UNDO, make the block visible and then erase it.
To do this, type ATTMODE at the command prompt. Note its current value.
Change it to a value of “2”. Use the REGEN command. At location 0,0 you
should see a list of about 50 attributes, now visible. These are tied to the
Frequently Asked Questions
11-39
New Ladder
Setup
How many ladders can I insert on to a drawing?
There is no limit but ladders may not overlap each other. Multiple ladder fragments in the same vertical column need to be vertically aligned along their
left-hand side. Note that these limitations do not apply when X-Y Grid or XZone referencing is selected.
Can a project have different quantities of ladders on different drawings of
the project?
Yes. They can even be of different widths, lengths, rung spacings, positions,
and orientations.
Can ladders be of different lengths, widths, and rung spacing, even on the
same drawing?
Yes.
Can I insert a new ladder on an existing drawing at any time?
Yes.
How can I find the next available line reference number for a new ladder on a
new drawing?
WD does this automatically. It scans your project set and displays the next
available number as a default. You can override if you want.
Can I have both a vertical ladder and a horizontal ladder on the same
drawing?
Yes. In some cases it is possible to have both, but with line-reference based
numbering, it is risky. WD may become confused as to which ladder a component or wire is to be a member of. With the X-Y grid or X-Zone referencing
mode active, this problem does not exist.
How can I set the new ladder width and spacing defaults to my liking?
These default values are carried on the invisible WD_M block. You can
change the default settings in several ways:
METHOD A - Using a Template/Prototype
If you are using a template drawing with a pre-inserted WD_M block, open the
template drawing in AutoCAD (it has a “.dwt” extension). Select the CONFIG
Frequently Asked
Questions
WD_M block. Erase this block and then purge your drawing. Set ATTMODE
back to its original value (probably a “1”).
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-40
Frequently Asked Questions
Drawing toolbar button. On the Configuration dialog, select the Ladders
Setup button.
This dialog is displayed. Make the appropriate changes. Click OK to exit the
Configuration dialog and save the changes to the drawing’s WD_M block.
Save and exit your template drawing.
METHOD B - No Template
Open the WD_M drawing, \viawd\wd\jic1\WD_M.dwg. Change the default
values of these two attribute definitions:
DLADW
Default ladder width
RUNGDIST
Default ladder-rung spacing
If you want to change 3-phase ladder defaults, edit the default value of this
attribute definition:
PH3SPACE
Default 3-phase spacing (distance between
phases)
Save and exit the drawing.
What makes a WD ladder smart?
If Line Reference numbering is selected:
The first line reference number is actually part of a block. It is called the ladder’s “Master line reference” number block (or MLR). Its physical insertion
location and the half dozen attributes that it carries enable WD to treat the ladder as an “intelligent” ladder. Two MLR blocks are shown in the drawing
below, one for each ladder column. The rest of the line reference numbers
are just dumb text and can be erased with no ill effect. Only the first number
Frequently Asked Questions
11-41
If X-Y Grid or X-Zone Referencing mode is selected:
When the X-Y Grid or X-Zone referencing mode is selected there is no intelligence carried on the ladder itself. The grid reference spacing, origin, and vertical and horizontal axis annotation lists are carried on attribute values of the
drawing’s invisible WD_M block. There is no MLR block inserted on a ladder.
How do I insert this Master Line Reference (MLR) block?
It comes in automatically when you use the New Ladder command to
insert a ladder on to your drawing.
I want the line reference numbers without the ladder. How?
Select the “no bus” radio button on the INS LADDER dialog and insert the ladder normally, or, insert the ladder with the line reference numbers. Then use
AutoCAD ERASE command and carefully blow away the ladder leaving the
line reference numbers intact.
My drawings are point-to-point rather than ladder based. Help!
Not a problem. Use either the X-Y grid, X-zone, or line reference numbers
without the ladder (see previous FAQ).
What happens if I accidentally erase this first line reference number (the
MLR block/attribute)?
Your ladder becomes dumb. WD will become confused and possibly lump
this ladder’s reference annotation into the left-most adjacent one. You can
easily recover by copying the first line reference number (that is, its MLR
block/attribute) from an adjacent ladder column. Run WD’s REVISE Ladder
command and restore the ladder’s correct beginning reference number.
Frequently Asked
Questions
of each column, the MLR, carries the intelligence for the entire ladder and
should not be erased.
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-42
Frequently Asked Questions
If there is no other ladder to borrow an MLR block/attribute from, temporarily
insert a new ladder off to the side of your drawing. Move the new ladder’s
MLR into the correct position on your existing ladder and then delete the
remainder of the new ladder. Then run WD’s REVISE Ladder as described
previously.
What about the second through nth line reference numbers along the side
of a ladder?
These are ordinary TEXT entities that carry no intelligence. You can erase
some of them or all of them. WD only keys off of the very first line reference
number of each ladder, the ladder’s MLR block/attribute insert.
How can I permanently change relative position of line reference numbers
and text size?
Display the MLR block’s drawing and modify it to suit but don’t delete any of
the attribute definitions you find. Move and/or change the text size of the
RUNGFIRST attribute definition. The other attribute definitions are marked
invisible.
Here are the file names (default path is \viawd\wd\jic1\):
WD_MLRH.dwg
For horizontal rung/vertical ladders
WD_MLRV.dwg
For vertical rung/horizontal ladders
WD_MLRHX.dwg
Hexagon-shaped user block - horizontal rung/
vertical ladders
WD_MLRVX.dwg
Same as above, but for vertical rung/horizontal
ladders
Let’s say that you want line reference numbers to be 0.15 units tall and 1.5
units to the left of the ladder’s vertical bus. Open WD_MLRH.dwg. Change
the RUNGFIRST attribute definition text size to 0.15, make sure it is right justified, and then move its insertion point to -1.5,0.0. Save and exit.
Can my line reference numbers include leading zeros and/or alpha
characters?
Yes. Leading zeros and embedded alpha characters are supported for line
reference numbering.
Is there a limit on how big the line reference number can be?
There is no practical limit to the size of line reference numbers. WD has no
“65000” barrier.
What happens if I use AutoCAD’s MOVE to reposition a ladder’s first line
reference number?
There can be a problem if you don’t move the entire ladder as a unit. If you
move the first line reference number (the MLR block/attribute) more than a
Frequently Asked Questions
11-43
If you want to move the beginning line reference number attribute, use
the ATTR MOVE command. Select right on the line reference number text
and slide it to the desired location. This moves the visible attribute but leaves
its underlying block insertion point location unchanged.
Can I reposition an existing ladder on my drawing?
Yes. Use the regular AutoCAD MOVE command. Make sure you that get the
entire ladder including the very first line reference number (the MLR block
insert). Select the REVISE Ladder button and then click Cancel on the dialog. Using this command forces WD to re-read and update its internal ladder
location list.
Line Reference “Ruling” Marks
Can I insert a new ladder that has line reference numbers with “ruling”?
Yes. Select the CONFIG Drawing toolbar button to display WD’s configuration dialog. Select the Ref Nums in the Referencing Section. Select the
Numbers ruling button. Click OK to close the Configuration dialog.
Now you are ready to insert the new ladder.
Select the NEW ladder toolbar button. The INSERT NEW LADDER
dialog is displayed. Make changes here if the defaults are not to your liking.
Frequently Asked
Questions
half rung spacing along the ladder, then WD functions and features that
depend upon line references will get out-of-whack. WD keys off of this MLR
block’s physical location relative to other components inserted elsewhere on
the ladder. These X and Y offsets are used to calculate line reference values
for cross-referencing and reference-based component and wire number tagging.
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-44
Frequently Asked Questions
For example, change the “skip value” to “4”. This means that four rungs will
be skipped for every one that is drawn. Set the rung spacing to 0.25.
Select the ladder’s beginning location. The upper left-hand point of the ladder’s first rung. Pull your cursor down to the ladder’s ending location, leftmouse click to anchor the bottom. The ladder generates with a rung drawn in
at every fifth line reference number (that is, “skip 4”).
If you don’t want every line reference number to show up then you can use
AutoCAD’s ERASE command to get rid of the extras. DO NOT erase the top-
Frequently Asked Questions
11-45
User-Defined Line Reference Symbols
Can I use my own line reference symbol; let’s say a hexagon with internal
text?
Yes. A sample hexagon Master Line Reference symbol is provided with two
internal attributes, the sheet number above (attribute “SHEET”) and a ladder
rung sequential below (attribute “RUNGFIRST”). Its file name is
\viawd\wd\jic1\WD_MLRHX.dwg (WD_MLRVX.dwg for horizontal ladders).
You can use this example as is or modify it to suit. You need to stay with this
block name: WD_MLRHX (or WD_MLRVX). WD specifically looks for these
names.
Here is how to set up your drawing’s configuration to access this alternate
version of the Master Line Reference symbol (MLR).
Select the CONFIG Drawing toolbar button and look for the Referencing section. Choose Ref Numbers. Then select the Setup button and User
Frequently Asked
Questions
most line reference number. This is the ladder’s MLR block and carries the
ladder’s intelligence.
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-46
Frequently Asked Questions
block on the sub-dialog. Then, in the upper right section of the Config dialog
make sure that you have a sheet number entered.
If you want to use reference-based component tagging and you want the
sheet number to be part of component tagging, cross-referencing, or wire
numbers, then make sure you include the sheet number parameter (%S) in
the appropriate format edit boxes. For example, you get component tags like
“CR0105” (sheet 01, ladder reference 05) if you set up the WD Configuration
dialog’s Component Tags - Tag Format edit box, shown here, with this format code:
%F%S%N
Now you can insert a new ladder. It will use the “user” block symbol for
the master line reference. Make your selections for the new ladder. Do not
Frequently Asked Questions
11-47
The new ladder goes in using the hexagon line reference symbol as the first
line reference number (the MLR block). WD inserts dumb graphics for the
2nd through nth line reference numbers. Each line reference mark contains
the sheet number above and the line reference below.
Frequently Asked
Questions
include any sheet number with the value you enter in the “1st ref” edit box.
Click OK and insert the ladder.
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-48
Frequently Asked Questions
If you have selected line reference-based component tagging and the format
includes the sheet number (ex: “%F%S%N” which means “Family code Sheet
# Reference #”) then tags will display like those shown here.
Existing Ladder
Can I renumber an existing ladder?
Yes. Select REVISE Ladder and enter the new beginning line reference
number. Click OK to update the ladder’s reference numbers. Note that this
does not update existing components or wire numbers. Use the RETAG and
INS WIRENUMS commands to finish the process (see subsequent questions).
How do I update reference-based component tags on a renumbered ladder?
Use the RETAG command. This updates component tags to match the
new line reference numbers. This process gives you the option to automatically update child contacts that are on other drawings of the project.
Frequently Asked Questions
11-49
How do I update reference-based wire numbers on a renumbered ladder?
How can I shorten or lengthen an existing ladder?
You can do this manually. First use REVISE Ladder to change the column of line reference numbers to match the desired ladder length. Then use
AutoCAD’s STRETCH command to lengthen or shorten the ladder.
Can I automatically change the rung spacing of an existing ladder?
No, but you might be able to do it manually. First, use REVISE Ladder
to change the column of line reference numbers to the desired rung spacing
and ladder length. Then use the WD SCOOT command or AutoCAD’s
STRETCH command to move the existing rungs to their new rung locations.
How can I widen or compress an existing ladder?
You can use either the SCOOT command or AutoCAD’s STRETCH
command to stretch or squeeze an existing ladder. With SCOOT just grab the
ladder’s vertical rail and pull it out or push it in. Use the ALIGN COMP command (under the SCOOT fly-out) to quickly put components back into nice
neat columns.
Can I split an existing ladder into two separate pieces and retain all
intelligence?
Yes. Use AutoCAD editing commands to break and reposition the split-off
piece. On this second piece, erase its top-most line reference text entity.
Now copy the top-most line reference text entity (the MLR block) of the original ladder to the first rung of the split-off piece. Position it carefully. Now
count how many rungs are in each piece and run WD’s REVISE Ladder command. Enter the number of rungs in each piece and the beginning line reference number for the split-off ladder.
Frequently Asked
Questions
Rerun the INS WIRENUMS command. The wire numbers will update. If
off-page wire connections are involved, make sure that you check the Crossref SIGs button on the Wire Tagging dialog.
11-50
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked
Questions
Can I copy an entire ladder into another column and update?
Yes. Follow this procedure:
1. Use WD’s COPY CIRC command to copy the ladder and its circuitry into
position for the new column.
2. Renumber the ladder using the REVISE Ladder command.
3. Use WD’s RETAG command to update component tags.
4. Run WD’s INS WIRENUMS to update the wire numbers.
Can I have both control ladders and 3-phase ladders on the same drawing?
Yes.
Wires
What is a wire?
WD treats LINE entities as “wires” when the lines are found on a WD-defined
“wire layer”. These lines will get tagged with wire numbers and show up in
various WD wire connection reports.
Can a polyline be treated as a wire?
No.
Are there pre-defined layer names for wiring?
No. You decide what layer names to use. Select the CONFIG Drawing
toolbar button and then choose the Layers Setup button. This layer-naming
dialog is displayed.
Frequently Asked Questions
11-51
How do I add a new wire layer?
Display the WD Layer sub-dialog as described above. Select the Add layer
name button in the Wire LINE layers section and type in the new layer name.
Wild cards are allowed (ex: “YEL*” makes all layers that begin with “YEL” to
be treated as wire layers). Click OK to close the dialogs and save the new
settings. Now use AutoCAD’s LAYER dialog to actually create each new
layer and set its screen color.
Is there a recommended wire layer naming convention?
Some WD reports will extract wire numbering and terminal information.
Included in these reports is the layer name for each connected wire line entity.
If your wire layer name reflects the wire color, gauge, and type, then this information can be deduced from the various reports that include wire layer
names.
For example, wire layers with names like “RED_14_THHN”,
“WHT_12_THHN”, and “BLK_12_THHN” can convey this type of information.
If you assign color numbers that are shades of the actual colors then you
have visual feedback as well.
Can there be a special “Jumper” wire layer?
Yes, any wire layer that includes the substring “JUMPER” in the wire layer
name is ignored when WD processes it’s various From/To reports (ex: layer
name “BLK_12_JUMPER”). This means that you can exclude jumpers from
showing up in these reports simply by putting jumper connections on a wire/
jumper layer.
Note: For all other wire numbering and processing operations, WD treats
wires on jumper layers just like any other wire.
Do I have to make a wire layer current before inserting wires?
No, this is not necessary if you use WD’s INSERT WIRE or 3PHASE utility to
insert wires. These utilities insert LINE wires and automatically move them to
the first wire layer in your valid wire layer list if your current layer is not a valid
wire layer.
For example, the valid wire layer list is “RED_14_THHN”, “WHT_12_THHN”,
“BLK_12_THHN”. Your current layer is “0”. Any new wires you create with
WD will default to the first wire layer in the list, “RED_14_THHN”. But, if you
change your current layer to BLK_12_THHN, then any new wiring will go to
the current layer (that is, BLK_12_THHN since it is a valid wire layer).
Frequently Asked
Questions
The upper right-hand list box shows the drawing’s currently defined wire layer
names. You can have one or many layers set aside for wires. Their names
may contain wild card characters (as illustrated here – for example, any layer
name beginning with “RED…” will be considered by WD as a wire layer). You
can even flag all layers to be valid wire layers (i.e. all LINE entities are wires)
though this is not recommended.
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-52
Frequently Asked Questions
Exception: For single wires, if you insert a new wire and its starting point is
tied to an existing wire, then the new wire takes on the layer of
the wire it is tied to.
Can I use AutoCAD’s LINE command to insert new wires?
Yes. Make sure the current layer is set to one of your valid wire layers (see
above). Use WD’s GAP command if your line crosses another wire and you
want to show a gap.
Can I use AutoCAD’s COPY command to copy existing wires?
Yes, you can if the wires you copy have not been processed with WD’s INS
WIRENUMS command, (or, if they have, you’ve run WD’s ERASE WIRENUM
command first) and there are no wire loops/gaps. A safer way to do this is to
use WD’s COPY CIRC command. It works just like AutoCAD’s copy but does
necessary error checking and clean up on the wires you want to copy.
If, after the fact, you realize that AutoCAD copy was used to copy wiring that
had existing wire numbers and/or gaps/loops, run the WDAUDIT command
(found on the WD pull-down menu under Report/MISC, debug). This utility
will attempt to clean things up.
How can I assign existing wires to a different wire layer?
Use WD’s WIRE Layer command (it is on the MISC toolbar flyout). A dialog displays listing all valid WD wire layers found on the drawing.
You can highlight the one you want (or pick a “just like wire”), click OK, and
then pick the wire LINE entities you want to move to that wire layer.
An alternate method is that you can use any AutoCAD layer-related editing
command.
Frequently Asked Questions
11-53
How do I verify that all my wires are on a valid wire layer?
Can I insert a connecting jumper wire and have different wire numbers at
each end?
Yes. Draw it using a polyline. WD ignores polylines for wire number processing, even when they are on a wire layer. WD will not “see” the jumper and the
wire numbers will not be disturbed. You can also draw the jumper using line
entities that are on a layer that is not defined as a valid wire layer.
How can I draw a rounded jumper wire and have the same wire number on
each side?
The trick is to make WD think that the rounded jumper is just a dumb terminal.
This means that its file name needs to start with the letters “HT0”.
Here is an example loop jumper symbol named HT0JLOOP.dwg that, when
inserted, does not trigger a wire number change through it. Insert it as you
would insert a regular component or terminal symbol.
Use can also put a special attribute called WD_JUMPERS on your symbol.
This attribute allows you to define the internally jumpered terminals. See the
chapter on Library Symbols, Attributes for defining internally jumpered terminals.
Do LINE wires have to be orthogonal?
No. They can go from point to point at odd angles.
Connection Trap Distance
When does WD consider two wire segments connected to one another?
Two wire segments connect if the end of one wire segment touches or falls
with a small “trap” distance of any part of the other wire segment. This can be
at the other wire’s end or anywhere along the other wire’s length.
Frequently Asked
Questions
Use the SHOW WIRE command under the spool of wire fly-out.
All “wires” will be highlighted.
11-54
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked
Questions
How can I check for unconnected wires?
Running WD’s WDAUDIT command will find and display all unconnected wire ends. WD will draw a red diamond, in temporary graphics,
around each wire segment end that does not “connect” to either another wire
or to a component or signal arrow.
To check a single wire, use the CHECK/TRACE WIRE command.
How large is the connection “Trap” distance?
The default value is 0.025 when dealing with inch units, 0.625 for millimeter
units.
What about crossing wires?
Crossing wire segments do not connect unless one of the crossing wires is
broken at the crossing point and the broken end falls within the small “trap”
distance of any part of the other wire.
How does a wire connect to a component?
If a component’s X?TERM* (ex: “X2TERM01”) wire connection-point attribute
lies within the small “trap” distance of the end of a wire, then WD interprets the
component connected to the wire. The trap distance around each wire connection point for a push-button symbol is illustrated here. WD interprets any
wire end that falls within the dotted boxes as connected to the push-button.
Frequently Asked Questions
11-55
Can I change the trap distance value?
What are wire-connection pitfalls?
1. Wire segments that come within a WD-trap distance of one another and
then run in parallel run the risk of being treated as a single wire network.
The problem occurs not along the parallel runs but at the points where the
wire makes the right-angle turn to run in parallel.
2. Components with closely spaced wire connection points may not be processed properly if the connection points fall within WD’s trap distance of
one another.
How can I tell if I have a trap distance problem?
When WD displays only one wire number for two closely spaced wire networks, you probably have the problem. Use the CHECK/TRACE wire command under the “Spool of Wire” toolbar fly-out. Temporary graphics will
appear on every wire segment as WD traces the wire. If the temporary graphics jumps to a nearby network, then there is a trap distance problem at this
jump point.
Frequently Asked
Questions
No. The only time the trap distance changes is when you change the system’s scaling factor as illustrated below on the Scale Setup sub-dialog of the
Config dialog.
11-56
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked
Questions
Crossing Wire Gaps/Loops
Can I turn off the automatic gap/loop feature?
Yes. Select the CONFIG Drawing toolbar button and then choose Solid
in the Wire Cross section.
Can I manually draw line wires that cross without gaps?
Yes, but make sure that the line wires you draw are put on a valid wire layer.
Can I manually erase the loop part of a gap/loop?
Yes. The loop part carries no intelligence and WD will continue to process the
wire gap normally.
Can I adjust the default gap width?
No. It is set at a fixed gap distance of four times the trap distance (default trap
distance = 0.025 for inch units). If you wish, you can manually stretch or trim
the wires back using regular AutoCAD editing commands, but do not make
the gap distance tighter.
Does a wire network’s assigned wire number automatically jump across
wire gaps?
Yes. WD adds extended entity data (XDATA) on each segment of a gapped
wire. This provides continuity intelligence across the gap. There is no limit to
the number of gaps that a single wire can have. If you want to follow the
“pointers” that WD maintains across a gap, display using WD’s VIAX utility
(type VIAX at the AutoCAD command prompt).
Frequently Asked Questions
11-57
No. It needs the XDATA pointers that the INSERT WIRE and GAP WIRE
commands provide. Draw the line wire without any gaps. Then use WD’s
Insert Wire GAP command to add smart gap/loops at wire crossing points or
WD’s Check/repair GAP command to electrically “link two wire segments
together”.
Can I manually trim a gapped wire to give a wider gap? Will it still be smart?
Yes.
What if I manually decrease the gap width by slightly extending the ends?
You run the risk of the gapped end’s trap distance catching the solid wire
passing through the gap. WD would then incorrectly interpret the gap as a 4way wire connection point.
How can I troubleshoot gap pointers?
You can use CHECK/REPAIR GAP command under the “Spool of wire” toolbar fly-out or type VIAX and select the gap segment.
Can I use huge “gaps” to simulate passing a set of parallel wires from one
side of a drawing to the other?
Yes. This is an alternative to using individual SRC/DEST wire arrow symbols.
Just draw your wire segments on one side of the drawing, corresponding wire
segments on the other side. Then use the CHECK/REPAIR GAP command
under the “Spool of wire” toolbar fly-out to establish the “gap” pointers on each
pair. WD’s wire numbering command will treat both sides of each segment
pair as the same wire network.
Wire Numbers
What does the term “wire network” mean?
A network is one or more wire LINE segments and optional branches that
interconnect and form an electrically unbroken conductor. Wire segments of
the network may contain in-line terminals and/or wire crossing gaps. All segments of a wire network will receive the same wire number unless you select
the “Special wire numbering per wire basis” option on the MISC Settings subdialog on the PROJ dialog.
Frequently Asked
Questions
If I manually draw a gapped wire using AutoCAD’s LINE command, will it be
smart?
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-58
Frequently Asked Questions
Why are there four types of wire numbers: Normal, Fixed, Extra, and
Signal?
NORMAL
Wire numbers that are free to update when you rerun
the INS WIRENUMS command.
FIXED
Wire numbers that are fixed to their current value they will not update with subsequent runs of the INS
WIRENUMS command.
EXTRA
Extra copies of the Normal or Fixed wire number that
is assigned to a given wire network. A single wire
network has one Normal or one Fixed wire number
(but not both) and may have many EXTRA copies of
the wire number inserted at various locations on the
network.
TERM/SIG
Wire numbers for terminals and signal arrows.
WD assigns each wire number type to its own layer. You can assign a different color to each of these three layers so you can easily tell them apart.
How do I assign wire number layers?
Select the CONFIG Drawing toolbar button. Then pick the Setup Layers button in the upper right hand corner of the dialog. WD’s layer setup dialog is displayed. The four wire number layer names are entered in the lower
right. Don’t forget to use AutoCAD’s LAYER command or dialog to create
these layers and to set the layer color assignments (otherwise WD creates
them on-the-fly, when needed, but assigns the default layer color).
Frequently Asked Questions
11-59
Select the WIRE RPT button on the BOM report fly-out toolbar.
Select Component connection report on the dialog that displays.
You want to run one of WD’s wire connection reports, strip out everything from
the report except for the column of wire numbers, sort it, and then dump it to
an ASCII file. Try the Component connection report. It extracts the wire
number tied to every wire connection point of every component or stand-alone
terminal. Here is the wire number extraction sequence:
Choose the scope of the report (single drawing or project-wide) and if you
want to limit the report to components carrying a specific “location” code
(example: all wire numbers tied to components in control panel “PNL1”).
Frequently Asked
Questions
I just want a list of wire numbers to feed to a wire marker machine. What do
I do?
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-60
Frequently Asked Questions
WD extracts the wire connection data and displays the report. Now you want
to strip out everything but the wire number column. Click Change report format in the lower right-hand corner of the dialog.
Click Remove all. This clears the right-hand list that is the field column list to
be displayed. Now pick the WIRENO entry from the left-hand list to restore
the wire number data column to the empty, right-hand side report column list.
Click OK.
The result is a report listing just the wire numbers. Click SAVE TO FILE and
then enter a file name for the ASCII report file. An alternate use for this proce-
Frequently Asked Questions
11-61
Can WD optionally assign a different wire number to each wire in a common
wire network?
Yes. The default is that all segments of a wire network will receive the same
wire number. But you can optionally flip WD to a “per wire basis” wire tagging
mode. Select the “Special wire numbering per wire basis” option on the MISC
Settings sub-dialog on the PROJ dialog. When multiple wires are drawn tied
to a common wire connection point, each wire will be treated as an independent wire network and will receive its own unique wire number assignment by
WD.
Text Size and Wire Offset
Can I change the default wire number text size and/or offset distance above
the wire?
A wire number is actually an attribute tied to a block. The block is inserted on
the wire itself and the attribute floats above it. Call up the following drawing
files and modify to suit (\viawd\wd\jic1\).
WD_WNH.dwg
Normal wire number for horizontal wire insertion
WD_WNV.dwg
Normal wire number for vertical wire insertion
WD_WCH.dwg
Extra wire number copy for horizontal wire insertion
WD_WCV.dwg
Extra wire number copy for vertical wire insertion
Can I change all existing wire numbers to a different text size?
Select Project-wide UTILs from the PROJ toolbar fly-out. Select Change Attr
Size in the bottom right-hand corner and select Setup. Pick Wire Number
Frequently Asked
Questions
dure is to click PUT ON DWG and then insert the wire number report as a narrow table, resembling a terminal strip layout, right on your drawing.
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-62
Frequently Asked Questions
text and set the height value you want (and width scale factor, if desired).
Click OK and select the drawings to process.
Can I have wire numbers automatically go in below the wire?
Yes. Edit the horizontal wire number block/attribute library symbols listed
above. Call up the WD_WNH and WD_WCH drawings. Use the MOVE command to move the wire number attribute definition down so that the top of the
attribute lies below the 0,0 origin point.
How can I have different wire number sizes and positions for different
clients?
Create client-specific versions of WD’s wire number symbols (as above).
Move them to client-specific subdirectories and set up WD to look here first
before it looks at the default library. Refer to the section in this chapter entitled Library Symbols -- Multiple Libraries/Clients.
How can I change the text width of an existing wire number?
Use the SQUEEZE command and pick right on the wire number. Each
click compresses the text width by 5%. To do a mass drawing-wide or projectwide change, select the UTILS button under the PROJ toolbar fly-out.
How can I reposition a wire number without adding a wire leader?
Use the ATTR Move command and pick right on the wire number. Slide
it to its new position. Avoid using AutoCAD’s MOVE command for this task
(see below).
Frequently Asked Questions
11-63
Can I use AutoCAD’s MOVE command to move a wire number?
How can I tell if wire numbers have been incorrectly moved?
Use the Show Wire command under the spool of wire fly-out.
Select the “Show block origin point” option. You should see a little square displayed at each wire number block origin point. The square should touch a
wire segment.
Running the WDAUDIT program on the drawing can often find and
restore moved wire numbers back to their wire networks.
Can I use AutoCAD’s ERASE command to remove wire numbers?
Yes, though some XDATA clean up will not take place using AutoCAD’s
ERASE command. As long as the Insert Wirenums command is rerun at
some later time, this will not be a problem. Use the Erase Wirenums command to erase one or many wire numbers. To remove all wire numbers from
a drawing or project set, select the project-wide UTILS button under the PROJ
fly-out.
Leaders
How can I get rid of a wire leader?
Use the leader command and re-do the leader as if it were very short.
The leader command will suppress the leader when the wire number is
brought close to its wire.
Can I use AutoCAD’s ERASE command to get rid of a leader?
Yes. Some XDATA pointers will be left behind but these should not interfere
with WD’s operation.
Can I make leaders come in on a different layer?
No, not automatically, but you can manually change the layer of the leader
with AutoCAD.
Does WD support other styles of wire number leaders?
No.
Frequently Asked
Questions
This is not recommended. The wire number is really an attribute tied to a
block. The block’s origin rests on the wire segment. If you MOVE the wire
number block to a different segment on the same wire network and the block’s
origin falls with a “trap distance” of that wire segment then everything will be
fine. But why take a chance? Use SCOOT, ATTR Move, or Move Wire
Number to safely accomplish this task.
11-64
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked
Questions
How can I force a wire leader to be applied to every new wire number?
Select CONFIG Drawing and select Always from the Leader dropdown menu in the Wire Numbering section.
Catalog Files
Can I have just one catalog table for everything?
Yes. Create a single catalog table, within your Access catalog database file,
called MISC_CAT. Then, for each new project you create, go to the PROJ
dialog, select Misc Settings, and set the “Always use MISC_CAT” button as
shown below.
Frequently Asked Questions
11-65
Can I have a project-specific catalog file?
Can I have a different version of the WD catalog database for different
clients?
Yes. Create client subdirectories for the modified, client-specific catalog
Access database. WD will look for an Access database file in the project subdirectory called either default_cat.mdb or & lt; projname & gt; ._cat.mdb. Now, as you
create a new project for a client, save the project’s “.WDP” file to that client’s
subdirectory so the client’s project file and modified catalog database are
together in the same subdirectory. This combination triggers WD to first
search for needed catalog tables in the client’s subdirectory before it goes
searching in the default catalog subdirectory. If WD finds the catalog file it is
looking for in the client’s project subdirectory then it doesn’t bother looking for
it elsewhere.
I inserted a parent relay and selected its catalog part number. The pin
numbers were automatically assigned. Where did it get this information?
When you select a catalog part number for your component, WD also looks in
the _PINLIST table within your Access catalog database file. If it finds a
match, the pin information is pulled from the table and used for the component. The coil pins are assigned to the component and the pin list for any
child components is saved on the component. It is carried as “Xdata” under
the name “WD_PINLIST” or, if a “PINLIST” attribute is present on the parent
device, the pin list is carried on this invisible attribute.
I changed the list of pins in the _PINLIST catalog table. But next time I
inserted a child component it used the old pins. What went wrong?
The parent device carries the complete pin list for all children. A copy of this
pinlist data is carried in a table in the project's Access scratch database file in
a table called _PINLIST. When you insert a child contact and identify a parent
device, WD checks the _PINLIST table to see if there is an entry for that parent. If so, it does a query on the COMP table in the scratch database to find
any child contacts tied to that parent and collect all pin pairs in use. It compares this list with the list carried in the _PINLIST table, formats the data, and
presents it in the pin list dialog.
So changing the entry in the _PINLIST catalog database table doesn't cause
WD to alter the pinlist info carried on some component hidden on some drawing somewhere. You'd have to go to that device, hit INS/EDIT and edit that
component, hit catalog lookup, immediately hit OK (with the original catalog
entry highlighted). This would trigger WD to check the _PINLIST database
table, get the pinlist (the one you just edited in _PINLIST), and pop this new
list on to the device.
Frequently Asked
Questions
Yes. Create a catalog file called & lt; projname & gt; _cat.mdb. It must be in
Microsoft Access format. WD looks for this file in the same subdirectory as
the project’s “.wdp” file. Copy the default_cat.mdb supplied with WD or use it
as a template for your new table format.
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-66
Frequently Asked Questions
Old Drawings Compatible with WD
Can WD be used on my old, non-intelligent schematic wiring diagrams?
Yes. Some of the package’s drafting and editing features can probably be
used on your existing drawings, even those created by other products or converted from other CAD systems.
1.
Open the drawing and select CONFIG Drawing. Allow WD to insert
its invisible WD_M block.
2. Configure the drawing’s settings to match those used on the existing drawing for tagging, wire numbering, and cross-referencing format. Measure
the ladder rung vertical distance, determine the number of rungs in the ladder, and note the beginning line reference number.
3. Now go back to the WD pull-down menu and select Ladders & gt; Dumb ladder convert.
Frequently Asked Questions
11-67
This dialog displays:
Frequently Asked
Questions
Enter the ladder’s first line reference, spacing, and number of rungs. Click
OK and then pick the insertion point for the MLR block (1st line reference
number of a ladder). Insert it in the upper left-hand corner of the ladder, in line
with the very top ladder rung or the ladder’s first line reference number.
Repeat this process for each ladder on your drawing.
If you want to reuse the existing drawing’s line reference TEXT entities, make
the new MLR line reference number attribute invisible (use WD’s ATTR Hide
tool).
Here are the WD drafting and editing features that should now work on your
non-WD drawing:
• Insert component (automatic orientation and wire break), insert circuit
• Tagging of new components and wire networks (though there will be no
check to verify that a component tag or wire number is repeated)
• Insert wire, insert 3-phase wire
• The trim wire command should work on both old and new wires -- auto dots
on new wires only)
• Scoot wires, scoot components (new only), scoot wire numbers (new only)
• Wire leaders (new only)
• Cross-referencing of components (new only)
WD Project Files
Are there restrictions on the project file name?
It needs to have a “.wdp” file extension, and it cannot exceed a total of 127
characters in length.
11-68
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked
Questions
My project is pretty big. How can I speed things up?
If your project can be divided up into sections and subsections, try using WD’s
sec/subsec feature in the project dialog. Assign section codes to the various
subsets of drawings within the overall project set. Then, when you instruct
WD to do some project-wide task that really only deals with one section of the
project, make use of the sec/subsec feature in WD’s drawing selection process. Also, if your project set includes “reference only” drawings that have no
WD data to process, give them a special section code or subcode so they can
be easily excluded from processing. In the same vein, if you have panel layout drawings in the drawing set, exclude them when you’re doing some
project-wide schematic wiring diagram task such as wire numbering or crossreferencing.
Are you operating across a network and is your WD “USER” subdirectory on a
network drive or on your local hard drive? If not on the hard drive, move your
USER subdirectory to the local drive and see if some operations run faster.
The USER subdirectory drive and path is set up in the ASCII text file wd.env.
Do WD commands and menu selections move like cold molasses? If your
\viawd\wd subdirectory with the WD executables, icon menu files, and support
files are on a network drive, then this could be the major bottleneck. Try moving these files back to your hard drive (again, wd.env will need to be
adjusted). You can leave the library symbols and catalog files on the network,
but keep the executables and support files local.
Is it time to retire that old iron? Your neighbor’s kid probably has a faster
machine for his games than what you’re trying to use for work.
Does removing a drawing from the project file actually delete the drawing?
No. It only removes the drawing’s file name from the list carried in the
project’s “.WDP” file. The drawing file is not deleted.
Some drawings listed in my project don’t exist. Is there a quick way to get
rid of the references?
Yes. Go to the Project REBUILD command and select “Full rebuild”. WD will
verify that all drawings listed in your project set actually exist. If some don’t
exist, WD pops up a dialog asking you for permission to remove these references from the project list.
Can two projects reference the same drawing file?
Yes. There is nothing stopping you from doing this, though it could lead to
conflicts if both projects try to modify the same drawing with some projectwide tagging or cross-referencing function.
Do all drawings for a given project have to be in the same directory?
No. Drawings can be from anywhere such as multiple drives, and multiple
subdirectories.
Frequently Asked Questions
11-69
Can I have both panel layout and schematic drawings in the same project?
Can I have both panel layout and schematic wiring on the same drawing?
Yes. This is not a problem. WD will insert both its non-visible WD_M block
(for schematics) and its WD_PNLM block (for layout) and keep everything
straight as to what it is doing. For example, running the Panel BOM report will
only extract panel footprint items and running the schematic component
report will filter out all but schematic wiring diagram symbols.
Can I start a new drawing without a project?
Yes. You can create the project file later and add your drawing to it.
While in WD, what could stop me from calling up and working on some nonWD drawing?
Nothing stops you. WD does not take control of your system and does not
interfere with you running any stock AutoCAD command or other third party
application.
Where are my project files stored?
Project files, with “.WDP” extensions, default to the directory pointed to by
your project subdirectory (given by the WD_PROJ setting in the
“\viawd\wd.env file). This is not mandatory. When you create a project file,
you can save it to any subdirectory you wish. In some cases you may want to
store them in client-specific subdirectories to take advantage of WD’s ability to
access client-specific catalog files and/or library symbols.
I want Pick Proj to default to some predefined directory. How can I?
WD normally defaults to the same directory as the active project. You can
override this by adding an entry to the \viawd\wd.env ASCII text file. Exit
AutoCAD and open the wd.ev file with any generic text editor (ex: Wordpad).
For example, let’s say you want the Pick Proj dialog to always come up
defaulting to n:/projects/electrical. Add this line, make sure it ends in a forward slash:
WD_PICKPRJDLG,n:/projects/electrical/,WD default pick proj
I accidentally deleted my “.wdp” project file. What should I do?
You can recreate the project file without too much trouble. Create a new
project and add all of your drawing files (select Add & gt; Multiple from the PROJ
dialog). Now you will extract the drawing settings from one of the project’s
drawings and copy them into the new project file. To do this, enter AutoCAD
and make this new project active (select Project and then select this new
project’s name). Display one of the existing drawings in the project and select
Frequently Asked
Questions
Yes.
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-70
Frequently Asked Questions
WD’s Compare Dwg with Proj settings command on the WD pull-down
menu.
On the next dialog, the one displaying all of the differences, select Project
File -- Chg proj file. Then select all the attribute values. Each setting will be
copied from your current drawing into the project file.
WD seems to remember what the last project was. How?
It saves the name of the last couple dozen projects you worked on in a file
called \viawd\wd\user\lastproj.fil. This file is in your “user” subdirectory (given
by the WD_USER setting in the \viawd\wd.env file). When you activate WD, it
checks for this file and, if found, reads and opens the named project file.
WD Scratch Database File
Does WD maintain an underlying project database?
Yes and no. WD does maintain a “scratch” database for a project, stored in
Microsoft Access format that WD uses to speed up certain project-wide operations. This file is for scratch use only; it is not part of the intelligence stored
in a WD project. All intelligence is derived straight from the AutoCAD “.dwg”
files themselves. If this scratch database file is missing or corrupted, WD
auto-generates it, on the fly, from the project’s drawing set.
The file name is & lt; project & gt; .mdb, where & lt; project & gt; matches the current
project’s “.wdp” file name. For example, if the current project is acme99.wdp,
its scratch database filename will be acme99.mdb.
Where is the project's scratch database stored?
There are two options for where WD stores the project's scratch database. It
can be kept in the local USER directory with each user working on a project
maintaining a separate copy of the current drawing set. The second option is
to store the scratch database in the project's directory, i.e. the same directory
as the project .wdp file. This makes the scratch database sharable if kept on
a network directory. The option is set under the PROJ & gt; MISC SETTINGS
Frequently Asked Questions
11-71
Note: Multiple users can work on the same project whether the scratch file is
stored locally or in the same subdirectory as the project file.
How does WD keep a project’s database up to date?
WD automatically “freshens” the database when it senses that one or more
drawings in the current project’s drawing list has a time/date stamp that is different from a copy of this time/date stamp carried in the database file. If you
have a copy of Access, open a project’s scratch database file and examine
the FILETIME table. There you will see a list of all drawings currently listed in
the project’s “.wdp” ASCII text file along with the time/date stamp of each
drawing’s data stored in the other tables of the file. When the actual “.dwg”
file’s time/date stamp mismatches with what is stored here, WD does an
incremental update of the database file.
Is WD’s project database available for external use?
Yes. It is in generic Microsoft Access format. Feel free to write your own
applications that tap into this data. There’s all sorts of neat data there.
If I change data in the project database, will these changes automatically
show up on my WD drawings?
No. The current version of WD does not support this. Use WD’s Spreadsheet
Re-tagging utility to accomplish this task.
Do I need to archive the project database file with my project drawing set?
This is not necessary because WD automatically regenerates the file, when
needed, if the file does not exist. The only advantage of archiving this scratch
“.mdb” file would be to save regeneration time later. If your project is large,
then it might make good sense to archive the file.
I think my project database file is corrupted. What should I do?
Erase it. WD will autogenerate it the next time it is needed. If you want to
force an immediate rebuild, select the Rebuild Proj toolbar button under the
PROJ fly-out.
What about non-WD information I might want to add to a component? Is it
saved anywhere in the project database?
WD supports a user table in the project database. You can add your own
application data to any WD block insert (components, footprints, wire numbers, terminals, wire jump arrows) and WD will extract and maintain a copy of
this information in a USER table in the project database. This allows you to
do “queries” on the project database file (in Microsoft Access format) and
access all of this user info carried on all entities project-wide. This data is
stored on the entities as invisible “extended entity data”. You are free to use
this data in any way you see fit. Examples: storing explicit wire sequencing
information, cable or wire lengths, routing information, storing special parts
Frequently Asked
Questions
dialog. The default is to store the scratch files locally (in your local USER subdir).
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-72
Frequently Asked Questions
information, descriptions, or MRP data, storing engineering notes, setup, or
maintenance information. Select the USR REC command under the MISC
toolbar fly-out.
Each application data record that you add to an entity can be up to 255 char
long. A single WD entity can carry several hundred of these “records”. Each
record is tracked on the entity-by-entity handle plus a three digit record number beginning at “000”. WD in the new “USER” table of the project’s database
file automatically maintains this same information, project-wide.
WD Environment File
Edits I make to wd.env do not take effect. What should I do?
WD reads this file one time when WD first “wakes up”. Exit AutoCAD and
restart WD. The new values should now be in effect.
What environment settings are available in wd.env file?
Here is a complete list of WD related environment variables (note: the
“%VIA_DIR%” is used by WD to represent the base drive/path pointing to the
WD installation, “c:\viawd” for example).
WD,%VIA_DIR%/wd/,WD programs
WD_LIB,%VIA_DIR%/wd/jic1/,WD symbols
WD_PROJ,%VIA_DIR%/wd/proj/,WD data
WD_USER,%VIA_DIR%/wd/user/,WD userlib
WD_CAT,%VIA_DIR%/wd/catalogs/,WD catalog files
WD_PNL,%VIA_DIR%/wd/panel/,WD panel main directory
*WD_MSG,language,language mapping name for messages and prompts
*WD_INSCOMPDLG,x:/some path/,def path for INS COMP “Browse” button
*WD_INSCKTDLG,x:/some path/,def path for INS CKT file selection dialog
*WD_INSFPDLG,x:/some path/,def path for INS PNLCOMP file selection dialog
*WD_PICKPRJDLG,x:/some path/,to override starting subdir for “PICK PROJ”
button
*WD_OPEN_DWG,(c:my_prog),expression to autoexecute when dwg
opened from PROJ dlg
*WD_PLOT2FILEDIR,x:/some path/,target dir for WD BATCH PLOT to file
(WD 2000 only)
*WD_XCAT,%VIA_DIR%/wd/wd_xcat.lsp, bypass cat lookup and call user's
extrn routine
*WD_MENU,%VIA_DIR%/wd/my_menu.dat,to override default schem icon
menu
*WD_PMENU,%VIA_DIR%/wd/mypnlmnu.dat,to override default panel layout
icon menu
*WD_SCR_DLG,x:/some path/,def path for SCRIPT file path
*WD_ACADPATHFIRST,1,(if=1 then check ACAD path first for support files)
*WD_SLB,x:/some path/,override path for icon menu “.slb” library files
*WD_SUP_ALT,x:/some path/,alternate path for support files
*WD_SAVE2FILEDLG,x:/some path/,override starting path for report file dialog
Frequently Asked Questions
11-73
To disable a setting listed in the wd.env without removing it, put an asterisk in
front of the entry. In addition to the %VIA_DIR% variable, WD also supports
other variables that can be used to define the path for any entry listed above.
%ACAD_SUP_LAST%
Last path defined in your AutoCAD
Preferences Support file path
%ACAD_SUP_FIRST%
First path defined in your AutoCAD
Preferences Support file path
For example: WD_PICKPRJDLG,%ACAD_SUP_LAST%/wdprojects/,def
path for proj pick dlg
This would instruct WD to retrieve the last path defined in your AutoCAD Preferences Support file path and substitute it into the above string.
You can also embed an AutoLISP expression into the above expressions as
long as the expression returns a character string value. For example:
WD_PROJ,c:/projects/%(getenv “USERNAME”)%/viawd/, user folder
will execute the AutoLISP expression (getenv “USERNAME”) and substitute
its value into the overall “WD_PROJ” environment string value.
How can I tell if WD is correctly reading an environment setting?
With WD awake, type in the following (after the AutoCAD command line
prompt):
Command: (c:wd_getenv “xxxxxx”) - press Enter
where xxxxxx = the environment variable to query.
WD and Drawing Management Systems
How does WD deal with systems that require drawing check in / check out?
Some of the package’s most powerful features rely on being able to read
across multiple drawings (i.e. all the drawings listed in your active project file).
Frequently Asked
Questions
*WD_ZIP,x:/some path/filename.ext,full path and exe file name for the ZIP
utility to be used by WD's zip project utility.
*WD_LASTSURF,x:/some path/last_surf.log,name of an ASCII text file that is
to be created and written to every time WD's SURF command is used to
select a device to surf to.
*WD_OLDXNAMES,1,1=force to “CIM_” prefix for XDATA, missing or nil or
anything else use “VIA_”.
*WD_DWF_PC3,PublishToWebDWF.pc3, alternate “dwf” plotter config pc3
file reference.
*WD_WBLOCKDLG,x:/some path/,to override starting subdir for Black Box
Builder WBlock option.
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-74
Frequently Asked Questions
WD must have simultaneous access to all of your project’s “.DWG” files.
Drawing management systems that require check in / check out will thwart
these features unless the entire project drawing set is checked out and accessible to WD in some “work space” area. This also means that a “.WDP”
project file, which lists the complete path to each wiring diagram drawing,
needs to point at the drawings as they would appear once they have been
copied by the DMS system into the designated work space area.
Network Installation
What might a typical WD Network installation look like?
This setup has WD’s software and menu support files installed locally for performance and the symbol libraries, project files, and catalog database files on
a network drive.
Install WD locally and then move the following files up to the network drive:
Move \viawd\wd\jic1and/or jic125 symbol library to the network drive.
Move \viawd\wd\catalogs database file to the network drive.
Move \viawd\wd\*.hlp and *.cnt help files up to the network drive and
make sure that this path is included in the ACAD path.
Create a directory on the network drive for WD’s project files.
Now, exit AutoCAD and edit local ASCII file \viawd\wd.env. It probably looks
something like this:
*WD environment configuration file
*Created: 96/08/06 14:45:27
*Format: key,data,description
WD,%VIA_DIR%/wd/,WD programs
WD_LIB,%VIA_DIR%/wd/jic1/,WD symbols
WD_PROJ,%VIA_DIR%/wd/proj/,WD data
WD_USER,%VIA_DIR%/wd/user/,WD Userlib
WD_PNL,%VIA_DIR%/wd/panel/,WD base subdir for panel libs
WD_CAT,%VIA_DIR%/wd/catalogs/,WD catalog files
Let’s say that you move the library to n:/elect/jic1/ and the catalog database
files to p:/dbase/wd/ and you create a special subdirectory for WD project files
called n:/wdproj/. Edit the local wd.env file as shown here:
*WD environment configuration file
*Created: 96/08/06 14:45:27
*Format: key,data,description
WD,%VIA_DIR%/wd/,WD programs
WD_LIB,n:/elect/jic1/,WD symbols
WD_PROJ,n:/wdproj/,WD data
WD_USER,%VIA_DIR%/wd/user/,WD Userlib
WD_PNL,%VIA_DIR%/wd/panel/,WD base subdir for panel libs
WD_CAT,p:/dbase/wd/,WD catalog files
Frequently Asked Questions
11-75
How can I write custom apps that tie into WD?
Listed in the following topics are some of the entry points that WD makes
available to programmers and integrators.
For an example application that makes use of a number of these routines,
examine the source code for the Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Generation utility.
This file’s name is \viawd\wd\wdio.lsp and is fully commented.
Note: Your code may need to invoke a WD “wake up” with the following calls
in order to make these entry points “visible” to the rest of your application. (if (not wd_load) (if (setq x (findfile “wd_load.lsp”)) (load x)))
(wd_load).
Insert Electrical Component
Insert electrical component at specific X-Y coordinate, break underlying
wires:
(c:wd_insym2 symname basepoint scale dlgflag )
User hook into the INS COMPONENT command, all data supplied on the
command line with optional EDIT dialog popping up after symbol inserts.
Component automatically breaks any underlying wire(s), new wire number
generates on new wire segment (if required), component tag automatically
generates based on inserted line ref or next available sequential
symname = symbol block name (WD's search path is used when full path
name is omitted.
basepoint = xy insertion point coordinate, nil=user prompted for insertion point
scale = insertion scale (default= 1.0)
dlgflag = nil to skip the INSERT/EDIT dialog
RETURN = entity name of new INSERT
ex: (setq comp_en (c:wd_insym2 “HCR1 “8.125,10.0 1.0 nil))
Insert electrical component (same as above) but at user specified pick
point:
(c:wd_insymn symname)
symname = symbol name (ex: “HPB11)
RETURN = none, loops in command until you exit without a new insertion pick
point
ex: (c:wd_insymn “HPB11”)
Insert electrical component (same as above) but keeps repeating the insert
of “symname”, user prompted to select each insertion point:
(c:wd_insymn_repeat symname)
Frequently Asked
Questions
WD API / AutoLISP Programming Hooks
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-76
Frequently Asked Questions
symname = symbol name (ex: “HPB11”)
RETURN = none, loops in command until you exit without a new insertion pick
point
ex: (c:wd_insymn_repeat “HPB11”)
Insert electrical component (same as above) but symbol name typed in at
command line (or via AutoCAD file selection dialog):
(c:wd_insym)
RETURN = entity name of new INSERT
ex: (c:wd_insym)
Insert electrical component (same as above) but user prompted to select a
“just like” component, then user is prompted for insertion point:
(c:wd_insym_same)
RETURN = entity name of new INSERT
ex: (c:wd_insym_same)
Insert electrical component (same as above) but command triggers icon
menu display for component selection:
(c:wd_insym_dlg)
ex: (c:wd_insym_dlg)
Insert electrical component (same as above) but user is prompted to draw a
fence, where WD inserts selected component at intersections between the
fence and underlying wires:
(c:wd_insym_f)
RETURN = none
ex: (c:wd_insym_f)
Insert electrical component (same as above) but user is prompted to pick a
“just like” component prior to drawing the fence:
(c:wd_insym_f_same)
RETURN = none
ex: (c:wd_insym_f_same)
Insert electrical component, but wires do NOT break:
(c:wd_insert_elect_block symname basepoint layflg scale )
Frequently Asked Questions
11-77
ex: (setq comp_en (c:wd_insert_elect_block “HCR1 (list 5 6) 1 1.0))
ex: (setq comp_en (c:wd_insert_elect_block “HCR1 (getpoint) 1 1.0))
Query pin list database and return pin list info:
(c:wd_get_pinlist mfg cat assycode)
mfg = manufacturer code (optional)
cat = catalog part number (required)
assycode = assycode value (optional)
RETURN = nil if no match found, = (list “coilpin1”,”coilpin2”
“type1”,pin1a,pin1b;type2,pin2a,pin2b;...”)
where type=0 convertible contact, 1=N.O., 2=N.C.
ex: (c:wd_get_pinlist “AB” “700-P200A48” nil) returns this list: (“K1,K2”
“0,A1X,A1Y;0,A4X,A4Y”)
Insert a WBLOCKed circuit into the current drawing, and trigger automatic
re-tag update:
(c:wd_ins_circ2 dwgname basepoint scale flgbits)
dwgname = AutoCAD drawing to insert
basepoint = insertion point (set to nil to prompt user for coordinate)
scale = insertion scale (default = 1.0)
flgbits = 1’s preserve any “fixed” wire nums on WBLOCKed insert, nil=erase
all
flgbits = 2’s preserve any SOURCE signal arrows
flgbits = 4’s retain existing new entity layer names
flgbits = 16’s chk and move all non-wire/non-Lay “0” lines to a valid wire layer
RETURN = none
ex: (c:wd_ins_circ2 “/viawd/wd/user/2sp_rev “10.5,12.0 1.0 1)
Frequently Asked
Questions
symname = symbol block name (WD's search path is used when full path
name is omitted).
basepoint = xy insertion point coordinate, MUST be provided!
layflg = nil to keep attribs on existing layer, otherwise move attribs to layers
per drawings's CONFIG setting (WD_M block)
scale = insertion scale (default= 1.0)
RETURN = entity name of new INSERT
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-78
Frequently Asked Questions
Re-Tag all schematic components on current drawing, update all associated
child components project-wide. There is no user prompting, this routine
can be embedded into a script file:
(c:wd_update_circ_noprmpts)
Load a different WD-compatible icon menu data file (i.e. file in same general
format as the default /viawd/wd/wd_menu.dat file but perhaps referencing a
different set of symbols such as pneumatic or hydraulic):
(c:wd_loadmenu filename)
filename = WD-compatible menu ascii data file name
RETURN = none
ex: (c:wd_loadmenu “pneumat.dat”)
Display specific “page” from WD’s icon menuing system. Allows you to
make a selection and then return that selection:
(c:wd_gomenu menu_num)
menu_num = menu “page number (integer value)
RETURN = string or command string assigned to selected button
ex: (setq symname (c:wd_gomenu 3))
Open the INSERT/EDIT dialog prefilled with a specific component’s data
(also works on PLC modules, terminals, signal arrows).
(c:wd_edsym2 comp_en)
comp_en = entity name of block insert
RETURN = none
ex: (c:wd_edsym2 (car (entsel)))
Erase a connected component and try to reconnect all broken wires and
reconcile unneeded wire numbers:
(c:wd_delsym_main comp_en)
comp_en = entity name of block insert to erase
Insert Panel Layout Footprints
Insert panel footprint block. Footprint can be totally “dumb” with no
prepositioned WD attributes (ex: footprints straight from a vendor) or WDaware with attributes. If no attributes, WD adds annotation data to the block
on-the-fly in the form of AutoCAD extended entity data (XDATA).
(defun c:wd_insymp fpblk xy rot scl anno_dat)
fpblk = panel footprint block to insert
Frequently Asked Questions
11-79
ex: (c:wd_insymp “pnl/ab/abpb3r” nil 0.0 1.0 nil)
ex: (c:wd_insymp “pnl/ab/abpb3r” (list 5.5 4.0) 0.0 (list 2.0 -2.0) nil)
User entry point for inserting assy of one or more panel footprints, terminal
footprints, name plates, and/or balloons.
(defun c:wd_pnl_asmb2 symname xy scl rot flgbits)
symname = wblocked dwg to insert exploded (nil=user prompted to choose)
xy = insertion point (nil=user prompt)
scl = scale (nil=GBL_wd_symscl value if exist or 1.0 if not)
rot = rotation angle in degrees (nil=prompt user)
flgbits = 1's bit set=convert any dumb blocks found in the exploded assembly
to “panel” footprints (set flgbits=nil to leave any dumb blocks as dumb
blocks)
RETURN: nil if failed to run, otherwise return ent name list in this order: (list
footprints nameplates balloons term_footprints)
User entry point for inserting a nameplate.
(c:wd_ins_np fpben npblk xy rot scl mfg cat asmb xgrp noprompts
anno_data)
fpben = footprint block ent name to tie nameplate to (nil=insert as stand-alone
nameplate)
npblk = nameplate block name (nil=figure out from mfg/cat/asmb lookup)
xy = nameplate insertion point (nil=prompt user for pick point if fpben=nil and
noprompts = nil). If fpben given, inserts at its origin.
rot = rotation angle, nil=prompt user if noprompts=nil, nil=0.0 if noprompts=1
scl = scale, nil=insert at current symbol setting scale, or optional x and y scale
passed as a list: (list xscl yscl)
xgrp = 1 to explode and GROUP (ex: nameplate block nested inside of a
stretchable border, = nil to insert as normal unexploded block
noprompts = 1 if to suppress all user prompts and no edit dialog and also
return quietly from the routine if any needed data is missing or invalid
anno_dat = annotation data list (any entry can have value or be set to nil or ““)
(nth 0 ) = “TAGNAME”
(nth 1 ) = “P_ITEM” item number to use (nil=try to find existing match)
(nth 2 ) = “INST”
(nth 3 ) = “LOC”
(nth 4 ) = “GROUPWITH”
(nth 5 ) = “MOUNT”
(nth 6 ) = “CNT”
(nth 7 ) = “UM”
(nth 8 ) = list of DESC lines (DESC1,DESC2,DESC3)
(nth 9 ) = list of RATINGx values (RATING1 thru RATING12)
RETURN: nil if failure or ent name of inserted nameplate block
Frequently Asked
Questions
xy = insertion point (nil = user prompted)
rot = rotation (in degrees), nil = 0.0 degrees
scl = scale (default = 1.0), optional (list xscl yscl) allowed
anno_dat” = future/optional list of annotation data, pass “nil” for now
RETURN: entity name of new block insert
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-80
Frequently Asked Questions
Move attributes found on panel footprint block insert “ben” to the
appropriate layer categories defined on the drawing's WD_PNLM block
insert.
(c:wd_adjust_pnllays ben)
ben = AutoCAD entity name of footprint block
RETURN = list of changes made, nil=no change
Get ATTRIB or XDATA value from panel footprint block “ben” XDATA in form
“WD_attname”. Look for ATTRIB first, if not found, look for XDATA value.
(c:wd_get_pnlval ben attnam)
ben = AutoCAD entity name of footprint block
attnam = attribute's name to query for its value
RETURN = value or nil if none found
Update ATTRIB or XDATA value from block “ben” XDATA in form
“WD_attname”. Look for ATTRIB first, if not found, look for XDATA. value
(has a “WD_” prefix).
(c:wd_upd_pnlval ben attnam attval)
ben = AutoCAD entity name of footprint block
attnam = attribute's name to query for its value
attval = attrib value
Select component from WD Schematic extract list (.wd1 file), find and
inserts matching footprint (based upon schematic component's MFG and
catalog number), then kicks into the EDIT footprint dialog.
(c:wd_pnl_lout fnam)
fnam = panel extract csv file, “nil”=use proj's default data file
Prompts user to select a panel footprint to edit. Kicks into EDIT footprint
dialog.
(c:wd_pnl_ed) -- obsolete name, use entry point below
(c:wd_psymed)
Kicks into EDIT footprint dialog, footprint to edit is passed on command
line.
(c:wd_pnlb_doedit ben dat eflag) -- renamed, recommend using below
(c:wd_psymed_doedit ben dat eflag)
ben = insert entity name
eflag =1 if called from balloon and “ben” is main component, =nil if not called
from balloon program
Frequently Asked Questions
11-81
Simple, generic footprint insert with rotate prompt.
footprint = footprint block/file name to insert
Footprint Insert. This routine can be encoded into WD's icon menuing
system as a $C=wd_infpx & lt; blkstr & gt; .
(c:wd_infpx plst)
plst = (list BLKSTR) where BLKSTR= symbol name
Footprint Insert. This routine can be encoded into icon menuing system as
a $C=wd_infpt & lt; blkstr & gt; & lt; mfg & gt; & lt; cat & gt; & lt; assycode & gt; & lt; footprintblock & gt; . This
entry point DOES NOT prompt for component rotation at insertion time.
(c:wd_infpt plst rotask)
plst = list of BLKSTR, MFG, CAT, ASSYCODE, FOOTPRINT
rotask = nil if don't prompt for rotation
Panel Terminal insert. This routine can be encoded into icon menuing
system as a $C=wd_infptx & lt; blkstr & gt; .
(c:wd_infptx plst)
plst = (list BLKSTR) where BLKSTR= terminal symbol name
Insert panel terminal footprint symbols by picking from schematic terminal
extract list.
(c:wd_ptrm_lout fnam)
fnam = panel extract csv file, “nil”=use proj's default data file
Insert panel terminal footprint symbol from current project's list, allows
[CR] to repeat command.
(c:wd_ptrm_lo)
Insert Wires / Wire Numbers
Insert a wire segment. If wire crosses another wire, WD automatically adds
a gap or loop at crossing point:
(c:wd_wire end1 end2 layer)
end1, end2 = start, end coordinates
layer = nil to default to current wire layer, otherwise insert on layer
Frequently Asked
Questions
(c:wd_insymp_r footprint)
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-82
Frequently Asked Questions
Insert wire segment (same as above), but with reduced error checking (runs
faster in automated drawing generation programs).
(c:wd_wire_quik end1 end2 layer)
Insert or change a wire number related to specified wire entity.
Automatically position the wire number on wire segment, adding leader if
necessary. If existing wire number found, modify its value “in place”:
(c:wd_putwn wire_en wirenum)
wire_en = wire LINE entity name
wirenum = wire number text string
RETURN = handle number of wire number INSERT, nil if failed
ex: (setq hdl (c:wd_putwn wire_en “1X2))
Insert a “Fixed” wire number related to specified wire entity. Automatically
position the wire number on wire segment, adding leader if necessary. If
existing wire number found, modify its value “in place”:
(c:wd_putwnf wire_en wirenum)
wire_en = wire LINE entity name
wirenum = FIXED wire number text string
RETURN = handle number of wire number INSERT, nil if failed
ex: (setq hdl (c:wd_putwnf wire_en “100T2”))
Insert a wire number on a network that has a segment passing through (or
very near) a given X-Y coordinate point:
(c:wd_putwnxy xy wirenum)
xy = coordinate to look for passing LINE wire
wirenum = FIXED wire number text string
Insert a wire number on a network (same as above) but no error checking
and assumes NO existing wire number on network (runs faster in automated
drawing generation programs). DO NOT use this routine if there could be an
existing wire number present on the wire network -- use c:wd_putwnxy
instead.
(c:wd_putwnxyq xy newval)
Insert a “Fixed” wire number on a network that has a segment passing
through (or very near) a given X-Y coordinate point:
(c:wd_putwnxyf xy wirenum)
xy = coordinate to look for passing LINE wire
wirenum = FIXED wire number text string
Frequently Asked Questions
11-83
(c:wd_putwnxyfq xy newval)
Move existing wire number entity to a new “XY” coordinate on a line entity
“line_en” of the same wire network.
(c:wd_move_wn num_ben line_en xy )
num_ben = wire number block name
line_en = ent name of wire segment to move wire number to
xy = xy coordinate on the line where wire number to move to
TRIM wire entity at a given X-Y coordinate. Automatically remove wire
connection dot(s) as required:
(c:wd_trimwire wire_en xy)
wire_en = entity name of wire segment to process
xy = trim pick point coordinate
Try to remove any unneeded gap/loops from wire segment “ben”.
(c:wd_ungap ben )
Reset all non-fixed wire numbers on current drawing. Change wire number
attributes to “?” (this is used prior to a project-wide sequential wire
numbering operation).
(c:wd_wire_num_qm)
PLC
Search for and return list of PLC parametric build data for target PLC part
number:
(c:wd_find_sel_plc catkey)
catkey = catalog number to search for (ex: “1771-IAD”), searches list of PLC
data files listed in \viawd\wd\plc.dat
RETURN = list of data to pass to routine below
Insert PLC module at given XY coordinate. Automatically adapt to
underlying rung spacing, annotate with incrementing address numbers:
(c:wd_inplc_nd plc_xy style firstaddr veryfirsta base_carry beg_ix end_ix
usr_rv data a%%lst)
plc_xy = X-Y insertion point
Frequently Asked
Questions
Insert a “Fixed” wire number on a network (same as above) but no error
checking and assumes NO existing wire number on network (runs faster in
automated drawing generation programs). DO NOT use this routine if there
could be an existing wire number present on the wire network -- use
c:wd_putwnxyf instead.
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-84
Frequently Asked Questions
style = PLC “style” number (digit 1 through 9). Defines the “look” of the graphics that will be generated
firstaddr = first addr for module or this piece of broken module
veryfirsta = first addr of the overall module
base_carry = numbering method (8=octal, 10=decimal, 16=hex, nil=prompt
user if necessary
beg_ix = place to start in the list
end_ix = place to stop in the list
usr_rv = vertical rung spacing
data = list of data passed obtained from the routine above
(see example of this routine in the wdio.lsp program)
Invoke PLC selection dialog, pick, insert PLC module per user prompts.
(c:wd_inplc)
Same as above but use “datfnam” instead of defaulting to “plc.dat” for
manufacturer file selection.
(c:wd_inplc_altdat datfnam)
datfnam = list of vendor names/parametric data files to pick from. (if datfnam =
nil then default to “plc.dat”)
Insert/Edit Ladders, Drawing Setup
Insert ladder.
(c:wd_in_ladder Lc_ph pt1 pt2 rungl isvert rungw rungv Lc_3sp rungi
gridxy_mode Lc_dr def_1st nonums)
Lc_ph = 1 for single phase ladder, =3 for phase ladder
Lc_3sp = spacing between 3-ph bus (real value) when Lc_ph = 3
isvert = “V” to create a ladder with vertical rungs (i.e. horiz ladder) or = “H” to
create ladder with horizontal rungs (i.e. vertical ladder)
pt1 = xyz coordinate of left-hand, top-most reference of ladder
pt2 = xyz of bottom ref of ladder. If pt2=nil then the bottom point is calculated
as offset from pt1 given in length value “rungl”.
Rungw = ladder width
rungv = vertical distance between successive rungs
Lc_dr = -1 to suppress drawing all rungs, =0 draw all, =1 to skip every other
rung, =2 skip two, draw one
gridxy_mode = nil for line-ref based ladders, = 1 for X-Y grid or X-Zone ladder
that will not have line reference numbers attached to it
nonums = nil to insert line ref text ents along column; =1 to suppress
def_1st = first line ref value (alphanumeric string, not integer)
rungi = rung ref number increment (default = 1)
(see wdio.lsp source code for example)
Frequently Asked Questions
11-85
Re-reference ladder reference numbers.
mlr_en = entity name of the top-most reference number (the master line reference block insert)
first = first line reference value (alphanumeric string, not integer)
rungi = line reference rung increment (default = 1)
rungv = vertical distance between successive rungs
rungc = count of rung references to update
just_erase = 1 to blank out value on master line ref (the top-most value) and
erase existing 2+ line reference numbers
horv = “V” for ladder with vertical rungs, “H” for ladder with horizontal rungs
sheet = optional sheet number text value if this is to part of the special user
hex block (that has its own SHEET attribute)
sh_en = SHEET attrib ent name on the special user master line ref block
insert, nil=none
sub_blk_name = name of nested block embedded into special user hex block,
carries the master line ref attributes
Re-reference ladder reference numbers if they include a SHEET attribute
and the WD_M block's SHEET value differs from that on each ladder's
master line reference block insert.
(c:wd_ladr_reref)
Re-reference ladder reference numbers with minimum info req'd.
(c:wd_renum_ladders lst)
lst = list of one or more sublists, each sublist consisting of a minimum of two
and max of five pieces of information:
old_first_num = existing first line ref number on target ladder
new_first_num = replacement for above(three optional parameters, use “nil” if
not defined)
rungi = optional line ref rung increment (if different from existing)
rungv = optional rung spacing value (if different from existing)
rungc = optional count of rung refs to update
ex: (c:wd_renum_ladders (list (list “101” “301”)(list “120” “320”))) looks for ladders beginning with “101” and “120” on current drawing and, if found, renumbers beginning with “301” and “320” respectively
Retrieve list of ladder parameters from current drawing.
(c:wd_get_gridrefs)
Return value is list of lists of ladder parameters, one sublist for each ladder on
the current drawing
Re-reference ladder ref numbers, alternate method.
(c:wd_chg_ldr_info oldlst newlst)
Frequently Asked
Questions
(c:wd_ref_col mlr_en first rungi rungv rungc just_erase horv sheet sh_en
sub_blk_name)
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-86
Frequently Asked Questions
oldlst = list as returned by (c:wd_get_gridrefs) above
newlst = edited version of “oldlst” with desired changes
Reset WD internal parameters when different drawing opened.
(c:wd_1_reset_dwg)
Read WD's WD_M block for current drawing and fill internal lists. Insert the
WD_M block if it is not found on the current drawing.
(c:wd_read_dwg_params)
Same as above.
(c:wd_reread_dwg_params)
Annotate title block with current time and date stamp info if target attributes
are present. Note: this routine is built into WD's batch plotting utility.
(c:wd_prnt_time_date)
General Functions
Retrieve an attribute value from a block insert:
(c:wd_getattrval ( comp_en attrname )
comp_en = entity name of block insert
attrname = attribute name to find and retrieve (wildcards okay)
RETURN = attribute value (or nil if attribute not found)
ex: (setq val (c:wd_getattrval comp_en “TAG1))
Modify an attribute value on a block insert:
(c:wd_modattrval ( comp_en attrname newval noupd)
comp_en = entity name of block insert
attrname = attribute name to find and modify (wildcards okay)
newval = new value to insert on attribute
noupd = 1 to suppress regen of block, nil=regen
RETURN = 1 if success, nil if attribute name not found
ex: (setq rtrn ( c:wd_modattrval comp_en “TAG1 “PB1001A))
Convert text entity to an attrib definition, in place.
(c:wd_chg_to_attdef txten atnam )
txten = ent name of text entity to convert
atnam = attrib tag name
Frequently Asked Questions
11-87
(c:wd_add_attr entnam atnam val jst hgt wdt)
entnam = block entity name (nil = prompts user to pick block)
atnam = attribute name to add (nil = prompts for name)
val = value to attach to new attribute (nil = prompts for value)
jst = justification (ex: “L” = left) (nil = defaults to “L”)
hgt = attribute text height (nil = defaults to TEXTSIZE variable)
wdt = width (nil = 1.0)
Increment ASCII string “str” by value “val” (integer, pos or neg ok).
(c:wd_increment_str str val)
Convert delimited ASCII string to an AutoLISP list.
(c:wd_delim_str_to_lst str delimchar)
Create a “Previous” selection set from entity ben.
(c:wd_make_prev_selset ben)
ben = entity name or entity handle string
RETURN: ben if success and selection set created; nil if fail
ex: (c:wd_make_prev_selset (c:wd_putwnxyf xy “123A”)) Capture a newly
created wire number entity and make it accessible using AutoCAD “Previous”
selection option:
Retrieve Xdata value.
(c:wd_get_1000_xdata en appnam)
en = entity name
appname = xdata name (ex: “WD_WDBLKNAM”)
RETURN: xdata record's data or nil if not found
Add or modify existing “1000” xdata.
(c:wd_mod_1000_xdata en appnam data)
Delete an existing “1000” xdata record from an entity.
(c:wd_del_1000_xdata en appname)
en = entity name
appname = xdata name (ex: “WD_MFG01”)
RETURN: 1=success, nil=not found or failure
Search for block name “nam” using WD's search paths.
(c:wd_does_block_exist nam)
Frequently Asked
Questions
Add an attribute to an existing inserted block on a drawing. You are
prompted to select the location for the new attribute.
11-88
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked
Questions
Return with full path name if found, nil otherwise
Display error dialog for block “nam” not found in WD paths.
(c:wd_block_path_failed_msg nam)
Insert comma delimited file “fnam” as a table on to current drawing.
(c:wd_ins_table fnam)
Insert generic “.dbf” file “fnam” as a table on to current drawing.
(c:wd_14a_ins_dbftable dbfnam)
Swap out INSERT entity “oldben” with new block “wd_symnam”. Preserve
attribute values and wire connections.
(c:wd_bswap oldben wd_symnam options retain_scl force_scl maplst)
options 1's bit set= retain old ATTRIB locations, 0=use new
2's bit set= suppress copy of existing attrib values to matching attribs on new
block, 0=copy values from old to new where there is a match
retain_scl = 1 to keep existing symbol's scale
force_scl = scale value override if non-nil
maplst = nil to ignore or (list (list old new) (list old new)...) to map existing
attribute values to new symbol's attrib values
ex:
(defun c:bswap_ex ( / ss en ed oldblknam newblknam slen ix)
(setq en (entsel “\nSelect block type to swap:”))
(if en
(progn
(setq en (car en)) ; entity name of block that user picked
(setq ed (entget en)) ; entity data
(setq oldblknam (cdr (assoc 2 ed))) ; get actual block name
(setq newblknam (getstring “\nEnter New block name to use for swap:”))
(if (/= newblknam ““)
(progn ; Okay, prepare to do the swapping!
; First find all instances of the old block
(setq ss (ssget “_X” (list (cons -4 “ & lt; AND”)(cons 0 “INSERT”)
(cons 2 oldblknam)(cons -4 “AND & gt; ”))))
(setq slen (sslength ss))
(setq ix 0)
(while ( & lt; ix slen)
(setq old_ben (ssname ss ix)) ; next block instance to do
; Do the swap. Don't force attributes to old locs, keep
; existing block insert scale factor, no attrib mapping
(c:wd_bswap old_ben newblknam nil 1 nil nil)
(setq ix (1+ ix)) ; increment counter to get next instance
)))))
(setq ss nil) ; release selection set
(princ)
)
Frequently Asked Questions
11-89
(c:wd_bswap_list oldnams newnams retain retain_scl maplst)
oldnams/newnams -- parallel lists of old block name / new block path/name
retain 1's bit set= retain old ATTRIB locations, 0=use new
2's bit set= suppress copy of existing attrib values to matching attribs on new
block, 0=copy values from old to new where there is a match
retain_scl = 1 to keep existing symbol's scale
maplst = optional list of parallel lists mapping old attrib values to new (list (list
“OLDNAM1” “OLDNAM2” “OLDNAM3’) ; old names (list “TAG#*”
“DESC1” DESC2”))
; corresponding new names
Display full catalog information for select schem or pnl block.
(c:wd_bomr_ent_qb ben)
ben = AutoCAD entity name of selected WD schem or pnl footprint block
Return list of catalog look-up data lists for selected entity.
(c:wd_bomr_qbdat ben)
ben = AutoCAD entity name of selected WD schem or pnl footprint block
RETURN list of lists where first list is for the main part number and any subsequent lists are the “Multi-BOM” extra part number.
Each list consists of 15 elements including part number, block name, and a
full dump of the data from the target catalog look-up file
Gather up lists of all catalog number info off of entity “ben” and format into
a list of lists.
(c:wd_bomr_entcat ben)
ben = selected INSERT entity, WD schematic or panel footprint
RETURN list of lists
(nth 0 rtrn) = (list mfg cat assycode count dbfblknam unit_measure)
(nth 1 rtrn) = (list (list & lt; 2+ multiple BOM cat number lists & gt; ))
(nth 2 rtrn) = (list & lt; 2-char suffixes for each 2+ part num list & gt; )
Trigger auto update of current drawing based upon changed data carried in
Excel spreadsheet, Access file, dBase file, or comma-delimited ASCII
spreadsheet dump file.
(c:wd_ss2_import_curdwg fnam upcase)
fnam = xls,mdb,dbf, or csv dump from spreadsheet. Must have several key
column labels that WD keys off of to find matching block for updates.
These include “DRAWING” (full drawing path ; name) and “HDL” (for
block insert handle numbers). Run WD's “To Spreadsheet” utility to create
an example template file.
upcase = “1” to force all updated data to upper case, “0”=as is
Frequently Asked
Questions
Block swapping, drawing-wide. Connected wires automatically stretch/trim
to reconnect, when possible.
11-90
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked
Questions
Trigger WD Surfer search and surf dialog.
(c:wd_wdsurf what freshen str inst loc)
what = 0 for schem/pnl devices, 1 for signal codes, 2 for schem/pnl terminals,
3 for PLC I/O, 4 for schem/pnl wire numbers, 5 for catalog number surfing
freshen = 1 to check for database freshen required, nil=skip
str = text string to surf on (wild cards allowed). Can be tag-id, wire number,
catalog number, signal code
inst = installation code (when IEC tagging mode is active)
loc = location code (when IEC tagging mode is active)
ex: (c:wd_wdsurf 0 1 “CR104” nil nil) to surf on all schem/pnl references for
CR104.
ex: (c:wd_wdsurf 5 1 “700*” nil nil) to find and surf on all items that carry CAT
part number beginning with “700”.
Troubleshooting utility. Moves entities to new layer, even entities that are
embedded in inserted blocks on the drawing.
(c:vialm)
vialm at AutoCAD command line.
Use for troubleshooting gap pointers and other entities with extended entity
pointer data. Type “viax” at AutoCAD command.
(c:viax)
viax at AutoCAD command line.
Project / Project Database File
Read current project’s WDP file and return list of lists.
(c:wd_proj_wdp_data)
RETURN = list of lists
(nth 0 rtrn) = wdp file name
(nth 1 rtrn) = count of dwgs in file
(nth 2 rtrn) = list of *[ ] TITLE lines (start at (nth 1))
(nth 3 rtrn) = list of ?[ ] values
(nth 4 rtrn) = list of +[ ] values
(nth 5 rtrn) = list of drawing names
(nth 6 rtrn) = list of dwg names with sec/subsec data included
Display WD's proj dwg list selection dialog. Pick from list.
(c:wd_pdwgs d_lst main_title title2 exclude_refonly)
d_lst = (nth 6 (c:wd_proj_wdp_data)) ; see above
main_title, title2 = description text for dialog
exclude_refonly = 1 to hide drawings that are marked “REF ONLY”
RETURN = list of picked drawing file names.
(nth 0 rtrn) = list of selected drawing file names
Frequently Asked Questions
11-91
Create (or rewrite to modify) a WD project WDP file from a set of lists:
fname = wdp file name to create
t_lst = list of *[] project title data lines (12)
a_lst = list of ?[] entries
p_lst = list of +[ ] path entries
d2_lst = list of dwg name with Sec/Sub data included (nth 6 above)
Determine if the current drawing is listed in the current project and, if so,
which drawing it is in the sequence of listed project drawings (1=1st).
(c:wd_is_cur_dwg_in_proj)
Return values: -1 = no project active, 0 = cur dwg not in current project, & gt; 0 =
drawing listed in current project (1=1st dwg, 2=2nd dwg listed, and so on.
Return value is an integer.
ex: find SHEET number of next drawing past the currently displayed drawing
(using AutoLISP)
(if (not GBL_wd_prj_ixlst) (c:wd_mdb_freshen nil))
(setq ix (c:wd_is_cur_dwg_in_proj))
(setq nextsheet ““)
(if ( & gt; ix 0)
(progn ; current drawing is in the project, increment to next dwg in list
(setq ix (1+ ix))
(setq sheet_lst (nth 3 GBL_wd_prj_ixlst))
; Get next drawing's SHEET value
(if (setq x (member ix (nth 1 GBL_wd_prj_ixlst)))
(progn ; found relative position of next dwg's data in parallel lists
(setq nextsheet (nth (- (length (nth 1 GBL_wd_prj_ixlst)) (length x)) (nth
3 GBL_wd_prj_ixlst)))
))))
nextsheet ; return ““ or next SHEET value
Force total rebuild of project’s scratch database file:
(c:wd_mdb_rebuild dbfnam)
dbfnam = nil to rebuild current project’s scratch file
Trigger scratch database file “freshen” and set value of variable
GBL_wd_prj_ixlst which is a list of lists of project's drawing data (see
below):
(c:wd_mdb_freshen dbfnam)
dbfnam = nil to freshen current project’s scratch file
Structure of GBL_wd_prj_ixlst is 9 parallel lists (pulled from the FILETIME
table in the project's Access database temp file):
(nth 0 GBL_wd_prj_ixlst) = DWGIX key field values
Frequently Asked
Questions
(c:wd_proj_wdp_write fname t_lst a_lst p_lst d2_lst)
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-92
Frequently Asked Questions
(nth 1 GBL_wd_prj_ixlst) = list of drawing file sequence in the drawing list portion of the project's “.wdp” file
(nth 2 GBL_wd_prj_ixlst) = list of full drawing name and paths
(nth 3 GBL_wd_prj_ixlst) = list of SHEET values (the %S value)
(nth 4 GBL_wd_prj_ixlst) = list of DWGNAM values (the %D value)
(nth 5 GBL_wd_prj_ixlst) = list of IEC Proj values (the %P value)
(nth 6 GBL_wd_prj_ixlst) = list of IEC Installation values (the %I value)
(nth 7 GBL_wd_prj_ixlst) = list of IEC Location values (the %L value)
(nth 8 GBL_wd_prj_ixlst) = list of inter-dwg cross-ref format strings
Open project drawing, one listed before the current drawing. QSAVE
current drawing if something in database has changed.
(c:wd_proj_dprev)
Open next drawing listed in project file.
(c:wd_proj_dnext)
Save project file name “fnam” in the standard LASTPROJ.FIL data file
pointed at by “GBL_wd_llp”.
(c:wd_savproj_nam fnam)
fnam = .WDP file name
Select a WD project file from a standard “Open File” dialog. The selected
project becomes current.
(c:wd_proj_pick_dlg)
Create new WD project.
(c:wd_make_newp)
Check if file name “fnam” is in file name list “d_lst”.
(c:wd_proj_chkrepeat fnam d_lst)
fnam = drawing name
d_lst = list of drawings in format as returned by c:wd_proj_wdp_data
Retrieve a list of recent project file names and descriptions.
(c:wd_get_recent_prj_lst)
Opens dialog listing recent projects to let you select a project.
(c:wd_projb_recentlst)
Returns file name of selected proj or nil if none selected or “cancel” hit.
Frequently Asked Questions
11-93
Make project file “fnam” the working project.
fnam = .WDP file name
Run WD’s title block based on the information in .WDT file, “fnam”.
(c:wd_tb_usewdt_fnam fnam attend wd_flags)
fnam = WD title block .WDT file
attend = 0 no user prompts, 1 user prompts if problems are encountered
wd_flags = a 31 element list corresponding to the 31 allowed title block
updates. “1 = update, “0
= skip.
The 31 items are as follows - LINE1 - LINE24 project descriptions lines, WD
Sheet number, Drawing Name (as shown in WD config), File Name, Full
File Name, Sheet Max, File Name Extension, Resequence Sheet Values.
Report Generation
Note: Most reports currently require some user interaction. If you have a
report that you need to generate under your program's control with no
user input, please contact VIA Development Corporation.
Panel component report with no user prompting (all data passed on
command line):
(c:wd_compr_pnlr param_lst)
Trigger panel component report generation without any user prompts
param_lst = “list” of nine elements
doall = 1 to process all dwgs in cur proj; nil to do current dwg only
todolocs = 1 to process all components; 2 process only components with a
blank location code; 3 process components that “wild card” match with
“doloc” parameter below
doloc = loc code to include (if todolocs=3). Can have wild cards per AutoCAD
stds (ex: “*CAB*”) means any location with “CAB” substring
incl = what to include (0=just components,1=incl name plates,2=incl connectors,4=incl pnl terminals)
suprs = suppress blank entries (0=extract all, 1=no blank TAG items, 2=suppress blank MFG/CAT items, 3=suppress both 1 and 2)
format = output file “ASC” for ascii, “DBF” for generic dbase format, “CSV” for
comma delim ascii, “CSV+P” for comma delim with proj info as first line of
data
fields = 0 to output all; 1= only fields defined in default “.set” report settings
file; & lt; filename & gt; = file to use (“.set” extension is not required, use double
backslashes if path is given).
outfilename = output file name
scriptfilename = optional script file (executes after report extraction is complete)
ex: (c:wd_compr_pnlr (list 1 1 nil 3 0 “csv” 0 “report.csv” nil))
Frequently Asked
Questions
(c:wd_makeproj_current fnam)
11-94
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked
Questions
ex: (c:wd_compr_pnlr (list 1 1 nil 3 0 “asc” “d:\\spcl\\pnlcomp.set” “dat.out” nil))
Trigger wire or cable from/to report generation without any user prompts.
(c:wd_frm2_r param_lst)
param_lst is a “list” of eleven elements:
xtr = 1 to force a fresh extract of wire information, 0= reuse wire extract data
from the last run. NOTE: when xtr=0 then type and doall values are
ignored
type = 0= Wire from/to, 1=Cable conductor from/to
fut1 = (future) set to nil
doall = 1 to process all dwgs in current project; nil to do current dwg only
frmlst = “list” of “from” location codes; ex: (list “PNL1” “PNL2”); wild cards
are permitted. To enable all location codes, use (list “*”)
tolst = same as above but “to” location codes
fut2 = (future) set to nil
format = output file format “ASC” for ascii, “DBF” for generic dbase format,
“CSV” for comma delim ascii, “CSV+P” for comma delim with project info
as first line of data, “XLS” for Excel, “MDB” for Microsoft Access.
fields = 0 to output all fields; 1= output only fields defined in default “.set”
report settings file; & lt; filename & gt; = specific settings file to use (“.set” extension is not required, use double backslashes if path is given).
outfilename = output file name, use single forward or double backslashes in
path
scriptfilename = optional script file name (executes after report extraction is
complete). The “outfilename” can be accessed from within the script file
through the following AutoLISP variables: for R14 it is simply FNAM, for
R2000 the report file name can be retrieved via (vl-bb-ref 'FNAM).
example 1: (fresh extract, wire from/to, ,proj-wide,from=PNL1, to=all
locs,,CSV ascii out, output all fields, output file “report.csv”, no script file):
(c:wd_frm2_r (list 1 0 nil 1 (list “PNL1”) (list “*”) nil “csv” 0 “c:\\report.csv” nil))
example 2: (rerun with last data, , , ,from=CAB1 or CAB2, to=all locs,,CSV
ascii out, output fields in “.set”, out file “report.csv”, no script file):
(c:wd_frm2_r (list 1 0 nil 1 (list “CAB1” “CAB2”) (list “*”) nil “csv” 1 “report.csv”
nil))
Retrieve list of LOC, INST, GROUPWITH, or MOUNT codes used on the
current drawing or the project set. For current dwg only, this routine
extracts directly from the entities currently in the drawing. For project-wide
list, this routine queries the project's database file, tables “COMP”,
“PLCIO”, and “TERM” for schematic and “PNLCOMP”, “PNLTERM” for
panel. This routine does NOT do a database “freshen” before doing the
query. You may want to call (c:wd_mdb_freshen nil) if you're not sure
whether the database file is fully in sync with the drawing set.
(c:wd_getlocs param_lst)
param_lst is a “list” of four elements
doall = 1 to process all dwgs in project, nil to do current dwg only
Frequently Asked Questions
11-95
Note: You can use this routine to do simple queries of the project database on
other field names. For example, (c:wd_getlocs (list 1 “TAGNAME” 1
nil)) will extract a proj-wide list of schematic TAG names (this does
NOT work for dwg extract only).
Trigger schem BOM report generation without any user prompts.
(c:wd_bomr param_lst) (OBSOLETE -- use (c:wd_bomschr...) below
param_lst is a “list” of eight elements
doall = 1 to process all dwgs in current project; nil to do current dwg only
todolocs = 1 to process all components; 2 process only components that have
a blank location code; 3 process components that “wild card” match with
“doloc” parameter below
doloc = location code to include (if todolocs=3). Can have wild cards per
AutoCAD stds (ex: “*CAB*”) means any location with “CAB” substring
incl = what to include (0=sch comps only,1=incl cables,2=incl connectors, 3 =
include all)
format = output file format “ASC” for ascii, “XLS” for Excel, “MDB” for Access,
“CSV” for comma delim ascii, “CSV+P” for comma delim with project info
as first line of data
fields = 0 to output all fields; 1= output only fields defined in default “.set”
report settings file; & lt; filename & gt; = specific settings file to use (“.set” extension is not required, use double backslashes if path is given).
outfilename = output file name, use single forward or double backslashes in
path
scriptfilename = optional script file name (executes after report extraction is
complete). The “outfilename” can be accessed from within the script file
through the following AutoLISP variables: for R14 it is simply FNAM, for
R2000 the report file name can be retrieved via (vl-bb-ref 'FNAM).
ex: (c:wd_bomr (list 1 3 “CAB1” 3 “ASC” 1 “report.txt” nil))
Trigger schem BOM report generation without any user prompts.
(c:wd_bomschr param_lst)
param_lst is a “list” of nine elements
doall = 1 to process all dwgs in current project; nil to do current dwg only
todolocs = 1 to process all components; 2 process only components that have
a blank location code; 3 process components that “wild card” match with
“doloc” parameter below
doloc = location code to include (if todolocs=3). Can have wild cards per
AutoCAD stds (ex: “*CAB*”) means any location with “CAB” substring
incl = what to include (0=sch comps only,1=incl cables,2=incl connectors, 3 =
include all)
purch = 1=like subitems combined, nil=normal tallied BOM, 2=”By TAG” BOM
Frequently Asked
Questions
what = “LOC”, “INST”, “MOUNT”, or “GROUPWITH”
filter = 1 for Schem elements only, 2=Panel only, 3=Schem and Panel
outfilename = output text file name, nil=don't output list to a file
RETURN: list of codes
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-96
Frequently Asked Questions
format = output file format “ASC” for ascii, “XLS” for Excel, “MDB” for Access,
“CSV” for comma delim ascii, “CSV+P” for comma delim with project info
as first line of data
fields = 0 to output all fields; 1= output only fields defined in default “.set”
report settings file; & lt; filename & gt; = specific settings file to use (“.set” extension is not required, use double backslashes if path is given).
outfilename = output file name, use single forward or double backslashes in
path
scriptfilename = optional script file name (executes after report extraction is
complete). The “outfilename” can be accessed from within the script file
through the following AutoLISP variables: for R14 it is simply FNAM, for
R2000 the report file name can be retrieved via (vl-bb-ref 'FNAM).
ex: (c:wd_bomschr (list 1 3 “CAB1” 3 nil “XLS” 1 “report.xls” nil))
Trigger panel BOM report generation without any user prompts.
(c:wd_bompnlr param_lst)
param_lst is a “list” of nine elements
doall = 1 to process all dwgs in current project; nil to do current dwg only
todolocs = 1 to process all components; 2 process only components that have
a blank location code; 3 process components that “wild card” match with
“doloc” parameter below
doloc = location code to include (if todolocs=3). Can have wild cards per
AutoCAD stds (ex: “*CAB*”) means any location with “CAB” substring
incl = what to include (0=pnl comps only,2=incl connectors,4=incl pnl terms
8=incl nameplates, 16=incl unreferenced schem comps,31 = include all)
purch = tally in purchase order format; 1=purchase order format, 0=normal
BOM format, 2 = “By TAG” BOM format
format = output file format “ASC” for ascii, “XLS” for Excel, “MDB” for Access,
“CSV” for comma delim ascii, “CSV+P” for comma delim with project info
as first line of data
fields = 0 to output all fields; 1= output only fields defined in default “.set”
report settings file; & lt; filename & gt; = specific settings file to use (“.set” extension is not required, use double backslashes if path is given).
outfilename = output file name, use single forward or double backslashes in
path
scriptfilename = optional script file name (executes after report extraction is
complete). The “outfilename” can be accessed from within the script file
through the following AutoLISP variables: for R14 it is simply FNAM, for
R2000 the report file name can be retrieved via (vl-bb-ref 'FNAM).
ex: (c:wd_bompnlr (list 1 1 ““ 31 1 “ASC” 1 “c:\\purchase.txt” nil))
Trigger generation of Export DWGS-- & gt; TO Spreadsheet data dump without
any user prompts.
(c:wd_2ss param_lst)
param_lst is a “list” of eight elements:
dumpwhat = “comp” for schem components, “pnl” for panel components,
“term” for schem terminals, “pnlterm” for panel terminals, “sig” for wire
Frequently Asked Questions
11-97
ex: (c:wd_2ss (list “comp” 1 nil 1 nil “XLS” “c:/rep/datadump.xls” nil))
“USER” Table Tools
WD supports a user table in the project database. You can add your own
application data to any WD block insert (components, footprints, wire numbers, terminals, wire jump arrows) and WD will extract and maintain a copy of
this information in a USER table in the project database. This allows you to
do “queries” on the project database file (in Microsoft Access format) and
access all of this user info carried on all entities project-wide. This data is
stored on the entities as invisible “extended entity data”. You are free to use
this data in any way you see fit. Examples: storing explicit wire sequencing
information, cable or wire lengths, routing information, storing special parts
information, descriptions, or MRP data, storing engineering notes, setup, or
maintenance information, ...
Each application data record that you add to an entity can be up to 255 char
long. A single WD entity can carry several hundred of these “records”. Each
record is tracked on the entity by entity handle plus a three digit record number beginning at “000”. WD in the new “USER” table of the project’s database
file automatically maintains this same information, project-wide.
Get user record data from an entity.
(c:wd_user_get ben recnum)
ben = entity name or entity handle number
recnum = record number (integer or three-digit text string value, ex: “005”)
RETURN: text value returned (255 char max) or nil if record not present on
the target entity.
Frequently Asked
Questions
from/to signals, “wnum” for wire numbers, “wnumlay” for wire layers, “plc”
for PLC modules, “plcdesc” for PLC I/O points and descriptions
doall = 1 to process all dwgs in current project; nil to do current dwg only;
2=process partial list of dwg indexes (list in partial_lst below)
partial_lst = if doall=2 then this gives list of drawing index numbers to process
where 1=first dwg in project list, 2=2nd, and so on, ex: (list “2” “10” “35”
“36”)
todolocs = 1 to process all components; 2 process only components that have
a blank location code; 3 process components that “wild card” match with
“doloc” parameter below
doloc = location code to include (if todolocs=3). Can have wild cards per
AutoCAD stds (ex: “*CAB*”) means any location with “CAB” substring
format = output file format “XLS” for Excel, “MDB” for Microsoft Access format,
“CSV” for comma delim ASCII, “DBF” for generic dBase format.
outfilename = output file name (use double backslashes or single forward
slashes)
scriptfilename = optional script file name (executes after report extraction is
complete). The “outfilename” can be accessed from within the script file
through the following AutoLISP variables: for R14 it is simply FNAM, for
R2000 the report file name can be retrieved via (vl-bb-ref 'FNAM).
Frequently Asked
Questions
11-98
Frequently Asked Questions
Put user record data on to an entity. If the given recnum already exists,
overwrite the old value with the newvalue.
(c:wd_user_put ben recnum newvalue)
ben = entity name or entity handle number
recnum = record number (integer or three-digit text string value, ex: “005”)
newvalue = text string data (255 char max) to insert on to the entity
RETURN: 1=success, nil=failure
Get all user record data from an entity.
(c:wd_user_getall ben dataonly)
ben = entity name or entity handle number
dataonly = 1 to return a list of the data, nil=return data in the form of a list of
lists where each sublist is a list of the recnum and datavalue (ex: (list
(“001” “Rec value one”)(“002” “Rec value two”)...)
RETURN: data list (or list of lists), nil=no data found
Get next user record from an entity.
(c:wd_user_getnext ben start)
ben = entity name or entity handle number
start = starting record number (integer or 3-char string). Value of “000” or 0 or
nil means start at the first or only record on the entity
RETURN: text value returned or nil if no more records found on entity
Put user record data on to an entity using the next unused rec number
starting at “start” or higher.
(c:wd_user_putnext ben start value)
ben = entity name or entity handle number
start = starting record number (integer or 3-char string). Value of “000” or 0 or
nil means start at the first or only record on the entity
newvalue = text string data (255 char max) to insert on to the entity
RETURN: 3-char recnum code used, nil=failure
Delete user record number “recnum” from an entity.
(c:wd_user_del ben recnum)
ben = entity name or entity handle number
recnum = record number (integer or three-digit text string value, ex: “005”)
RETURN: 1=success, nil=not found
Delete all existing user records from an entity.
(c:wd_user_delall ben)
ben = entity name or entity handle number
RETURN: count (integer) = number of records deleted, nil=none found
Appendix A
In This Appendix. . . .
- Push Buttons
- Pilot Lights
- Switches
- Photo Eyes
- Relays
- Timers
- Terminals
- Connectors
- Power Distribution Blocks
- Electronics
- Generic Boxes
- Cable Markers
- Stand-Alone Cross-Ref
- Wire Arrows
- Solenoids
- Instruments
- Fuses
- Circuit Breakers
- Motor Control
- Capacitors
- Transformers
$
A-2
Appendix A
Appendix A
Push Buttons
Illuminated Push Buttons
Appendix A
A-3
Standard Pilot Lights
Appendix A
Press to Test Pilot Lights
Appendix A
A-4
Appendix A
Master Test Pilot Lights
Appendix A
A-5
Neon Pilot Lights
Appendix A
Selector Switches
Appendix A
A-6
Appendix A
Appendix A
A-7
Illuminated Selector Switches
Appendix A
Appendix A
Appendix A
A-8
Limit Switches
Proximity Switches
Appendix A
A-9
Foot Switches
Anti-Plugging Switches
Flow Switches
Appendix A
Pull Cord Switches
A-10
Appendix A
Appendix A
Level Switches
Pressure Switches
Temperature Switches
Toggle Switches
Appendix A
A-11
Appendix A
Photo Eyes
A-12
Appendix A
Appendix A
Relays
Appendix A
Appendix A
Timers
A-13
Appendix A
Appendix A
A-14
Terminals
Appendix A
Appendix A
Connectors - Wire Number Change
A-15
Appendix A
Appendix A
A-16
Connectors - No Wire Number Change
Appendix A
A-17
Appendix A
Wire Markers
A-18
Appendix A
Appendix A
Power Distribution Blocks
Miscellaneous
Appendix A
A-19
Appendix A
A-20
Appendix A
Appendix A
Electronics
Appendix A
A-21
Receptacles
Appendix A
Generic Boxes
A-22
Appendix A
Appendix A
Cable Markers
Stand-Alone Cross-Ref
Wire Arrows - Ref Only
Appendix A
A-23
Solenoids
Appendix A
Instruments
A-24
Appendix A
Appendix A
Fuses
Disconnect Switches
Appendix A
A-25
Circuit Breakers
Appendix A
Note: 3-pole components are built on-the-fly when selected from the menu.
Motor Control
Appendix A
Appendix A
A-26
Note: 3-pole components are built on-the-fly when selected from the menu.
Capacitors
Appendix A
A-27
Transformers
Appendix A
Appendix A
A-28
Appendix A
Index
Index
Symbols
+ 6-107
Numerics
2nd and beyond 5-7
3-conductor toolbar button 6-46
3-Phase Wire 6-63
3-Phase Wire Tagging 6-47
3Phase/Motor Wirenum command 6-63
A
B
Balloon Setup 10-6, 10-32
C
Cable Conductor Report 9-12
CABLE Conductor View/Edit button 6-52
Cable Marker Symbols 4-4
Cable Markers 6-50, A-22
Capacitors A-26
Catalog Assignment 8-8
Catalog Database Table Structure 8-7
Catalog File Directory 8-6
Catalog Files 11-64
Catalog Look Up 2-15
Catalog lookup 6-16
Catalog Lookup button 10-12
Change Attribute Layer 6-70
Change report format button 9-16
Changing Appearance of Existing Library Symbols
4-13
Changing Attribute Size Project-Wide 6-37
Changing Attribute Text Size 6-25
Changing the Order of Drawings in the Project 2-6
Changing Utility's Defaults 5-58
Check/Repair Gap Pointers 6-58
Check/Trace Wire 6-58, 6-59
Checking Coil/Contact Count 6-14
Child Location Code Update 6-39
Circuit Breakers A-25
Client specific library symbols 2-20
Client subdirectory structure 2-18
CMP Insert from Schem toolbar button 10-8, 10-14
Combined INST/LOC and component TAG mode
(IEC Style) 2-13
Command Icon 7-14
Common to both Parent and Child Components 412
Index
Add 6-11
Add Attribute to Block 6-111
Add Language 6-99
Add New Phrase 6-102
Adding a New Drawing to the Project 2-4
Adding a New Icon Menu Page 7-11
Adding a New Symbol to the Icon Menu 7-5
Adding Existing Drawing(s) to the Project 2-4
Adding Insert Circuit to the Icon Menu 7-16
Adding Multiple BOM Catalog Numbers to a
Component 8-16
Adding Slide for new PLC Style 5-22
Adding to an Existing PLC Data File 5-22
Address Prefix or Suffix 5-17
Align Components 6-16
Align Components/Wire Numbers 6-16
Angled Wires 6-63
Annotating 5-52
Anti-Plugging Switches A-9
Assigning a Description to each Drawing 2-8
ATTR command 6-32
ATTR Move/Edit 6-25, 6-29
Attribute Add to Footprint After Insertion - Xdata to
Attribute Utility 10-17
Attribute Mapping file 6-93
Attribute Requirements - Schematic symbols 4-7
Attributes - Minimum Requirements 5-53
Auto-Attribute Add to Footprint During Insertion 1016
Automatic Schematic/Panel Update 10-8
Automatic Time/Date Stamping 6-77
Batch Plot to File 6-78
Black Box/Symbol Builder 6-2
Block Name versus Geometry Definition 10-28
Block/Wblock 6-7
BOM By Tag Format 9-14
BOM Copy Utility 8-18
BOM Purchase List Format 9-14
BOM Report of Sub-assembly items 9-14
BOM Report Output 9-15
BOM Reports 9-10
Box Color/Linetype/Layer 5-16
Browse 6-7
Bump Ladders Up/Down 6-85
Index
Index
Component Attribute Utilities 6-45
Component Block Swapper 6-17
Component Catalog Look-Up Tables 8-2
Component Connection Report 9-21
Component cross-reference text between options
2-15
Component Description Text 4-16
Component Exception Report 10-39
Component footprint 10-18
Component Layers 3-11
Component Location Mark Symbols 4-5
Component Report 9-31
Component Re-Tag 6-84
Component Spreadsheet Data Format 10-13
Component Tagging 11-34
Component Tagging Format 3-5
Component Utilities 6-8
CONFIG dialog 3-7, 3-9
CONFIG Drawing 3-2
Configuration and Ladder Master Line Reference
Symbols 4-6
Configure Component Tag Format 11-9
Configure Cross-Reference Format 11-15
Configure Drawing Form and Ladder Defaults 11-6
Configure Layer Naming Convention 11-16
Configure Wire Number Format 11-13
Connection Trap Distance 11-53
Connectors - No Wire Number Change A-16
Connectors - Wire Number Change A-15
Contact Quantity/Pin-List Look-Up 8-20
Contact state attribute 6-5
Conventions 1-3
Conversion Toolbar 6-106, 6-116
Conversion Utilities 6-103
Convert Catalog dBase Files to Access File 8-2
Convert Destination Arrow 6-110
Convert Dumb Block to WD Schematic 6-106
Convert Dumb Ladder 6-112
Convert existing text entities to attributes 6-6
Convert Footprint dBase Files to Access File 10-31
Convert Source Arrow 6-109
Convert Text to Attribute Definition 6-112
Convert to WD attributes 6-7
Convert Wire Number 6-109
Convert/Edit WD Attributes 6-108
Converting Your Existing Library 4-14
Copy Loc/Inst/Groupwith/Mount Codes 10-19
Copy Panel Footprints 10-12
Copy Phrase 6-102
Copy Project 2-12
Create Slide toggle 7-13
Creating a New Library Symbol 4-14
Creating a new PLC Data File 5-21
Creating a New PLC Style 5-51
Creating a New Project / Project Files 2-2
Creating your own stretchable name plate symbols
10-34
Cross Reference Update 6-84
Crossing Wire Gaps/Loops 11-56
Cross-Ref Text to Multi-line MTEXT 6-39
Cross-Reference Exception Report 9-31
Cross-Reference Format 3-9
Cross-reference text options (text button) 2-15
Customized labels for WD's title block dialogs 2-19
Customizing the LINEx labels shown in the dialogs
6-95
Cut and Paste Icon Function 7-16
D
Dashed link line connection 6-6
Dashed Link Lines 6-42
Data Types tracked/detected by Mark/Verify 6-83
Dealing with non-sequential addresses 5-17
Default Spacing 10-5
Define Wire Sequence 6-55
Delete 6-12
Delete Language 6-100
Delete original non-WD block 6-107
Delete Phrase 6-102
Delete Picked Text 6-107
Description Text 2-14
Detailed Plot Config Mode 6-77
Disconnect Switches A-24
Drawing Layout 11-33
Drawing Values 6-86
Drawing-Wide/Project-Wide Search 8-10
Dumb In-Line Wire Markers 4-4
Dumb In-line Wire Markers 6-57
Dumb Terminal Strip Utility 6-45
Dwg Num 6-85
E
Edit 6-12
EDIT ATTR utility 6-25
Edit Attributes 6-26
EDIT Component 6-25
Edit Language button 6-99
Edit Specific Phrase 6-100
Edit wire number 6-63
Editing a Component's Attribute Text Value 6-39
Editing existing terminal strip 6-45
Editing Look-Up Files 10-28
Editing the Cable Conductor Database File 6-52
Electronics A-20
Erase Component 6-12
Erasing a Wire Number 6-66
Index
Hiding/Un-hiding Attributes 6-30
Horizontal and Vertical Symbols 11-22
How the Manual is Organized 1-2
How to Create a New Project 2-2
How to Link WD information to your title block 6-86
F
I
Fence Insert 6-8
Fence Insert Just Like 6-9
Find/Replace Component Text 6-39
Find/Replace Wire Number Text 6-67
First/Top-most parametric symbol 5-4
Fix/Unfix Component Tags Project-Wide 6-33
Fixed Component Tags 6-32
Fixing all Wire Numbers 6-64
Fixing Wire Numbers 6-63
Fixing/Un-fixing all Wire Numbers Project-Wide 664
Flip Contact 6-13
Flow Switches A-9
Foot Switches A-9
Footprint Attributes/Xdata 10-15
Footprint Block Attribute / Xdata Names 10-18
Footprint Insertion - Manual Draw on-the-fly 10-12
Footprint Insertion - Selection from Icon Menu 1011
Footprint Insertion - Selection from Spreadsheet
Data 10-13
Footprint Look-Up 10-24
Footprint/Terminal Selection and Insertion 10-4
Forcing a Break 5-18
From Component Insert/Edit Dialog 8-9
From External File 8-13
FROM Spreadsheet & gt; Drawing Update utility 6-72
From your own external Database application 8-16
Fuses A-24
Icon Menu 11-4
Icon Menu Wizard 7-2, 7-5, 7-8
ICON Menu's File Format 7-18
Illuminated Push Buttons A-2
Illuminated Selector Switches A-7
Including unused terminals 5-19, 5-20
INS Component 6-39
Ins Component 7-7
Insert Attribute 6-4
INSERT Comma-delim file tool 6-72
INSERT COMPONENT 6-36
INSERT Component 5-51
INSERT Component command 7-2
Insert Component from Catalog List 6-9
Insert Component Menu Line 7-19
Insert Electrical Component 11-75
Insert Just Like 6-8
INSERT Panel Footprint 10-12
Insert Panel Footprint Assemblies 10-13
INSERT Panel Footprint command 7-2
INSERT Panel Footprint toolbar button 10-34
Insert Panel Layout Footprints 11-78
Insert standard attributes 6-3
Insert Wires/Wire Numbers 11-81
Insert/Edit Ladders, Drawing Setup 11-84
Inserting 5-51
Inserting a Stand-Alone Name Plate 10-34
Installation 1-3
Instruments A-23
Introduction 1-2
Item Numbering 10-5
Item/Detail Number Balloons 10-32
G
GAP wire command 6-57
General Components 4-2
General Functions 11-86
General Information on Wiring Diagram 11-2
General Setup 5-61
Generic Boxes A-21
Generic Name Plates 10-34
Getting Help 1-3
Grouping Drawings within a Project 2-6
H
Hide 6-107
HIDE attribute command 6-31
L
Ladder Defaults 3-3, 11-34
Ladder Reference Numbers 5-56
Ladder Setup 5-60
Language Conversion 6-97
Language Conversion Setup 6-99
Language Swap button 6-97
Last Used 8-10
Layer Names 11-35, 11-36
Layer Rename 6-69
Layer Utilities 6-69
Layers 10-7
Index
Erasing all Wire Numbers Project-Wide 6-66, 6-67
Existing Ladder 11-48
Expanding the Menu with a New Location Mark
Symbol 6-36
Extracting a Wire From/To Report 9-21
Index
Layers and Colors 11-24
Leaders 11-63
Level Switches A-10
Library Symbol Name 4-2
Library Symbol Naming Convention 4-2
Library Symbols 11-18
2nd and beyond 5-7
Mass Attribute Size Change 6-38
Limit Switches A-8
Line Reference Ruling Marks 11-43
Link terminal text to wire connection 6-5
Linking a Name Plate to a Component Footprint 1033
List Used button 7-13
LOC/DESC Update toolbar button 6-34
LOCATION MARKS 6-36
Location Marks 6-35
Look-Up File Format 10-26
Look-Up File Naming Convention 10-25
Index
M
Managing the Library Symbols 4-13
Manual Insertion 11-30
Mapping AutoLISP or System Variable values to
the Title Block 6-93
Mark and Verify Changes 6-80
Master Test Pilot Lights A-4
Merging Schematic Wire Numbers on to Footprints
10-19
Minimum Attribute/Xdata Requirements 10-18
Misc Settings 2-13
Miscellaneous A-18
Miscellaneous, Catch-All Catalog Table 8-10
Modify Icon Menu File Directly 7-18
Modifying a PLC Appearance Style 5-16
Modifying the Appearance 5-52
Modifying/Expanding Catalog Tables 8-7
Module Placement 5-57
Modules Used Report 9-16
Motor Control A-25
Mouse Functions 10-3
Mouse Functions - Double Click 10-4
Mouse Functions - Right Click 10-3
Move Component 6-12
Move Up/Move Dn 6-56
Moving Component Attributes 6-39
Multiple Clients 2-18
Multiple Libraries/Clients 11-26
N
Name Plate Report 10-39
Name Plates 10-33
Neon Pilot Lights A-5
Network Installation 11-74
New Drawing -- Setup, Template 11-32
New Ladder 11-39
New Phrase button 6-102
NO/NC and Pin List Data Carried on the Parent 824
Non-Parametric Build 5-53
Not limited to Relays/Timers/Contactors/Switches
8-24
O
Old Drawings Compatible with WD 11-66
Option to fill cross-reference annotation 2-15
Optional Rating attributes 6-6
Other CFG Settings 6-85
P
Panel Bill of Materials Report 10-39
Panel BOM / Panel Reports 9-32
Panel Component Report 10-39
Panel Drawing Configuration 10-31
Panel Edit Footprint 10-31
Panel EDIT toolbar button 10-31
Panel Layout Footprint Symbols 4-6
Panel Layout Pull-Down Menu 10-3
Panel Layout Reports 10-35
Panel Layout Toolbar 10-3
Panel Nameplate 10-19
Panel Terminals Spreadsheet Data Format 10-14
Parametric PLC Data Files 5-11
Parametric PLC Symbols 5-3
Photo Eyes A-11
Pick 6-107
Pick Mode 6-56
Pick Project 6-64
Picking a Different Project 2-11
Pigtail Exception 4-15
Pigtails 4-15
Pin List Database Tabl 8-21
PLC 5-1, 11-83
PLC I/O Connection Report 9-15
PLC I/O Parametric Build Symbols 4-3
PLC I/O Reports 9-15
PLC Insert - complete units 5-53
PLC Module and Individual I/O Point CrossReference 9-17
PLC Module Style 3-13
PLC Parametric Build 5-3
PLC Parametric Build - Theory 5-2
PLC Tips and Hints 5-51
Plug/Jack Connector Pin Symbols 4-5
Index
Plug/Jack Connector Report and Pin Chart 9-24
Power Distribution Blocks A-18
Pre-defining Symbol Annotation 4-13
Press to Test Pilot Lights A-3
Pressure Switches A-10
PROJ toolbar button 2-2
Project & gt; TO Spreadsheet tool 6-71
Project File Format 2-15
Project Re-Sequence/Re-Tag 6-83
Project Wide Utilities 6-45
Project Zipping Utility 6-79
Project's Scratch Database 2-14
Project/Project Database File 11-90
Project-Specific Catalog File 8-10
Project-wide Settings 2-13
Project-Wide Title Block Update 6-88
Project-wide Utilities 6-64, 6-78
Project-Wide Values 6-86
Proximity Switches A-8
Pull Cord Switches A-9
Pulled from Another Project 8-12
Push Buttons A-2
Pushing DESC Attributes Down 6-30
Q
R
Read Settings 5-62
Real time inter-drawing cross-referencing 2-14
Receptacles A-21
Rectangular Box 5-16
Reference Number Mode 3-4
References 3-4
Referencing Mode 3-3
Relays A-12
Remove duplicated pin numbers 9-26
Removing a Drawing from the Current Projec 2-7
Repeated and Missing Wire Numbers Report 9-27
Replaceable Parameters 3-2
Report Generation 11-93
Repositioning a Wire Number 6-65
Requirements and Recommendations 1-3
Re-Sequence Item Numbers 10-32
Re-Sequence Ladders 6-84
Re-sequence SHEET values 6-96
Restoring Your Settings 5-62
Rmv All 6-56
Rotate ATTR 6-66
S
Saving Your Settings 5-61
Saving/Retrieving settings to/from the project file 314
Scaling Factor 3-13
Schematic Copy LOC Utility 6-35
Schematic Reports 9-2
Selector Switches A-5
Semi-Automatic from Schematic Data 10-8
Sequential Format 3-7
Sheet 6-85
Sheet/Drawing Codes 3-5
Show Missing BOM 8-20
Show Wire Sequence 6-57
Show Wires Utility 6-63
Signal Arrow Style 3-9
Single, Stand-Alone I/O Points 5-51
Slow response 7-4
Solenoids A-23
Sort 6-11
Source/Destination Wire Signal Arrow Symbols 4-5
Special Wire Numbering 2-14
Specific to Child Components 4-8
Specific to Parent / Stand-alone Components 4-7
Spreadsheet Columns 5-59
Spreadsheet Edit / Drawing Update 6-70
Spreadsheet Sample 5-55, 5-58
Spreadsheet Table Insert 6-72
Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Drawing 5-54
Spreadsheet Utilities 6-63
SQUEEZE 6-37
Stand-Alone Cross-Ref A-22
Stand-Alone Cross-Ref Symbols 6-45
Stand-alone cross-ref syms 6-21
Stand-Alone Cross-Reference Symbols 4-6
Stand-Alone PLC I/O Point Symbols 4-3
Stand-Alone Schematic Terminals Insert / Edit 6-25
Stand-Alone Terminal Symbols 4-12
Stand-Alone Terminals 4-3
Standard Pilot Lights A-3
Starting a new project for a given client 2-21
Starting with a Previous Project's Schematic
Spreadsheet Data 10-15
STRETCH attribute 6-37
Stretch Wire 6-48
Sub-Menu Page 7-20
Sub-Menu Trigger Menu Line 7-19
Surf ZOOM Factor 6-74
Surfing on Cross-Reference Exception Report 9-20
Swapping Wire Numbers 6-66
Index
Quick and Dirty Terminal Strip Table 9-29
Quick BOM check 6-15
Quick Start 1-4
QUIK Check 6-14
Rotating Wire Numbers 6-66
Run Mode 5-57
Index
W
T
Index
Symbol Origin 4-16
Symbol Width 4-16
WD and Drawing Management Systems 11-73
WD API/AutoLISP Programming Hooks 11-75
WD Audit / Problem Fixer utility 6-79
WD Batch Plotting 6-75
WD batch plotting Values 6-86
WD Drawing Configuration 3-2
WD Environment File 11-72
WD Layer Name Setup 3-11
WD Mapping Info Embedded on Title Block 6-89
WD Panel Layout Template Drawing 10-31
WD Project Files 11-67
WD Scratch Database File 11-70
WD Surf 6-72
WD to Title block mapping file 2-18
WD_JUMPERS 4-12
What if Title Block consists of Multiple Blocks? 6-93
Wire Arrows - Ref Only A-22
Wire Color/Gauge Labels 6-45
Wire Color/Gauge Labels Setup 6-49
Wire Connection / Terminal Pin Number Pairs 4-9
Wire Connection Points 4-16
Wire connection points and associated terminal text
6-4
Wire Connection Tables 10-35
Wire Crossing 3-9
Wire Dot Symbol 4-5
Wire Gap/Un-Gap 6-57
Wire Line Layers 3-13
Wire Markers A-17
Wire Number Extra Copies 6-66
Wire Number Layers and Wire LINE Layers 3-12
Wire Number Symbols 4-6
Wire Number Tag/Re-tag 6-84
Wire Number Tagging 11-34
Wire Number Tagging Format 3-7
Wire Number Utilities 6-45
Wire Numbers 11-57
Wire Reports 9-19
Wire Shields 6-53
Wire SRC/DEST Signal Exception Report 9-32
Wire Utilities 6-45
Wires 11-50
Table Naming 8-5
Tablet Insertion 11-31
Temperature Switches A-10
Term, Connectors 6-39
Terminal Exception Report 10-41
Terminal footprint 10-19
Terminal Footprint Insertion - Semi-Automatic from
Schematic Data 10-10
Terminal Insert/Edit 6-40
Terminal Numbers Report 9-28
Terminal Plan Report 9-28
Terminal Reports 9-28
Terminals A-14
TERMn 4-11
Text Size and Wire Offset 11-61
TEXTVALS Rating and Misc attribute value
assignment 8-16
Timers A-13
Tips and Hints 4-16, 7-18
Title Block 6-85
Title Block Setup Wizard 6-95
Title Block Utility 6-72, 6-97
Toggle Switches A-10
Transformers A-27
Triggering for a re-prompt of I/O address 5-18
TRM Insert from Schem toolbar button 10-15
U
Ugly slides 7-4
UNGAP command 6-57
Unused Connections 5-57
Update TB button 6-96
Updating Menu Slide 7-16
Use Layer 0 4-13
Use of %%x Prompt Values 5-17
User Attributes 5-17
User Programming API Routines for .wdp file
management 2-17
User Scripts and Programs - Batch Processing 6-78
USER Table Tools 11-97
User-Defined Line Reference Symbols 11-45
Using the Black Box Builder utility 4-14
V
Viewing a Drawing 2-21
Viewing the Drawing Configuration 3-2
X
X?TERMDESCn 4-10
X?TERMn 4-10
X-Y Grid Mode 3-4
X-Zone Mode 3-5
Index
Z
Zip Utility Initial Configuration 6-79
Index
Index
Index